Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
31B-199
501021258 CD s tL � l7 a n. n J c G Rettnqulshedby: DatefTime; 2-p -0 o Received by: Jan DatelTima: Aellnquisf d by: DateJTt�e: Racetved by: DatelTlrt►e: ` 0 Relbutulrbed by. DaterTime: nereived by: DateJTtme: C'ump2my Name: ATC Associates,Iric. SCILA13 Emergency Pagers: 8 SCfiQDL STREET Company Address: 39 Spruce Street (781)397-1322 WEYMOUTH, MA 02169 cots: E. L oVM'teadotir state: MA Zip: 01028 (781)649-2673 (781)337-9334 FAX(781)337-7642 Projectl4ame: Smith College AnalyslsType; PLIA Fax: (413)325-8227 Projp_dAddmss: Sesslons Annex-- 13001ve9iep: Yom.. tin RErults in: v>enis"an 5i./sandv Fablan rmiect Manager: Denis StJean Sr. Tumsrouna Time: Same Day Verbal Results: Yes nk Project Number. Bi-19438.OD242 Fzx Oopy by: Cell m Pager p; Sampled by: Richard J-Korzeniourstki Date: 0Zf13109 Retx,rn sanples: Yes Ho Site Fox: Spedal 3nStructions orCommenu: AddItionat Fbx: Lab ID Field ID Location Sample Description Homogenous j Application 10438A0242.01 Exterior, Nodhwesl side of house, Lounge Area Paper under Clapboards 1D438.00242.02 Exterior, South Center,Reai Lounge Area Paper under Clapboards 10438 00242-03 Exterior, Soulbeast side, Typing Room Paper under Clapboards a ll 1. FELT 16 2M1 lei 11 rK .`J1-1L_"D seer Rcwom nVc. 1 . 8 SCHOOL STRE(;T WEYMOUTH,t A 02189 Pit=-S mirv`^7Po.%-zv1'rAt,zAko roiurs TEL: (781)337-9334•FAX(781)337-7642 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates.Inc..East Longmeadow Date Received 02/14/2001 SciLab Job No. 501021258 Attn: Sandy Fabian Date Examined 02/14/2001 P.O.4 81-10438.00242 39 Spruce Street Page 1 of 1 1st Floor PE: 81-10438.00242; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow,MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00242-01 501021258-01 NO NAD Location_Exterior North West Sidc of House Lounge Area Description: Brown,Homogeneous, Paper Under Clapboards Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 90. %, Non-fibrous 10. % 10x38.00242-02 501021258-02 No NAD Location:Extcrtor South Center Rear Loungt:Area Description: Brown, Homogeneous.Paper Under Clapboards Asbestos Tyres: Other Material: Cellulosc 90. %, Non-fibrous 10. 10438.00242-03 501021258.03 No NAD Location:Extetior South Fast Side Typing Room Descrivtiorl:Brown,Homogeneous. Paver Under Clavboards Asbestos Traes: Other Material: Cellulose 90. %, Non-fibrous 10. % Revortinz Notes: Anslyzed by.Corey A Barnett "NAD/NSO=no ashcstos detected: NA=not analyzed: Dulk Asbestos Analysis vcr 40 CFR 763.Subpart F.Appendix A and 1=LAP Analysis Protocol.e 195.1/198.4 for New York samples: Note PLM is not comistcntly rcliable in detecting asbestos in floor covermes and similar non-liable organically bound materials- TEM is currently the only method that can be used to dctcrrnute if this matenal cart be considered or created as non-a*besws-containing in New York SUte(also see EPA Advisory for floor 61e.Flt 59. 146.3$910.8/1/91) National lnstinute of Standards and Technology Accreditation rr.puirerncros Mandate that this report must not be rctiroduced except in flill with the approval of the laboratory. This report rclatcs ONLY to the items tested Reviewed bye tw► 50012251 ,E Relinquished by: Date/Time: rz 2 67_U0 ` Received by: Date/Time: j Relinquished bY: um Date/Time: Received by: Date/Time: . Relinquished b Date/Time: i Received by: Date/Time: fl 9 : _ray a s.f .. .. 1 . I Company Name: ATC Associates, Inc. SCILAB Emergency Pagers: 8 SCHOOL STREET Company Address: 39 Spruce Street (781)317-1522 WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 City: E. Longmeadow state: MA zip: 01028 (781)649-2873 (781) 337-9334 FAX (781) 337-7642 f9$ Project Name: Smith College Analysis Type: PLM �,,,ne• . . �.� Fax: (413) 525-8227 Project Address: Sessions Annex Positive Stop: Yes No Results to: Denis St]ean Sr./Sandy Fabian Project Manager: Denis StJean Sr. Turnaround Time: 3 Day Verbal Results: Yes No Project Number. 81-10438.00231 Fax Copy by: Cell or Pager#: Sampled by: Richard J. Korzeniowski Date: 12/27/00 Return Samples: Yes No Site Fax: Special Instructions or Comments: j Additional Fax: Lab ID Field ID Location Sample Description Homogenous Application 10438.00231-28A First Floor, Lounge Area Window Glazing 10438.00231-286 First Floor, Front Living room Window Glazing 10438.00231-28C First Floor, Rear Living room Window Glazing I ! 11 ii 1f 1f It 1t If I 11 I 11 I Relinquishes .y: - Date/Time: 1'L'Z,�'. 00 Received by: Date/Time: fa- Relinquished by: Date/Time: . Received by: t Date/Time: Relinquished by to/Time: / Received by: fog Date/Time: t'! Company Name: ATC Associates, Inc. SCILAB Emergency Pagers: 8 SCHOOL STREET Company Address: 39 Spruce Street (781)317-1522 WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 City: E. Longmeadow State: MA zip: 01028 (781)649-2873 (781)337-9334 FAX(781)337-7642 Phone 43} Project Name: Smith College Analysis Type: PLM Fax: (413) 525-8227 Project Address: Sessions Annex Positive Stop: Yes No Results to: Denis St3ean Sr./Sandy Fabian Project Manager: Denis StJean Sr. Tumaround Time: 3 Day i Verbal Results: Yes No Project Number. 81-10438.00231 Fax Copy by: Cell or Pager#: Sampled by: Richard J. Korzeniowski Date: 12/27/00 Return Samples: Yes No Site Fax: Special Instructions'or Comments: - Additional Fax: Lab ID Field ID Location Sample Description Homogenous Application 10438.00231-21BB Second Floor,Kitchenette Glue Holding Wallboard 10438.00231-21C Third Floor, Bathroom Wallboard 10438.00231-21 CC Third Floor, Bathroom Glue Holding Wallboard 10438.00231-22 Second Floor, Room 203 . Gray(Square Design) Linoleum 10438.00231-23A Second Floor, Large Bathroom Covebase r 10438,00231-23AA Second Floor, Large Bathroom Brown Glue on Covebase 10438.00231-23B Second Floor, Small Bathroom Covebase 10438.00231-23BB Second Floor, Small Bathroom Brown Glue on Covebase 10438.00231-23C Third Floor, Bathroom Covebase 10438.00231-23CO Third Floor, Bathroom Brown Glue on Covebase 10438.00231-24A- First Floor, Bathroom Covebase 10438.00231-24AA First Floor, Bathroom White Glue on Covebase 10438.00231-25A ' Third Floor, Housekeeping Closet Red Paper under Hardwood Floors 10438.00231-25B Third Floor, Reg. Closet Red Paper under Hardwood Floors 10438.00231-26A First Floor, Front Stairwell Brown Rubber Stair tread 10438.00231-26AA First Floor, Front Stairwell White Glue on Stair tread 10438.Q0231-27A Second Floor, Front Stairwell, to Third Floor Light Brown Rubber Stair tread 101438.00231-27AA Second Floor, Front Stairwell, to Third Floor Light Brown Glue on Stair tread i, A 4 Relinquished by: Date/Time: I -0J i Received by: Date/Time: - Relinquished by: /' Date/Time: Received by: Date/Time: — t Relinquished by: Date/Time: r Received by: Date/Time. Company Name: ATC Associates, Inc. SCILAB Emergency Pagers: 8 SCHOOL STREET Company Address: 39 Spruce Street (781) 317-1522 WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 City: E. Longmeadow State: MA zip: 01028 (781) 649-2873 (781)337-9334 FAX(781) 337-7642 h ne. 1 - Z Project Name: Smith College Analysis Type: PLM I r Fax: (413) 525-8227 Project Address: Sessions Annex Positive Stop: Yes NO i Results to: Denis St3ean Sr./Sandy Fabian Project Manager: Denis StJean Sr. Turnaround Time: 3 Day Verbal Results: Yes No Project Number. 81-10438.00231 Fax Copy by i Cell or Pager#: Sampled by: Richard J. Korzeniowski Date: 12/27100 Return Samples: Yes No i I Site Fax: Special Instructions or Comments: j Additional Fax: (. Lab ID Field ID Location Sample Description Homogenous Application 10438.00231-14C Second Floor, Small Bathroom Plaster(White Smooth Coat) 10438.00231-14CC Second Floor, Small Bathroom Plaster(Brown Coat) E 10438.00231-14D Third Floor, Housekeeping Closet Plaster(White Smooth Coat) 10438.00231-14DD Third Floor, Housekeeping Closet Plaster(Brown Coat) 10438.00231-14E Third Floor, Bathroom Plaster(White Smooth Coat) 10438.00231-14EE Third Floor, Bathroom Plaster(Brown Coat) 10438.00231-15 First Floor, Room 102 Plaster(Type II) 10438.00231-16 First Floor, Bathroom Gray (Pebble Design0 Linoleum 10438.00231-17A Second Floor, Kitchenette 1'x 1' Ceiling Tile j 10438.00231-17B Second Floor, Kitchenette 1'x 1' Ceiling Tile 10438.00231-18A Second Floor, Kitchenette Brown Glue Daubs under 1'x 1' Ceiling Tile 10438.00231-18B Second Floor, Kitchenette Brown Glue Daubs under 1'x 1' Ceiling Tile 10438.00231-19 Second Floor, Back Stairwell Black Felt under Light Brown Linoleum 10438.00231-20A Second Floor, Kitchenette Yellow/Brown (Pebble Design) Linoleum 10438.00231-20B Second Floor,Small Bathroom Yellow/Brown (Pebble Design) Linoleum 10438.00231-21A Second Floor, Large Bathroom Wallboard 10438.00231-21AA Second Floor, Large Bathroom Glue Holding Wallboard �nnoo nn�o4 ��c Qo�nnri Flnnr Kif_chonPtFa Wallboard It If If I IF IA II 1 9 1 1 It l II If 1 II Relinquished by: Date/Time: ��-00 Received by: Date/Time: Relinquished by: Date/Time: Received by: t Date/Time: f Relinquished by: Date/Time: Received by: O (,t,Q Date/Time: r.. i y Company Name: ATC Associates, Inc. SCILAB Emergency Pagers: 8 SCHOOL STREET Company Address: 39 Spruce Street (781)317-1522 WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 } city: E. Longmeadow state: MA zip: 01028 (781)649-2873 (781)337-9334 FAX(781) 337-7642 Phone8 Project Name: Smith College Analysis Type: PLM Fax: (413) 525-8227 Project Address: Sessions Annex . Positive Stop: Yes Pao Results to: Denis Stlean Sr./Sandy Fabian Project Manager: Denis StJean Sr. Turnaround Time: 3 Day' Verbal Results: Yes No Project Number. 81-10438.00231 Fax Copy by: Cell or Pager#: Sampled by: Richard J. Korzeniowski Date: 12/27100 Return Samples: Yes No ;r Site Fax: Special Instructions or Comments: Additional Fax: Lab ID Field ID Location Sample Description Homogenous Application 10438.00231-08B First Floor, Room 102 Wood Design Linoleum E 10438.00231-08C Second Floor, Room 205 Wood Design Linoleum 10438.00231-09A First Floor, Room 101 2'x 4' Ceiling Tile (Type II) 10438.00231-09B First Floor, Room 101 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type II) 10438.00231-09C First Floor, Room 102 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type II) r 10438.00231-10A First Floor, Bathroom 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type 1) 10438.00231-10B Second Floor, Large Bathroom 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Ty 1) j 10438.00231-10C Third Floor, Bathroom 2'x 4'Ceiling.Tile(Type 1) 10438.00231-11A First Floor, Bathroom Sheetrock 10438.00231-11B Second Floor, Large Bathroom Sheetrock 10438.00231-11C. Second Floor, Small Bathroom Sheetrock 10438.00231-12A First Floor, Bathroom Sheetrock 10438.00231-12B Second Floor, Large Bathroom Sheetrock 10438.00231-12C Second Floor, Small Bathroom Sheetrock I 10438.00231-14A First Floor, Stairwell to basement Plaster(White Smooth Coat) 10438.00231-14AA First Floor, Stairwell to basement Plaster(Brown Coat) 10438.00231-14B First Floor, Bathroom Plaster(White Smooth Coat) 10438.00231-1488 First Floor, Bathroom Plaster(Brown Coat) Relinquished by: Date/Time:, i2 23 loo Received by: Date/Time: I a Relinquished by: Date/Time: , Received by:***** Date/Time: ¢. Relinquished by. Date/Time: _ f Received by: Date/Time: D t Company Name: ATC Associates, Inc. SCILAB Emergency Pagers: 8 SCHOOL STREET Company Address: 39 Spruce Street (781) 317-1522 WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 City: E. Longmeadow State: MA zip: 01028 (781) 649-2873 (781) 337-9334 FAX (781) 337-7642 Phone 413 525198 � r � ', project Name: Smith College Analysis Type: PLM Far.: (413) 525-8227 Project Address: Sessions Annex Positive Stop: Yes No Results to: Denis Stlean Sr./Sandy Fabian Project Manager: Denis StJean Sr. Turnaround Time: 3 Day Verbal Results: Yes No Project Number: 81-10438.00231 Fax Copy by: Cell or Pager#: Sampled by: Richard J. Korzeniowski Date: 12/27/00 Return Samples: Yes No Site Fax: Special Instructions or Comments: Additional Fax: Lab ID Field ID Location Sample Description Homogenous Application 10438.00231-01A Basement, Trunk Room (Water Meter) Rough Ceiling Plaster 10438.00231-01B Basement, Trunk Room (Water Meter) Rough Ceiling Plaster 10438.00231-01AA Basement, Trunk Room (Water Meter) Rough Ceiling Patched area 10438.00231-02 Basement, By Gas Hot water Heater Bebris above Wood Ceiling 10438.00231-03A First Floor, Rear living room • 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile t 10438.00231-03AA First Floor, Rear living room 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile (Mastic) 10438.00231-03B First Floor, Front living room 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile). 10438.00231-03BB First Floor, Front living room 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile (Mastic) 10438.00231-03C First Floor, Hallway to Typing Room 9"x 9" Brown Floor the 10438.00231-03CC First Floor, Hallway to Typing Room 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile(Mastic) 10438.00231-04A - First Floor, Rear living room Black Felt under 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile 10438.00231-04B First Floor, Front living room Black Felt under 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile 10438.00231-04C First Floor, Hallway to Typing Room Black Felt under 9"x 9" Brown Floor tile 10438.00231-05 First Floor, Lounge Area Rough Ceiling Plaster 10438.00231-06 First Floor, Front Closet Paper Ceiling 10438.00231-07A First Floor, Kitchenette Area Light Brown (Square Design) Linoleum 10438.00231-07B Second Floor, Back Stairwell Light Brown (Square Design) Linoleum Ill SC/ENURC LABORAWR/ES, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 PU(l SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212)679-86)00•FAX:(212)679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/0212001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 17 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow,MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-28B 201011019-74 No NAD 28 Location:First Floor Front Living Room Description: Grey/Beige,Homogeneous, Window Glazing Asbestos Tvves: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-28C 201011019-75 Yes w 28 Location:First Floor Rear Living Room Description: Grey/Beige,Homogeneous, Window Glazing Asbestos Tvpes: Chrysotile <1. % Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous >99. °%o � Reporting Notes: Analyzed by:Paul Mucha ,C *NAD/NSD=no asbestos detected; NA=not analyzed; NAPS=not analyze sitive stop;Bulk Asbestos Analysis per 40 CFR 763,Subpart F,Appendix A and ELAP Analysis Protocols 198.1/198.4 for NY samples; Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials.TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non-asbestos-containing in NY State(see also EPA Advisory f floor tile,FR 59, 146,38970,8/1/94).National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mand#that FE,L#rt st not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the laboratory.This report relates ONLY t items 480,Vt.Cert.#AL016055 Reviewed By: tt 1 SCIENTIFIC LABORATOR/ES, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET .w NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTALLABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212)679-9392 eA M PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 16 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-26A 201011019-69 No NAD 26 Location:First Floor,Front Stairwell Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Brown Rubber Stair Tread Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-26AA 201011019-70 No NAD 26 Location:First Floor,Front Stairwell Description: White, Homogeneous, White Glue On Stair Tread Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-27A 201011019-71 No NAD 27 Location:Second Floor Front Stairwell To Third Floor Description: Light Brown, Homogeneous, Light Brown Rubber Stair Tread Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-27AA 201011019-72 No NAD 27 Location:Second Floor Front Stairwell To Third Floor Description: Light Brown, Homogeneous, Lgt. Brown Glue On Stair Tread Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. 10438.00231-28A 201011019-73 Yes 28 Location:First Floor Lounge Area Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Window Glazing Asbestos Tvnes: Chrysotile Trace ` Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % SCIENTIFIC LARORAWR/EE, INC. j 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212)679-8600•FAX: (212) 679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 15 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow,MA 01028 Client No. /HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-24A 201011019-65 No NAD 24 Location:First Floor Bathroom Description: Cream, Homogeneous, Covebase Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-24AA 201011019-66 No NAD +w 24 Location:First Floor Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, White Glue On Covebase 00 Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % +0 10438.00231-25A 201011019-67 No NAD 25 Location: Third Floor Housekeeping Closet Description: Pink, Homogeneous, Red Paper Under Hardwood Flr Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair 2. %, Cellulose 90. %, Synthetic fibers 2. fa Non-fibrous 6. % 10438.00231-25B 201011019-68 No NAD 25 Location: Third Floor Regular Closet Description: Pink, Homogeneous, Red Paper Under Hardwood Flr Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair 2. %, Cellulose 90. %, Synthetic fibers 3. Non-fibrous 5. .w sciEivriFic t.aeoRA roRiES, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212)679-9392 0 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 14 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-23AA 201011019-60 No NAD ' 23 Location:Second Floor Large Bathroom Description: Brown, Heterogeneous, Brown Glue on Covebase Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-23B 201011019-61 No NAD 23 Location:Second Floor Small Bathroom 4 Description: White, Homogeneous, Covebase Asbestos Tvnes: +MIA Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-23BB 201011019-62 No NAD no 23 Location:Second Floor Small Bathroom Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Brown Glue On Covebase Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % - 10438.00231-23C 201011019-63 No NAD 23 Location:Third Floor Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Covebase Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-23CC 201011019-64 No NAD 23 Location:Third Floor Bathroom Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Brown Glue On Covebase Asbestos Tvnes: y. Other Non- Material: Cellulose Trace, fibrous 100. % __._... SCIENTIFIC LABOR4 TORIES INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTALL4BORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX:(212) 679-9392 ]PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 1 44 ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SeiLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 13 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow,MA 01028 Client No. /HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-21BB 201011019-55 No NAD 21 Location:Second Floor Kitchenette Description:Brown, Homogeneous, Glue Holding Wallboard Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 1. %, Non-fibrous 99. % 10438.00231-21C 201011019-56 No NAD 40 21 Location:Third Floor Bathroom Description:Brown, Homogeneous, Wallboard Asbestos Tvves: Other Material: Cellulose 85. %, Non-fibrous 15. % 10438.00231-21CC 201011019-57 No NAD 21 Location:Third Floor Bathroom Description: Brown, Homogeneous,Glue Holding Wallboard Asbestos Tvves: Other Material: Cellulose 5. %, Non-fibrous 95. % 1 10438.00231-22 201011019-58 Yes 15 % 22 Location'Second Floor Room 203 Description: Grey, Heterogeneous, Gray Square Design Linoleum Asbestos Tvt)es: Chrvsotile 15. % Other Material: Cellulose 10. %, Synthetic fibers Trace, Non-fibrous 75. % 10438.00231-23A 201011019-59 No NAD 23 Location:Second Floor Large Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Covebase Asbestos Tvves: - Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. ck _ w ip 117 EAST 30TH STREET w NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212) 679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 " Attn: Michelle Lan*viere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 12 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No. /HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-20A 201011019-50 Yes 12 % 20 Location:Second Floor Kitchenette Description: Yellow/Brown/Grey, Heterogeneous, Yellow Brown Pebble Des. Lin. ' Asbestos Tvpes: Chrvsotile 12. % Other Material: Cellulose 15. %, Non-fibrous 73. % 10438.00231-20B 201011019-51 NAPS 20 Location:Second Floor Small Bathroom Description: Yellow Brown Pebble Des. Lin. Asbestos Tvpes: d„ Other Material: 10438.00231-21A 201011019-52 No NAD 21 Location:Second Floor Large Bathroom Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Wallboard Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 80. %, Non-fibrous 20. % 10438.00231-21AA 201011019-53 No NAD 21 Location:Second Floor Large Bathroom ru Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Glue Holding Wallboard Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 2. %, Non-fibrous 98. % 10438.00231-21B 201011019-54 No NAD 21 Location:Second Floor Kitchenette Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Wallboard Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 80. %, Non-fibrous 20. % SCIENTIFIC LABORATORIES / 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212)679-8600•FAX: (212) 679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 40 ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 11 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-17A 201011019-45 No NAD 17 Location:Second Floor Kitchenette Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, 1x1 Ceiling Tile Asbestos Tvves: Other Material: Cellulose 40. %, Fibrous glass 40. %, Non-fibrous 20. % t� - 10438.00231-17B 201011019-46 No NAD 17 Location:Second Floor Kitchenette Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, lxl Ceiling Tile Asbestos Tvves: Other Material: Cellulose 40. %, Fibrous glass 40. %, Non-fibrous 20. % 10438.00231-18A 201011019-47 Yes 3 % 18 Location:Second Floor Kitchenette Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Brown Glue Daubs Under CT Asbestos Tvves: Chrvsotile 3.0 % Other Material: Cellulose 5. %, Fibrous glass 5. %, Non-fibrous 87. % 1043800231-18B 201011019-48 NAPS 18 Location:Second Floor Kitchenette Description: Brown Glue Daubs Under CT Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: 10438,00231-19 201011019-49 No NAD 19 Location:Second Floor Back Stairwell Description: Black, Homogeneous, Black Felt Under Linoleutn ' Asbestos Tvves: Other Material: Cellulose 30. %, Synthetic fibers 5. %, Non-fibrous 65. SCIENTIFIC LABORATORIES, INC. 1 =3 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK,NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212)679-5600•FAX:(212)679-9392 • tin, PLM Bulk Asbestos Report AA ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 ON Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 10 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No. /HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-14DD 201011019-40 Yes <_1.% 0" 14 Location:Third Floor Houskeeping Closet Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Cementitious, Plaster Brown Coat Asbestos Tvnes: Chrvsotile <1. % Other Material: Animal hair Trace, Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous >99. % 10438.00231-14E 201011019-41 No NAD 14 Location:Third Floor Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Plaster White Smooth Coat Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-14EE 201011019-42 Yes .r 14 Location:Third Floor Bathroom Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Cementitious, Plaster Brown Coat Asbestos Tvnes: Chrvsotile <1. % Other Material: Animal hair Trace, Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous >99. % 10438.00231-15 201011019-43 Na NAD 15 Location:First Floor,Room 102 Description: Grey/Tan, Heterogeneous, Plaster (Type II) Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 25. %, Non-fibrous 75. % 10438.00231-16 201011019-44 No NAD 16 Location:First Floor,Bathroom Description: Grey, Heterogeneous, Gray Pebble Design On Lin. Asbestos Tvnes: ON Other Material: Cellulose 20. %, Fibrous glass 5. I7o, Non-fibrous 75. rb SCIENTIFIC BABORAWR/ES INC. / 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212) 679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 9 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-14B 201011019-35 No NAD 14 Location:First Floor,Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Plaster White Smooth Coat Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. % 4 _ 10438.00231-14BB 201011019-36 No NAD 14 Location:First Floor,Bathroom Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Cementitious, Plaster Brown Coat Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-14C 201011019-37 No NAD 14 Location:Second Floor Small Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Plaster White Smooth Coat Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-14CC 201011019-38 Yes <1.% 14 Location:Second Floor Small Bathroom Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Cementitious, Plaster Brown Coat OA Asbestos Tvnes: Chrvsotile <1. % Other Material: Animal hair 1. %, Cellulose 1. %, Non-fibrous >97. % 10438.00231-14D 201.011019-39 No NAD 14 Location. Floor Houskeeping Closet Description: White, Homogeneous, Plaster White Smooth Coat Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 2. `/o, Non-fibrous 98. `% ' SCIENTIFIC LAB®R4 TORIES INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212) 679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 8 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-12A 201011019-30 No NAD 12 Location:First Floor,Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Sheetrock Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-12B 201011019-31 No NAD 12 Location:Second Floor Large Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Sheetrock Asbestos Tvnes: w Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-12C 201011019-32 No NAD .� 12 Location:Second Floor Small Bathroom Description: White, Homogeneous, Sheetrock " Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-14A 201011019-33 No NAD 14 Location:First Floor,Stairwell To Basement Description: White, Homogeneous, Plaster White Smooth Coat Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-14AA 201011019-34 Yes <1,% 14 Location:First Floor,Stairwell To Basement Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Cementitious, Plaster Brown Coat , Asbestos Tvnes: Chrysotile <1. % Other Material: Animal hair 1. 17o, Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous >98. % S'C/E/WIF/C LABOMWR/1ES, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET AP NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONh1ENTAL LABORATORIES (212)679-8600• FAX: (212)679-9392 PLMM Bulk Asbestos Report ` ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 7 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No. /HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-10B 201011019-25 No NAD 10 Location:Second Floor Large Bathroom Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, 2x4 Ceiling Tile (Type I) Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 40. %, Fibrous glass 40. %, Non-fibrous 20. % 10438.00231-10C 201011019-26 No NAD 10 Location:Third Floor Bathroom Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, 2x4 Ceiling Tile (Type I) Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 35. %, Fibrous glass 50. %, Non-fibrous 15. % 1043 8.00231-11 A 201011019-27 No NAD 11 Location:First Floor,Bathroom Description: Grey/Tan,Heterogeneous, Sheetrock Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 25. %, Fibrous glass 3. %, Non-fibrous 72. % 10438.00231-11B 201011019-28 No NAD 11 Location:Second Floor Large Bathroom Description: Grey/Tan, Heterogeneous, Sheetrock Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 20. %, Fibrous glass 2. %, Non-fibrous 78. % 10438.00231-11C 201011019-29 No NAD 11 Location: Second Floor Small Bathroom Description: Grey/Tan, Heterogeneous, Sheetrock Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 25. %, Fibrous glass 3. %, Non-fibrous 72. l" SC/ENMIC L.BBOR4WR/ES, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX:(212)679-9392 wo 46 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 . 39 Spruce Street Page 6 of 17 .�► RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-08C 201011019-20 No NAD 8 Location:Second Floor Room 205 r� Description: Brown/Beige, Heterogeneous, Wood Design Linoleum Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 60. %O, Synthetic fibers 2. %O, Non-fibrous 38. % 10438.00231-09A 201011019-21 No NAD 9 Location:First Floor,Room 101 Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, 2x4 Ceiling Tile (Type II) Asbestos Tvnes: .� Other Material: Cellulose 40. %O, Fibrous glass 35. %O, Non-fibrous 25. % 10438.00231-09B 201011019-22 No NAD 9 Location:First Floor,Room 101 Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, 2x4 Ceiling Tile (Type II) " Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 40. %O, Fibrous glass 35. %O, Non-fibrous 25. % 10438.00231-09C 201011019-23 No NAD 9 Location:First Floor,Room 102 Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, 2x4 Ceiling Tile (Type II) Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 35. %O, Fibrous glass 40. %O, Non-fibrous 25. % 10438.002: 1-10A 201011019-24 No NAD 10 Location:First Floor,Bathroom Description: White/Grey, Homogeneous, 2x4 Ceiling Tile (Type I) Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 30. %, Fibrous glass 50. %, Non-fibrous 20. % SCIENTIFIC L.ASOR4 TOR/FS, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212)679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 5 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 es Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-06 201011019-15 No NAD 6 Location:First Floor,Front Closet Description: Brown, Homogeneous,Paper Ceiling Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 90. %, Non-fibrous 10. % 10438.00231-07A 201011019-16 Yes 15 % 7 Location:First Floor,Kitchenette Area Description:Light Brown/Grey, Heterogeneous, Light Brown Square Design Lin. 40 Asbestos Tvpes: Chrvsotile 15. % Other Material: Cellulose 15. %, Non-fibrous 70. % 10438.00231-07B 201011019-17 NAPS 7 Location:Second Floor Back Stairwell ►► Description: Light Brown Square Design Lin. Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: 10438.00231-08A 201011019-18 No NAD 8 Location:First Floor,Room 101 Description: Brown/Beige, Heterogeneous, Wood Design Linoleum Asbestos Tvpes: it Other Material: Cellulose 35. %, Synthetic fibers 2. %, Non-fibrous 63. 10438.00231-08B 201011019-19 No NAD 8 Location:First Floor,Room 102 Description: Brown/Beige, Heterogeneous, Wood Design Linoleum Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 70. �Io, Synthetic fibers ?. %, Non-fibrous 28. �% Other Material: Cellulose 70. Syntheti I -- - o ,ter SC/EIV1Bf/C L.AB®J?4 f d'RBES, INC. / 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212) 679-9392 d" PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Oft ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 am Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 4 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-04A 201011019-11 No NAD wb 4 Location:First Floor,Rear Living Room Description: Black, Homogeneous, Black Felt Under 9x9 Brown FT 04 Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 30. %, Non-fibrous 70. % 10438.00231-04B 201011019-12 No NAD 4 Location: First Floor,Front Living Room Description: Black, Homogeneous, Black Felt Under 9x9 Brown FT Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair 3. %, Cellulose 30. %, Synthetic fibers Trace, Non-fibrous 67. % 10438.00231-04C 201011019-13 No NAD 4 Location: First Floor, Hallway To Typing Room Description: Black, Homogeneous, Black Felt Under 9x9 Brown FT Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair Trace, Cellulose 30. %, Synthetic fibers Trace, Non-fibrous 70. % 10438.00231-05 201011019-14 No NAD 5 Location:First Floor,Lounge Area Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Cementitious, Rough Ceiling Plaster Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair Trace, Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100. % SCIENNF®C LAHOR 4 r RIEA, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX:(212)679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 40 ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O. # S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 3 of 17 REA ; 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No. /HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-03BB 201011019-08.2 No NAD 3M Location:First Floor,Front Living Room Description: Brown, Homogeneous, 9x9 Brown Floor Tile Mastic Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair 5. %, Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 95. % t 10438.00231-03C 201011019-09 NAPS 3 Location:First Floor,Hallway To Typing Room Description: 9x9 Brown Floor Tile Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: 10438.00231-03CC 201011019-10.1 No NAD 3M Location: First Floor, Hallway To Typing Room Description: Black, Homogeneous, 9x9 Brown Floor Tile Mastic Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair Trace, Cellulose 5. %, Synthetic fibers 2. %, Non-fibrous 93. % 10438.00231-03CC 201011019-10.2 No NAD 3M Location: First Floor, Hallway To Typing Room Description: Brown, Homogeneous, 9x9 Brown Floor Tile Mastic 40 Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair 8. %, Cellulose 2. %, Synthetic fibers 2. Non-fibrous 88. SceE/VM®c L.ABaR4?'aiQ/E�, INC. 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212)679-8600•FAX: (212)679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O. # S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 2 of 17 RE: 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-03A 201011019-05 Yes 3.8 % 3 Location:First Floor,Rear Living Room Description: Brown, Homogeneous, 9x9 Brown Floor Tile Asbestos Tvnes: Chrysotile 3.8 % Other Material: Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 96.2 % 10438.00231-03AA 201011019-06 No NAD 3M Location:First Floor,Rear Living Room Description: Black, Homogeneous, 9x9 Brown Floor Tile Mastic Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Cellulose 2. %, Non-fibrous 98. % 10438.00231-03B 201011019-07 NAPS 3 Location:First Floor,Front Living Room Description: 9x9 Brown Floor Tile „u Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: 10438.00231-03BB 201011019-08.1 No NAD 3M Location: First Floor, Front Living Room Description: Black, Homogeneous, 9x9 Brown Floor Tile Mastic Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair Trace, Cellulose 5. %, Synthetic fibers Trace, Non-fibrous 95. % ts► SCIENTIFIC LABORATORIES, INC. AP 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212)679-8600•FAX: (212) 679-9392 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates Date Received 01/02/2001 SciLab Job No. 201011019 Attn: Michelle Lariviere Date Examined 01/03/2001 P.O.# S-65 39 Spruce Street Page 1 of 17 RE 81-10438.00231; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00231-01A 201011019-01 No NAD 1 Location:Basement Trunk Room(Water Meter) Description: OffWhite, Homogeneous, Rough Ceiling Plaster Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-01B 201011019-02 No NAD 1 Location:Basement Trunk Room(Water Meter) Description: OffWhite, Homogeneous, Rough Ceiling Plaster Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100. % 10438.00231-01AA 201011019-03 No NAD 1 Location:Basement Trunk Room(Water Meter) Description: White, Heterogeneous, Rough Ceiling Patched Area Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 30. %, Non-fibrous 70. % 10438.00231-02 201011019-04 No NAD 2 Location: Basement By Gas Hot Water Heater Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Cementitious, Debris Above Wood Ceiling Asbestos Tvpes: 40 Other Material: Animal hair Trace, Cellulose 1. %, Synthetic fibers Trace, Non-fibrous 99. 40 w Sc®El4/r/Flc LaBOI?AroleIEs, INC. / 117 EAST 30TH STREET NEW YORK, NY 10016 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (212) 679-8600•FAX: (212).679-9392 A� January 3,2001 ATC Associates Attn:Ms.Lariviere 39 Spruce Street East Longmeadow,MA 01028 RE: ATC Associates au Job Number 201011019 P.O.#S-65 81-10438.80231; Smith College; Sessions Annex Dear Ms.Lariviere: Enclosed are the results for PLM asbestos analysis of the following ATC Associates samples received at SCILAB on Tuesday, January 02,2001,for a 3 day turnaround: 10438.00231-01A, 10438.00231-01B, 10438.00231-OIAA, 10438.00231-02, 10438.00231-03A, 10438.00231-03AA, 10438.00231-03B, 10438.00231-03BB, 10438.00231-03C, 10438.00231-03CC, 10438.00231-04A, 10438.00231-04B, 10438.00231-04C, 10438.00231-05, 10438.00231-06, 10438.00231-07A, 10438.00231-07B, 10438.00231-08A, 10438.00231- 0813, 10438.00231-08C, 10438.00231-09A, 10438.00231-0913, 10438.00231-09C, 10438.00231-10A, 10438.00231-10B, 10438.00231-10C, 10438.00231-11A, 10438.00231-11B, 10438.00231-11C, 10438.00231-12A, 10438.00231-12B, ft 10438.00231-12C, 10438.00231-14A, 10438.00231-14AA, 10438.00231-1413, 10438.00231-14BB, 10438.00231-14C, 10438.00231-14CC, 10438.00231-14D, 10438.00231-14DD, 10438.00231-14E, 10438.00231-14EE, 10438.00231-15, 10438.00231-16, 10438.00231-17A, 10438.00231-17B, 10438.00231-18A, 10438.00231-18B, 10438.00231-19, 10438.00231- 20A, 10438.00231-20B, 10438.00231-21A, 10438.00231-21AA, 10438.00231-21B, 10438.00231-211313, 10438.00231-21C, 10438.00231-21CC, 10438.00231-22, 10438.00231-23A, 10438.00231-23AA, 10438.00231-2313, 10438.00231-231313, 10438.00231-23C, 10438.00231-23CC, 10438.00231-24A, 10438.00231-24AA, 10438.00231-25A, 10438.00231-2513, 10438.00231-26A, 10438.00231-26AA, 10438.00231-27A, 10438.00231-27AA, 10438.00231-28A, 10438.00231-2813, 10438.00231-28C The 75 samples contained in zip lock bag were shipped to SciLab via Federal Express. These samples were prepared and 00 analyzed according to the EPA Interim Method(40 CFR 763,subpt F,App. A). The required analytical information,analysis results,analyst signature and laboratory indentification is contained in the Analyst's Report. This report relates ONLY to the sample analysis expressed as percent asbestos. SciLab assumes no responsibility for customer supplied data such as"sample type", "location",or"area sampled". This report must not be used to claim product endorsement by SciLab,NVLAP or any agency of the U. S.Government. The National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements,mandates that this report must not be reproduced,except in full,and with the approval of the laboratory. Scil-ab appreciates this opportunity to serve your organization. Please contact us for any further assistance or with any questions. i cere , t _ Pa it Mucha Laboratory Supervisor " NEW YORK• LOS ANGELES•SAN FRANCISCO•BOSTON*ALBANY-RICHMOND ii 5GO0O24 � � w Relinquished by: Date Time: ' , Received by: Date/Time: y Relinquished by: Date/Time: r z Received by: Date/Time: m Relinquished by: Date/Time: ` Received by: Date/Time: Company Name: ATC Associates, Inc. SCILAB Emergency Pagers: 8 SCHOOL STREET Company Address: 39 Spruce Street (781) 317-1522 WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 City: E. Longmeadow State: MA zip: 01028 (781) 649-2873 (781) 337-9334 FAX (781) 337-7642 Phase" (413) 525 I19$ '{ Project Name: Smith College Analysis Type: PLM Fax: (413) 525-8227 Project Address: Sessions Annex Positive Stop: Yes No Results to: Denis St3ean Sr./Sandy Fabian Project Manager: Denis StJean Sr. Turnaround Time: 3 Day Verbal Results: Yes No Project Number: 81-10438.00221 Fax Copy by: Cell or Pager#: Sampled by: Richard J. Korzeniowski Date: 09/01/00 Return Samples: Yes No Site Fax: Special Instructions or Comments: Additional Fax: Lab ID Field ID Location Sample Description Homogenous Application 10438.00221-01A Roof-West Side Silver painted Asphalt Yes 10438.00221-01 B Roof-South East Silver painted Asphalt " 10438.00221-01C Roof-Center Silver painted Asphalt 10438.00221-02A Roof-South East Paper under Tin Roof Yes 10438.00221-02B Roof- North East Paper under Tin Roof 10438.00221-02C Roof-South West Paper under Tin Roof 10438.00221-03A Roof- East Side Paper under Slate Roof Yes 10438.00221-03B Roof-North East Paper under Slate Roof " 10438.00221-03C Roof-South East Paper under Slate Roof " 10438.00221-04A Roof-South East Black Flashing Yes 10438.00221-04B Roof- North East Black Flashing " 10438.00221-04C Roof-South Center Black Flashing p CiLAB BOSTON INC. 8 SCHOOL STREET WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 PULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (781)337-9334•FAX: (781)337-7642 1111! PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates, Inc.,East Longmeadow Date Received 09/08/2000 SciLab Job No. 500092425 Attn: Sandy Fabian Date Examined 09/11/2000 P.O.# 81-10348.00221 39 Spruce Street Page 3 of 3 1st Floor RE: 81-10348.00221; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow,MA 01028 111 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00221-04B 500092425-11 NAPS •� 4 Location:Roof-North East Description: Black Flashing Asbestos TviDes: Other Material: 10438.00221-04C 500092425-12 NAPS 4 Location:Roof-South Center Description: Black Flashing Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Reporting Notes: Analyzed by:Steven Grevelis *NAD/NSD=no asbestos detected; NA=not analyzed; Bulk Asbestos Analysis per 40 CFR 763,Subpart F,Appendix A and ELAP Analysis Protocols 198.1/198.4 for New York samples; Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. TEM is currently the only method that can be used to wr determine if this material can be considered or treated as non-asbestos-containing in New York State(also see EPA Advisory for floor tile,FR 59, 146,38970,8/1/94). National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the laboratory. This report relates ONLY to the items tested. Reviewed by: �Q _ ire 1�w SC/LAS ,COSY®/V'r INC. 8 SCHOOL STREET WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 FUU SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (781)337-9334•FAX:(781)337-7642 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates, Inc.,East Longmeadow Date Received 09/08/2000 SciLab Job No. 500092425 Attn: Sandy Fabian Date Examined 09/11/2000 P.O.# 81-10348.00221 39 Spruce Street Page 2 of 3 1st Floor RE: 81-10348.00221; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow,MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00221-02C 500092425-06 No NAD 2 Location:Roof-South West Description: Black,Heterogeneous,Paper Under Tin Roof Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Animal hair 5. %, Cellulose 35. %, Non-fibrous 60. % 10438.00221-03A 500092425-07 No NAD 3 Location:Roof-East Side Description:Black, Homogeneous,Paper Under Slate Roof Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 60. %, Non-fibrous 40. % 10438.00221-03B 500092425-08 No NAD 3 Location:Roof-North East Description: Black,Homogeneous, Paper Under Slate Roof Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 60. %, Non-fibrous 40. % 10438.00221-03C 500092425-09 No NAD 3 Location:Roof-South East Description: Black, Homogeneous, Paper Under Slate Roof Asbestos Tvpes: Other Material: Cellulose 60. %, Non-fibrous 40. % 10438.00221-04A 500092425-10 Yes 12 % 4 Location:Roof-South East Description: Black, Homogeneous, Black Flashing Asbestos Tvpes: Chrvsotile 12. % Other Material: Non-fibrous 88. % M" SClf.AB BOBT0I4l� INC. LEM 8 SCHOOL STREET so WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (781) 337-9334•FAX: (781)337-7642 #Ils PLM Bulk Asbestos Report ATC Associates, Inc.,East Longmeadow Date Received 09/08/2000 SciLab Job No. 500092425 " Attn: Sandy Fabian Date Examined 09/11/2000 P.O.# 81-10348.00221 39 Spruce Street Page 1 of 3 1st Floor RE: 81-10348.00221; Smith College; Sessions Annex East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Client No./HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 10438.00221-01A 500092425-01 Yes 5 % 1 Location:Roof-West Side Description: Silver/Black, Heterogeneous, Silver Painted Asphalt Asbestos Tvnes: Chrvsotile 5. % Other Material: Cellulose 25. %, Non-fibrous 70. % 10438.00221-01B 500092425-02 NAPS 1 Location:Roof-South East N. Description: Silver Painted Asphalt Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: 10438.00221-01C 500092425-03 NAPS 1 Location:Roof-Center Description: Silver Painted Asphalt Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: 10438.00221-02A 500092425-04 No NAD 2 Location:Roof-South East Description: Black, Heterogeneous, Paper Under Tin Roof Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair 5. %, Cellulose 35. %, Non-fibrous 60. % 10438.00221-0213 500092425-05 No NAD 2 . Location: Roof-North East Description: Black, Heterogeneous, Paper Under Tin Roof Asbestos Tvnes: Other Material: Animal hair 5. %, Cellulose 35. %, Non-fibrous 60. % 1 ' SC RAD BOSTON, INC. 8 SCHOOL STREET WEYMOUTH, MA 02189 FULL SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES TEL: (781)337-9334•FAX: (781)337-7642 September 11,2000 ATC Associates,Inc.,East Longmeadow Attn:Ms.Fabian 39 Spruce Street 1st Floor East Longmeadow,MA 01028 RE: ATC Associates,Inc.,East Longmeadow Job Number 500092425 P.O.#81-10348.00221 81-10348.00221; Smith College; Sessions Annex Dear Ms.Fabian: Enclosed are the results for PLM asbestos analysis of the following ATC Associates,Inc.,East Longmeadow samples received at SCILAB on Friday,September 08,2000,for a 3 day turnaround: 10438.00221-01A, 10438.00221-01B, 10438.00221-01C, 10438.00221-02A, 10438.00221-02B, 10438.00221-02C, 10438.00221-03A, 10438.00221-0313, 10438.00221-03C, 10438.00221-04A, 10438.00221-04B, 10438.00221-04C The 12 samples contained in plastic sample bags were shipped to SciLab via Federal Express. These samples were prepared and analyzed according to the EPA Interim Method(40 CFR 763,subpt F,App.A). The required analytical information,analysis results,analyst signature and laboratory indentification is contained in the Analyst's Report. This report relates ONLY to the sample analysis expressed as percent asbestos. SciLab assumes no responsibility for customer supplied data such as"sample type","location",or"area sampled". This report must not be used to claim product endorsement by SciLab,NVLAP or any agency of the U.S.Government. The National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements,mandate that this report must not be reproduced,except in full with the approval of the laboratory. SciLab appreciates this opportunity to serve your organization. Please contact us for any further assistance or with any questions. Sincerely, —4L Steven A.Grevelis + Asbestos Laboratory Manager NEW YORK•LOS ANGELES• BOSTON• ALBANY•RICHMOND fro 9 - 1 -oo 1 Vy�v v LZI 0z c 1 Oq 3 J. uv 7.Z1.,.o1 A .5 �,,cJ ����lf✓' AtpGU�f wo ON J lot/�3. oo 0 D c IaY�,.u� LZI-C3 JS owl °.u0 "L2� - 02a 4-;- 3d,OJ11,1 . of r'y I a 3v. vo , J. IJN1 pl�fl� G1wl� Y1 g3,3. C� J 2.2 Cgs no Annex OE71.3I. qA 3113 102- 1028 �a2J1-r� ooFSl-oJ/a 102 OST2 UP UP 41 11 w z - - SPRINKLER 6o`1f'lf' co-)3:1='0}_ A ROOM x STORAGE do-43 I-VIC AREA 100T co_31 -ZqA�LYAA 101A 1018 o p 2{2-0,� ` I .0 C L SPACE C0112' 2 oc -y Id3J} G3AA +O'IA JA•ps oc131-1Y81ry8II 101 BATH ROOM pp23i 1 3C 100LA REAR U3�1 1cA LIVING ROOM F-T STORAGE AREA ppZy r.0'I A 100 1 FRONT ..._. LA9 o CRAVdL SA-02. SPACE loop HALL OozsfolL 1o0L ovC PARLO FRONT UP LIVING ROOM TR K oo231-0S ST AG 00131.13 ROOM NUMBER LEGEND p 101 NEW ROOM NUMBER C ENTRY 3a`J 1 1 J' A PREMOUS ROOM NUMBER SA•03 ,x31 26 A Z lA 00.24 1-OJ'b,o anD+c X18 SA�oy SA.oI 00131-CIA 0013i•01 CO2J1-Oq oC231-04 co:dl•61B COl SESSIONS ANNEX CC�1-oa BASEMENT FLOOR po211 °� FIRST -FLOOR tt. � BASEMENT & FIRST FLOORS DRAWING NO ap2Sl oFJ$ SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" O b� DRAWN BY:CAO REV. BY: 455-01 �'Np�01 (DATE: 11/14 /96 DATE: d : ' Li�jw} f0✓!1 �JY yc,i: QJ �1 lv� µ..A0.^ '1�,.,}l,f„)� 4j�1J' 1'—'TW I' U�ec oo13i 1�1ct�VC( «'131-IIC0-I2C oc2J�o-z3A*2 Sari OOST2 a 200T ., ON C ON o 201A 200ST2 U? N 303 00131 -Iy 9 304 2011 202 0ozaI -0}a 10 5 4 303A 60::31�La 0 00231.210+21 AO 00731'11L421C coZ31-15A OOT 40131- osr, 200K? 00251 -11L 11300 K, 200TI 0. 04131 -I4A+C9�' 300J t , c C.-L31-2.111421A4 203 7 3 20311_ C 0 231-/0 C 3' 300K DN KITCHENETTE SA-0 } e., :I DN 200 ;; 2 2038 0023i I` P 1`4 OD Sp OL 20411 OJ2 , ab-,5-02-11 30111 200ST1 ooi31'IOjs 00231-22 OoZj1't4ErIWfE m 301 N 204 230+1Jn 2 302 8 00131-253 ocz3I - 205 6 1 20511 00231'Z-4A,13AA THIRD FLOOR PLAN ROOM NUMBER LEGEND SECOND FLOOR PLAN Ar�cote SESSIONS ANNEX U-At/' iJzu )iha. 204 NEW ROOM NUMBER �G1 SECOND & THIRD FLOOR PLANS DRAWING N0. 2 PREVIOUS ROOM NUMBER h SCALE: DRAWN BY:CAO REV. BY: 455-23 Yell,,r '1�. I,�. 3 te NDE� DATE: 11/18/96 DATE: ! ! ! ! ! # A ! 10438.00231-01A Rough Ceiling Plaster Basement,Trunk Room(Water Meter) 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-01B Rough Ceiling Plaster Basement,Trunk Room(Water Meter) 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-05 Rough Plaster Ceiling First Floor,Lounge Area Trace Animal Hair 10438.00231-11A Sheetrock First Floor,Bathroom 25%Cellulose 10438.00231-11B Sheetrock Second Floor,Large Bathroom 20%Cellulose 10438.00231-11 C Sheetrock Second Floor,Small Bathroom 25%Cellulose 10438.00231-12A Sheetrock(Joint Compound) First Floor,Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-12B Sheetrock(Joint Compound) Second Floor,Large Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-12C Sheetrock(Joint Compound) Second Floor,Small Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-21A Wallboard Second Floor, Bathroom 80%Cellulose 10438.00231-21 B Wallboard Second Floor,Kitchenette 80%Cellulose 10438.00231-21C Wallboard Third Floor,Bathroom 85%Cellulose 10438.00231-24AA White Glue on Cove base First Floor,Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-26AA White Glue on Stair tread First Floor, Front Stairwell Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-28A Window Glazing First Floor,Lounge Area Trace Chrysotile 10438.00231-28B Window Glazing First Floor,Living Room Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-28C Window Glazing First Floor,Living Room <1%Chrysotile 10438.00231-08A Wood Design Linoleum First Floor,Room 101 35%Cellulose 10438.00231-08B Wood Design Linoleum First Floor,Room 102 70%Cellulose 10438.00231-08C Wood Design Linoleum Second Floor, Room 205 60%Cellulose -W Pa;e4of4 Thitrs(k�,, Fehruarp 15,2001 10438.00242-02 -Paper under Clapboards Exterior,South center side, Rear Lounge 90%Cellulose 10438.00242-03 Paper under Clapboards Exterior,Southest Side,Typing Room 90%Cellulose 10438.00221-03A Paper under Slate Roof Roof-East Side 60%Cellulose 10438.00221-03B Paper under Slate Roof Roof-North Side 60%Cellulose 10438.00221-03C Paper under Slate Roof Roof-South East Side 60%Cellulose 10438.00221-02A Paper under Tin Roof Roof-South East Side 5%Animal Hair 10438.00221-02B Paper under Tin Roof Roof-North East Side 5%Animal Hair 10438.00221-02C Paper under Tin Roof Roof-South West Side 5%Animal Hair 10438.00231-14AA Plaster(Brown Coat) First Floor,Stairwell to Basement <1%Chrysotile 10438.00231-14BB Plaster(Brown Coat) First Floor, Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-14CC Plaster(Brown Coat) Second Floor,Small Bathroom <1%Chrysotile 10438.00231-14DD Plaster(Brown Coat) Third Floor, Housekeeping Closet <1%Chrysotile 10438.00231-14EE Plaster(Brown Coat) Third Floor,Bathroom <1%Chrysotile 10438.00231-15 Plaster(Type 11) First Floor,Room 102 25%Cellulose 10438.00231-14A Plaster(White Smooth Coat) First Floor,Stairwell to Basement Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-14B Plaster(White Smooth Coat) First Floor, Bathroom 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-14C Plaster(White Smooth Coat) Second Floor,Small Bathroom 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-14D Plaster(White Smooth Coat) Third Floor,Housekeeping Closet 2%Cellulose 10438.00231-14E Plaster(White Smooth Coat) Third Floor,Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-25A Red Paper under Hardwood Floors Third Floor,Housekeeping Closet 2%Animal Hair 10438.00231-25B Red Paper under Hardwood Floors Third Floor,Front Closet 2%Animal Hair 10438.00231-01AA Rough Ceiling Patched Area Basement,Trunk Room(Water Meter) 30%Cellulose T/tursikv, Fehrtrarl, IS,2001 Pagge 3 of 4 10438.00231-03CC(2) 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile(Mastic) First Floor,Front Living Room 8%Animal Hair 10438.00231-04A Black Felt under 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile First Floor,Rear Living Room 30%Cellulose 10438.00231-04B Black Felt under 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile First Floor, Front Living Room 3%Animal Hair 10438.00231-04C Black Felt under 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile First Floor, Front Living Room Trace Animal Hair 10438.00231-19 Black Felt under Light Brown Linoleum Second Floor,Back Stairwell 30%Cellulose 10438.00231-23AA Brown Glue on Cove base Second Floor,Large Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-23BB Brown Glue on Cove base Second Floor,Small Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-23CC Brown Glue on Cove base Third Floor,Bathroom Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-26A Brown Rubber Stair tread First Floor, Front Stairwell Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-23A Cove base Second Floor,Large Bathroom 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-23B Cove base Second Floor,Small Bathroom 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-23C Cove base Third Floor,Bathroom 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-24A Cove base First Floor, Bathroom 100%Non-Fibrous 10438.00231-02 Debris above Wood Ceiling Basement,by Gas Hot Water Heater Trace Animal Hair 10438.00231-21AA Glue Holding Wallboard Second Floor,Bathroom 2%Cellulose 10438.00231-21 BB Glue Holding Wallboard Second Floor,Kitchenette 1%Cellulose 10438.00231-21 CC Glue Holding Wallboard Third Floor,Bathroom 5%Cellulose 10438.00231-16 Gray(Pebble Design)Linoleum First Floor, Bathroom 20%Cellulose 10438.00231-27AA Light Brown Glue on Stair tread Second Floor,Front Stairwell to Third Floor Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-27A Light Brown Rubber Stair tread Second Floor,Front Stairwell to Third Floor Trace Cellulose 10438.00231-06 Paper Ceiling First Floor, Front Closet 90%Cellulose 10438.00242-01 Paper under Clapboards Exterior,Northwest side of building,Lounge Ar 90%Cellulose ='. _.._ ,._ _ . _ _ Page 2 of 4 Thursrlgp, Febrsaq 15,2001 W Asbestos and Non Asbestos Materials Session Annex 455 Asbestos Contaning No Sample Number Material type Sample Location Result 92AO0213(SA-08) 1'x 1'Ceiling Tile Second Floor, Kitchenette 40-50%Cellulose 10438.00231-17A 1'x 1'Ceiling Tiles Second Floor,Kitchenette 40%Cellulose 10438.00231-17B 1'x 1'Ceiling Tiles Second Floor, Kitchenette 40%Cellulose 92AO0210(SA-05) 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile First Floor, Bathroom 40-50%Cellulose 92AO0211 (SA-06) 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile Second Floor,Bathroom 40-50%Cellulose 92AO0212(SA-07) 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile Third Floor,Bathroom 40-50%Cellulose 10438.00231-10A 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type 1) First Floor, Bathroom 30%Cellulose 10438.00231-10B 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type 1) First Floor, Large Bathroom 40%Cellulose 10438.00231-10C 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type 1) First Floor,Small Bathroom 35%Cellulose 10438.00231-09A 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type 11) First Floor, Room 101 40%Cellulose 10438.00231-09B 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type II) First Floor, Room 101 40%Cellulose 10438.00231-09C 2'x 4'Ceiling Tile(Type 11) First Floor,Room 102 35%Cellulose 10438.00231-03AA 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile(Mastic) First Floor, Rear Living Room 2%Cellulose 10438.00231-03BB 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile(Mastic) First Floor,Front Living Room Trace Animal Hair 10438.00231-03BB(2) 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile(Mastic) First Floor,Front Living Room 5%Animal Hair 10438.00231-03CC 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile(Mastic) First Floor, Front Living Room Trace Animal Hair TlarursdaY, February 15,2001 Page 1 of 4 10438.00221-01C Silver Paint Asphalt Roof-Center NA/PS 92A00207(SA-02) Thermal Pipe Insulation Basement,At Tank Area 40-50%Chrysotile 10438.00231-20A Yellow/Brown(Pebble Design)Linoleum Second Floor,Kitchenette 12%Chrysotile 10438.00231-2013 Yellow/Brown(Pebble Design)Linoleum Second Floor,Small Bathroom NAPS Paae 2 of 2 Thzirsda-s-, r-ebriiaq 15,2001 Asbestos and Non Asbestos Materials Session Annex 455 Asbestos Contarring Yes Sample Number Material type Sample Location Result 10438.00231-03A 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile First Floor, Rear Living Room 3.8%Chrysotile 10438.00231-03B 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile First Floor,Front Living Room NAPS 10438.00231-03C 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile First Floor,Front Living Room NAPS 92AO0209(SA-04) Aircell Pipr Insulation Basement,At Tank Area 70-80%Chrysotile 10438.00221-04A Black Flashing Roof-South East Side 12%Chrysotile 10438.00221-04B Black Flashing Roof-North East Side NAPS 10438.00221-04C Black Flashing Roof-South Center NAPS 10438.00231-18A Brown Glue Daub under 1'x 1'Ceiling Tiles Second Floor,Kitchenette 3%Chrysotile 10438.00231-1813 Brown Glue Daub under 1'x 1'Ceiling Tiles Second Floor,Kitchenette NAPS 92AO0206(SA-01) Cement Fitting Insulation Basement,Trunk Storage Room 40-50%Chrysotile 10438.00231-22 Gray(Square Design)Linoleum Second Floor,Room 203 Closet 15%Chrysotile 10438.00231-07A Light Brown(Square Design)Linoleum First Floor,Kitchenette Area 15%Chrysotile 10438.00231-07B Light Brown(Square Design)Linoleum Second Floor,Back Stairwell NA/PS 92AO0208(SA-03) Paper Pipe Wrap Basement,Southeast Corner of Basement 70-80%Chrysotile 10438.00221-01A Silver Paint Asphalt Roof-West Side 5%Chrysotile 10438.00221-01 B Silver Paint Asphalt Roof-South East Side NAPS Tl:irrstli y, February IS,2001 Page 1 of 2 Smith College Sessions Annex Asbestos containing materials Location Type of material Quantity Basement(Throughout) Pipe insulation 15 Liner Feet First Floor Front Hall and Entry Front Closet 9"x 9"Brown Floor Tile 1,024 Square Feet Front Living Room op Rear Living Room Hallway to Typing Room On Front Stairs tw First Floor Typing Room Kitchenette Light Brown(Square Design)Linoleum 400 Square Feet Back Stairwell Housekeeping Closet First Floor Gray(Pebble Design)Linoleum(Neg.) Bathroom* Above 90 Square Feet Light Brown (Square Design)Linoleum Second Floor 80 Square Feet Back Stairwell Light Brown(Square Design) Linoleum Second Floor Small Bathroom* Yellow/Brown (Pebble Design)Linoleum 250 Square Feet Large Bathroom* Asbestos flooring underneath Kitchenette Second Floor Brown Glue Daubs above V x V Ceiling 40 Square Feet Kitchenette* Tiles Second Floor Gray(Square Design)Linoleum 20 Square Feet Room 203 Closet Third Floor Yellow/Brown(Pebble Design)Linoleum 120 Square Feet Bathroom* Asbestos flooring underneath Third Floor 80 Square Feet w Back Stairwell Light Brown(Square Design)Linoleum Third Floor Gray(Square Design) Linoleum 30 Square Feet Kitchenette Area Notes: -Asbestos flooring under shower stalls -All Quantities are estimated Sessions Annex Building Materials not tested as of 2/15/01 • Gaskets on piping in Basement This survey was not a demo survey, due to the building being occupied and the damage it would cause. Take extra care when opening up wall(s) and/or ceiling(s) during demo. If unknown material is found, contact Smith College PP EH&S at ext. 2458. Note: If a material is found and is not on the following lists call Smith College PP EH&S at 2458 for testing , Asbestos and Lead Survey Reports for Sessions Annex 40 20072 C 0 - pN FDN 00ST2 200ST2 UP 03 °n 9 201 202 304 5 4 10 303A Xx" X a 3007 20071 200K H.K. 300J i 203 305 3 i 203A 305A 300K 00ST1 D KITCHENETTE 3 t 200 � � 203C 2038 DN 204A C ' 302A 301A t 200ST1 t e t s m ° 204 301 N O € 205 2 302 1 205A 8 1 THIRD FLOOR PLAN ROOM NUMBER LEGEND SECOND FLOOR PLAN C011 SESSIONS ANNEX 204 NEW ROOM NUMBER ^ �� SECOND & THIRD FLOOR PLANS DRAWING NO. 2 PREVIOUS ROOM NUMBER SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" OG ,ylb DRAWN BY:CAO REV. BY: 455-23 NDE9 DATE: 11/18/96 DATE: i F10-2-Al 1028 3 w 102 t00ST2 UP UP z j I I w 5 SPRINKLER � g� ROOM Y 9 STORAGE AREA � 1007 XIOIA 1078 CRAWL SPACE C 701 BATH ROOM t00LA REAR LIVING ROOM STORAGE AREA 100571 CRAWL FRONT SPACE Fl-00--p-1 H ALL PARLOR tool- FRONT UP LIVING ROOM TRUNK STORAGE ROOM NUMBER LEGEND 101 NEW ROOM NUMBER C ENTRY A PREVIWS ROOM NUMBER BASEMENT FLOOR FIRST FLOO COl O SESSIONS ANNEX 0 BASEMENT & FIRST FLOORS DRAWING NO. h SCALE: 1/8"=I'—O" OG ���~ DRAWN BY:CAO REV. BY: 455-01 NDE9 DATE: 11/14/96 1 DATE: Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm) Condltion Notes 595 131 Floor Lounge Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 29.0 Fair 596 151 Floor Lounge White Wood Baseboard 5.1 Fair 597 1st Floor Lounge White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 598 1st Floor Lounge White Plaster Ceiling 29.0 Fair 599 1 st Floor Lounge White Wood Small Arch Frame 29.0 Good 600 1st Floor Lounge White Wood Small Arch Wall Panel 11.0 Good 601 151 Floor Lounge White Wood Double Door Frame 3.3 Good 602 151 Floor Lounge White Wood Double Door 5.6 Fair 603 1st Floor Lounge Brown Stained Wood Double Door Threshold 0.1 Poor 604 151 Floor Lounge White Metal Radiator 0.0 Fair 605 1st Floor Lounge Brown Wood Radiator Pad 0.0 Fair 606 1st Floor Lounge White Wood Window Shelf&Support 5.3 Fair 607 1st Floor Lounge White Wood Window 4.2 Fair All Components 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 Page 19 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination 5mltn uoilege Sessions Annex Northampton, Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm2) Condition Notes 562 1 s`Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Door 21.0 Good 563 1 S`Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Small Arch Frame 26.0 Good 564 1 S`Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Small Arch Wall Panel 7.8 Good 565 1St Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Stair Under Pan 19.0 Good 566 1St Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Drawer 23.0 Good 567 151 Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 568 15t Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Baseboard 4.2 Fair 569 1st Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 570 1 St Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Decorative Upper Trim 5.4 Good 571 1 St Floor-Entry Way Closet White Plaster Wall 31.0 Poor 572 1 S`Floor-Entry Way Closet White Wood Shelf Support 16.0 Good 573 1St Floor-Entry Way Closet White Wood Shelf 15.0 Fair 574 1t1 Floor-Entry Way Closet White Metal Closet Rod 0.0 Good 575 151 Floor-Entry Way Closet White Wood Chair Rail 41.0 Fair 576 1 St Floor-Entry Way Closet White Wood Lower Wall Panel 38.0 Fair 577 15f Floor-Entry Way Closet White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 578 151 Floor-Entry Way Closet White Metal Pipe 0.0 Fair 579 151 Floor-Entry Way Closet White Wood Door Frame 5.1 Fair 560 1St Floor-Entry Way Closet White Wood Door 20.0 Fair 581 it Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Stair Riser 22.0 Fair 582 15t Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Stair Stringer 20.0 Good 583 1 S`Floor-Front Stairs Brown Stained Wood Newel Post 0.0 Fair 584 1st Floor-Front Stairs Brown Stained Wood Top Rail 0.0 Fair 585 15t Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Baluster 21.0 Fair 586 1 St Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Lower Rail 33.0 Fair 587 1 St Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Lower Wall Panel 26.0 Fair 588 1 St Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Small Arch Frame 24.0 Good 589 1 St Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Small Arch Wall Panel 9.1 Fair 590 1 St Floor-Front Stairs Tan Flowered Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.1 Good 591 1 St Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Decorative Upper Trim 1.9 Good 592 1 St Floor-Front Stairs White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 593 15`Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Large Upper Trim 20.0 Good 594 1s`Floor-Front Stairs White Wood Baseboard 26.0 Fair Page 18 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northampton, assachuse s Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/Cm2) Condition Notes 529 1 at Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Folding Double Door 5.1 Fair 530 15t Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Folding Double Door Frame 31.0 Fair 531 15t Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Transom 0.0 Good 532 151 Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Folding Double Door 12.0 Good 533 1s`Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Folding Double Door Frame 43.0 Good 534 1st Floor-Front Living Room Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 535 1"Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Chair Rail 42.0 Fair 536 1st Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Lower Wall Panel 40.0 Fair 537 1st Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Window 29.0 Good All Components 538 1 at Floor-Front Living Room White Metal Radiator 3.8 Good 539 1 at Floor-Front Living Room Brown Wood Radiator Pad 0.0 Good 540 it Floor-Front Living Room White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 541 15t Floor-Front Living Room White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 542 1st Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Decorative Upper Trim 3.5 Good 543 1 at Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Fireplace Mantle 33.0 Good 544 1 s`Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Fireplace Trim 29.0 Good 545 1 at Floor-Front Living Room Tan Ceramic Tile Fireplace Hearth 48.0 Good 546 1st Floor-Front Living Room Tan Narrow Brick Fireplace 41.0 Good 547 1st Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Bookcase 0.0 Good 548 1 s`Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Arch Frame 39.0 Good 549 1 at Floor-Front Living Room White Metal Pipe 0.0 Good 550 1st Floor-Front Living Room White Wood Window 24.0 Good Fixed 551 1 at Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way Tan Flowered Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 552 1 at Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Arch Frame 41.0 Good 553 1 at Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Chair Rail 27.0 Good 554 1 at Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Lower Wall Panel 42.0 Good 555 1st Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Metal Radiator 0.2 Good 556 1 at Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way Brown Wood Radiator Pad 0.0 Fair 557 is'Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Double Door Frame 23.0 Good 558 15t Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Metal Electrical Box 0.1 Good 559 15f Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Double Door 0.0 Good 560 15t Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way Gray Wood Double Door Threshold 7.9 Poor 561 1"Floor-Front Hall/Entry Way White Wood Door Frame 21.0 Good Page 17 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm2) Condition Notes 496 1"Floor Bathroom Yellow Pressboard Wall 0.0 Good 497 1"Floor Bathroom Yellow Metal Wall Heater 0.0 Good 498 1st Floor Bathroom Yellow Wood Window Casing,Apron,Stops,Sash 0.0 Good 499 1s'Floor Hallway Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 3.7 Good 500 1s`Floor Hallway White Wood Baseboard 2.6 Fair 501 1"Floor Hallway White Wood Door Casing 30.0 Good 502 1st Floor Hallway White Wood Door 28.0 Good 503 1"Floor Hallway White Metal Radiator 0.1 Good 504 1 st Floor Hallway Brown Wood Radiator Pad 0.0 Good 505 1"Floor Hallway White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 506 1't Floor Hallway White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 507 1st Floor Hallway White Metal Electrical Box 0.1 Good 508 1s'Floor Hallway White Wood Double Door 4.8 Good Small 509 1st Floor Hallway White Wood Double Door Frame 3.8 Good Small 510 1st Floor-Rear Living Room Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 511 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Baseboard 28.0 Fair 512 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Lower Wall Panel 36.0 Fair 513 1 s`Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Small Double Door 0.1 Good 514 1s'Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Small Double Door Frame 0.1 Good 515 1S`Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Fireplace Mantle 0.1 Good 516 1 St Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Fireplace Trim 0.2 Good 517 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room Red Narrow Brick Fireplace 0.0 Good 518 1st Floor-Rear Living Room Red Narrow Brick Fireplace Hearth 0.2 Good 519 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Door Frame 37.0 Good 520 1s'Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Door 23.0 Good 521 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Window 5.1 Fair All Components 522 1 s`Floor-Rear Living Room White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 523 1S`Floor-Rear Living Room White Plaster Ceiling -0.4 Good 524 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Decorative Upper Trim 17.0 Good 525 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room White Metal Radiator 1.8 Good 526 1 st Floor-Rear Living Room Brown Wood Radiator Pad 0.0 Good 527 1st Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Louvre Double Door 0.0 Good 528 1"Floor-Rear Living Room White Wood Louvre Double Door Frame 15.0 Good Page 16 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northarrigtoo, Massachusett s Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm2) Condition Notes 463 Basement Trunk Room Black Metal Sewer Pipe 0.0 Fair 464 Basement Trunk Room White Brick Wall 0.0 Good 465 Basement Trunk Room White Metal Pipe 0.4 Good 466 Basement Trunk Room White Wood Crawispace Window Frame 2.7 Good 467 Basement Trunk Room Gray Metal Steam Trap 0.0 Good 468 15'Floor Typing Room Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wail 0.0 Good 469 15'Floor Typing Room White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Apron 0.0 Good 470 1 s`Floor Typing Room White Wood Window Stops 27.0 Fair 471 1 St Floor Typing Room Silver Metal Radiator 0.0 Good 472 1 S'Floor Typing Room White Metal Conduit 0.1 Good 473 1 s`Floor Typing Room Tan Metal Conduit 0.1 Good 474 1St Floor Typing Room White Wood Shelf Support 0.0 Good 475 1 St Floor Typing Room White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Good 476 1 S'Floor Typing Room White Wood Door 30.0 Poor 477 1 S'Floor Typing Room White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 478 1 S'Floor Typing Room White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 479 Is'Floor Kitchenette Multi-Color Flower/Leaf Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 480 1st Floor Kitchenette White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Good 481 1St Floor Kitchenette White Wood Chair Rail 0.0 Good 482 1 st Floor Kitchenette White Wood Door 0.0 Good 483 1St Floor Kitchenette Brown Stained Wood Threshold 0.0 Fair 484 1"Floor Kitchenette White Wood Shelf Support 0.0 Good 485 Vt Floor Kitchenette White Wood Wail Panel 0.0 Good 486 1 St Floor Kitchenette White Metal Upper Cabinet 0.0 Good 487 1St Floor Kitchenette White Metal Lower Cabinet 0.0 Good 488 1 St Floor Kitchenette Silver Metal Radiator 0.4 Good 489 15'Floor Kitchenette White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Apron 0.1 Good 490 1 St Floor Kitchenette White Wood Window Stops 21.0 Good 491 15'Floor Kitchenette White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 492 1S'Floor Kitchenette White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 493 1St Floor Bathroom Yellow Wallpapered Sheetrock Wall 0.1 Good 494 1S1 Floor Bathroom Yellow Wood Towel Rack 0.0 Good 495 1S2 Floor Bathroom White Metal Toilet Stall 0.0 Good Page 15 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusett s Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mglcm2 Conditlon Notes 430 Basement-Storage Area White Metal Lolly Column 0.1 Poor 431 Basement-Storage Area White Metal Pipe 0.0 Poor 432 Basement-Storage Area Green Metal Tank 0.2 Poor 433 Basement-Storage Area Gray Metal Condensate Tank 0.1 Fair 434 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Ceiling 0.1 Fair 435 Basement-Storage Area Gray Metal Gas Meter 0.3 Good 436 Basement-Storage Area Red Brick Wall 0.0 Good Splattered 437 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Basement Domed Window Sash 1.7 Good 438 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Basement Domed Window Frame 5.1 Good 439 Basement-Storage Area White Stone Fireplace Support 0.5 Good 440 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Large Basement Window Sash 2.1 Good 441 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Large Basement Window Frame 2.4 Fair 442 Basement-Storage Area White Fiberboard Basement Window Filler 0.0 Good 443 Basement-Storage Area Gray Cement Floor 0.1 Fair 444 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Double Door 5.1 Good 445 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Double Door Frame 14.0 Good 446 Basement-Storage Area White Metal Washer Drain Pipe 0.0 Fair 447 Basement-Storage Area White Metal Ceiling Panel 0.3 Good 448 Basement-Storage Area White Block Wall 0.0 Good 449 Basement-Storage Area Brown Metal Water Heater 0.1 Good 450 Basement-Storage Area Yellow Metal Water Heater 0.0 Good 451 Basement Bathroom Gray Cement Floor 0.2 Poor 452 Basement Bathroom Yellow Brick Wail 0.0 Fair 453 Basement Bathroom Yellow Block Wail 0.0 Fair 454 Basement Bathroom Yellow Metal Ceiling 12.0 Good 455 Basement Bathroom Gray Wood Ceiling 0.0 Poor 456 Basement Bathroom Yellow Wood Wall Board 5.1 Fair 457 Basement Bathroom White Wood Swinging Door 0.0 Poor 458 Basement Trunk Room White Plaster Ceiling -0.5 Good Rough 459 Basement Trunk Room White Plaster Wail 0.0 Good 460 Basement Trunk Room White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 461 Basement Trunk Room Red Metal Sprinkler Pipe 1 0.1 Good 462 Basement Trunk Room Black Metal Conduit Support 1 0.1 Good Page 14 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northampton, Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mglcm') Condition Notes 397 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Fair 398 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Wood Door 23.0 Fair 399 Basement-Storage Area Gray Wood Shelf&Supports 0.9 Poor 400 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Basement Window Sash 0.0 Poor 401 Basement-Storage Area Black Wood Basement Window Frame 0.2 Poor 402 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Storm Window 16.0 Good Stored 403 Basement-Storage Area Gray Wood Ceiling 16.0 Poor 404 Basement-Storage Area White Brick Column 0.0 Fair 405 Basement-Storage Area Gray Metal Electrical Box 0.1 Fair 406 Basement-Storage Area Gray Wood Electrical Box Board 0.0 Fair 407 Basement-Storage Area Yellow Metal Heat Timer 0.2 Good 408 Basement-Storage Area Green Metal Load Transfer Control Box 0.0 Good 409 Basement-Storage Area Gray Wood Telephone Box Board 2.6 Fair 410 Basement-Storage Area Black Wood Fiber Optic Box Board 0.0 Fair 411 Basement-Storage Area Gray Metal Fiber Optic Box 0.0 Good 412 Basement-Storage Area Black Metal Fiber Optic Support 0.0 Fair 413 Basement-Storage Area Red Wood Wicker Basket 0.1 Good 414 Basement-Storage Area Brown Stained Wood Basement Window Domed Sash 0.1 Poor 415 Basement-Storage Area Off-White Wood Basement Window Domed Frame 0.0 Poor 416 Basement-Storage Area Gray Wood Beam 0.0 Poor 417 Basement-Storage Area Red Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 418 Basement-Storage Area White Brick Wall 1.4 Poor 419 Basement-Storage Area White Metal Sewer Pipe 0.0 Poor 420 Basement-Storage Area Black Metal Sewer Pipe 0.0 Fair 421 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Door 28.0 Fair Stored 422 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Pallets 22.0 Fair 423 Basement-Storage Area Yellow Block Wail 0.0 Good 424 Basement-Storage Area Yellow Brick Wall 0.0 Good 425 Basement-Storage Area Blue Metal Hot Water Tank 0.0 Fair 426 Basement-Storage Area Green Metal Valve 0.0 Good 427 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Swinging Door 0.0 1 Fair 428 Basement-Storage Area White Wood Swinging Door Frame 0.0 Fair 429 Basement-Storage Area White Metal I-Beam 1.6 Poor Page 13 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm2) Condition Notes 364 1 St Floor-Room 102 White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Apron,Stops 0.1 Fair 365 1st Floor-Room 102 White Wood Window Sash 1.6 Poor 366 1 st Floor-Room 102 White Wood Window Sill,Apron,Stops,Sash 0.2 Fair 367 1st Floor-Room 102 White Wood Window Casing 0.9 Fair 368 1 St Floor-Room 102-Left Closet White Wood Wall 0.0 Fair 369 1st Floor-Room 102-Left Closet White Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 370 1 st Floor-Room 102-Left Closet White Wood Shelf Support 0.0 Good 371 1 St Floor-Room 102-Left Closet White Wood Shelf 0.0 Good 372 1 st Floor-Room 102-Left Closet White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Good 373 IS'Floor-Room 102-Left Closet Brown Stained Wood Parkay Floor 0.3 Poor 374 1St Floor-Room 102 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Poor Above Dropped Ceiling 375 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Brick Wall -0.7 Poor 376 Basement-Sprinkler Room Gray Wood Ceiling 21.0 Poor 377 Basement-Sprinkler Room Red Wood Fire Extinguisher Box 0.1 Good 378 Basement-Sprinkler Room Gray Wood Wall Board 0.1 Good 379 Basement-Sprinkler Room Black Wood Fire Alarm Panel Board 0.0 Good 380 Basement-Sprinkler Room Tan Metal Fire Alarm Panel 0.0 Good 381 Basement-Sprinkler Room Red Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 382 Basement-Sprinkler Room Black Wood Basement Window Frame 3.5 Poor 383 Basement-Sprinkler Room Gray Wood Wall Board 0.1 Fair 384 Basement-Sprinkler Room Red Metal Sprinkler Parts Box 0.3 Good 385 Basement-Sprinkler Room Gray Metal Air Pump 0.0 Good 386 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Metal Lolly Column 0.0 Poor 387 Basement-Sprinkler Room Brown Wood Stair Tread 0.2 Poor 388 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Wood Stair Riser 15.0 Poor 389 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Wood Stair Stringer 0.0 Poor 390 Basement-Sprinkler Room Brown Wood Newel Post 0.0 Fair 391 Basement-Sprinkler Room Brown Wood Top Rail 0.1 Fair 392 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Wood Basement Window Sash 0.0 Fair 393 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Wood Basement Window Frame 0.3 Fair 394 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Wood Large Wail Trim 0.0 Fair 395 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Plaster Wail 0.0 Fair 396 Basement-Sprinkler Room White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Fair Page 12 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northampton. Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination mgicm2) Condition Notes 331 2nd Floor-Room 205 White Wood Door Frame 19.0 Fair 332 2nd Floor-Room 205 White Wood Door 1.3 Good 333 2" Floor-Room 205 White Wood Baseboard 26.0 Good 334 2"d Floor-Room 205 Brown Stained Wood Parkay Floor 0.3 Fair 335 2nd Floor-Room 205 Tan Metal Conduit 0.3 Good 336 2nd Floor-Room 205 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 337 2"d Floor-Room 205 White Wood Upper Trim 0.0 Good 338 2nd Floor-Room 205 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good Rough 339 2"d Floor-Room 205 White Wood Window Casing,Apron,Stop,Sash 25.0 Poor 340 2nd Floor-Room 205 White Wood Window Sill 0.2 Poor 341 2nd Floor-Room 205 Silver Metal Radiator Cover 0.0 Poor 342 2"d Floor-Room 205 Silver Metal Radiator 0.0 Poor 343 2nd Floor-Room 205 Gray Wood Threshold 26.0 Poor 344 15t Floor-Room 101 Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Fair 345 1 St Floor-Room 101 White Wood Door Frame 0.1 Fair 346 1 St Floor-Room 101 White Wood Door 32.0 Fair 347 1St Floor-Room 101 White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Good 348 1 St Floor-Room 101 Brown Stained Wood Parkay Floor 0.2 Fair 349 1St Floor-Room 101 White Metal Wall Access Panel 0.0 Fair 350 1St Floor-Room 101 White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Stops,Sash 13.0 Fair 351 1 St Floor-Room 101 White Wood Window Apron 0.0 Fair 352 1f1 Floor-Room 101 White Metal Baseboard Heater 0.0 Good 353 15t Floor-Room 101-Left Closet Off-White Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 354 151 Floor-Room 101-Left Closet Off-White Wood Shelf Support 0.0 Good 355 1s1 Floor-Room 101-Left Closet Off White Wood Shelf 0.0 Good 356 1s1 Floor-Room 101-Left Closet Off-White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Good 357 1St Floor-Room 101 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Poor Above Dropped Ceiling 358 1 st Floor-Room 102 White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Fair 359 1st Floor-Room 102 White Wood Door 0.0 Fair 360 1St Floor-Room 102 Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Fair 361 1 St Floor-Room 102 White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Fair 362 1 St Floor-Room 102 Brown Stained Wood Parkay Floor 0.4 Fair 363 1 St Floor-Room 102 Silver Metal Radiator 8.8 Fair Page 11 A TC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northarngton, Massachusetts Sample XRF Result Sample Testing Combination (mg/ern ) Condition Notes No.298 2n°Floor-Room 203 White Wood Baseboard 0.4 Fair 299 2n°Floor-Room 203 Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.1 Poor 300 2nd Floor-Room 203 Silver Metal Radiator Cover 0.1 Poor 301 2"°Floor-Room 203 Silver Metal Radiator 0.2 Fair 302 2nd Floor-Room 203 White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 303 2"d Floor-Room 203 White Wood Window 11.0 Fair All Components 304 2nd Floor-Room 203 White Wood Upper Trim 0.2 Fair 305 2nd Floor-Room 203 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Fair 306 2nd Floor-Room 203 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 307 2nd Floor-Room 203 Off-White Metal Pipe 0.0 Fair 308 2nd Floor-Room 203 Tan Metal Conduit 0.2 Good 309 2nd Floor--Room 203-Open Closet Tan Wallpapered Plaster Wall 28.0 Fair 310 2nd Floor-Room 203-Open Closet White Wood Shelf Support 0.0 Fair 311 2nd Floor-Room 203-Open Closet White Wood Shelf 0.0 Fair 312 2"d Floor-Room 203-Open Closet White Wood Door Frame 10.0 Fair 2" 313 d Floor-Room 203-Open Closet White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 314 2nd Floor-Room 204 Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Fair 315 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Wood Door Frame 22.0 Fair 316 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Wood Door 24.0 Fair 317 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Wood Baseboard 26.0 Fair 318 2nd Floor-Room 204 Brown Stained Wood Parkay Floor 0.5 Fair 319 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Wood Fireplace Mantle 22.0 Poor 320 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Wood Fireplace Trim 22.0 Fair 321 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Wood Fireplace Filler 9.2 Good 322 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Wood Window 8.7 Poor All Components 323 2nd Floor-Room 204 Silver Metal Radiator Cover 0.0 Poor 324 2nd Floor-Room 204 Silver Metal Radiator 0.1 Poor 325 2nd Floor-Room 204 Off-White Wood Radiator Pad 5.1 Poor 326 2nd Floor-Room 204 Tan Metal Conduit 0.1 Good 327 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 328 2nd Floor-Room 204 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Fair Rough 329 2"d Floor-Room 204 White Wood Upper Trim 0.0 Fair 330 2nd Floor-Room 205 Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Fair Page 10 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm2 Condition Notes 265 2nd Floor-Room 202 Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Fair 266 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Wood Door Frame 0.1 Fair 267 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Wood Door 30.0 Poor 268 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Fair 269 2" Floor-Room 202 Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Poor 270 2" Floor-Room 202 Tan Metal Conduit 0.2 Good 271 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 272 2"d Floor-Room 202 White Wood Window Frame 0.0 Poor Fixed 273 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Wood Window Sash 24.0 Poor Fixed 274 2nd Floor-Room 202 Silver Metal Radiator 0.1 Poor 275 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Apron,Stops 0.1 Poor 276 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Wood Window Sash 28.0 Poor 277 2nd Floor-Room 202 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 278 2"d Floor-Room 202 White Wood Upper Trim 0.0 Good 279 2nd Floor-Room 201 Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall -0.5 Good 280 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Door Frame 25.0 Good 281 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Door 18.0 Fair 282 2n°Floor-Room 201 White Wood Baseboard 2.2 Fair 283 2nd Floor-Room 201 Tan Metal Conduit 0.2 Good 284 2" Floor-Room 201 White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 285 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Access Door 14.0 Fair 286 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Access Door Frame 0.1 Fair 287 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 288 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Upper Trim 0.0 Good 289 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 290 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Window 30.0 Poor All Components 291 2n°Floor-Room 201 Silver Metal Radiator 0.0 Poor 292 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Apron,Stops 0.2 Fair Large Window 293 2nd Floor-Room 201 White Wood Window Sash 3.5 Poor Large Window 294 2nd Floor-Room 201 Brown Stained Wood Parkay Floor 0.4 Good 295 2nd Floor-Room 203 Off-White Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 296 2nd Floor-Room 203 White Wood Door Frame 35.0 Fair 297 2n°Floor-Room 203 White Wood Door 25.0 Fair Page 9 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northamr)ton, Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/ern) Condition Notes 232 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Plaster Wall -0.4 Good 233 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Plaster Ceiling -0.1 Good 234 3'd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Good 235 Yd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Good 236 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Door 0.1 Fair 237 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 238 3rd Floor-Room 303 Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Poor 239 3`d Floor-Room 303 Tan Metal Conduit 0.2 Fair 240 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Window Sill,Apron,Casing 0.0 Good 241 Yd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Window Stops 10.0 Poor 242 3`d Floor-Room 303 White Metal Window Sash 5.1 Poor 243 3rd Floor-Room 303 Silver Metal Radiator 0.1 Poor 244 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Window 0.0 Fair All Components 245 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Small Door 0.0 Good 246 3rd Floor-Room 303 White Wood Small Door Frame 0.2 Good 247 Yd Floor-Room 303-Closet White Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 246 3rd Floor-Room 303-Closet White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 249 Yd Floor-Room 303-Closet White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 250 Yd Floor-Room 303-Closet White Wood Shelf 0.0 Good 251 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 252 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 253 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Door Frame 0.2 Good 254 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Door 0.1 Good 255 3` Floor-Room 304 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 256 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Baseboard 0.4 Good 257 3rd Floor-Room 304 Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Poor 258 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 259 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Window Sill,Casing 0.4 Good 260 Yd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Window Apron 1.5 Good 261 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Window Stops 10.0 Poor 262 Yd Floor-Room 304 White Metal Radiator 0.2 Fair 263 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Small Door 0.2 Good 264 3rd Floor-Room 304 White Wood Small Door Frame 0.1 Good Page 8 ATC Associates, Inc. 6 111 i4 1 # l I iZ i 1 # 1 # I Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northamgton. Massachuseft, Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination mg/cm= Condition Notes 199 3m Floor-Room 301-Closet Off--White Wood Shelf 0.0 Good 200 3 Floor-Room 301-Closet White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 201 3 rd Floor-Room 301-Closet White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 202 3m Floor-Room 301-Closet Off-White Wood Baseboard 0.1 Good 203 3 Floor-Room 301-Closet Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Poor 204 3rd Floor-Room 305 Off-White Plaster Wall 0.2 Good 205 3`d Floor-Room 305 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 206 3fd Floor-Room 305 White Metal Conduit 0.1 Good 207 3rd Floor-Room 305 White Wood Baseboard 0.2 Good 208 3`°Floor-Room 305 White Wood Door Frame 0.2 Good 209 3rd Floor-Room 305 White Wood Door 0.2 Good 210 Yd Floor--Room 305 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Poor 211 3`d Floor-Room 305 Silver Metal Radiator 1.6 Poor 212 P Floor-Room 305 White Wood Window Sill,Apron 0.0 Fair E 213 3'd Floor-Room 305 White Wood Window Casing 6.3 Poor fff 214 3rd Floor-Room 305 White Wood Shelf 0.0 Good - 215 3 Floor-Room 305 White Wood Window 6.2 Fair All Components 216 Yd Floor-Room 302 White Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 217 3'd Floor-Room 302 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 218 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Wood Baseboard 19.0 Fair 219 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Plaster Ceiling 0.1 Good 220 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Wood Ceiling Access Panel 0.6 Good 221 3 -Floor-Room 302 White Wood Ceiling Access Panel Frame 1.5 Fair 222 3rd Floor-Room 302 Tan Metal Conduit 0.2 Good 223 3`d Floor-Room 302 White Wood Window Casing 1.2 Good 224 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Wood Window Sill 1.9 Fair 225 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Wood Window Apron 1.3 Good 226 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Wood Window Sash 0.0 Good 227 3r0 Floor-Room 302 Silver Metal Radiator 0.1 Good 228 3`d Floor-Room 302 Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Poor 229 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Wood Door 0.1 Good 230 3rd Floor-Room 302 White Wood Door Frame 0.8 Good 231 Yd Floor-Room 302 White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good Page 7 ATC Associates, Inc. 1 Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northamoton. Massachusett s Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm2) Condition Notes 166 2nd Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Pressboard Wall 0.0 Good 187 2nd Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Metal Wall Heater 0.0 Good 168 2nd Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Wood Towel Rack 0.0 Fair 169 2nd Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Wood Window Apron,Casing,Stops 0.0 Fair 170 2"d Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Wood Window Sash 25.0 Poor 171 2nd Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Metal Wall Access Panel 0.0 Fair 172 2nd Floor Large Bathroom White Metal Toilet Stall 0.0 Good 173 2nd Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Wood Door Frame 0.0 Fair 174 2" Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Wood Door 21.0 Fair 175 2nd Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.1 Good 176 2nd Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Pressboard Wall 0.0 Poor 177 2nd Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Metal Wall Heater 0.0 Good 178 2nd Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Wood Door Frame 0.1 Fair 179 2"d Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Wood Door 14.0 Poor 180 2nd Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Wood Window Apon,Casing,Stops 0.0 Fair 181 2nd Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Wood Window Sash 3.7 Poor 182 2"d Floor Small Bathroom Yellow Metal Access Panel 0.0 Good 183 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Good 184 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Wood Door 0.1 Good 185 3` 0.0 Good Floor-Room 301 White Metal Conduit 186 3`d 0.0 Good Floor-Room 301 White Plaster Wall 167 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 188 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Wood Bookcase 25.0 Good 189 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Wood Baseboard 20.0 Good 190 3`d Floor-Room 301 Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Poor 191 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 192 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Wood Window Sill,Apron 0.0 Poor 193 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Wood Window Casing 11.0 Poor 194 3`0 Floor-Room 301 White Metal Wind-ow Sash 5.1 Poor 195 3`d Floor-Room 301 Silver Metal Radiator 5.1 Poor 196 3`d Floor-Room 301 White Wood Window 0.1 Fair All Components 197 3`d Floor-Room 301-Closet Off-White Plaster Wail 0.3 Fair 198 3`d Floor-Room 301-Closet Off-White Wood Shelf Support 0.1 Good Page 6 ATC Associates, Inc. l ! 1 it ► l ii i1 it % . Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northarnipton. Massachusetts Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cm2) Condition Notes 133 North Side Stairwell White Wood Door 16.0 Poor To Exterior 134 North Side Stairwell White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Fair To Exterior 135 North Side Stairwell Gray Wood Threshold 6.4 Fair To Exterior 136 2nd Floor Hall Tan Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 137 2,d Floor Hall White Wood Baseboard 28.0 Good 138 2" Floor Hall White Wood Door Frame 0.4 Fair 139 2nd Floor Hall White Wood Door 24.0 Fair 140 2"d Floor Hall White Wood Door Frame 24.0 Fair 141 2nd Floor Hall White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 142 2"d Floor Hall Silver Metal Radiator 0.2 Good 143 2" Floor Hall White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Apron,Stops 0.1 Fair 144 2nd Floor Hall White Wood Window Sash 1.5 Fair 145 2nd Floor Hall Brown Wood Radiator Pad 0.0 Fair 146 2"d Floor Hall White Wood Telephone Board 0.0 Good 147 2nd Floor Hall White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 148 2nd Floor Hail White Wood Double Door Frame 0.6 Fair 149 2" Floor Hall Gray Metal Electrical Box 0.1 Good 150 2nd Floor Hall Brown Stained Wood Threshold 0.0 Fair 151 2"d Floor Hall Brown Stained Wood Newel Post 0.0 Fair 152 2"d Floor Hall Brown Stained Wood Top Rail 0.0 Fair 153 2nd Floor Hall White Wood Baluster 14.0 Good 154 2nd Floor Hall White Wood Lower Rail 23.0 Good 155 2" Floor Hall White Metal Column From Newel Post 2.3 Fair 156 2"d Floor Hall White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Fair 157 2"d Floor Hall White Sheetrock Ceiling 0.1 Good 158 2nd Floor Hall White Wood Decorative Upper Trim 5.1 Good 159 2"d Floor Kitchenette Yellow Wallpapered Plaster Wall 2.5 Good 160 2nd Floor Kitchenette Yellow Pressboard Wall 0.0 Fair 161 2nd Floor Kitchenette Yellow Wood Window Apron,Stops 0.0 Good 162 2nd Floor Kitchenette Yellow Wood Window Casing,Sash 9.0 Fair 163 2nd Floor Kitchenette White Metal Upper Cabinet 0.0 Fair 164 2" Floor Kitchenette White Metal Lower Cabinet 0.0 Fair 165 2nd Floor Large Bathroom Yellow Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good Page 5 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusettt s Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mglcm) Condition Notes 100 3 -Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette Off-White Wood Door Frame 0.1 Fair 101 Yd Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette Off-White Wood Door 0.0 Fair 102 3`d Floor-Stairwell to 2nd Floor(by Kitchenette) Tan Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Fair 103 V Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by K tchenette) Off-White Wood Chair Rail 0.8 Good 104 3m Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by Kitchenette) Brown Stained Wood Hand Rail 0.0 Fair 105 3d Floor-Stairwell to 2nd Floor(by Kitchenette) Off-White Wood Stairs Large Upper Trim 0.0 Fair 106 3'd Floor-Stairwell to 2n°Floor(by Kitchenette) Off-White Wood Stair Stringer 0.1 Fair 107 3rd Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by Kitchenette) Off-White Wood Stair Riser 0.1 Fair 108 3rd Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by Kitchenette) White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Fair 109 3"d Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by Kitchenette) White Plaster Ceiling -0.2 Fair 110 3n°Floor-Stairwell to 2"°Floor(by Kitchenette) White Metal Conduit 0.1 Fair 111 3d Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by Kitchenette) White Wood Lower Rail 0.0 Fair 112 3rd Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by Kitchenette) White Wood Baluster 0.3 Fair 113 3'd Floor-Stairwell to 2nd Floor(by Kitchenette) Brown Stained Wood Top Rail 0.0 Fair 114 3rd Floor-Stairwell to 2"d Floor(by Kitchenette) Brown Stained Wood Newel Post 0.0 Fair 115 North Side Stairwell Tan Wavy Lined Wallpapered Plaster Wall 1.9 Good 116 North Side Stairwell White Piaster Ceiling 2.2 Fair 117 North Side Stairwell White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Good 118 North Side Stairwell White Wood Baseboard 0.0 1 Good 119 North Side Stairwell White Wood Stair Stringer 0.0 Good 120 North Side Stairwell White Wood Window 0.1 Fair 121 North Side Stairwell Brown Stained Wood Baseboard 0.0 Fair 122 North Side Stairwell Brown Stained Wood Stair Stringer 0.0 Fair 123 North Side Stairwell Brown Stained Wood Newel Post 0.0 Fair 124 North Side Stairwell Brown Stained Wood Baluster 0.0 Fair 125 North Side Stairwell Brown Stained Wood Top Rail 0.0 Fair 126 North Side Stairwell Brown Stained Wood Stair Tread 0.0 Fair 127 North Side Stairwell Brown Stained Wood Corner Trim 0.0 Fair 128 North Side Stairwell White Wood Door Frame 0.1 Fair 129 North Side Stairwell White Wood Door 35.0 Fair To 2" Floor 130 North Side Stairwell White Metal Radiator 0.1 Fair 131 North Side Stairwell White Wood Window 7.8 Fair Fixed 132 North Side Stairwell Silver Metal Radiator 0.0 Good Page 4 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusett s Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mg/cros) Condition Notes 67 3'd Floor Hall White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 68 3`d Floor Hall Off-White Wood Bookcase 18.0 Fair 69 3'1 Floor Hall White Wood Small Window Sill 0.4 Poor 70 3`d Floor Hall White Wood Small Window Casing,Stops,Sash 16.0 Poor 71 3'd Floor Hall Off-White Wood Baluster 0.1 Fair 72 3'd Floor Hall Brown Stained Wood Top Rail 0.0 Fair 73 3`d Floor Hall Brown Stained Wood Newel Post 0.1 Fair 74 3`d Floor Hall White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Good 75 3'd Floor Hall Off-White Metal Wall Access Panel 0.0 Good 76 3'd Floor Hall Off-White Wood Towel Rack 0.0 Good 77 3'd Floor Hall Off-White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 78 3`d Floor Hall White Wood Window Sill,Casing,Apron 0.1 Poor 79 3`d Floor Hall White Wood Window Stops 4.9 Fair 80 3`d Floor Hall White Wood Corner Trim 1.0 Good 81 3'd Floor Hall White Plaster Ceiling 2.4 Good Short Ceiling 82 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Plaster Wall 0.0 Fair 83 3`°Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 Fair 84 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Fair 85 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Wood Door 0.2 Fair 86 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Wood Baseboard 0.1 Fair 87 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Wood Upper Chair Rail 0.2 Fair 88 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Fair 89 3'd Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Metal Sewer Pipe 0.0 Good 90 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Poor 91 3`d Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Wood Shelf 2.7 Poor 92 3`O Floor Hall-Housekeeping Closet White Wood Shelf Support 0.1 Good 93 3`d Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette Off-White Plaster Wall 0.0 Poor 94 3`d Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette Off-White Wood Hanger Board 0.0 Fair 95 3'd Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette Off-White Wood Baseboard 0.1 Fair 96 3`d Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Fair 97 3`d Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.0 Fair 98 3`d Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette White Wood Shelf Support 0.0 Fair 99 3`d Floor Hall-Closet by Kitchenette White Plaster Ceiling 0.0 1 Fair Rough Page 3 ATC Associates, Inc. Lead Determination Smith College Sessions Annex Northam ton Massachusett s Sample XRF Result No. Room Testing Combination (mglcm2) Condition Notes 34 Exterior Black Metal Railing 5.9 Good 35 Exterior Gray Wood Double Door 110 Good Exterior Gray Wood Double Door Threshold 11.0 Good P8 37 Wi Exterior Gray Wood Basement ndow Unit 2.1 Fair 3`d Floor Bathroom Yellow Wallpapered Sheetrock Wall 0.1 Good 3rd Floor Bathroom Yellow Pressboard Wall 0.0 Good 40 3`d Floor Bathroom Yellow Wood Window Casing 0.9 Good 41 3rd Floor Bathroom Yellow Wood Window Sash,Stops,Apron 0.0 Good 42 3rd Floor Bathroom Yellow Metal Wall Heater 0.0 Good 43 3`d Floor Bathroom Off-White Metal Toilet Stall 0.0 Fair 44 3rd Floor Bathroom Yellow Metal Window 511 Poor 45 3` Floor Bathroom Yellow Metal Wall Access Panel 0.1 Good 46 3rd Floor Bathroom Yellow Wood Door Frame 0.0 Fair 47 3`d Floor Bathroom Yellow Wood Door 0.1 Fair 48 3rd Floor Kitchenette Tan Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 49 3`d Floor Kitchenette White Wood Skylight Frame 15.0 Fair 50 3rd Floor Kitchenette White Metal Conduit 0.0 Good 51 3rd Floor Kitchenette White Metal Upper Cabinet 0.0 Fair 52 3rd Floor Kitchenette White Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.1 Good 53 3rd Floor Kitchenette White Wood Shelf Support 0.0 Good 54 3rd Floor Kitchenette White Metal Shelf Support 0.0 Good 55 3°d Floor Kitchenette White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Good 56 3rd Floor Kitchenette White Wood Baseboard 0.0 Good Small 57 3rd Floor Kitchenette White Metal Lower Cabinet 0.0 Fair 58 3`d Floor Hall Tan Wallpapered Plaster Wall 0.0 Good 59 3rd Floor Hall Off-White Wood Chair Rail 2.0 Good 60 3rd Floor Hall Off-White Wood Baseboard 2.0 Good B1 3rd Floor Hall Off-White Metal Radiator 0.0 Fair 62 3rd Floor Hall Brown Stained Wood Floor 0.0 Fair 63 3rd Floor Hall Off-White Wood Small Door Frame 0.1 Good 64 3rd Floor Hall Off-White Wood Small Door 20.0 Good 65 3rd Floor Hall Off-White Wood Door Frame 0.0 Fair 66 3`d Floor Hall Off-White Wood Door 0.3 Good Page 2 ATC Associates, Inc. if Lead Determination Smith College i Sessions Annex 1 o a to ach e s {� Sample XRF Result j No. Room Testing Combination (m Cm2) Condition Notes 1 Exterior Off-White Wood Siding 29.0 Fair 2 Exterior Gray Wood Comer Board 6.7 Fair 3 Exterior Gray Wood Lower Trim 24.0 Fair 4 Exterior Off-White Brick Foundation 6.3 Fair 5 Exterior Gray Wood Support Column 27.0 Fair 6 Exterior Gray Wood Top Rail 30.0 Fair 7 Exterior Gray Wood Lower Rail 29.0 Fair 8 Exterior Off-White Wood Baluster 32.0 Fair 9 Exterior White Wood Lower Wall 2.6 Poor 10 Exterior Gray Wood Stair Tread 0.2 Fair i 11 Exterior Gray Wood Stair Riser 3.5 Fair 12 Exterior Gray Wood Porch Floor 1.7 Fair ? 13 Exterior Gray Wood Door Frame 3.3 Fair 14 Exterior Red Wood Door 1.4 Fair ((( 15 Exterior Gray Wood Threshold 1.8 Fair 16 Exterior Gray Wood Beams 27.0 Fair 17 Exterior Off-White Wood Porch Ceiling 22.0 Fair 18 Exterior Off-White Wood Porch Upper Trim 22.0 Fair 19 Exterior Gray Wood Upper Trim 34.0 Fair 20 Exterior Gray Wood Window 32.0 Fair 21 Exterior Gray Metal Window 0.0 Good 22 Exterior Red Metal Sprinkler Pipe 0.5 Fair 23 Exterior Off-White Metal Pipe 0.0 1 Good ( 24 Exterior Off-White Wood Window Filler 3.1 Fair 25 Exterior Gray Metal Bulkhead Door 0.0 Fair 26 Exterior Off-White Wood Bulkhead Frame 0.0 Fair 27 Exterior Off-White Wood Lower Lattice 11.0 Fair 28 Exterior Off-White Wood Upper Lattice 16.0 Fair 29 Exterior Gray 6 Off-White Wall Panels Below Window 25.0 Fair 30 Exterior Off-White Wood Kickplate 24.0 Fair 1 31 Exterior Red Wood Double Door 0.1 Fair 32 Exterior Gray Wood Double Door Frame 29.0 Fair 33 Exterior Gray Wood b Metal Double Door Threshold 1.0 Fair EPage 1 ATC Associates, Inc. w� If you have any questions regarding this inspection or report, or if we can assist you in creating a lead work practice specification, please do not hesitate to contact me at (413) 525-1198. Sincerely, ATC Associates Inc. Steve Dolinski Denis St.Jean Assistant Project Manager Smith College Account Manager 40 fig � r N r. {Iry Y�., r.w a.:.,.r,io....y:.i...:.............c....'..r—a,.ay...w.i. ., _... ..,..r•:k... .�..a/'`.yyi°",1'�`�'^'a"" 39 Spruce Street East Longmeadow, Massachusetts 01028 www.atc-enviro.com 413.525.1198 Fax 413.525.8227 AS S O C I A T E S I N C . +! February 7, 2001 Mr. Rich Korzeniowski Smith College Physical Plant .: 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01063 Re: Lead Based Paint (LBP) Determination Sessions Annex Northampton, Massachusetts ATC Associates Project No. 81-10438-0240 Dear Mr. Korzeniowski: Enclosed please find the LBP determination report for the above referenced building. Analysis of the sample data and visual inspection information indicate that lead containing paint was detected in the above referenced facility. TESTING PROTOCOL All testing was performed utilizing an X-Ray Fluorescence Analyzer (XRF) in accordance with Massachusetts Department of Public Health (DPH) 105 CMR 460 regulations for a lead determination. The instrument was calibrated prior to testing according to manufacturers and Massachusetts Department of Public Health (DPH) procedures. SUb10 RY OF FINDINGS The O.S.H.A. regulations interpret any XRF result over 0.0 mg/cm2 to be lead containing. Lead containing paint was detected in several material applications randomly sampled in the above referenced facility. Please refer to the accompanying lead determination report for the specific surfaces tested. CONCLUSIONS Renovation or demolition work involving lead containing materials would be subject to regulation including the prohibition of certain work practices such as sanding, grinding, or sandblasting. There are additional regulations pertaining to work practice requirements, worker training, medical surveillance, and disposal of lead containing material. If renovations would impact lead containing materials a lead work practice specification should be developed to assure the safe handling of these materials. Pirone,P.P. 1988. Tree Maintenance. 6h edition. Oxford University Press,New York. END OF SECTION as Page 5 Ow 4.10 Topsoil that is to be reinstalled shall be installed to a minimum depth of 6"for lawn areas and V 0"for all planting areas. .w 5. Site Storage,Traffic Flow, and Parking: 5.1 Areas requiring authorization by the Director of the Botanic Garden include field office placement,construction parking,soil stockpiling(in consultation with Foreman of Grounds),haul roads,material storage, chemical and fuel storage, and concrete washout areas. No parking will be permitted on lawns or over tree roots unless the areas have been specially prepared for parking. Fines for parking violations are the responsibility of the contractor and will not be passed on to the College for payment or resolution. " 5.2 In areas of engineered fills,minimum compaction is to be attained if fill is not to support a structure. Storage yard and traffic;areas for construction activity is to be well outside drip lines of trees. Protect soil surface from traffic compaction with 8"layer of bark mulch or wood chips. In extremely sensitive areas use double,overlapping, one-half inch plywood sheets with minimum 6"bark mulch or wood chip covering. Following construction,vertical mulch compacted areas. The Director of the Botanic Garden will define areas requiring mulches,plywood and vertical mulching. The Contractor will properly prepare site as directed prior to staging of equipment or materials. 40 The Contractor is responsible for all expenses associated with compacted soils resulting from construction operations. 5.3 Future planting areas outside fence-protected areas that may be subject to construction traffic,material storage and equipment parking,should be mulched to a minimum depth of 6",with bark mulch or wood chips. 5.4 Pliers,pilings,and posts: Use posts to hold retaining walls upright, and construct walks,porches and buildings on piers where possible to protect root systems. Care must be taken to minimize root compaction between piers. 5.5 Dumping and disposal of waste(paint, oil,fuel, etc.)is prohibited around all trees and shrubs. All construction .w debris is to be removed from the site and disposed of properly. No debris is to be buried on site. 5.6 Run-off from building materials, vehicle cleaning,petroleum products,lime,mortar,calcium chloride,etc.,are to be eliminated in areas of tree and shrub root systems. 5.7 No herbicides(soil sterilants,etc)are to be used on the campus without authorization by the Director of the Botanic Garden. Oft 6. Inspections_ 6.1 Trees and shrubs to remain,protected areas,and future planting areas are to be inspected weekly by the Director an of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. The Contractor is responsible for immediate correction or any deficiencies and responsibly for all associated costs. 7. Penalties: 7.1 The Contractor shall be held liable for all violations of the aforementioned specifications and standards and shall,when necessary,repair or replace,as appropriate,all plans to be preserved and to correct all other deficiencies as determined by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. REFERENCES Anon. 1986. Manual for Plant Appraisers. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Washington,DC. Anon. 1992. Guide for Plant Appraisal. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Washington,DC. Harris, Richard W. 1983. Arboriculture: care of trees, shrubs, and vines in the landscape. Prentice-Hall,Inc., Englewood Cliffs,N7 Page 4 M indicated on boring and test pit data sheets or reasonably anticipated shall be stripped of all such material and fill shall be used to bring such areas to the rough grade level. Sticks, stones, and roots over 2 inches in any dimension shall be removed from topsoil before stockpiling. All other stripped soil which can be classified as fill as defined herein shall be used or stockpiled for re-use in rough grading. The Foreman of Grounds shall define the storage area prior to piling. 3.3 Piles of topsoil shall be located so that the material can be used readily for the finish surface grading but not where root systems of trees and shrubs to be preserved can be compacted by storage piles or equipment. Topsoil shall be protected and maintained during the construction period. 3.4 All unsuitable material as well as logs,stumps,roots,brush,and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of by the Contractor as soon as practicable following the cutting,clearing,or grubbing thereof. 4. Grade Changes and Excavations: 4.1 The Director of the Botanic Garden must approve the location of all utility and irrigation lines prior to bidding Ak and again prior to installation. 4.2 The Contractor shall coordinate utility trench locations with installation contractors. Consolidate utility trenches whenever possible. Excavate trenches by hand in areas with roots larger than 1". Tunnel under plant roots larger than 2"in diameter. 4.3 A trench can be mechanically dug toward a tree to its drip line or one-third of the tree's height from the trunk, whichever is greater. The trench should be continued by hand until significantly large roots(determined by Botanic Garden representative)are encountered or a distance indicated by the chart specifications(Toronto specifications- see Harris, 1983)is reached,whichever is less. Tunneling should continue under the central root system to reach the trench at the other side. Depth of the tunnel will vary but should be below the major zone of absorbing roots(to be determined when digging the trench by hand). 4.4 Excavation should be filled immediately after installation of utility lines, leaving no air pockets. Exposed roots should be covered and kept moist. 4.5 After serious root injury,the contractor shall be responsible for a watering schedule determined in consultation with the Director of the Botanic Garden. 4.6 Where paving is to extend within the drip lines ines of high value trees to be preserved, or the grade over their root system is to be raised with non load-bearing soil,aeration systems must be installed following consultation with Botanic Garden staff. 4.7 Lowering soil level and excavating for large buildings and basements: in areas where trees are to be preserved and soil level is to be lowered,retaining walls approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden,must be installed, rather than grading. Excavation toward the tree must stop when 2"diameter roots are encountered. Walls are to be no closer than halfway between the drip line and the trunk. Keep soil and roots moist and shade soil with mulch. Drainage along foundations should be provided to handle seepage. Prune and tie back branches to height Am requirements of construction equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed by an arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5. 4.8 If roots are to be cut for a project they should not be cut during bud break or leafing out. If at all possible,roots OR should be cut in early spring or late summer. 4.9 New drainage patterns created by berms,banks,or grade changes must be approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden and the Foreman of Grounds. Page 3 or roots shall be refilled with suitable material compacted to the density,grade, and contour of the surrounding earth. 2 Tree/Shrub Protection: 2.1 Plant materials selected to remain shall be protected by sturdy,temporary barriers erected prior to any construction or excavation work on the site. These barricades shall be maintained in good condition during the entire period of construction work on the site. Unless otherwise specifically approved by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden,use only new and solid lumbar of utility grade or better to construct temporary barricades arolund plants designated to remain. Barricades shall be 4"x 4"wood comer posts with 3 @ 2"x 4"rails @ 2' 0"intervals to 6' 0"height for trees and 2 @ 2"x 4"rails @ 2' 0"intervals to 4' 0"height for shrubs. Barricades shall be set at the outer drip line for shrubs,unless otherwise authorized by the Director of the Botanic Garden,taking special care not to damage large roots. All barricades/fencing shall be removed when no longer needed as determined by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. 2.2 Trees to remain shall not be used for crane stays,guys,or other fastenings. Vehicles shall not be parked within the areas inside the drip line of trees or where damage may result to such trees. Do no stockpile fill,equipment,or building supplies with the areas inside the drip line of trees or within 5' of shrubs. 2.3 Damage no plant by burning,by pumping of water,by cutting of live rots or branches,by operating internal combustion engines beneath branches, or by any other means. If,in order to perform excavation work,it becomes w necessary to cut roots of plants to be saved, such roots must be neatly cut by Botanic Garden staff or by a professional Arborist who shall be notified in advance of the excavation. 2.4 The Contractor is responsible for all costs of establishing and carrying out a maintenance program for plants to "* be saved throughout the time of construction. The program shall include regular feeding, watering, spraying,and cabling,and pruning of all dead or broken branches. Submit a schedule of the maintenance to the Project Manager at the beginning of the job. Schedule and procedures must be approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden. 2.5 Prunine shall be done in a manner which does not change the natural appearance of the plant. Broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed with a clean cut. All pruning shall be done by skilled professionals in accordance with specifications and standards set by the International Society of Arboriculture and the National Arborist Association appropriate to the type of plant and to its special or individual requirements. The Contractor shall meet with the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate before commencing the work of pruning. w► 2.6 Carefully remove branches of any trees to be saved which endanger life or property. Remove dead branches of all trees to be barricaded with the Contract Limit Line,and with the approval of the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate,desirable branches which may interfere with construction or be damaged during construction must be properly tied out of the way where possible,rather than removed. Prune and tie back branches to height "" requirements of construction equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed by an Arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5. 2.7 Any existing_plant scheduled to be protected and preserved, that is injured or destroyed shall be replanted at the Contractor's expense as detailed in Section 1.4. Report all damage promptly to the Director of the Botanic Garden so an Arborist can treat the damaged plants quickly and appropriately. 3. Stripping and Stockpiling-Soil: 3.1 Prior to the start of general excavation,strip all topsoil,peat, and organic silt from within areas to be occupied by structures,paving, and lawns,as well as other areas to be regarded in this contract,and stockpile. Do no stripping until final approval of work area limit lines detailed in Section 1.2. has been reconfirmed by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate. rAl 3.2 All topsoil,peat and organic silt encountered during the stripping operations,regardless of depth,shall be removed, and.stockpiled at the site designated by the Foreman of Grounds of the Physical Plant department. No topsoil is to be removed from the campus without the approval of the Foreman of Grounds. Topsoil shall not be piled over root systems of existing trees and shrubs. Areas having greater depths of topsoil,peat or organic silt than .r� Page 2 APPENDIX A: TREE AND SHRUB PRESERVATION SPECIFICATIONS (SMITH COLLEGE) General: Due to the high expense of follow-up care necessary to offset construction damage to trees, shrubs,and soils,and the importance of our tree and shrub collections to the overall quality of life on our campus,it is expected that every effort will be made to eliminate construction damage. 1. Clearing, Grubbing, and Removal: 1.1. All trees and shrubs,unless noted to remain, shall be cut and removed in their entirety. All stumps,brush, vegetation,rubbish and other perishable or objectionable matter shall be cleared from the site. No on-site burning will be permitted. This debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an approved dumping site in compliance with local codes and the Wetlands Protection Act. 1.2 Prior to starting site clearing operations or any other construction work, stake out all limits of cut and fill,and groups or trees and shrubs to be saved. Promptly upon completion of layout work and before any clearing or other construction work is begun on the site,the Contractor shall arrange a conference on the site with the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate to identify and mark trees and areas of trees and shrubs which are to remain. After the conference,the Contractor shall erect sturdy,temporary fencing along the ? ! work area limits,separating it from protected areas. Minimum distances from protected trees shall be to the outer drip lines around each tree or group of trees and shrubs. Sensitive species may require fencing at even greater distances from the main trunk. Do no clearing without a clear understanding of existing conditions to be preserved. 1.3 Limits of clearine shall be those areas defined by the limits of cut and fill. Removal of trees, shrubs,and herbaceous perennials outside those areas shall be done only as noted on the drawings and as approved by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. 1.4 Fell trees in such a way as to not injure trees to be saved. A representative of the Botanic Garden shall designate trees that are to be carefully topped rather than felled. No trees shall be removed until authorized by the Botanic Garden representative. Excavation or grading with the branch spread of trees to be saved shall be performed only under the direction of the Project Manager,with the approval of the Director of the Botanic Garden unless otherwise directed. Existing trees to be saved,which have, in the opinion of the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden,become damaged,shall be replaced with trees of similar size and species. Replacement trees to be tagged in the field or sales yard by the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. Planting specifications for all replacement plantings will be provided by the Director of the Botanic Garden. All expenses incurred shall be paid by the Contractor. If the tree or shrub cannot be replaced because of size or peculiarity of species, the College shall be reimbursed in accordance with the Tree Evaluation Formula as described in"Guide for Plant Appraisal'and"Manual for Plant Appraisers"(latest editions)as published by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. 1.5 Exercise extreme care during grubbing and stripping operations to prevent damage to surface roots of trees to be preserved. Stipping of topsoil around trees to be saved will be restricted to areas designated by the Director of the Botanic Garden. Woody vegetation located near remaining trees is to be cut to ground level and left,or ground below grade(not pulled out), in order to reduce root injury to remaining trees. When lowering grade,scarifying and preparing sub grade for fills and structures within drip lines of trees to be saved,use retaining walls with discontinuous footings to maintain natural grade as far as possible. Excavate finish grade by hand and prune OP exposed roots in accordance with Section 2.3. Soil beyond cut face can be removed by equipment sitting outside the drip line of the tree. 1.6 Remove stumps and roots to clear depth of not less than V 0"below subgrade level except in areas where the Director of the Botanic Garden has called for woody growth to be cut to ground level. At lawns only,depth shall be 6"below finish grade. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of stumps Page 1 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL r B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.06 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder 40 loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. OR END OF SECTION FM as am Electrical 16100-22 3/1/2001 ,,�, Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall - be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A#12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 900 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. Electrical 16100-21 3/1/2001 1W Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations OR Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL .. .0 2.14 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM (Handicap Toilet) A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed (including cabling) by the Electrical Contractor. B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a call switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series. C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate marked "Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot(6) long nylon pull cord. D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone; flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all required transformers. w E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation must be made at the point of origin. go PART 3 -INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 04 A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. am B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall +�• be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.02 GROUNDING Electrical 16100-20 3/1/2001 '"" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL a. Bond all metal conduits, racks and panels. All grounding shall comply with ANS/TIA/EIA 607 Grounding and Bonding Standard. 4. Pull Cords a. Install a fish cord in all empty conduits smaller than 1-'/2'. Install a 1/8 " nylon pull cord in all conduits 1-1/2" and larger. 5. Identification 4^ a. Patch panels and device plates shall be labeled according to the following: !!' 1- Each patch panel shall be alphabetically labeled in sequence, e.g A,B,C, etc. with the pre-assigned B&G building number as a prefix. 2- The number on the patch panel shall correspond to the number on the device plate in the room. 3- The device plate shall be numbered with patch panel letter and port number, e.g A-1, B-1, C-1, etc. 4- All labels shall be machine made and shall be 3/8" high. Hand written labels are not acceptable. b. Cable marker tags to be consecutively numbered. Provide system diagram at each patch panel with outlet identifications indicated on 8 %" X 11"floor plan which has been mounted in a protective frame securely attached to the wall. C. For major building renovations, provide system diagram on Autocad Release 14, or as approved by owner. 6. Testing a. Test all cables for length, impedance, resistance, capacitance, attenuation, next loss, and inverted pairs with a Wirescope 350 or approved equal. Verify that that testing device is acceptable to owner or approved equal. Verify that testing device is acceptable to owner prior to commencing testing. All points shall pass the test for Category 5E standards. Submit printed test data to owner and A/E at least 7 days prior to connection of system equipment. All testing shall comply with EIA/TIA 67 Standards. b. Test reports shall incorporate the labeling convention described in 3.5 A. 1 (E.G. EG007-A-1, EGO07 A-2.....EG007-B-24) C. Test Telephone cables for proper mapping and terminations. Electrical 16100-19 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts ` Section 16100 ELECTRICAL r�r to ITS for storage and returned to job site at new locations. g. New outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of .M standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1)for data, (1) for telephone, and (1) for future expansion. h. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan and HAAS Electric for final termination and testing. .r� i. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the appropriate Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings as MDF and IDF. j. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room. do 2. Wiring a. Where wiring is concealed in building construction, install in min. .. '/" conduit. Cable may be bundled on messenger cable with velcro wraps in accessible ceiling space. Do not use tie wraps to bundle or support cable, except at patch panels. Use only hangers designed and approved for the required application. an b. Maintain a minimum 12" spacing from power and lighting circuits. C. Protect all cable from physical damage. Avoid micro bends and maintain proper radius. Support riser cable uniformly to prevents undue stress on cable or bends. d. Label each index strip with the corresponding jack number as marked on the wall plate and 8X11 map. e. Organize cabling in D rings or other support brackets designed for the purpose. Provide D rings for crosswire to incoming house circuit pairs. f. Provide min. 4' service loop supported by closed D rings on backboard. In all cases, service loop shall be long enough to allow cable to reach either voice or data termination blocks. 3. Grounding Electrical 16100-18 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL to CMR when passing through floors. Use blue cable for data. b. VOICE: Use gray cable Cat 5 PVC or plenum. 6. Raceway System a. Provide a complete raceway and outlet box system. b. Conduit sizes: Minimum V size, except that conduits to wall outlets may be W size. Provide larger sizes as indicated. C. Outlet Boxes: Minimum 4" square by 2-1/2" deep. Provide single- gang extension ring for each flush-mounted outlet box. In non fire rated walls, "old work" plaster rings only are preferred. 7. Telecommunications Back Boards a. New type AC or MDO plywood, 3/4"thick 4' wide by 8' high, primed and painted with flame retardant gray paint. Provide wall r�lr coverage as indicated on plans. C. EXECUTION 1. General a. Install raceway and outlet box system as indicated, with not more than two quarter bends(180 degrees total) between accessible pulling locations. Cable bend radius shall not be less that 8 diameter. All pull boxes shall be straight through. b. Terminate conduits at telecommunications back boards, outlets or as indicated. C. Install outlets where shown on plans. Install, wire and connect all ? termination equipment per manufacturer's instructions for satisfactory operation. d. For new renovation projects; deactivate old cable and provide cross wire to new punch down blocks, remove all abandoned cable, jacks, face plates, and wireway. e. Maintain existing 2 pr communications cable for card reader system where applicable. f. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement, and in IDF closets shall be removed from job site, delivered op Electrical 16100-17 00 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL 2. Telephone Punch Down Blocks a. Provide AT&T 110 quick connecting terminating system. Units to be comprised of one-piece molded plastic 4-pair connecting blocks with horizontal color-coded index strips secured to mounting frame organizing 25 pairs (22 to 26 gauge). Configure units in 300 pair blocks at each backboard. b. Provided protector blocks at building service entrance as required by NEC 70, Article 830-C and as manufactured by AT&T Type 188 Building Entrance Protectors w/4B-EW Series Protectors. Verify clamping voltage with Williams Telco Office. 3. Telephone/ Data Wall Outlets a. As a minimum provided voice and data jacks as follows: Dorms—in each sleeping room-1 voice and 1 data per bed. Commons Rooms- min. of 1 voice and 1 data outlet spaced so that no point on any wall space is more than 20' away from the outlet when measured along continuous wall surface. And in all cases, as noted on drawings. b. Each outlet shall house the required number of Category 5E, 8- wire RJ45 jacks designed for termination of 22-26 AWG unshielded cable. Jacks to be of single modular design, color-coded for ease of identification; Voice-office white, Data-black. Mount devices in a labeled modular face plate, HBL# FPL12,13 or 14 as required. C. Acceptable Manufacturer: Voice Outlet; Hubbell HD58A6 (Office White); conforming to PDS —T568B AT&T standards; Data Outlet, Hubbell HD5EB5 (Black) conforming to PDS-T568B standards. 4. Telephone Riser Cable a. AR Series, NEC type CMR. Level 3, UL listed cable constructed of color-coded, 24 AWG solid copper pairs insulated with PVC skin over expanded polyethylene insulated, UL CM and MP flame retardant PVC jacket. Provide quantity of pairs indicated from telephone entrance room. 5. Twisted pair Distribution Cable (Voice & Data) a. DATA: 4 pair, AWG solid bare copper conductors, Category 5E extended distance, extended frequency, cellular polyethylene insulated, UL CM and MP flame retardant PVC jacket. Provide UL CMP fluoropolymer jacket in air handling spaces and type Electrical 16100-16 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL N.E.0 70, 1996 and testing shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA TSB-67. 3. Submittals a. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of device of equipment, and wire/cable to be used on the project indicating compliance with special requirements. b. Shop Drawings: 1) Provided complete schematic and field wiring diagrams, indicating all devices and equipment. 4. Cabling Contractor a: The local area network wiring system shall be installed by a Hubbell Certified cabling contractor with at least 5 years experience in the installation, testing, and adjustment of systems similar to the system specified herein. A 5. Guarantee a. Parts, labor and travel to replace defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year after final acceptance and the Hubbell 25 year warranty. �r B. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1. Data Patch Panels a. Multi Port sized as needed, with IDC terminations on rear of panel and Category 5E RJ45 modular jacks on front. Panels to comply with all FCC, ISO,UL and CSA requirements, be suitable for termination of 22-26 AWG cables, be equipped with wiring saddles for each row of termination blocks, and be sized for each standard 19" equipment rack and contain a minimum of 24 ports and a maximum of 48 ports ( P670486) . Provide hinged wall mount rack or full size relay rack as required by owner, Hubbell# ON CR1976. b. Acceptable manufacturer: Hubbell PC7024B (24 port) and PC7048B (48 port) C. Rack mount shall be equipped with cable support bars. d. Do not use fluorescent fixtures in data closets or within 15' of data patch panels. Electrical 16100-15 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts "" Section 16100 ELECTRICAL „,t w F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 04 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than 10,000 amps. H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. ■+ Panelboards shall be Square D, "NQOD" series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor) A. The Electrical Contractor shall install a complete fire alarm system as shown on Drawings. All fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be a Simplex 4005 system complete with all peripherals, including auto dialer to Campus Security as directed by the Owner. B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. C. The building shall be wired on a"zone per floor" basis unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. w 2.12 ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Existing electric service is 200 ampere, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, and shall remain. 2.13 TELEPHONE/DATA WIRING SYSTEM A. PART 1- GENERAL 1. Description of work a. Provided a telephone and data wiring system including patch panels, protector blocks, punch down blocks, wiring, conduit, outlets, and other miscellaneous hardware required for a complete system. Telephone switch, handsets and data distribution and control equipment are not in contract. 2. Reference Standards . , a. Systems connector interface and pair assignments to be compliant with EIA/TIA 568A for voice &data transmission on UPT cable. Wiring and connectors to comply with EIA/TIA TSB- 36 and TSB-40 requirements for category 5E high speed transmission rates up to 100 Mbps. All work shall comply with Electrical 16100-14 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps. E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be to removable. Front trim shall be hinged. F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D I-LINE. No Substitutions Accepted. 2.10 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as required and where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal- magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as required. B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "On" and "Off' when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the"distributed phase"or phase sequence type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used ` in sequence down the right-hand side. Electrical 16100-13 3/1/2001 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL ,, C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, or required. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" �! selector switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen- Bradley Bulletin 522. No substitutions will be allowed. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No substitutions will be allowed. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. 2.09 DISTRIBUTION PANELS A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as required. B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. Buses shall be copper. Electrical 16100-12 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which - electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect and Owner. 2.08 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off' position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover,with positive pad-locking provisions in the"Off' position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC. 5. Fuses shall be as required. 6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure. Electrical 16100-11 r 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. an 1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 5352-I, or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898-HGI, or ' equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20-3-5-0, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat. No. 5362-IG, or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, " Leviton Cat. No. 1221-2, or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton ., Cat. No. 1223-2, or equal. 7. Light Switches, 4 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1224-2, or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light-20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-PLR, or equal. 9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278. 10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-1, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex, style as chosen by Architect. 11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching screws. To be Leviton Cat. No. 86000 series, or equal. 2.07 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in Electrical 16100-10 3/1/2001 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL specified. so F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal. 2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 0 A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the National Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: 1. structural conditions. 2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used. F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws, bonderized paint finished. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal. 2.05 NAMEPLATES t A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.06 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where ! " Electrical 16100-9 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL PART 2—MATERIALS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or .F partitions, raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type. C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings. 2.02 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. 2.03 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. ` B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as Electrical " 16100-8 3/1/2001 „� ON Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations 4M Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 go ELECTRICAL g caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Electrical Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all work specified and shown on the Drawings. 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. Electrical 16100-7 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item we of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. . 7. Valve chart, if applicable. 8. List of recommended spare parts. ., 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1)year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. wo B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment Electrical 40 16100-6 3/1/2001 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications ! " and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Contractor. l 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply Electrical 16100-5 ( 3/1/2001 war Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL requirements and be so labeled. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance •. with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.08 PERMITS, FEES,AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, Electrical 16100-4 3/1/2001 .� Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense.. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal' appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and P0 Owner. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.06 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their Electrical 16100-3 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL 14. All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in operation, and which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required. 1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract �* Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at +•� a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other , trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear *" the extra expense involved due to such failure. Electrical 16100-2 3/1/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 16100 ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL !" 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work so under the Contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. The Electric Service Entrance is existing to remain. 2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. 3. Feeders. 4. Panelboards. 5. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. Telephone/Data System 7. Fire Alarm System. J 8. Emergency Call For Aid System 9. Wiring devices and plates. -- ' " 10. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connections to equipment. _. 11. Arrange for inspections and perform tests. 12. Guarantee and instructions. PO 13. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and delivered to such places as designated by the Owner. Electrical 16100-1 3/1/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations !"! Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION OF OP HVAC 15600-49 2/28/2001 .�w Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Filters: Each fan coil unit, and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. B. Fan Coil Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor *+� for each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each size furnished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate. 3.12 FIRE SAFING A. Work included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural .w. Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage ** rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or Architect- Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At"poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. HVAC 15600-48 2/28/2001 * Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 4P 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass"S" hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. HVAC 15600-47 2/28/2001 w Smith College Session Annex Renovations WO Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak"compounds to the system. 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. 3.7 INSULATION .. A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. HVAC 15600-46 2/28/2001 "'" Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME 831.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The _ HVAC 15600-45 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other "* trades. E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a HVAC 15600-44 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within � specified limits. J. Service and Guarantee: 1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all + ! latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. PART 3 -INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the Owner. >I* B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on, and clean filters shall be installed. 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense. B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor. C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location approved by the Engineer. D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor HVAC 15600-43 2/28/2001 A Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 4. Exhaust Fans a. Each new toilet exhaust fan shall be controlled in the following manner: Humidstats located in each shower room shall vary the speed of the fan (through VFD drive furnished by this Contractor) to maintain space humidity at 50 to 60%. I. Adjustment and Calibration: 1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for s functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. NO b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. " d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all HVAC ' 15600-42 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) outside temperature is above 58 degrees. When outside temperature falls below 58 degrees, one pump shall cycle O" on/off subject to the night sensor. When outside temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump shall run continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the night sensor. In the cooling mode, one pump shall cycle on/off to maintain higher setting. 2. Fan Coil Control Cabinet Heaters: a. Winter Occupied Cycle: ±!■ (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain heating requirement for room. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit. b. Winter Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain lowered set point of room. Fan shall be de- energized. c. Summer Occupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion to add chilled water on a rise in space demand. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit. d. Summer Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion, however, no chiller water will be available. Fan shall be de-activated. Should room temperature exceed 80 degrees. The coil valve shall open in the fan run. 3. Radiators and Unit Heaters a. Each radiator and unit heater shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated control valve. On a call for heat the control valve shall open and when temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall P, close. HVAC 15600-41 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non- „■ energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to Me monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. w.+ Each specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the Drawings. wo 1. Pump Control a. Each building shall be served by two inline pumped distribution and for heating only. "* b. Heat distribution shall be supplied by pumps P-1 and P-2 (one spare). C. The steam to water heat exchanger shall be controlled as follows: (1) (HX-1) Sensors located in the water supply and water return shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset from outdoor temperature by modulating each steam control valve to maintain the following schedule: ,, Hot Water 0 degrees = 160 degrees HCS 65 degrees = 90 degrees HCS d. Occupied Pump Control: The temperature control system shall control pumps in the following manner. A (1) In the occupied mode, only one (1) pump shall run unless the energy management system decides both pumps are necessary in order to maintain temperature. A variable frequency drive unit shall control pump in response to load. e. Unoccupied Pump Control: ** (1) The hot water pumps shall remain off(both pumps) when HVAC 15600-40 2/28/2001 .,, Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) network. F. Software 1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: a. Complete database entry b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated _ G. Systems Software 1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band-displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall HVAC 15600-39 2/28/2001 ow Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5% over a range of 20%to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW-40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean ■* square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20oF-140oF. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. wir j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model A70HA-1 C. k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model AF24-S. I. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of • 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site HVAC 15600-38 2/28/2001 �„ Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 4W HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of- 52oF to 152oF and an accuracy of within +1oF in this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O. 1l 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of + 0.25oF in the range of 45oF to 96oF,ALC Model BA-10K-2- RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.25oF in 00 their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.75oF over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-272-2-XX-B-1-2-2. 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential go transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of HVAC 15600-37 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal w binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication, power, and all outputs. �w i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated. 3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control nt a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an accuracy of +1 oF. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ. HVAC 15600-36 2/28/2001 .,� Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet(10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable. f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100 controllers. h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. HVAC 15600-35 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations do Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system 'A° components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. *� 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. * Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt(except for power to the temperature control panels). b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. • E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1. Global Network Controller- LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network(CMnet) and the Global Network(Lgnet). HVAC X 15600-34 2/28/2001 oft Ilk Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built' Drawings, and one(1) CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The ? ! simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments(fast motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). 1 00 D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: HVAC 15600-33 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. , 5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. •■ d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. e. All modems and accessories. 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries. dit 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, HVAC AN 15600-32 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 0 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing software programs. 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for 40 integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended from the existing system. 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope of Work 1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate ! ? all HVAC work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. HVAC 15600-31 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Contract Drawings. C. Fans: Fan wheels centrifugal, forward-curved, double width of non-corrosive, molded, fiberglass-reinforced thermo-plastic material on all units. Fan houses of formed sheet metal. All units shall be complete with three speed fan switch tappings for multi-speed control from a central processor. D. Motors: All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection and start at 78 percent of rated voltage. Motors operate satisfactorily at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed settings and at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise. Temperature rise by winding resistance method does not exceed 50 C. (PSC motors) on high speed. All motors factory run tested assembled in unit prior to rw shipping. All motors shall be complete with motor cords, which are quickly detachable at junction box by locking prong connector. E. Filters: Filters shall be removable from cabinet without removing front panel; filters ■* shall be 1"throw away type. Two extra sets of filters shall be provided for each unit. F. Electrical Performance: All cataloged model wires in accordance with National 46 Electric Code and UL listed. G. Fan coil unit shall be Trane, McQuay or International. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.24 ACCESS PANELS do A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12"x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal"(12"x 12"). 2.25 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements 1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20, and shall be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant. It is mandatory that the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing master central site software library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, thermal graphs, all to be HVAC 15600-30 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of one of the following: Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Metraflex Co. 2.22 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends. B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.23 FAN COIL UNITS A. General: Unit shall include chassis, coil, fan board, fan wheel(s), housing(s), motor, and insulation. Chassis shall be galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with all edges flanged. Insulation shall be faced, heavy density glass fiber. �e B. Water Coils: Water coils shall be 5/8 in. O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil r end supports. Maximum working pressure 300 psig, factory burst test 450 psig (air), and leak test 300 psig (air under water). Maximum entering water temperature 275 degrees F. Supply and return connections on side of units as designated on the HVAC 15600-29 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations .� Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM 8306. 11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM 8280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. *�* 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 816.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure wA Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation " requirements. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials • as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI 816.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.21 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. HVAC 15600-28 2/28/2001 �,,, Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 OR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Application 1. Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot and dual temperature water. 2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40, threaded, cast bronze fittings. 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. 4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan room equipment and connection to existing lines. ' C. Materials 1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as !! indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1.1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI 816.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, y" Bonney"Weldolets"or"Threadolets", or equal. wl, HVAC 15600-27 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to ,w maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal. 7. All hot water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. 8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover, thickness to be as listed below. "R G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: w Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: 1. Hot Water/Steam Condensate Return: a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in. C. Runouts 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in. d. Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in. 2.20 PIPE AND FITTINGS ew A. General 1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. HVAC 15600-26 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations ' Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. 2.19 INSULATION A. All air supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the " Sheet Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted. F. Pipe Insulation 1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. HVAC 15600-25 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) �** 2.16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U- bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell, water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall include a cast iron bonnet, copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped. ft B. HX-1 shall be capable of heating 35 gpm from 160- to 1800 with 5-psi steam pressure. Total heat load is 399,000 Btuh, 364 pounds per hour capacity. Velocity shall not exceed 4 ft/sec. with a pressure drop of 1 foot of water. The shell and tube shall be rated for 150-psi design pressure and 375 - design temperature. Bell & Gossett Model No. SU62-4. C. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell &Gossett or approved equal. 2.17 STEAM TRAPS A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings. B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and �* attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.18 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee& Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2"and larger-Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals. Mw C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4"or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1/2"and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. HVAC 15600-24 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) electrical alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle. Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the second pump, should the first pump or its control fail, shall be provided by the lag float switch. D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers shall coincide.with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All interconnecting wiring between the pump, control panel shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit. The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture shall furnish complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, installation and operation instructions. Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or approved equal. 2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring or base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions. B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent"Air Separator", line size, with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case Shall they be less than 2 in. steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. E. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. HVAC 15600-23 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic current, which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.13 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.14 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacture's instructions a duplex condensate units as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of(1) cast iron receiver, (2) water pumps, (2) float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified. dR The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be equipped with,(2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water level gauge, dial thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves between pumps and recover, and (2) lifting eye bolts. A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning, requiring no additional floor space for servicing. B. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be close coupled vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted and be equipped with stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, and renewable bronze case ring. Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 250-F for maximum life. Each pump shall be close coupled to a vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor HP and RPM, electrical characteristics, and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 control cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following: (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays)with fused disconnect and cover interlock for each motor. (1) Electrical alternator. (2)"Auto-Off Hand"selector switches. (1) Numbered terminal strip. (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage exceeds 230 volts. All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA rated. The control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The HVAC 15600-22 2/28/2001 + Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 +> HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. ! 2.10 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water heating system: 25-240°F 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper(Ashcroft#110613)and a brass lever handle gauge cock(Ashcroft#1095). B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 1. Ashcroft -#1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.12 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 !!! lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for r tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal A HVAC 15600-21 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1. Gate Valves-Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T. 3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. ws D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger-Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931. " 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as balance valves. w G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or 118F, G6-H12. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series " STAF, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. 1. For 2 in. and smaller- Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and we plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. HVAC a' 15600-20 2/28/2001 40 Smith College Session Annex Renovations 0 Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door shall be 5-1/8 in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head operator. I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air outlet louvers. 2.08 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type) A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at temperatures from 5°F to 2500 (-15°C to 121-C) and working pressures of 175 PSI (12 Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI B16.1, 125-lb. flat face. C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close- grained cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring, and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be if tungsten carbide/carbon with other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel. D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled 1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quit operation. The horse power of the motor shall be of such size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. Provide steel base. E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed. ' 2.09 VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non- shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type. HVAC 15600-19 2/28/2001 an Smith College Session Annex Renovations ,m Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) so A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards. B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings .w shall be permitted. C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets +�* shall be constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. 00 Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units' 36" or longer. w. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8") above finished floor. E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be tamper-proof. F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. *� The front shall wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws. Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall. G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors. The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for ■* automatic engagement at the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position, the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws. HVAC 15600-18 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) P. installation method by construction type q. control applications r. system start-up procedures 2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products utilized. Al► 3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, manifolds, and other recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing system. 2.6 UTILITY FAN w A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan, fan scroll, motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection. C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall be bonderized and then coated with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent corrosion resistance standards. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type. E. The shaft shall be constructed of C1040 ground and polished steel. to F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing type and shall be especially constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation. H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan. I. Fan shall be Greenheck Model SWB or equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air. 2.7 CONVECTORS HVAC 15600-17 2/28/2001 w Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) be connected to the same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation. f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to indicate cooler return water. g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system. wee h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4" NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability. 3. Fittings a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold. Wo b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2", 5/8" 3/4" Manifold to 1/2" copper tubing Hose Bib OR Manifold Cap C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should not require soldering. D. System Requirements 1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information shall be included relating to the following: a. tube handling b. tube measuring C. tube cutting d. tube bending e. tube repairing f. tube connections ! g. tube solvent sensitivity h. tube LIV light sensitivity i. tube capacity and pressure drop j. tube loop layout patterns k. tube fastening procedures I. manifold assembly instructions M. manifold location n. fitting assembly instructions o. insulation practices HVAC 15600-16 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) up to a 90 degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum W bend radius shall be as follows: 3/8" tubing 3.0" radius 1/2" tubing 3.75" radius ' 5/8" tubing 4.5" radius 3/4"tubing 5.75" radius so n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than five (5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows: 1. Nominal tubing size. 2. Type of plastic tubing material. 3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9. 4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating is valid. 5. ASTM designation, ASTM F876. 6. Manufacturer's name and production code. Additional Marking 1. Date of manufacturing. 2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726. 3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the tubing. 2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of t individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following features: a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations and allows for future expansion. b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an automatic integrated air vent. C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the uN diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have so incremental adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. on e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to HVAC 15600-15 W 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 3/8" 0.500" 0.070" 1/2" 0.625' 0.070" 5/8" 0.750" 0.083" 3/4" 0.875' 0.097" g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3. h. Sustained Pressure: w. Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 250 210 1/2" 195 165 5/8" 190 165 3/4" 190 165 i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall be as given. Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure .� Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 275 235 1/2" 215 185 5/8" 210 180 3/4" 210 180 w j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM F876). k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9, (paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing material shall be within the range of 65% to 89% ON inclusive." I. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10 (paragraph of ASTM F876), the time tZ (t2 = time to failure of boiled sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sample). M. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for HVAC 15600-14 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and associated fittings. B. References 1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing". 2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems". 3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor heating systems". to C. Materials 1. Tube a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with ASTM F876. b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and pressure. C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 !!" F working temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature. d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs: e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity. f. Dimensions and Tolerances Nominal Average Outside Minimum Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness HVAC 15600-13 �, 2/28/2001 am Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. +*a B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected w blade register, off-white finish,with opposed blade damper. C. Top Exhaust Register (TER) - Titus Model 271 FL/AG-15 aluminum construction, double deflection, white finish, with opposed blade damper. D. Top Supply Registers (TSR) - Titus Model CT-980 Fixed Aluminum Bar with '/4' spacing and type-11 border. E. Bottom Return Register (BRR) - Titus Model 1707, double reflection register with opposed blade damper. 2.4 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. 1. Type"A"- No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2"aluminum mesh bird screen, and Kynar 500 finish. 2.5 RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM A. Scope of Work HVAC 15600-12 2/28/2001 *"� Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 0 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL- 555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. 40 Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. Q. Flexible Air Duct: 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. HVAC 15600-11 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections V-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over w 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1"standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2"x 1-1/2"x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2"on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". H. Sheet metal screws 3/4"#10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of • rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. �* J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4"x 1-1/4"x 1/8"angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1"x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6"centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0"centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. wM L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with HVAC 15600-10 2/28/2001 *" 10 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. 1.20 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the HVAC Subcontractor is more specifically described below. 40 B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for ail labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all HVAC work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Refer to section 01230 alternates the following schedule and the contract Drawings for a description of alternatives. PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METALWORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. ew Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or 4, SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co- ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. - E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not op allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by ! ! HVAC 15600-9 2/28/2001 am Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure . adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC �* Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. HVAC 15600-8 2/28/2001 *�! Smith College Session Annex Renovations go Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control' paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1.16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other OR Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by 4" reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly HVAC 15600-7 2/28/2001 wr Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically +.�+ noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.14 GUARANTEE A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment " caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of HVAC 15600-6 2/28/2001 * Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Subcontract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1.13 WORK CONCEALED HVAC 15600-5 2/28/2001 1W Smith College Session Annex Renovations 40 Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) OR Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be +* furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. ,■„ 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the HVAC 15600-4 2/28/2001 •� OR Smith College Session Annex Renovations On Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 u HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss OP or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves, Tunstall steam traps. 40 B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. w 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, r full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. +o HVAC 15600-3 2/28/2001 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 13. Record Drawings. 14. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS w A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter ww shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of'support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear HVAC 15600-2 2/28/2001 .�, w Smith College Session Annex Renovations OR Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15600 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 -GENERAL go 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following, 1. Steam to water heat exchanger. 2. Unit heaters, cabinet heaters, and radiators. 0P 3. Pex tubing system and manifold. 4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, including pumps, heat exchanger valves, and specialties. 5. Duct systems for and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and terminal boxes. 6. Exhaust fans. 7. Insulation for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 8. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. 9. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others. 10. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College." 11. Guarantee. 12. Instructions. HVAC 15600-1 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. .w END OF SECTION .w w w Plumbing 15400-22 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations PO Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to have a new water meter installed by the Northampton Water Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall order the new meter, and the College shall be billed direct for all charges. 3.13 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.,or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness - by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. !!! D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. OR Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. Plumbing 15400-21 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, .� thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. Flush out entire system. *� B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. w 3.11 GAS SERVICE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the gas ` company for a new gas service. B. The gas company shall furnish and install the service to the building. wet C. The Plumbing Contractor shall start his work from the outlet of the meter or regulator provided by the gas company and connect to all equipment requiring gas as shown on the Plans. 3.12 WATER SERVICE w Plumbing 15400-20 2/28/2001 RN Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations op Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING ! ! A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General Contractor. 3.5 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly 04 engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. o C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping !P passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed op as required by the Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP Plumbing 15400-19 2/28/2001 f Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated ! for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services. Plumbing 15400-18 2/28/2001 .w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING A. Existing gas-fired water heater with storage tank, based on AO Smith, consisting of one (1) Burkay Model No. HW225 water generators, shall remain and be re-piped to new Viessman Tanks. t !e B. Furnish and install circulation pump to deliver 45 GPM min. at 20 ft. head, with 3/4 HP, 208 volt motor, Taco pump and relocate flow switch. C. Furnish and install thermal expansion absorber, as manufactured by Amtrol Model AST-180, with 36 gallon acceptance volume, 77 gallon tank volume, ASME tank pre-charge tank with butyl-diaphragm liner, FOA approved. D. Indirect Steam-Fired Storage Water Heaters: Furnish and install one (1)Viessmann Horicell-HG 450-120 gallon indirect fired storage water heaters. New heater shall have a steam heat exchange capable of delivering 125 gph at 1000 F. temperature difference. E. Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible to provide an angle iron support frame to support new heater(4 in. by 4 in. by 3/8 in. angle iron) min. of 24 in. high. Actual height to be coordinated with Heating Contractor to allow proper installation of steam traps. 2.15 DEMOLITION A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropri- ate use of 450 wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double Plumbing 15400-17 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING 3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer. K. Sink (P-5) 1. Single Bowl Sink (P-5)- Sink to be Elkay Model No. LR2219 complete with Delta Model No. 2476 faucet with spray and Aqua Pure Model No. AP-DWS1000 water filter. L. Washing Machine Connection (P-6) 1. Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with '/2' supplies and 2"drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate. M. Wall Hydrant(P-7) 1. Woodford Model B65 Series concealed type, automatic draining with anti- siphon vacuum breaker, 1/4" hose thread nozzle, one piece valve plunger to control both flow and drain functions, loose tee key to be furnished with each hydrant. No substitutions shall be made. N. Hose Bibb(P-8) 1. Woodford Model No. 24P, with vacuum breaker and loose key. w O. Floor Drain (P-9) 1. Wade Model No. 1100 w/FC7 Strainer. P. Floor Drain (P-9A) aA 1. Mechanical room floor drains to be Zurn 415 with type"B" strainer. Q. Laundry Tub (P-10) 1. Basin- Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit. 2. Faucet-Chicago Model 895-317, 8" center with E-12 aerator. 3. Trim - Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece. 2.14 WATER HEATER SYSTEM Plumbing 15400-16 ' 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 WO PLUMBING diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of Clear-Flo showerhead with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar. 3. Fittings—Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow. + H. Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-3A) 40 1. Shower Stall—Aker Model No. B3032 single compartment shower receptor with drain set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. Shower doors shall be Universal-Rundal Model No. "Tritons" No. 9645 complete with %4" thick laminated white glass and full length S/S hinge. This Contractor shall be responsible to install shower drains and perform all piping. Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. 2. Shower Valve — Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X, pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle turn. Consisting of Valve 4-500, Super shower head with Nu-Arm head bracket No. 4-131-M-301. fm I. Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-313) 1. Shower Stall —Aker Model No.133632 single compartment shower receptor with drain set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. Shower doors shall be Universal-Rundal Model No. "Tritons" No. 9645 complete with W thick laminated white glass and full length S/S hinge. This Contractor shall be responsible to install shower drains and perform all I'm piping. Note: This Contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. ' 2. Shower Valve — Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X, pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle turn. Consisting of Valve 4-500, Super showerhead with Nu-Arm head bracket No. 4-131-M-301. J. Mop Receptor(P-4) 1. Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin. 2. Faucet — Chicago Faucet Model 540-LD-897S-WXF, 8" centers, with vacuum breaker spout, 369 handles, WXF non-adjustable inlet centers, polished chrome plate only, ADA compliant. Plumbing 15400-15 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING D. Water Closet(P-1A) Handicapped 1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" 17"H Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 '/2"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Sloan 'Royal' 111-YO-ADA with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall and spud flanges. 3. Seat - Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge. E. Lavatory(P-2) 1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Faucet—American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with lever handles. 3. Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece, BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated trap with cleanout plug. F. Lavatory(P-2A) Handicapped 1. Basin — American Standard "Murro" Model #0954.000 viteous china, wall hung with shroud/knee guard 0059.020. 2. Supply Fitting - S-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self- closing with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop with flow, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A "* stops and risers. 3. Fittings — Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. G. Bath Tub/Handicapped Shower(P-3) 1. Shower basin — Shower basin shall be ceramic tile furnished and installed by general contractor. Furnish and install a P-9 floor drain. w 2. Control Valve—Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model No. S- 96-500-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral Plumbing 15400-14 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.12 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or 00 cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12"x 12" min.)with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. 2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral to with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the of rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper go installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Water Closet(P-1) 1. Closet—American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 '/2"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with V angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall and spud flanges. 3. Seat - Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal fm Plumbing 15400-13 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water: 30°F- 180°F. C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating 0* range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal. B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.8 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP A. New recirculation pumps shall be Taco Model 007 Cartridge circulator pump, with aquastat operation to deliver 5 gpm at 10'-0" head, 1/25 H.P. B. This Contractor shall furnish and install pump aquastat for pump. Wiring of pump and aquastat shall be by the Electrical Contractor. C. Circulating pump shall be Taco Cartridge circulators. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.9 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLY w A. Furnish and install in Haven House one Leonard Valve Co.'s Model TM 186-8015- 30TA-PRV-RF-0 Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve, inlet checkstops, outlet volume/shut-off valve, dial thermometer(range: 0 to 140 degrees F.), rough bronze ,finish, complete with unions and interconnected copper piping, solid bi-metal corrosion resistant thermostat element. B. Unit shall be factory assembled, tested, and shall consist of a 1 %4' main valve and a 3/" min. flow valve. Unit is sized for 97 gpm. At a 101b. P.D. C. No substitutions will be allowed. D. See Drawings for size and model number for each building. 2.10 WATER METER A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a 1 '/2 " Rockwell "Census" water meter in accordance with the City of Northampton Water Department requirements, complete with remote meter register. 2.11 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS Plumbing 15400-12 2/28/2001 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING 46 D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1') of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5') in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2"from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. 2.5 INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self- sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro"Handi Lav-Guard", or equal, molded insulation kit. 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2°F !!! " subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. Plumbing 15400-11 2/28/2001 No Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations as Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 am PLUMBING 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson. F. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. w„ 2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931. 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. 4% G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4". H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or I13-440. I. Pressure Reducing Valves 1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., Model U5B-GG with thermal bypass. No substitutions shall he allowed. 2. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2"diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs. 2.3 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot(12') intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6') intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. s Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be in- stalled outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot (8') intervals. Plumbing 15400-10 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING ,f, C. All waste lines 2"and smaller shall be Type"L"copper. All vent lines 2"and smaller shall be type"M"copper. 0% D. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be !�u chrome plated. E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40.threaded black steel pipe with fittings. All pipes 2-1/2"and larger shall be Schedule 40 pipe with threaded or welded joints. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1" and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1/4"and larger with tee handles. D. Gate Valves: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two- piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1R1138, Stockman, or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1 R1138, or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. E. Balancing Valves. Plumbing 15400-9 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING 1.17 GUARANTEE dw A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.18 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Plumbing Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all fire Protection work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Refer to section 01230 alternates, and the following schedule, and all contract Drawings. for a description of alternatives. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with solder fittings. Plumbing 15400-8 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 RJR PLUMBING Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.15 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. Ok B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of ' equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. Ok 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. Plumbing 15400-7 2/28/2001 am Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,o Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. 1.13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. w. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the .a. Plumbing 15400-6 " 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be coordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant Department The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. Plumbing 15400-5 2/28/2001 an Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,i, Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING go B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and w designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters db Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS 40 A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. ws 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his Plumbing 15400-4 Aft 2/28/2001 w. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. +! ! 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. Plumbing 15400-3 2/28/2001 A. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .. Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING so 8. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring u* water, gas, drain, and waste connections. 9. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, water heaters and pumps, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and "* shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superinten- dent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done w to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing 15400-2 2/28/2001 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or, not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Water service entrance with meter connecting to water supply line located in the existing basement. 2. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, supports, and roof terminals. 3. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing lines within the building or on site. Provide valve, boxes, fittings and all required components for a complete installation. 4. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports, valves, water heater, and pump. 5. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 6. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 7. Gas piping system connecting each and every fixture, device, and item of equipment requiring gas within the building. The system shall be installed with all incidentals necessary for a complete operational system and shall include all piping, valves, stops, drips, meters, pressure reducing valves, vents to atmosphere, gauges, structural supports (hangers), and such other standard specified accessories as are necessary for a complete approved system. Plumbing 15400-1 2/28/2001 O Smith College 44 Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 OP FIRE PROTECTION 1 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of 44 water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. e C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. 3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. END OF SECTION Fire Protection 15300-23 3/02/01 .m Smith College Session Annex Renovations 04 Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION ow 3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc. 04 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. g` B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. as C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. w I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows. K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. W, L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. ■ M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. Fire Protection 15300-22 am 3/02/01 am Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 3.2 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the 00 work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. 40 B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. Fire Protection 15300-21 3/02/01 l w Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION I. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper connection shall be wall mounted cast brass body, dual drop clappers, brass plugs with ar, chains, all with rough chrome-plated finish and lettering on escutcheon reading, "Automatic Sprinkler", equal to Potter- Roemer. Hose connection sizes and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department standards. M. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig. 5982, size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal position only. n. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip, size as required. o. Double check valve assembly w/metered bypass as noted on plans, to be furnished and installed by the Sprinkler Subcontractor, DEP approved for backflow prevention, Watts Model 709DDC. Provide test kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits. p. Swing check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip size as required. q. Gamewell dry pipe kit shall include all necessary equipment as 4W shown in Gamewell Bulletin 6010, typical piping diagram for dry pipe watchman's kit, Model No. M2700-13. Shall include S-1, S-2, S-3 switches, air maintenance compressor, and supervisory panel, • Model M2011-14. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping instal- lation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. Fire Protection 15300-20 .■ 3/02/01 Smith College ON Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION F. Fire Protection Specialties 1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment connections. a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as required by the insurance underwriter. b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" chrome plated head with Type '74' recessed escutcheon, rated at 165°F unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces. C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test orifice. f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with white finish, temperature 165°F unless noted otherwise g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1, 1" NPT, 165°F. h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1" NPT, 165°F. i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system. j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc., Viking Corporation, or equal. k. Dry Pipe alarm valve shall be equal to Viking "Model E" system complete with alarm valve, solenoid valve, 1/2 H.P. air compressor, and air maintenance device accelerator and air maintenance compressor mounted on riser. Fire Protection 15300-19 3/02/01 I Smith College Session Annex Renovations 00 Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 10 a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as wu upstream pipe size. b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. 2. Gate Valves a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 275U Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 on Hammond: IR1154 Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F 3. Check Valves a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. r 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. " Fire Protection 15300-18 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 I'm FIRE PROTECTION 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of 40 one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. 0 Corner& Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. ! ' 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. E. Valves 1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with instal- lation requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with PIP pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. Fire Protection 15300-17 3/02/01 MW Smith College Session Annex Renovations ON Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION D. Supports, Anchors, and Seals 1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4". b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building sub- strate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. Fire Protection w. 15300-16 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in founda- on walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. go Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides. 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutch- eons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Producers Specialty&Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, ! ' walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; r and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface. Fire Protection 15300-15 x. 3/02/01 IP Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicat- ed) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by dia- grams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. ®„ Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in 44 hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide • uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. w 1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: Fire Protection 15300-14 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. so (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings. go C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each tP Fire Protection 15300-13 3/02/01 MW Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION A. Interior Piping 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI 816.4, or flanged, ANSI 816.1. C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut- groove type for piping 2-1/2"and larger only. (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-1/2"and larger) (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A .�. 536. (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of !* contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having proper- ties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000-psi. (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encas- ing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning Fire Protection 15300-12 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congest- ed areas of piping and equipment. (3) Branch piping need not be marked. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. a. Provide 1-1/8"sq. brass tags with black lettering. b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for pro- per attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1. d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. V e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect. f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished ceiling. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS Fire Protection !! 15300-11 3/02/01 �.ri Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all fire Protection work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Refer to section 01230 alternates, and the following schedule, and all contract ` Drawings. for a description of alternatives. PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with instal- lation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is in- dicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Basic Identification 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification '�11 materials of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc. . Brady(W. H.) Co., ; Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color- coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. •R a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around pipe at each location, fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. w b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. Fire Protection 15300-10 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4"= T-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontrac- tor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be fur- 0-6 nished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. 40 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.18 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Fire Protection Subcontractor is more specifically described below. Fire Protection !l 15300-9 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 40 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as Y well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Ar- chitect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by +�* the change. C. Co-ordination of Trades Fire Protection 15300-8 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and below the ceiling. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. Fire Protection 15300-7 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. ' 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 1.9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no addi- tional cost. Fire Protection go 15300-6 3/02/01 mm Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the ! " Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.7 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be 4-0 U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. 1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings on thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes, which may be required. 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsi- bility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcon- tractor. Fire Protection 15300-5 3/02/01 ..w Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION " A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the +w express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontrac- tors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. 40 D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other on trades requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress Fire Protection 15300-4 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 1 FIRE PROTECTION 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5)years. B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". Pill C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". ` D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. PIN F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or go equal"appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Pill Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. 1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Fire Protection 15300-3 3/02/01 Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 8. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, . PO Box 5010, Hartford Ct. Attn: Mr. David M. Goush) for review and approval. 9. Extend all existing test connection to first floor. B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: 1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. 1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter(I.R.I.). Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. Fire Protection 15300-2 " 3/02/01 Im Smith College Session Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to, the following.. 1. Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the basement. 2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system. 3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 4. Provide and install double check valve backflow preventer assembly per DEP requirements. 5. Dry pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited to, line size valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full indicating, control, drain trim, and air compressor. 6. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, with Fire Department connection and system test and drain connections. 7. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or interfering with new construction. Fire Protection 15300-1 3/02/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .s Northampton, Massachusetts B. Set wheelchair lift square and level. Anchor unit securely to building structure. C. Furnish and install all internal and operational wiring, conforming to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, as necessary to connect the operating buttons and switches, from the control board to the power unit. Except for short lengths of flexible conduit to moving apparatus, ensure that all wiring is contained in rigid conduit or electrical metal tubing. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed lift and gates for smooth and balanced operation. 3.4 CLEANING A. After all work under this Section has been completed and satisfactorily tested, remove all applied packing labels from the various surfaces, thoroughly clean all prefinished surfaces. Touch up all scratches, abrasions, and other surface defects in the prefinished surfaces, using the same material, color, and gloss as used in the prefinishing system. End of Section A. on W Vertical Wheelchair Lifts 14422-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. Access Industries, Inc. (American Stair Glide Division), Grandview MO. 2. Concord Elevator, Inc., Pacoima, CA. 3. National Wheel-o-vator Company, Inc., Roanoke, IL. 2.2 WHEELCHAIR LIFT UNIT A. Operation and Performance requirements: *a 1. Load (rated capacity): 750 pounds. 2. Car Speed: 12 feet per minute. 3. Lift platform: 36 inches wide by 60 inches deep. 4. System Control: 24 VAC. 5. Drive system: Recirculating ball screw with rotating screw. 6. Total Rise: 2 feet 6 inches. 7. Height of platform sides, landing and platform gates: 42 inches. 8. Velocity sensitive overspeed control device. 9. Automatic braking device connected to operator control. 10. Operator Control: Keyed paddle control switch operable by hand elbow or arm from inside lift housing with panic button stop switch and alarm. 11. Call Stations: Wall mounted, keyed call stations at each landing. 12. Electro-mechanical gate interlock which prohibits operation of lift with gates open.When platform is level with landing, interlock will permit gate to open. 13. Emergency manual lowering device. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHING A. Electrostatic polyester finish in color as selected by architect from manufacturer's standard range. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces, and required embedded anchorage devices, and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section.Verify that field measurements are as indicated on approved shop drawings. po B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Perform the installation in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's written instructions,with standards required by authority having jurisdiction, and with additional requirements as specified herein. OM Vertical Wheelchair Lifts 14422-3 3/7/01 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01780- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Manufacturer's field quality control reports of field inspections, including, and revised "as-built" shop drawings. 2. Parts list and wiring diagrams: Upon completion of the installation, submit 4 copies of a complete parts list and as-built wiring diagrams for controller and lift system and maintenance instruction manual. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer specializing in applying the work of this Section with a minimum of 3 years experience approved by product manufacturer. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. All designs, clearances, construction, workmanship, and material, unless specifically excepted, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Elevator Code, as revised and amended per the rules and regulations of local authorities and all other governing bodies which may have jurisdiction, including all regulations for the physically handicapped. 1.7 PERMITS, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain and pay for all necessary municipal and State elevator inspections and permits; make all tests as required by the regulations of such authorities. The capacity and operational performance tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect and the code enforcement officer, after completion of the installation. B. Obtain certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installed wheelchair lift. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:Warranty shall include all materials and workmanship for wheelchair lift and installation. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Provide Installers maintenance contract under provisions of Section 01780- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, for a period of not less than one year from date of Substantial Completion of the General Contract. Maintenance contract shall include the following: 1. 24-hour emergency callback service for the equipment. 2. Examinations of the installation during regular working hours by trained employees of the wheelchair lift installer. 3. All necessary adjusting, greasing, and oiling. 4. Providing cleaning supplies and parts necessary to keep the equipment in proper operation, except any parts needed due to misuse, accident, or neglect 40 caused by others. 40 No Vertical Wheelchair Lifts 14422-2 3/7/01 go Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 14422 VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing a wheelchair lift,where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. Work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Wheelchair lift, including the driving machines, lift enclosures, entrance gates, guide rails, signal equipment, control systems, internal electrical wiring; and all devices for operation, dispatching, safety, security, leveling, and alarms. 2. Perform complete prefinishing of all metal surfaces, except for bright metal work. 3. Provide maintenance and call-back services for lift equipment furnished hereunder. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 16—ELECTRICAL: Electrical service for wheelchair lift operations. 0 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ANSI A 17.1. -Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks. 2. ANSI C1 -National Electrical Code. 3. UL:Applicable requirements for motors, switches and other electrical components. 4. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for wheelchair lifts, including barrier-free requirements. 00 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: !! 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, for lift components furnished hereunder. 2. Manufacturer's warranties: Manufacturer's written warranty, countersigned by Mfr the installer, clearly stating all terms and conditions of the warranty, and covering all materials and workmanship provided hereunder for a period of not less than one year from date of Substantial Completion of the General Contract. 3. Shop drawings: General arrangement for all wheelchair lift, dimensioned installation details with, landing heights, gate dimensions, tolerances of landing dimensions, perimeter conditions of construction, and all electrical characteristics and requirements for the lift equipment. 4. Samples: Sample chips of all available colors for paints and finishes, for selections by the Architect. Vertical Wheelchair Lifts 14422-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations 4' Northampton, Massachusetts D. Thoroughly sweep and vacuum all surfaces and remove all foreign matter. E. Measure all areas to receive materials to be furnished and installed hereunder, and verify in the field their actual dimensions, including wall-to-wall dimensions, offsets, door locations, and details, fixed equipment, and all other installed items. Extra Ilft charges will not be allowed because of lack of familiarity with actual project conditions. Use largest floor mat widths to produce minimum number of seams. Small pieces of floor mat will not be acceptable. F. Unroll floor mat for adjustment to environmental conditions at least 24 hours prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and install and entry mat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cement floor mat directly to the substrate with specified installation adhesive. Trowel adhesive evenly on the substrate. Install the floor mat within thirty minutes after spreading adhesive. C. Apply a 6 inch wide band of specified seaming adhesive continuously at each seam location, before bedding the floor mat therein, ensuring that each floor mat edge will be embedded therein at least 3 inches. D. Apply a continuous band of specified edge adhesive around entire perimeter edge of each floor mat, and embed the floor mating therein. E. Roll all floor mat areas with a 30 pound floor mat roller to ensure proper contact of floor mat with adhesive, and to remove all bubbles and buckles. Carefully roll seams and edges with the roller centered over the seam. F. Run all floor mat in the same direction. Plan and install floor mat in all areas so that single pieces per area shall be used to the fullest extent possible. No seams will be permitted in areas which are 12 feet, or less, in width. po G. Carefully measure all cut-outs at the project. H. Make all seams in floor mating by back-cutting the floor mat[or mat] on an angle so that the face yarn of abutting pieces intermingles, and provides a practically invisible transition at each seam location. Center seams, occurring at door openings, parallel to, and directly under, the doors. Seams occurring at corridor change of direction shall follow wall line parallel to floor mat direction. Do not center seams, perpendicular to, in the path of travel to doors. I. Install specified edging wherever floor mating abuts a dissimilar flooring material, r except where wood thresholds, or resilient floor tile trim occurs. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean and vacuum floor mat surfaces upon completion of the installation. ` 3.5 PROTECTION ! ' A. Prohibit traffic from floor mat areas for 24 hours after installation. End of Section Floor Mats 12481-3 I 3/7/01 wy, Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Store materials for 3 days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature and humidity stability. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees Fahrenheit ambient temperature 3 days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide 10 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Warranty shall include texture retention, wear, and static protection and edge ravel resistance and run resistance strength for the life of the matting. Commencing on the date of substantial completion. B. Mat installer's written guarantee covering prompt and proper replacement of any and all floor mating which indicates improper installation workmanship and/or defective material within twelve months from completion of the installation and acceptance thereof by the Architect, said corrective work being performed by the mat installer at no cost to the Owner. sA PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WALK-OFF FLOOR MATS A. Walk-off mats are scheduled on the Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives for matting: NFPA Class A or UBC Class 1 types, as determined by ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test and as recommended by mat manufacturer. B. Subfloor filler: Premix latex-type as recommended by the floor mat manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Request correction of defects in receiving surfaces which are not correctable by the methods specified herein. Do not commence work until such defects are entirely corrected. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges, and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks,joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat and hard surface, as required to ensure that floor mated surfaces will be level to within 1/8 inch tolerance in 10 feet in any direction. „ C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. Floor Mats 12481-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 12481 !! FLOOR MATS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Rolled entrance matting directly adhered over floors, where indicated on the Drawings, including all accessories necessary to complete the work. 2. Sub-floor filler, as required to ensure the specified tolerance level for finish surface of matting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ASTM E 648 -Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 2. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding flammability and smoke generation of interior finishes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties,for each item furnished hereunder, including floor mat, accessories, adhesives, and leveling materials. Include manufacturer's application methods or installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Manufacturer's warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation and resultant damage from failure of installation. 3. Manufacturer's certificate: Provide certificate stating that the floor mat, and other related materials to be supplied hereunder meet all requirements specified herein. !1 4. Verification samples: 18-inch by 36-inch sample of selected floor mat for final approval of the Architect. Approved samples shall be used as the standard of quality and colors for materials furnished under this Contract. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain a temperature of at least 60 degrees Fahrenheit, with a relative humidity of between 15 and 60 percent,for a period of 48 hours before, during, and after installation. B. Store all mat materials under cover in dry, well-ventilated spaces as soon as delivered. Protect floor mating from damage, dirt, stain, moisture, and mildew. Floor Mats 12481-1 3/7/01 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Adjust equipment to ensure proper working order and conditions. C. After installation is completed, insure that operating parts work freely and fit neatly. Adjust hardware and catches as required. 3.4 CLEANING A. At completion of each work day, remove tools and all crating boxes, coverings, rubbish and debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition. B. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS: 1. Wash and clean appliances. 2. Clean and polish glass, plastic, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings. End of Section .�. Y Appliances 11451-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL - 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Install, test, and clean Owner furnished appliances. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install the work of this Section in conformance with all applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding utilities, health, fire protection and safety. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLIANCES A. Appliances will be furnished by the Owner. PART 3 -EXECUTION 44 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. Notify the Contractor, and copy to Architect, in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work, and do not proceed with the work until said conditions are corrected. B. Verify clearances required for equipment. C. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location. D. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION t A. Install each product in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. 1. Maximum variation for installed equipment, from true position of 1/16 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and a maximum of 1/32 inch offsets in adjoining surfaces intended to be flush. B. Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility connections are achieved. C. Anchor equipment using devices appropriate for equipment, substrate and expected usage. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. fA Appliances 11451-1 3/7/01 WX Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations , Northampton, Massachusetts C. Exact locations of accessories within each room or area shall be as directed by the Architect. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation work in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install toilet accessories level and in true line, securely and rigidly anchored with theft proof fasteners of the size and type most appropriate for the specific receiving surface, concealing the fasteners as far as practicable. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all protective films and coverings from accessories, and clean and polish each piece. Remove all rubbish, packing materials, and debris, caused by the work of this Section. End of Section , Toilet Accessories 10810-4 317/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Mirror glass: 1/4 inch thick safety glass, ASTM C 1048 FT, fully tempered, complying with Class 1 clear, quality q3 glazing select, conforming to ANSI Z97.1, with Class 1, standard commercial quality, electro-copper back-plating protected by a corrosion-resistant zinc-coating. 4. Bobrick model N°. 2908. G. Tilt framed mirrors: size as indicated, having the following: 1. Frame: 3/4/inch exposed face stainless steel roll formed frame, beveled, with top extending from wall 4 inches and bottom extending 1 inch. Corners shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. corners 2. Back: 20 gage galvanized steel back attached to frame with concealed screws. 3. Mirror glass: 1/4 inch thick safety glass, ASTM C 1048 FT, fully tempered, complying with Class 1 clear, quality q3 glazing select, conforming to ANSI Z97.1,with Class 1, standard commercial quality, electro-copper back-plating protected by a corrosion-resistant zinc-coating. 4. Bobrick model B-2938. H. Shower soap dish: Bobrick B-973. I. Toilet tissue dispensers, double roll type: Bobrick, model B-2740. J. Lavatory mounted soap dish: Owner-furnished and installed by Contractor. j K. Paper towel dispenser: Owner-furnished and installed by Contractor. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Type 304 stainless, tamperproof. to B. Expansion shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHING A. Ferrous metals: Clean and treat, spray apply one coat of baked-on rust and moisture-resistant primer,followed by two coats of baked-on synthetic enamel, in selected colors. Ensure that finish coating is uniform in color intensity and degree of gloss,throughout. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM 456, Type SC2, satin finish. C. Stainless steel: Number 4 satin finish, except for peened surfaces of grab bars. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate times for building-in by other trades B. Coordinate with trades responsible for providing receiving surfaces on which accessories will be installed. Toilet Accessories 10810-3 3/7/01 .. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Deliver to the Owner upon completion of the work of this Section, applicable manufacturer's standard warranties. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 TOILET ACCESSORIES do A. Manufacture: To establish a standard of quality, design, function desired, and appearance, Drawings and specifications have been based on manufacturers and model numbers specified in the following paragraphs. No substitutions will be accepted. These manufacturers include: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Bobrick), Clifton Park NY. 2. Rubbermaid Commercial Products, (Rubbermaid), Winchester,VA B. Grab bars(of lengths and configurations as indicated on Drawings): Stainless steel, minimum wall thickness 18 gage (Stub's gage), with non-slip knurled, peened or striated surface. 1. Grab bars: 1-1/2 inch diameter with satin finished ends, concealed 1/8 inch thick mounting flange with snap-on cover, equal to: aw a. Bobrick series: B-6806.99 C. Robe Hook: Bobrick model B-2116, 2 per shower mounted side by side. an D. Surface mounted feminine napkin disposal unit: Rubbermaid model 6140. E. Shower curtains and rods: 1. Curtain rods: 1-1/4 inch diameter, Stainless steel, minimum wall thickness 18 gage (Stub's gage), with stainless steel 2-1/2 inch flange and concealed fasteners. Lengths as required for locations shown on the Drawings. a. Bobrick model B-6047. 2. Curtain hooks: 18-8, type 304 Stainless steel, 0.09 inch diameter. Provide one hook for every 6 inches, or fraction thereof of each curtain rod. a. Bobrick model B-204-1. w F. Framed mirrors: size as indicated, having the following: 1. Frame: one piece 3/4/by 3/4 inch type 304 18 gage stainless steel roll formed " ! frame, with continuous integral stiffener on all sides. Corners shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. corners 2. Back: 20 gage galvanized steel back attached to frame with concealed screws. Or Toilet Accessories 10810-2 3/7/01 00 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install bath accessories. B. Furnish bath accessory templates, to locate anchorage reinforcement, to trades responsible. C. Install Owner-furnished (OFCI) bath accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. B. Section 09310—CERAMIC Tile: Ceramic wall tile. C. Section 10170-Plastic Toilet Compartments. 1.3 REFERENCES, A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ANSI A 117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: on 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets,for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Schedule: Complete schedule, indicating types, quantity, and model numbers ON of accessories for each location in which the accessories will be installed. 3. Selection samples: Sample color chips indicating each manufacturer's full range of colors available for selection by Architect. Or 4. Verification samples: Complete units, as requested by Architect. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes and handicap regulations for installation work, and in conformance with ANSI A 117.1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name, identification of manufacturer or supplier and item identification number corresponding with approved schedule. Toilet Accessories 10810-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts H. No permanent exposed to view labels of any kind will be permitted to remain on the partitions, headrails, doors, or urinal screens. w 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Ensure that all work is be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, open joints, or other defects. Protect compartments during erection, and after erection, and until final approval of the entire project by the Architect. 3.4 ADJUSTMENT A. Adjust and align hardware to provide a uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors not to exceed 3/16 inch. „ B. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial-open position (approximately 30 degrees open)when unlatched. Return outswing doors to closed position. C. Test operation of movable parts, and make all adjustments necessary to ensure proper operation. 3.5 CLEANING +*� A. Upon completion of the installation, remove all evidence of tapes and other packing materials and thoroughly clean and polish all exposed to view surfaces. B. Provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. rw End of Section r ■w wr Plastic Toilet Compartments 10170-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts E. Hardware and fittings: Type 302/304 stainless steel or Brite anodized 6463T5 extruded aluminum. 1. Door hinges: Continuous spring loaded hinge for full height of door, through bolted to door and stile with theft resistant one-way screws fastening into receiving metal inserts; equal to Capital Partitions' series"B500" hinge. 2. Door latch with nylon slides. Door keeper, one piece 11 gage stainless steel. 3. Panel to stile connection: Full panel height"U"shape stainless steel channel. 4. Panel to wall connection: Full panel height"U"shape stainless steel channel or"Double T" shape extruded aluminum channel, clear anodized. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Equip all doors with combination coat hook and bumper. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. C. Ensure wall blocking is coordinated with location of anchors before commencing with installation. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence, and as specified herein. B. Install pilasters, partitions, urinal screens, and doors rigid, straight, plumb and level. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with two panel brackets and tube vertical upright anchored to floor. D. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. E. Hang door and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. F. Ensure that all holes in partitions, as required for attachment of related items, are accurately located and drilled, in accordance with the templates furnished by the accessory manufacturer. Conceal all evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting in the finished work. G. No permanent exposed to view labels of any kind will be permitted to remain on the partitions, headrails, or doors. Plastic Toilet Compartments 10170-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS wr A. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work. B. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's 10 year written warranty, which shall cover materials and manufacturing workmanship against defects. Warranty shall include breakage and corrosion of panels, hardware, and mounting components. ,. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND TYPE A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Capital Partitions, Inc., Columbia MD., (410)381-7060. 2. Santana Solid Plastic Products, Scraton PA., (713)343-7921. B. Toilet compartments: Solid plastic compartments having layouts of standard width and depth, except for handicapped compartments, which shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Compartments shall have pilasters with floor. Partitions shall be one of the following: 1. Capital "Poly-Pro"compartments, "Congress" Series. 2. Santana "Poly-Mar HD"series ,■„ C. Shower compartments: Solid plastic shower stalls having layouts of width and depth, as shown on Drawings, sizes to be coordinated with terrazzo shower bases furnished under Division 15- Mechanical. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Pilasters (stiles): HDPE solid polymer resin, 1-1/4 inch thick, 82 inches high of required depth with uniformly radiused edges in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full available range of solid colors. B. Doors and Panels: HDPE solid polymer resin, 1 inch thick, minimum 55 inches high, of required depth with uniformly radiused edges, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full available range of solid colors. 1. Door widths; except as otherwise indicated, provide the following widths: a. Standard stalls, 24 inches. b. Handicapped accessible stalls, 34 inches or greater. C. Pilaster floor shoes: 3 inches high formed stainless steel with satin finish, or HDPE in color matching pilasters. D. Top bracing: Extruded aluminum channel having "anti-grip"configuration. Plastic Toilet Compartments 10170-2 3/7/01 ' Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 10170 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Solid plastic toilet partitions, floor-mounted, overhead-braced type. 2. Solid plastic shower stalls. 3. Solid plastic urinal screens, matching toilet partitions design and finish,wall mounted with floor to ceiling tube brace. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 -ROUGH CARPENTRY: In wall blocking for partition panel support. B. Section 09310—CERAMIC TILE: Ceramic tile wall and floor finishes. C. Section 10810 -TOILET ACCESSORIES: Furnishing templates, providing and installing toilet accessories surface mounted to toilet compartments, and integral with compartments. 1.3 REFERENCES W A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standard and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ANSI A 117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 0 A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and manufacturer's warranty for each item furnished hereunder. Include information panel construction, hardware, and accessories. 2. Shop drawings: a. 1/2 inch scale dimensioned plans and elevations of each toilet room condition showing shower stalls, and urinal screen, and toilet compartment layout. b. Large scale design details of showing attachment clips and brackets; and complete installation details. 3. Selection samples: Manufacturer's full range of color chips,for selection by the Architect; up to two-color combinations for doors and partitions may be selected in each area. 4. Verification samples: 6 inch square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in Work, for color verification after selections have been made. Plastic Toilet Compartments 10170-1 �t 3/7/01 oft Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations so Northampton, Massachusetts a. Cabot: Water-based Polyurethane Varnish -Satin" No. 2201. b. ICI-Dulux Woodpride N°. 1802-0000 Aquacrylic Satin Varnish. c. Moore: "Benwood Clear Acrylic Polyurethane Finish-Low Lustre" N°. 423. d. Pratt& Lambert: "Acrylic Latex Varnish - Satin" No. Z17. 3.10 PAINTING SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black enamel. B. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers and access panels on and paint as scheduled above. w D. Plywood backboards for electrical panels and other equipment. Paint both front and back surfaces and all edges of plywood backboards before backboards are installed. 1. One coat alkyd enamel primer-sealer(undercoater). a. ICI-Dulux: Ultra Hide N°. 1120-1200 Alkyd Wood Undercoater. b. Moore: "Alkyd Enamel Underbody" N°. 217. c. Pittsburgh: "Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater", 6-6 Series. d. Pratt& Lambert: "Suprime 12" N°. S6371. e. Sherwin-Williams: "Wall and Wood VOC Primer" B49 WZ2. 2. Two coats of gloss alkyd enamel paint. .K a. ICI-Dulux: Devguard N°.4308xxxx Alkyd Industrial Enamel. b. Moore:"Impervo High Gloss Enamel' N°. 133. c. Pittsburgh: "Speedhide Industrial Gloss Oil Enamel' 7-814 Series. d. Pratt&Lambert: "Effecto Enamel' NO. S1100. e. Sherwin-Williams: "Industrial Enamel" B54 Z Series. E. Prime and paint insulated and exposed cold pipes, conduit, electrical boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are located in storage, mechanical or equipment spaces or those items which are factory prefinished. F. Exposed to view un-insulated hot pipes within finished painted areas:Two coats heat-resistant enamel conforming to Federal Specification TT-E-496, Type I, applied when surfaces are less than 140 degrees Fahrenheit. End of Section wu Paints 09910-10 3/7/01 ` Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Interior GYPSUM PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD, ceilings, and underside of soffits, previously painted: 1. Two coats latex flat paint as scheduled on the Drawings. D. Interior GYPSUM PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD, ceilings, and underside of soffits, new: 1. One coat primer. a. ICI-Dulux: Ultra Hide N°. 1060-1200 Vapor Barrier Primer/Sealer. b. Moore: "Quick Dry Prime Seal" N°. 201. c. Pittsburgh: "Speedhide Interior Quick Drying Latex Sealer', 6-2 Series +4P d. Pratt& Lambert: "Latex Vinyl Acrylic Wall Primer' N°. Z30001. e. Sherwin-Williams: "ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer", B28 W200 2. Two coats latex flat paint as scheduled on the Drawings. E. Interior METAL, FERROUS, to receive semi-gloss finish: (includes metal doors and frames): 1. One coat of rust prohibitive primer for unfinished metal surfaces, and touch up bare metal at shop primed, existing and previously coated surfaces: a. ICI-Dulux: Devflex N°. 4020xxxx DTM Flat WB Primer/Finish. b. Moore: "DTM Primer' N°. M29 c. Pittsburgh: "Pitt-Tech DTM Primer/Finish 100%Acrylic", 90-709/712 Series d. Pratt& Lambert: "TechGard Acrylic Metal Primer" N°.Z190. e. Sherwin-Williams: "DTM Acrylic Primer Finish" N°. B66 W1. 2. Two coats acrylic semi-gloss enamel as scheduled on the Drawings. F. Interior WOOD TRIM, new, unfinished, to receive painted (opaque)finish: 1. One coat alkyd enamel primer-sealer (undercoater):. a. ICI-Dulux: Ultra Hide N°. 1120-1200 Alkyd Wood Undercoater. b. Moore: "Alkyd Enamel Underbody" N°. 217. c. Pittsburgh: "Speedhide Alkyd Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater', 6-6 Series d. Pratt& Lambert: "Suprime 11" N°. S6375. e. Sherwin-Williams: "Wall and Wood Primer" B49 WZ2 2. Two coats alkyd enamel paint as scheduled on the Drawings. G. Interior WOOD HANDRAILS, unfinished, to receive transparent-stain polyurethane (water-based)finish. 1. One coat acrylic stain. a. Cabot: Interior Water-based Wood Stain"2100 Series. b. Pittsburgh: "Rez Semi-Transparent Latex Interior/Exterior Stain" No. 77- 460. c. Pratt& Lambert: "Acrylic Latex Stain Interior", NO. Z197 d. Sherwin-Williams: "Sherwood Water-reducible Wiping Stain", S64 Series 2. Two coats of satin-gloss (low luster)finish clear water-based polyurethane Paints 09910-9 iIA 3/7/01 ., , Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts b. Tnemec: "90-97 Zinc Rich Primer"at 3.0 mils DFT. c. Pittsburgh: "PPG Urethane Zinc Rich Primer", UC 65147 Series 3. First coat, modified epoxy intermediate coat: a. International: "Interseal 670 HS" at 5.0 mils DFT. b. Tnemec: "69 Color High-Build Epoxoline II"at 3.0 mils DFT. c. Pittsburgh: "PPG All Weather DTR", 97-948/949 Series @ 5 mils, (18 month recoat) 4. Second coat, aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating: a. International: "Interthane 990"at 4.0 mils DFT. b. Tnemec: 74 Endura Shield"at 4.0 mils DFT. c. Pittsburgh: "Pitt-Thane Ultra", at 3.0 mils DFT. C. Exterior WOOD CLAPBOARDS: 1. One Coat Primer: Alkyd enamel primer. a. ICI / Dulux: Ultra Hide 2110-1200 Exterior Alkyd Primecoat. b. Moore: "Moorwhite Primer" N°. 100 ** c. Pittsburgh: "Speedhide Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer", 6-9 Series d. Pratt& Lambert: "Pro Hide Exterior Alkyd Primer" N°. C299 r e. Sherwin-Williams: "A-100 Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer",Y24 W 20 2. Two coats alkyd paint as scheduled on the Drawings. D. Exterior WOOD TRIM, windows and doors, new, primed and previously painted: 1. One coat alkyd enamel primer at bare wood. (Touch up primed and previously painted surfaces) a. ICI /Dulux: Ultra Hide 2110-1200 Alkyd Primecoat. b. Moore: "Moorwhite Primer" N°. 100 c. Pittsburgh: "Sun-Proof Universla Exterior Oil-Based Primer", 1-70 Series d. Pratt& Lambert: "Pro Hide Exterior Alkyd Primer" N°. C299 e. Sherwin-Williams: "A-100 Ext. Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer", Y24 W200 2. Two coats alkyd paint as scheduled on the Drawings. 3.9 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Interior GYPSUM PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD partitions, previously painted: 1. Two coats latex eggshell paint as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Interior GYPSUM PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD partitions, new: 1. One coat primer. a. ICI-Dulux: Ultra Hide N°. 1060-1200 Vapor Barrier Primer/Sealer. b. Moore: "Quick Dry Prime Seal" N°. 201. * ► c. Pittsburgh: "Speedhide Interior Quick Drying Latex Sealer", 6-2 Series d. Pratt& Lambert: "Suprime 4" N°. Z1004. e. Sherwin-Williams: "ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer", B28 W200. 2. Two coats latex eggshell paint as scheduled on the Drawings. Paints 09910-8 3/7/01 "" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations + ► Northampton, Massachusetts D. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish and remove sanding dust prior to applying succeeding coat. E. Where clear finishes are required,tint fillers to match wood.Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 3.5 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work in each area, remove all coating splatters from glass, 1► prefinished surfaces, bright metals, and from other surfaces that have not been painted or finished hereunder. Do not use abrasive paper or abrasive cleaner on any prefinished surface or bright metal. Remove all materials and debris; leave work area in a clean condition. 3.6 PROTECTION AND TOUCH-UP so A. During painting work, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Properly clean, repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. B. Protect all painted and finished surfaces against damage until the date of final acceptance of the work. The Architect will conduct a final review of all work performed hereunder. Re-coat or touch-up, all scratches and other blemishes on surfaces,and as directed by the Architect, any areas found which do not comply with the requirements of this Section, and bear all costs therefor. C. Any re-coating or touch-up work, required after the work of this Section has been reviewed and accepted by the Architect,will be paid for by the Contractor. 3.7 PAINTING SCHEDULE - GENERAL FINISHES AND COLORS A. General: Number of coats scheduled herein below is minimum required, refer to Article entitled "APPLICATION"regarding coverage. B. Paint products and colors are scheduled on the Drawings. 3.8 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Exterior METAL, OTHER THAN RAILINGS, new, shop primed and existing: 1. One coat rust inhibitive primer. (touch up bare metal at existing and shop primed surfaces). a. ICI /Dulux: "Devguard N°.4160xxxx T&S Primer. b. Moore: "Universal Metal Primer' N°. M07 c. Pittsburgh: "Speedhide Industrial Rust Inhibitive Primers", 7-852 Series d. Pratt & Lambert: "Tech Gard Rust Inhibitve Primer" N's. S4551/S4556 e. Sherwin-Williams: "Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer', B50Z Series 2. Two coats acrylic gloss enamel:As scheduled on the Drawings. B. Exterior METAL, RAILINGS, galvanized (handrails and guardrails)to receive semi-high gloss finish: 1. Touch-up cold galvanizing paint. 1P 2. Primer: a. International: "Interzinc 308" at 2.0 mils DFT. fa Paints 09910-7 3/7/01 a< Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations , Northampton, Massachusetts J. New exterior wood scheduled to receive paint finish. 1. Smooth minor defects by sanding and/or by the use of steel wool. Remove all foreign matter with commercial paint remover and fine sandpaper. 2. Treat wood with a dip or heavy flood coat of Water Repellant Wood Preservative, allow to dry. Touch up knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with commercial stain sealer. 3. Fill up nail holes and cracks with wood putty or plastic wood after primer of first coat of finish is dry, and sand smooth. K. Existing exterior wood clapboards and trim scheduled to receive paint finish. 1. Scrape surfaces to remove loose, peeling and chipped paint. Sand only to ease edges and roughen existing paint surfaces. 2. Wash all with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate (TSP), and rinse surfaces well. w 3. Remove all remaining foreign matter, use commercial paint remover, if deemed necessary. Throughly neutralize paint remover as recommended by manufacturer.Allow wood to dry(15 percent moisture content maximum)and sand affected surfaces smooth. w. 4. Touch up knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with two coats commercial exterior stain sealer, "Kilz"or equal. 5. Fill up nail holes, wood defects, chips in layers of paint, and cracks with exterior wood putty or plastic wood after primer of first coat of finish is dry, and sand smooth. L. Gypsum board surfaces, new and existing: Fill minor defects with latex based spackle. Spot-seal all compound surfaces and repair areas in gypsum board, with specified first coat material before application of the first coat. M. Plaster surfaces, new and existing: .. 1. Fill minor defects with joint compound or spackle and seal with alkyd primer. 2. Cracks in plaster: Gouge minor cracks to 1/16 inch in width and depth and fill am with type"AP"sealant as specified under Section 07900 -JOINT SEALERS. 3.3 REMOVAL OF LEAD-BASED PAINT MATERIALS A. Remove and legally dispose of lead-based paint that is flaking and will scrape off. Comply with all referenced regulations, those contained within the referenced regulations, and all other applicable regulations and requirements of other governing agencies having jurisdiction. • 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply all materials in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed instruction, and in accordance with the best trade practices. Each coat shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect before succeeding coats are applied. • B. Do not apply successive coating until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry, and in no case in less than 24 hours after the preceding coat. C. Apply each coat to a uniform finish; Apply primer and first coat of slightly lighter in .. color tint than the scheduled color of the final coat. ..0 Paints 09910-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations !! Northampton, Massachusetts 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish and lay suitable drop cloths in all areas where coating work is being done to protect floors and all other surfaces from damage during the work. Protect adjoining surfaces with painters mask tape. B. Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove all finish hardware for painting doors and frames, except hinges and locks on exterior door; remove electrical plates, light fixture trim and fittings. Re-install hardware and other removed items after painted surfaces are thoroughly dry. C. Mix coatings thoroughly, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer of the specific coating used, to ensure uniformity of color and mass. Strain previously opened coatings to remove skins, lumps, and other foreign matter prior to painting. D. Thin or reduce materials only as recommended by the specific material manufacturer, and only with the approval of the Architect. E. Impervious surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to thoroughly dry. F. Shop primed steel surfaces: 1. Remove rust, blistered and defective shop prime paint, and all foreign materials, down to bright metal by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, or commercial paint remover. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. 2. Remove all grease or dirt with mineral spirits. 3. Spot prime bare metal with alkyd base metal primer product of the finish coating manufacturer. Seal top and bottom edges of metals doors with primer. r .G. Previously painted steel surfaces: 1. Remove rust, blistered and defective paint, down to bright metal by wire brushing, scraping, or sanding. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous as possible 2. Remove grease, dirt and all foreign materials. 3. Spot prime bare metal with alkyd base metal primer product of the finish coating manufacturer. H. New interior wood items scheduled to receive paint finish. 1. Smooth minor defects and remove all foreign matter by sanding, and if necessary, steel wool. 2. Wash sap spots and knots with mineral spirits. When dry, touch up knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with commercial stain sealer. 3. Fill up nail holes and cracks with wood putty or plastic wood after primer of first coat of finish is dry, and sand smooth. I. Existing interior wood items scheduled to receive paint finish. 1. Smooth minor defects by sanding. Remove all foreign matter with mineral spirits and fine sandpaper or steel wool. 2. Touch up knots and pitch streaks with commercial stain sealer. 3. Fill up nail wood defects, chips in layers of paint, and cracks with spackle. Ease edges of existing paint by application of spackle and sanding smooth. Paints 09910-5 3/7/01 .. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts am corrective measures, at no cost to the Owner, for any defects in the work, resulting from the use of such materials. C. Painting work should be scheduled so as to minimize touch-ups. Interior painting is to be without flashmarks. Should flashmarks occur due to touch-ups, the Contractor shall be required to redo the entire surrounding wall surface. D. Do not order materials until all required schedules have been properly submitted, reviewed by the Contractor and Approved by Architect. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except for field catalyzed coatings with good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. Color pigments shall be processed to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. Provide best quality grade, where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified. B. Liquid zinc coating for recoating depleted zinc on galvanized steel, and for touch- up of welds, scratches, and abrasions in galvanized steel: Galvanic Zinc-rich coating containing 95 percent metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to FS DOD-P-21035A (formally MIL-P-21035A) for repair of hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements of MIL-P-26915A USAF Specification for Zinc-Rich Paints.Acceptable products include: 1. Z.R.C. Chemical Products Company, Quincy MA., product: "Z.R.C." 2. Duncan Galvanizing, Everett Ma., product: "ZIRP". 2.2 ACCESSORIES ... A. Accessory materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated, but are required to achieve the finishes specified of commercial quality. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. Notify Contractor of any condition that may potentially affect proper application of coatings. B. Measure moisture content of surfaces, do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum board and joint treatment: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum plaster: 12 percent. 3. Interior wood: 15 percent. 4. Exterior wood: 18 percent. C. Beginning Work of this Section means acceptance of existing substrate surfaces and site conditions. Paints 09910-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Paint on-site sample areas, minimum 40 square feet, illustrating selected color, and tint. C. Locate samples where directed. The Contractor shall provide in the base Contract, a total amount of samples equal to one sample per room. D. Accepted samples may not remain as part of the work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; container labeling shall include manufacturer's name, type of paint, color mix designation, expected coverage, surface preparation instructions, instructions for mixing and reducing, drying time, and clean-up recommendations. B. Store materials, conforming with applicable codes and fire regulations, in designated spaces. Keep storage area secure when direct access is not required or when not performing work under this Section.Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion, maintain a dry-chemical type fire extinguisher in all areas where materials of this Section are being stored or used. ` C. Store paint materials in a well ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum of 90 degrees Fahrenheit. D. Do not use the sanitary system for mixing or disposal of refuse material. Carry water to mixing rooms and dump waste material in a suitable refuse receptacle. W Remove oily rags and waste each day. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply paints and finishes above minimum temperature conditions in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide sufficient lighting to maintain 80 foot-candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. The applicator of work specified herein is responsible to ensure that all paints, enamels, and coatings, proposed to be applied hereunder, are compatible with coatings used for shop-primed items and items which have been prime-coated under the work of other trades. B. Immediately notify the Architect in writing of conditions which may require a change in the specifications of this Section before proceeding with the work. Failure to do so, in a timely fashion, so as not to interfere with the schedule of work of this Contract, shall be construed as acceptance of the coatings specified. Perform all Paints 09910-3 3/7/01 am Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ■o Northampton, Massachusetts D. Section 08310 -ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS, and by trades requiring the same: Shop primed access panels, occurring in partitions and walls. "" E. Division 15 - MECHANICAL: Prefinished items such as plumbing fixtures, sprinkler heads, convectors, anemostates and similar surfaces and materials. F. Division 16 -ELECTRICAL: Prefinished items such as light fixtures, switch gear, electrical distribution cabinets and similar surfaces and materials. as 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. .® 1. ANSI/ASTM D 16- Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. 2. ASTM D 2016-Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 3. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for flammability and smoke generation of interior finishes. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials specified herein, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties, material compositions, and application instructions for all finishing products to be applied hereunder. a. Include certification of data indicating Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of all paint materials. 2. Samples: a. Opaque coatings: Two 9 x 12 inch finished samples on hardboard of each color scheduled in each finish for review and approval. Identify boards with finish type, color mix number and scheduled substrate surfaces or materials. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 3 years minimum documented experience. B. Single source responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 1.7 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field samples under provisions of Section 01400 -QUALITY CONTROL for purpose of verifying selected colors. Paints 09910-2 a. 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09910 PAINTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section consists of painting work where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. Painting work includes, but is not limited to the surface preparation and application of coated finishes, and subsequent touch-up, of interior and exterior items and surfaces as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as scheduled herein. - 1. Scope of painting work: In general,without limiting the generality thereof, the following surfaces,fixtures and equipment require a painted finish: a. New and existing gypsum board and plaster partition and wall surfaces . b. New and existing gypsum board and plaster ceilings and soffits. c. New and existing metal door frames. d. Existing exterior handrails. e. New and existing wood trim, interior and exterior. f. Exposed to view sprinkler piping. g. Exposed to view electrical conduit and raceways. h. Access panels and frames. 00 2. DO NOT PAINT the following surfaces and materials. a. Concealed from view surfaces, except as indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents or as specified herein. b. Chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, bronze, brass. c. Aluminum other than mill finished or factory primed. d. Factory finished mechanical and electrical equipment, pumps, machinery and similar items which occur in mechanical, storage or equipment rooms or areas. e. Factory finished materials, specialties, and accessories unless otherwise specified. f. Ceramic tile, acoustical tile, resilient flooring,wood flooring, and other integrally finished floor, wall and ceiling finishes. g. Plastic laminated millwork items. h. Fire resistant testing and certification labels, code required labels, safety warning labels, performance rating plates, nomenclature plates, identification plates, and similar other labels. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY: Wood trim items, setting and filling of nails, sanding of wood trim. B. Section 08115- STEEL DOOR FRAMES: Shop priming of metal frames. C. Section 08216- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS: Wood doors, unfinished. Paints 09910-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Apply sealant into joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions, using mechanical or power caulking gun equipped with nozzle of appropriate size, with sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints. a. The depth of sealant shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the specific joint function, but in no case exceed 1/2-inch in depth, nor less than 1/4-inch, regardless of the joint width. b, Maintain the outer edge of the sealant, where side faces of joints are in the same plane, back 1/8-inch from the faces. c. After placement of the sealant in joints with abutting materials, concave- tool the surfaces to uniform density, using a water-wet tool. Do not use detergents or soapy water for the tooling operations. d. Remove the temporary masking tape immediately after tooling, and before the sealant or caulking material has taken initial set. 3.6 CLEANING A. Completely clean all panel surfaces, clean all surfaces of adjacent surfaces which have been marked or soiled by the work of this Section, removing all excess On sealants and adhesives with solvents which will not damage the surfaces in any way. End of Section ! Plastic Wall Panels 09774-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations w Northampton, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of blocking, backing and support framing for work of this Section. Inspect all gypsum wall substrates and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surfaces receiving work of this Section must be dry, free from dirt, dust, grease and other foreign materials that will prevent proper adhesion of the wall panels. B. Verify gypsum board substrate surfaces are flat, conforming to Gypsum Association specifications for a Level 3 finish. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL w A. Install work in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for the conditions encountered. 3.4 APPLICATION OF PANELS WITH ADHESIVE A. Ensure that both panels and substrate are free of moisture, dirt, dust and other contaminants which may affect the bond of adhesive. B. Apply adhesive when temperature is between 50 and 90 degrees F. C. Trowel adhesive evenly on back of sheets, 1/4 deep with square notch trowel, or apply with cartridge gun spacing beads not more than 8 inches in center of panel and run a single bead along all edges of panel. D. Set panels in position and press against wall. Pull panel away from wall to flash off solvents. Press panel against wall again, apply adequate pressure to make full contact between panel and wall. Brace panel along vertical edges until adhesive is cured. 3.5 APPLICATION OF SEALANT AND MOLDINGS A. Install sealant and moldings, in sequence as recommended by the panel manufacturer to achieve a moisture resistant application of the panel system. B. After installation of panels and moldings has been completed, apply a continuous bead of specified sealant to all joints between the work of this Section and abutting w surfaces. Tool the sealant to a uniformly dense surface, level with the edges of moldings. Immediately remove all excess sealant from finished surfaces. 1. Install joint bead back-up in joints with abutting materials where joints are in ■,,, excess of 5/8-inch depth, and joints that have no back-up therein, placing the joint bead in the joint in a manner that will assure a constant depth 1/8 inch greater than the sealant and caulking material depth tolerances. a. Set beads into joints continuously, by slightly stretching during placement, to permit compression against sides of joint, without surface wrinkles or buckles. Plastic Wall Panels 09774-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09774 go PLASTIC WALL PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install polyvinyl chloride wall surround system at baths and showers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250- GYPSUM BOARD: Gypsum board substrate. B. Section 09300-TILE: Quarry tile flooring and base. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding wall finishes and smoke generation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions. 2. Shop drawings: 1/4 inch scale elevations showing panel joint locations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer specializing in applying the work of this Section with a minimum of 3 years experience and approved by product manufacturer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC PANEL SYSTEM A. System shall be furnished and installed by Universal Bath Systems, Chicopee, MA, 413-592-6876. 1. Model LB-110-CEI, 82 inches high. 2. Panels: .090 inch thick polyvinyl chloride. 3. Color: Bone. 4. Sealant: Dow Corning Corporation, Midland Ml.; product, "786". t 5. Adhesive: multi-purpose non-flammable, non-staining, construction adhesive recommended by the panel manufacturer. B. Moldings: One piece extruded moldings, color matched with panels, for application between abutting panels, inside and outside corners , and panel edges as recommended by the panel manufacturer and where indicated in the Drawings. Plastic Wall Panels 09774 -1 3/7/01 Rw Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts L. Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this Section. �w 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not permit work at or near finished wall covered areas. End of Section 0. ofts .w �w Vinyl Wall Covering 09723-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 3 -EXECUTION 00 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive the work of this Section, and conform to the requirements of the wall covering manufacturer. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply coverings unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and gypsum wallboard: 12 percent. D. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet, nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16-inch per foot. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrates and project on conditions. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use wall covering in roll number sequence. 1. Place wall covering sequentially in the order they are cut from the roll, including for filling all spaces above doors and above or below windows and similar locations. C. Trim additional selvage where required to achieve a color and pattern match at seams. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. D. Apply wall covering smooth,without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight. E. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. F. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. " G. Install wall covering before installation of bases, hardware, or other such items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. H. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll. I. Apply fabric covering to electrical, and telephone wall plates prior to replacing. J. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply covering with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. K. Install Termination trim. Vinyl Wall Covering 09723-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .. Northampton, Massachusetts B. Applicator, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wall covering materials to the project until all concrete, masonry, plaster and other wet work has been completed and dry. B. Deliver and store materials in original packaging showing manufacturer's identification, date of production and run number. C. Inspect roll materials on site to verify acceptance. w• D. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Do not store roll goods on end. Protect packaged 4W adhesive from temperature cycling and temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature above 60 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during, and after installation of wall coverings. B. Provide lighting level of 80 foot-candles measure mid-height at substrate surfaces. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Warranty shall cover faulty materials including: separation of vinyl facing from backing, staining caused by impurities in wall covering material or support mildew growth. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra materials of 25 linear feet for each color and type of wall covering installed to the Owner. B. Package and label each roll by manufacturer, color and pattern, and destination room number; store where directed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL WALL COVERING A. Vinyl wall covering is scheduled on the Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. Vinyl Wall Covering 09723 -2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09723 VINYL WALL COVERING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of substrate surfaces. B. Furnish and install vinyl wall coverings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250- GYPSUM BOARD: Gypsum board partitions, including joint treatment and sanding. B. Section 09910- PAINTS: Prime painting substrates scheduled to receive wall coverings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ASTM E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM F 793-Classification of Wallcovering by Durability Characteristics. 3. NFPA Publication 255-Tests of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and requlations for flame spread and smoke generation of interior finishes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330—SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each item furnished under this Section, including adhesives. 2. Warranty: Provide sample copies of manufacturers' actual warranties for all materials to be furnished under this Section, clearly defining all terms, conditions, and time periods for the coverage thereof. 3. Test Reports: Submit reports verifying flame and smoke ratings,when tested by UL, or agency approved by authority having jurisdiction. 4. Shop drawings: 1/4 inch scale elevations showing seaming layout. 5. Verification samples: 12 x 12 inch samples of wall coverings illustrating material color, texture and finish. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified herein. Vinyl Wall Covering 09723 -1 3/7/01 `MAROIS CONSTRUCTION CO.INC. 1• NR 262 Old Lyman Rd.•So.Hadley, MA 01075 Tel.(413)533-1320•Fax 532-1149 w +�Ir i 1!t 40 44 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts manufacturer. When manufacturer recommends first coat should be dry, check the moisture content of wood. When moisture content is same as original prior to application, sand with used 120 grit screen, clean and apply second coat.This should occur between 3 and 5 hours after first coat. If more than 5 hours has lapsed prior to starting the second coat of urethane, repeat sanding and cleaning procedures specified above and apply second coat. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of completed refinished areas from construction traffic until Substantial Completion of the General Contract. B. Cover the all wood floor surfaces, facings, and edgings,with heavyweight non- staining kraft paper and overlay with red-rosin paper, taping the edges to maintain position of the protection paper. Reapply papers as required to maintain floor protection. End of Section Refinishing Wood Floors 09691-3 4" 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .,. Northampton, Massachusetts B. Stain: Water based stain, fully compatible with finish system, in tone as selected by the Architect. C. Floor finish: Water base catalyzed urethane coating system, as manufactured by Basic Coatings, Des Moines IA., product"Street Shoe Commercial Wood Floor Finish" in Satin finish. 1. Sealer: as recommended by urethane coating system manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Nail loose boards and patch existing flooring with wood plugs. B. Remove dirt and built-up waxes by wiping floors with mop or cloth moistened with mineral spirts, or sealer as recommended by Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association and sealer/finish manufacturer, and immediately wipe dry. Remove white spots using specialized wood floor cleaners; remove all rubber heel marks, wipe areas dry. 1. Review with Architect in field stained areas of existing flooring, sand where ' directed to remove stains. C. Mask off adjacent surfaces and take precautions to contain dust. D. Sand all flooring, facings, and edgings, after installation of flooring and adjacent work is completed. Use a power sander, taking precautions to contain dust, sand flooring in several complete passes, commencing with 1-1/2 graduating to 1/2; followed by Numbers 0 and 00 for final sanding. Leave floor finish with no evidence of sander marks. E. Thoroughly vacuum-clean all sanded surfaces and other finish surfaces withing space, clean surfaces completely free from dust, and dry-mop with a tack cloth- clad mop. 3.2 FINISHING A. Prior to commencing application of finishing products, measure moisture content of flooring using moisture meter, and record results. Submit to Architect prior to refinishing. B. Stain wood to color and tone to match architect's accepted sample and field sample, applying stain at approximately 100 square feet per gallon; allow stain to fully dry , verify with moisture meter. C. When stain has cured, apply one coat of Basic Coatings product"Hydroline sealer' as recommended by manufacturer. When that moisture content of wood is same as original prior to application, sand/buff coat with a used 120 grit screen. D. Vacuum up all dust and tack with a clean water dampened towel. Apply second coat of sealer and, repeat sanding and cleaning procedures. E. Permit sealer to dry overnight prior to finishing with catalyzed urethane. Re-sand and clean as required. F. Mix catalyst with urethane in strict adherence to manufacturers' instructions.Apply one coat of catalyzed urethane with a coverage rate as recommended by Refinishing Wood Floors 09691-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09691 REFINISHING WOOD FLOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Prepare surfaces and refinish existing wood flooring where shown on the Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: „ 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data for finish system materials, with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended maintenance procedures. 2. Verificsation samples: Stain finish on same specie of wood as existing. B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Maintenance data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, a suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re- finishing, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.3 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field samples under provisions of Section 01400 -QUALITY CONTROL for purpose of verifying selected stain tone and color. B. Provide on-site samples, minimum12 square feet, illustrating selected stain with sealer overcoat, locate where directed. 00 C. Accepted samples may remain as part of the work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 0 A. Applicator specializing in applying the work of this Section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience of the type of flooring system specified. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature between 55 and 80 degrees Fahrenheit, with a relative humidity of between 35 and 50 percent for 48 hours prior to delivery and storage of the flooring materials at the area; maintain such conditions throughout the installation and finishing period, and thereafter until Owner's Final Acceptance or Owner's occupancy. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Sandpapers: Number 1-1/2 graduating to 1/2; followed by Numbers 0 and 00 for final sanding, except as otherwise recommended by the flooring finish manufacturer. Refinishing Wood Floors 09691-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ., Northampton, Massachusetts 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces upon completion of the installation. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. End of Section w� Carpet 09680-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.3 INSTALLATION -CUSHION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Layout cushion using longest lengths and maximum sized pieces possible. C. Lay out cushion so that carpet seams will not align directly over cushion seams. Secure by spot adhesive to sub-floor. D. Butt edges together and tight to edge of carpet gripper, tape all joints. E. Remove air pockets and ridges and slightly stretch.Anchor cushion securely around projections and contours. F. Install edge strips using maximum length pieces. Secure to sub-floor. 3.4 INSTALLATION -CARPET A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. B. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, 10 true, and unfrayed. C. Locate seams in areas of least traffic. Join seams in method recommended by manufacturer, form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. D. Run all carpet in the same direction. Plan and install carpet in all areas so that single pieces per area shall be used to the fullest extent possible. No seams will be permitted in areas which are 12 feet, or less, in width. E. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate any change of color or pattern between rooms w under door centerline. F. Carefully measure all cut-outs at the project. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. Blind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. G. Cut carpet 1.4 inch from walls to allow re-stretching.Fit carpet tight to vertical interruptions, leaving no gaps. H. Lay carpet tight and flat on cushion, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture within any one area. I. Install one piece gripper edging strip where carpet terminates and at other floor coverings. Where splicing cannot be avoided, seam ends tight and flush J. Make all seams in carpeting and entry mat by back-cutting the carpet or mat on an angle so that the face yarn of abutting pieces intermingles, and provides a practically invisible transition at each seam location. Center seams, occurring at door openings, parallel to, and directly under, the doors. Seams occurring at corridor change of direction shall follow wall line parallel to carpet direction. Do not center seams, perpendicular to, in the path of travel to doors. K. Install specified edging wherever carpeting abuts a dissimilar flooring material, except where wood thresholds, or resilient floor tile trim occurs. Carpet 09680-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Filler for patching, smoothing and leveling subfloors and underlayments: Portland cement-based latex underlayment acceptable to flooring manufacturer, equal to the following: 1. Ardex, Inc., products"Feather Flash" and "Ardex SD-P". 2. Quikrete Companies, product"Fast-Set Underlayment 1248". '" 3. Silpro Masonry Systems Inc., product"Ultra Skim and Speedtop" D. Carpet pad adhesive: Latex based, non-flammable in wet state, equal to W.W. go Henry Company, Huntington Park CA., product"377'. E. Carpet gripper: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suite application, with attachment devices. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Ensure that newly placed concrete has cured for a minimum period of 30 days and that moisture content of concrete is within range specified by adhesive manufacturer. ■* C. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with a maximum variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet, and are ready to receive work. D. Request correction of defects in receiving surfaces which are not correctable by the methods specified herein. Do not commence work until such defects are entirely corrected. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges, and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks,joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat and hard surface, as required to " ensure that carpeted surfaces will be level to within 1/8 inch tolerance in 10 feet in any direction. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Thoroughly sweep and vacuum substrate and remove all foreign matter. E. Measure all areas to receive materials to be furnished and installed hereunder, and verify in the field their actual dimensions, including wall-to-wall dimensions, offsets, door locations, and details, fixed equipment, and all other installed items. Extra charges will not be allowed because of lack of familiarity with actual project conditions. Use largest carpet widths to produce minimum number of seams. Small pieces of carpet will not be acceptable. F. Unroll carpet for adjustment to environmental conditions at least 24 hours prior to installation. so Carpet 09680-4 w, 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, deliver to the Owner extra materials for future repairs and maintenance, an amount equal to 8 square yards for each color, pattern and type of carpet installed. B. Clearly label and package extra materials securely to prevent damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Carpet is scheduled on the Drawings. 2.2 CARPET CUSHION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. O'Neill Division/Leggett& Platt Inc., Villa Rica GA. 2. G.S. Industries, Inc., Newton NC. so B. Carpet Cushion: Synthetic fiber carpet cushion, equal to Leggett& Platt product "Hartex Super" and G.S. Industries product"Performer Plus" meeting the following minimum criteria: 1. Density: (ASTM D 3574) 9.0 Ibs/cu.ft. 2. Thickness: (ASTM D 3574) 3/8 inch 3. Tensil Strength: (ASTM D 2261) 25 pounds/square inch 4. Flammability Pill: (DOC-FF 1-70) Pass 5. Radiant Panel: (ASTM E 84) .52 6. Roll Width: 12 feet 2.3 ACCESSORIES f" A. Adhesives for carpeting: NFPA Class A or UBC Class 1 types, as determined by ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test, as recommended by Carpet manufacturer for application and intended use.Acceptable manufacturers include: 1. Advanced Adhesive Technology, Inc, Dalton GA. 2. DAP Incorporated, Dayton OH. 3. W.W. Henry Company, Huntington Park CA. 4. Macklanburg-Duncan Company, Oklahoma City, OK. 5. Roberts Consolidated Industries, Inc., City of Industry, CA. B. Vinyl transition strips, carpet reducers, edgings and accessories: Homogeneous vinyl, in colors as selected by the Architect. 1. Acceptable manufacturers: !!" a. Johnsonite, Middlefield OH. b. Mercer Products Company, Orlando FL. c. Roppe Corporation, Fostoria OH d. Vinyl Products Inc., Floor Products Division, Sheboygan WI. 2. Transition strips: equal to Johnsonite model: Carpet 09680-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .� Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Manufacturer's sample warranties_ 4. Manufacturer's certificate: Provide certificate stating that the carpet, and other related materials to be supplied hereunder meet all requirements specified herein. 5. Verification samples: a. 12 inch long samples of edge strip and base gripper. b. 8-1/2 by 11 inch sample of cushion. c. After initial selection of carpet and color blends has been made by the Architect: 18 inches by 27 inches sample of selected carpet for final approval of the Architect. Approved samples shall be used as the standard of quality and colors for materials furnished under this Contract. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in carpet installation of the type specified herein "' with a minimum of 3 years documented experience, and approved by carpet manufacturer. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Store materials for 3 days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature and humidity stability. 1e B. Ventilate spaces where work of this Section occurs, during and for a period of 72 hours after completion of curing.Ventilate to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of fumes, vapors, and gases. Provide temporary fan units and ducting as required to for venting operations 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING w� A. Store all carpeting material under cover in dry, well-ventilated spaces as soon as delivered. Protect carpeting from damage, dirt, stain, moisture, and mildew. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to ensure carpet is not installed until dust generating activities have terminated and work overhead is completed. B. Install carpet after interior wet work is complete and fully cured. 1.9 WARRANTY +.r A. Furnish the following warranties under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Carpet manufacturer's 10 year warranty which shall include texture retention, wear, and static protection and edge ravel resistance and run resistance strength for the life of the carpet. Commencing on the date of substantial completion. 2. Carpeting installer's written guarantee covering prompt and proper replacement of any and all carpeting which indicates improper installation workmanship and/or defective material within twelve months from completion of the installation and acceptance thereof by the Architect, said corrective work being performed by the Carpeting installer at no cost to the Owner. Carpet 09680-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09680 CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prepare substrates to receive carpet as required to ensure specified tolerance level for finish surface of carpeting. Preparation work includes patching, smoothing and leveling subfloors and underlayment. B. Furnish and install 1. Carpeting over cushion underlay, where indicated on the Drawings, including all accessories necessary to complete the work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY:Wood subfloor and underlayment. B. Section 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY:Wood thresholds and bases, installing metal thresholds. C. Section 08710- DOOR HARDWARE: Furnishing metal thresholds. D. Section 09656- LINOLEUM FLOORING: Straight resilient bases, where indicated in conjunction with carpeting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ASTM D 2859-Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. 2. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E 648-Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 4. NFPA: Publication 253-Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems. OF 5. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding flammability and smoke generation of interior finishes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties, for each item furnished hereunder, including carpet, cushion, accessories, adhesives, and leveling materials. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Provide manufacturer's application PO methods or installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Carpet 09680-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Resilient base: Install base on solid backing, bond to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Apply wall base to walls, columns, casework and other permanent fixtures in areas where base is required. 1. Install in lengths as long as practical. 2. Scribe to fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3. Form all external and internal corners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Cope inside corners and fit neatly. B. Place resilient transition strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. C. Resilient edge and transition strips: 1. Install edge strips at all edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. 2. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. As installation progresses, continually remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage. 1. Prohibit traffic on finished floor areas until flooring adhesive has fully set. 2. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. B. Sweep floors to remove all loose dirt and debris. C. Clean sheet linoleum floors: 1. Scrub floors using a one disc scrubbing machine with green nylon pad and water to which a neutral cleaning agent(less than pH9) has been added. 2. Rinse thoroughly and let dry 3. Apply manufacturer's recommended spray cleaning fluid containing 5 percent natural wax and no polymers. Dust wipe or dry mop. D. Provide protection of completed flooring areas from construction traffic until Substantial Completion of the General Contract. Cover the all resilient floor surfaces with heavyweight kraft paper and overlay with red-rosin paper, taping the edges to maintain position of the protection paper. Reapply papers as required to maintain floor protection. End of Section Linoleum Flooring 09656-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. Apply, trowel and float finish subfloor filler and leave a smooth, level, hard surface. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate, and ensure that substrate is dry, clean and smooth prior to application of flooring. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL .�e A. Install all products in strict accordance with each manufacturer's written installation procedures and other provisions specified herein. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until they have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. C. Neatly fit resilient materials to all intersecting surfaces, and make joints as inconspicuous as possible. D. Terminate flooring at centerline of door in closed position where adjacent floor finish is of different material or color. w E. Apply resilient materials to have uniform contact with receiving surfaces throughout, with tight joints, and with all finish surfaces smooth, in true plane, free from buckles,waves, and other imperfections. F. Extend resilient flooring to wall lines beneath all movable equipment and movable casework. Fit resilient flooring onto breaks and recesses, against non-resilient bases, around pipes and other protrusions, under saddles, and to and around other 4W fixed surfaces, making neat cuts in the flooring and minimizing joints. G. Install reducer strips as required to terminate flooring. Transition strips with carpet are provided under Section 09680. ■. 3.4 INSTALLATION - SHEET LINOLEUM FLOORING A. Install linoleum using conventional full-spread method and heat welded seams. Application shall be performed by factory trained mechanics franchised by the manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and using tools and techniques recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Do not reverse roll sheets. B. Cut sheet material into required lengths and sizes. Layout and cut to achieve minimum number of seams and for pattern match between abutting edges, Reverse every other sheet. C. Lay cut sheets flat and allow to come to room temperature prior to installation. Seams in corridors shall run perpendicular to corridor. D. Lay flooring so as to ensure full uniform contact with substrate and to produce finished surfaces which are smooth, even and in true planes, free of buckles, waves, and other imperfections. E. Install the sheets and roll the floor surface to work wrinkles and air pockets out past the outer edges. Linoleum Flooring 09656-4 Iw 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2.2 RUBBER BASE A. Rubber Bases: Rubber Base:4 inches high, coved, ribbed back, 118 inch thick, rounded top. Colors shall be as selected. Rubber base shall be furnished in continuous lengths, approximately 100 feet long. 1. Johnsonite, Middlefield OH. 2. Mercer Products Company, Orlando FL. 3. Roppe Corporation, Fostoria OH. 4. Vinyl Products Inc., Floor Products Division, Sheboygan WI. B. Base accessories: Premolded end stops of same material, size and color as base. Job-form all external and internal corners from base material, pre-molded corner pieces will not be acceptable 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Filler for patching, smoothing and leveling subfloors and underlayments: Portland cement-based latex underlayment acceptable to flooring manufacturer, equal to the Ida following: 1. Ardex, Inc., products"Feather Flash" and °Ardex SD-P". 2. Quikrete Companies, product"Fast-Set Underlayment 1248". 3. Silpro Masonry Systems Inc., product"Ultra Skim and Speedtop" B. Adhesive: 2 component polyurethane acceptable to the flooring manufacturer. C. Transition/reducing strips, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bull nose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect. D. Floor Cleaning material: Domestic floor detergent, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Ensure existing substrate is not cushion flooring or perimeter-bonded sheet flooring. Ensure substrate is firmly bonded to underlayment. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site ION conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION !" A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's requirements for preparation of substrate to receive resilient flooring. B. Remove, by light sanding and grinding, all protruding edges, high spots. Ensure that substrate is free from paint, varnish, wax, oil, existing adhesive residue, or other foreign matter. Linoleum Flooring 09656-3 3/7/01 .o Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Avoid color and pattern differential; provide flooring from one production run in any single room or contiguous areas. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING w A. Deliver resilient flooring and base materials in original, unopened packages and store protected for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve ,o temperature stability. B. Store materials in a clean dry, enclosed space off the ground and protected from the weather. Protect adhesives from freezing. 00 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Store resilient flooring materials and accessories in the spaces where they will be '®! installed for at least 72 hours before beginning installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees Fahrenheit in the areas where the work is completed. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's standard wear warranties for all flooring materials installed under this Section under provisions of Section 01780- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, deliver to the Owner extra flooring and base materials for future repairs and maintenance, from the same manufacturing runs as those installed, in the following amounts: 1. Flooring: 3 percent of each material in each color, and pattern installed. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING A. Sheet linoleum Flooring: Marbleized sheet linoleum; all natural resilient, self- sanitizing, bactericidal inhibiting effect flooring material. 1. Manufacturer: Forbo Industries Inc., Hazleton PA., product"Marmoleum". B. Flooring Construction: All natural materials consisting of linseed oil, cork,wood floor, resin binders, gum and dry pigments, mixed and calendered onto a natural jute backing. Total construction shall conform with FS LLL-F-1238A, and contain no asbestos. C. Linoleum Sheet flooring Physical Characteristics 1. Sheet width: 200 cm (6-6"). 2. Nominal Thickness: 2.5 mm (1/10 inch). 3. Backing: Jute. D. Pattern and color shall extend throughout total thickness of wear surface. Color and patterns are as indicated on Drawings, where not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full available range. Linoleum Flooring 09656-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09656 LINOLEUM FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 40 A. Preparation of and leveling of substrate. B. Furnish and install the following: 10 1. Coved resilient base at linoleum flooring. 2. Straight(un-coved) resilient base at carpeted areas. 3. Vinyl transition strips wherever edges of linoleum flooring materials abut ok dissimilar flooring, where no thresholds occur. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500- CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS: application of protection paper to finished resilient flooring. B. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Plywood underlayment. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials and assemblies conforming to applicable building codes and regulatory agencies for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements of flooring and base trim in accordance with ASTM E 84. B. Provide flooring material to meet the following fire test performance criteria as tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory: 1. ASTM E 648 ( Critical Radiant Flux)of 0.45 wafts per sq. cm. or greater, Class 1. 2. ASTM E 662 ( Smoke Generation )Maximum Specified Optical Density of 450 or less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: - 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions for each specified product. 2. Samples for selection: Manufacturers'sample chain of colors and patterns available for selection by Architect. 3. Verification Samples: a. Sheet flooring: 12 by 12 inch illustrating color, and pattern for each color and type of flooring selected. b. Resilient base: Each type and color selected, 24 inches long. c. Edging: 12 inches long demonstrating profile, thickness, size and color. Linoleum Flooring 09656-1 317/01 MW Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on finished floor areas until flooring adhesive has fully set. B. Prohibit washing, scrubbing or other similar`wet' operations to occur on finished floor areas for a minimum period of 5 calendar days after installation. C. Provide protection of completed flooring areas from construction traffic until Substantial Completion of the General Contract. Cover the all resilient floor surfaces with heavyweight kraft paper and overlay with red-rosin paper, taping the w� edges to maintain position of the protection paper. Reapply papers as required to maintain floor protection. 3.6 CLEANING A. As installation progresses, continually remove excess adhesive from surfaces without damage. 1. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads,other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. B. Sweep floors to remove all loose dirt and debris. C. Not sooner than five days after installation, clean all materials installed hereunder with a non-abrasive commercial detergent approved by the material manufacturers, and thoroughly rinse with clear water. D. After cleaning and polishing, ensure that the flooring is protected with heavy kraft paper. End of Section am 4W A& Rubber Flooring 09654-4 r 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts F. For sealing joints between the top of wall base and irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. G. Provide transition/reducing strips, tapered to meet abutting materials. H. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, rubber composition,tapered or bull nose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available. PART 3 -EXECUTION pe 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's requirements for preparation of substrate to receive resilient flooring. B. Remove, by light sanding and grinding, all protruding edges, high spots. Ensure that substrate is free from paint, varnish,wax, oil, or other foreign matter. C. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. Apply, trowel and float finish subfloor filler and leave a smooth, level, hard 00 surface. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate, and ensure that substrate is dry, clean and smooth prior to application of flooring. E. Apply primers as recommended by adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install all products in strict accordance with each manufacturer's written installation procedures and other provisions specified herein. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until they have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Resilient edge and transition strips: 1. Install edge strips at all edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. Rubber Flooring 09654-3 3/7/01 MW Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .0 Northampton, Massachusetts a. Manufacturers' sample chain of colors and patterns available for oft selection by Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver resilient flooring and base materials in original, unopened packages and store protected for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. as B. Store materials in a clean dry, enclosed space off the ground and protected from the weather. Protect adhesives from freezing. 1.6 WARRANTY so A. Under the provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, provide manufacturer's standard wear warranties for all flooring and stair tread materials installed under this Section. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER STAIR TREADS/RISERS AND LANDINGS A. Stair treads/risers: Raised-stud one piece synthetic rubber nosing-tread-riser combination, nominally 50 inches wide and 0.16 inch thick, with 0.04 inch thick a,s raised round studs; equal to Freudenberg Building Systems Inc., Lawrence MA, product"Norament-925B,Article 489". Stair tread/riser shall be in solid color as selected by the Architect from any of the manufacturer's standard colors available. B. Landings: Raised-stud sheet synthetic rubber flooring tile, nominally 39 by 39 inches in size and 0.16 inch thick,with 0.04 inch thick raised round studs; [equal to] Freudenberg Building Systems Inc., Lawrence MA, product"Norament-925B, Article 354". Flooring color will match color selected by Architect for stair treads/risers. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Filler for patching, smoothing and leveling subfloors and underlayments: Portland cement-based latex underlayment acceptable to flooring manufacturer, equal to the following: •� 1. Ardex, Inc., products"Feather Flash" and "Ardex SD-P". 2. Quikrete Companies, product"Fast-Set Underlayment 1248". 3. Silpro Masonry Systems Inc., product"Ultra Skim and Speedtop" ,ra B. Adhesive for rubber stair treads and landings: 2-part epoxy adhesive, equal to Henry product"191 -Epoxy Adhesive". am C. Transition strips: Homogeneous vinyl, of profiles required for thickness of abutting materials, in colors as selected by the Architect. .t16 D. Cleaning material: Domestic floor detergent, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. E. For patching, smoothing and leveling concrete, provide portland cement-based am latex underlayment as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. so Rubber Flooring 09654-2 .r. 3/7/01 tAAI Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09654 RUBBER FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of and leveling of substrate. B. Furnish and install the following 1. Raised-stud sheet rubber stair treads/risers. 2. Transition strips wherever edges of resilient rubber flooring materials abut dissimilar flooring, where no thresholds occur. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 -CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS: application of protection paper to finished resilient flooring. B. Section 09310-CERAMIC TILE: ceramic tile flooring and marble threshold. lk C. Section 09680 - CARPET: carpet and transition strips. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials and assemblies conforming to applicable building codes and regulatory agencies for flamelfuel/smoke rating requirements of flooring and base trim in accordance with ASTM E 84. B. Provide flooring material to meet the following fire test performance criteria as tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory: 1. ASTM E 648 ( Critical Radiant Flux)of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class 1. 2. ASTM E 662 ( Smoke Generation ) Maximum Specified Optical Density of 450 or less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Submit the manufacturer's certification that the resilient flooring has been - tested by an independent laboratory and complies with the required fire tests. 3. Shop drawings: 1/4 inch scale plans of each flooring area scheduled for Work of this Section; indicate layout of the units and direction of tile patterns, identify selected colors and patterns. f, show location of welded seams and joints with abutting materials]. Drawings shall bear dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project. 4. Samples for selection: Rubber Flooring 09654-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts G. Fit acoustical ceiling tile units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. Install acoustical ceiling tile level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp or dents. 1. Field cut tegular type tile with a tegular reveal at all edge conditions. 2. At bath rooms, and where required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, install retention clips, provide two clips per ceiling panel installed on opposite sides of panel. ' 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from flat and level surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads: 2 degrees. 3.6 CLEANING A. Properly clean surfaces of panels and open grids free from dirt and handling marks. Wherever surfaces cannot be cleaned by normal methods or have defects, remove and replace with new components. End of Section Acoustical Ceilings 09510-5 3/7/01 ow Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .r Northampton, Massachusetts 2. USG product number"20428." 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work , of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Carefully examine all receiving surfaces, to which attachments will be made hereunder, and determine the most practical way of making such attachments. w Request Architect's approval of any attachment method which differs from that indicated on the approved shop drawings before proceeding with installation. B. Permit acoustical ceiling tile to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content prior to installation. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Locate system on room axis, leaving equal sized border units of not less than one- half tile width. B. Install all components of the suspended grid systems in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the approved shop drawings, conforming to ASTM C- 636 requirements. Ensure a deflection not to exceed 1/360 span of 48-inch simple span. +. C. Install specified edge moldings wherever ceilings intersect a wall or partition surface, and around all items having any dimension of 4 inches or more which penetrate the ceilings. Set moldings absolutely level, using as long lengths as practicable, and secure with fasteners recommended by manufacturer for the type of substrate. 1. Sealant Bed:Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant(type AA specified under Section 07900), concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings. 2. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches on center. ,,W and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 4W D. Install hanger attachments to overhead construction in accordance with the approved shop drawings, spacing the attachments not more than 48 inches on centers over location of each main tee member. 40 1. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers to span the extra distance. 2. Install hanger wire to attachments with triple twists. E. Install main tees parallel to the long dimension of each area, spacing the tees 48 inches on centers. Secure the bottom of hanger wires through slots in the main tee members and tie with triple twists. Level the main tees as the work progresses. F. Uniformly space the cross tees at 24 inches on centers, and secure the cross tees into the main tees as recommended by the system manufacturer. Acoustical Ceilings 09510-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 6. Acceptable products: a. Armstrong Fine Fissured, medium texture, product no. 1833. C. Type ACT-2 Typical ceiling panel: !! 1. Panel size: 24 by 24 inch by 5/8 inch thick. 2. Panel edge: Angled tegular. 3. Description:.ASTM E-1264, Type 3, Form 2. 4. Color: White. 5. Acoustical characteristics: go a. NRC: 0.55 b. CAC: 35 6. Acceptable products: a. Armstrong Fissured, medium texture, product no. 705. 2.2 CEILING GRIDS A. Type ACT-1 Ceiling grid: 15/16 inch exposed grid, pre-finished all aluminum tee system, in white color matching ceiling tile. Provide with matching hemmed edge wall moldings having aluminum capping or all aluminum edge trim. Exposed face color shall be white matching ceiling tile.Acceptable products are: 1. Armstrong: AL Prelude Plus Exposed Tee System 2. Chicago Metallic: 830 Series. 3. Donn; DXLA series. B. Type ACT-2 Ceiling grid: 15/16 inch exposed tee grid in white color matching ceiling panel; acceptable products are: 1. Armstrong; 15/16" Prelude Exposed Tee System. 2. Chicago Metallic; 200 Snap-Grid System. 3. Donn; DX Series. 2.3 ACCESSORIES r A. Edge moldings: Standard edge trim: Grid system manufacturer's standard L-shape edge trim compatible with exposed grid system and color matched. B. Edge/wall moldings where ceiling abuts walls and drop down soffits: Stepped profile"shadow" molding compatible with exposed grid system and color matched 1. Armstrong model 7820. 2. Chicago Metallic model 1460. 3. USG/Donn model MS174. C. Hanger attachments: Of the most appropriate types for the specific receiving surfaces. D. Hangers: ASTM A641 Soft temper, pre-stretched galvanized carbon steel wire,with a yield stress of at least 3 times design load, but not less than 12 gage. E. Retention clips at bath room: 1. Chicago metallic product number"935' Acoustical Ceilings 09510-3 3/7/01 ,. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ++ Northampton, Massachusetts a. 1/4 inch scale plans of each room or space; indicate grid layout and related dimensioning,junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to the system. b. Large scale installation details of special conditions. c. All drawings bearing dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project. 3. Verification samples: a. 12 by 12 inch samples of acoustical units, illustrating material and finish. b. 12 inch long samples of suspension system components including main runners, cross runner and edge trim. ar 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator specializing in applying the work of this Section with a minimum of 3 years experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling panel in original, unopened packages and store protected in a fully enclosed space. 1.7 WARRANTY A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacture's guarantee of all materials Ok furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other 10 provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS ■. A. Provide to the Owner, extra ceiling panel and suspension components, 3 percent of each type installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,s 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Specified Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster PA. No substitution will be accepted. B. Type ACT-1: 1. Panel size: 24 by 24 inch by 5/8 inch thick. 2. Panel edge: Angled tegular. ft 3. Description: ASTM E-1264, Type III, Form 1. 4. Color: White. 5. Acoustical characteristics: a. N RC: 0.55 b. CAC: 35 w Acoustical Ceilings 09510-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09510 W ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL - 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install suspended acoustical tile ceiling including suspension system and associated edge moldings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 15-MECHANICAL: 1. Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. " 2. Air diffusion devices in ceiling. B. Division 16-ELECTRICAL: 1. Fire alarm and smoke detection equipment mounted in ceiling system. 2. Light fixtures and independent hangers for suspended fixtures. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ASTM C 635- Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 2. ASTM C 636- Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. 3. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material "UL Classified" r 4. ASTM E 119- Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials"UL Classified". 5. ASTM E 1414-Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. "UL Classified". 6. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding flammability and smoke generation of interior finishes. B. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. CISCA(Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association) -Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Shop drawings: Acoustical Ceilings 09510-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts E. Provide hard finished grout which is uniform in color, smooth and without voids, pin holes, or low spots. F. Remove all excess grout immediately after installation thereof, wash and rinse the free from grout film, and tool grout to a uniform density throughout. 3.8 REPAIR A. Replace cracked chipped, broken, and otherwise defective tiles. B. Remove work not complying with requirements of the Contract Documents or the referenced standards, and promptly replace with work which does comply. 3.9 CLEANING A. After completion of the work of this Section, remove equipment, and clean all wall, partition, and floor areas free from deposits of mortar, grout, and other materials installed under this Section, and wash completed tilework. 1. Do not use acid or acid cleaners to clean tile. 2. When the is thoroughly clean and dry, polish glazed tile with clean dry cloths. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface until grout and tile materials are fully set, and not less than 72 hours. Protect floor surfaces with heavy red-rosin paper or kraft paper. 40 End of Section 40 u�► Ceramic Tile 09310-7 1A 3/7/01 .o Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations AW Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Extend control joints full thickness of tile, setting bed and reinforcing. C. Keep open joints free of grout and debris until filled with sealant. Install non- contaminating temporary joint filler to maintain joints in clean condition until installation of joint backing and sealant under Section 07900-JOINT SEALERS. 3.5 FLOORING INSTALLATION "F"-THIN-SET WITH ANTI-FRACTURE AND WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. General: Install in accordance with ANSI A108.5, and similar to TCA installation method number F122, and as additionally specified herein below. Apply materials in strict accordance with the written instructions and recommendations of setting materials manufacturer. .r 1. Setting materials: a. Membrane:Anti-fracture membrane (DIN18156, part 2). b. Bonding coat: Latex modified portland cement(ANSI Al 18.4). 2. Grout materials:Acrylic modified Portland cement sanded grout(ANSI Al 18.6). B. Install liquid applied waterproofing membrane with reinforcing as recommended by manufacturer over entire tile substrate area. C. Install latex/portland cement mortar bed over cured anti-fracture membrane to a nominal thickness of 3/32 inch. D. Grouting: 1. Allow tile to fully set prior to grouting; do not grout in less than 48 hours after installation of tile. 2. Grout tile joints in accordance with ANSI A108.10 and as additionally specified. 3.6 INSTALLATION -STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Install in accordance with ANSI A108.5, TCA installation method number F113, and as additionally specified herein below.Apply materials in strict accordance with the written instructions and recommendations of setting materials wr manufacturer. B. Grouting: Install in accordance with installation requirements of abutting tile. 3.7 INSTALLATION - GROUT A. Remove spacers, ropes, glue, and similar foreign matter prior to grouting. B. Force the maximum amount of the approved grout into joints in accordance with pertinent recommendations contained in ANSI A108.10 and for epoxy grouts, ANSI A108.6. C. Fill in joints of cushion-edge tile to depth of the cushion; fill joints of square-edge tile flush with the surface. D. Fill all gaps and skips. Do not permit mortar or mounting mesh to show through grouted joints. MW Ceramic Tile 09310-6 am 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.2 PREPARATION A. During the operation of work of this Section, protect existing finishes against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Clean, or repair all existing materials which are soiled or otherwise damaged by Work of this 00 Section, to match original profiles and finishes. Existing materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work to match existing. B. Vacuum clean substrate surfaces. C. Apply conditioner or primer to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS in A. Installation Standards: The American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile, 1992 edition (ANSI A108), is hereby made a part of this specification. All work of this Section shall be installed in accordance with the requirements contained in referenced ANSI A108 standards, and as additionally specified below, and in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications of those products used. B. Installation Methods: Schedule of substrate conditions, generic type of tile used, with appropriate setting and grouting methods are listed at end of this Section. 1. Use trowel shapes and sizes as recommended by setting materials manufacturer. 2. Back-butter tiles as required to provide coverage indicated. C. Tile Patterns and types: Tile patterns are shown on the Drawings, if more information is required, obtain the necessary information from the Architect. Do not interrupt tile pattern around openings. D. Tile Layout and installation 1. Layout tile on room axis, leaving equal sized border units of not less than one- half tile width. 2. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly.Align base and wall joints. 3. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, full without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL JOINTS A. General: Provide control joints where indicated on the Drawings, and as directed by the Architect. Where not indicated, provide joints per the following: 1. Where tile abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, dissimilar floors, curbs, columns, pipes, and where changes occur in substrate materials. B. Control joints: 1. Form control joints neat, straight, and uniformly wide equal to width of normal tile joint. Cut tile neatly and to accurate radius at exposed junction with pipes, etc. Ceramic Tile 09310-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. All materials shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured. 3. Waterproofing ,crack suppression & anti-fracture membranes shall meet the following physical requirements: a. Water Permeability: (at 30ft.hydro/0.9 atmos/91.2kPa)Nil b. Elongation at break(ASTM D-751): 40% c. Service Temperatures: -20-to+280-F(-28-to +137-C) „ d. Tensile breaking strength: 2950psi (20.4MPa;207kg/cm") e. Bond strength to concrete: 350psi (2.4MPa;24kg/cm-) f. Resistance to chemicals (90 day immersion): 1) Brine solution Not Affected 2) Sugar solution Not Affected 3) Milk Not Affected 4) 10%Acid Not Affected 5) 10%Alkali Not Affected 6) Toluol Softens 7) Urine Not Affected g. Rubber solvents or keytones Not Recommended h. Calcium chloride Excellent " i. Aromatic solvents Not Recommended j. Floor Tile Installation Evaluation (ASTM C627-81)900 cycles k. Service Rating (TCA) Extra Heavy Duty 4. Acceptable products are limited to: a. Mapei product: "Planicrete W" (urethane based). b. Laticrete product"Laticrete 9235 Waterproofing" (non-solvent based). 2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Grout for floors having joints 1/8 inch and greater width:Acrylic modified Portland cement sanded grout for floors conforming to ANSI 118.6.Acceptable products are limited to: 1. Mapei product: "Ultracolor'with acrylic latex additive "Plastijoints", 2. Laticrete product"Laticrete dry set wall grout"with acrylic latex additive"Grout admix 1776." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. 1. Verify that all concrete substrates are at least 28 calendar days old, completely cured and free of negative hydrostatic conditions or moisture problems. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and site conditions. Ceramic Tile 09310-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, deliver to the Owner extra materials in, an amount equal to 3 percent of the and trim of each color, finish and type installed. B. Clearly label and package extra materials securely to prevent damage. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE 0" A. Tile is scheduled on the Drawings. 2.2 STONE THRESHOLDS A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide marble thresholds complying with Class "A"of the Marble Institute of America, in color selected by the Architect from standard colors of the approved fabricator, shaped to provide a comfortable transition between tile and other floor finishes, with smooth matte surface finish and 60 in the dimensions and thickness shown on the Drawings. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Cement board, for use as substrate for ceramic tile: nominal 1/2 inch thickness manufactured for interior or exterior application, glass fiber reinforced, with a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 pounds per square inch and minimum flexural strength of 1,000 pounds per square inch. 1. Glasscrete Inc., product"Wonder-board." 2. W.R. Bonseal Inc., product: "Ultil-a-Crete". B. Thin-set polymer-modified Portland cement dry-set mortar for tile walls and floors: complying with the bond strength requirements of ANSI A118.4. 1. Acceptable products are limited to: AIw a. Mapei product: "Kerabond"with "Keralastic" additive. b. Laticrete product number 211"CreteFiller"with number 4237 additive. C. Self-leveling underlayment(factory pre-mixed)with primer. Provide primer at difficult(for adhesion)substrate conditions when recommended by manufacturer: Acceptable products are limited to: 1. Mapei product: "Ultra/Plan"or"UltraPlan MB"with "Primer UP" primer where recommended. 2. Laticrete product number 86-"Laticrete SLU", with "Laticrete SLU Primer" where recommended. D. Fluid applied anti-fracture and waterproofing membrane: Complying with German national standard (DIN18156, part 2), and ASTM C627 classification"Extra Heavy'. I Two component liquid rubber membrane cold applied, load bearing and non-toxic, used with 20 mil (0.5mm)thick flexible nonwoven rot-proof polyvinyl chloride reinforcing fabric. 1. Waterproof membrane shall be resistant to urine, dilute acid, alkali, sugar, brine, and food waste products. Ceramic Tile 09310-3 3/7/01 am Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. a. Include maintenance data and recommended cleaning materials, and cleaning and stain removal methods. 2. Verification samples: a. Mount tile and apply grout on one 24 by 24 inch cement backerboard „ board, for each the type and selected color, to indicate color and texture variations, tile flatness and joint size variations. b. Trim shapes and base, in selected colors in types and shapes indicated for project conditions. c. Stone threshold, 12 inch long samples in shaped profile. 3. Grade Certificates: Manufacturer's Master Grade Certificates submitted prior to shipment of tile to project. Comply with ANSI A137.1 for special purpose tiles. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ANSI/TCA A 137.1 and TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. B. Installer, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein. C. Tiles delivered to the job or installed in the work which do not fall within the accepted color and texture range demonstrated by the samples shall be removed from the site and replace with acceptable materials. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver tile in manufacturer's sealed cartons, grade-sealed by the manufacturer in accordance with ANSI A 137.1, with grade-sealed unbroken, and clearly marked as to contents, color, and quantity. B. Store and protect containers above floor level, keep dry until ready for use. C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store epoxy mortar and epoxy grouts at 70 degrees Fahrenheit(21° C)temperature for 24 hours prior to use. 1.7 WARRANTY +�► A. Provide 2 year, non pro-rated warranty under provisions of Section 01780- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Warranty shall provide for cracking, breakage or failure w of tile due to defective workmanship. 1. Materials must be compatible and from one source, single source responsibility for waterproofing, installation, Mortars and grouts.Job-site mixtures of sand portland cement and site dilution of additives shall not be permitted.: ok Ceramic Tile 09310-2 Im 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09310 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Flooring tile. 2. Tile base and associated trim. 3. Stone thresholds and saddles. 4. Fluid applied anti-fracture and waterproofing membrane. 5. Installation systems, adhesives, mortars and grouts. 6. Control joints in tiled floors. B. Perform drilling and cutting in tile surfaces, as required to accommodate 1► penetrating items of other trades,from templates and instructions furnished by the respective trades. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Underlayment. B. Section 07900—JOINT SEALERS: Backer rod and sealant at control joints. C. Section 10810-TOILET ACCESSORIES: Furnishing toilet accessories and installation templates. D. Division 15- MECHANICAL: Floor drains. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ANSI A108.11 - Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. 2. ANSI A108.5- Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 3. ANSI A108.10- Installation of Grout in Tilework. 4. ANSI A118.1 -Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. 5. ANSI A118.4- Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 6. ANSI A118.6- Ceramic Tile Grouts. 7. ANSI A118.9-Cementitious Backer Units. 8. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, latest edition. 9. ASTM C 627- Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems. 10. ASTM E 119- Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials. OKA Ceramic Tile 09310-1 3/7/01 ON Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Apply compound to all joints, edges, corners, fastener head depressions and abrasions in the surfaces, whether or not such conditions will be concealed from ' view. Sand completely smooth all compound surfaces, which will be exposed to view, and leave ready to receive applied coatings or finish. C. Provide the minimum levels of gypsum board finishes as defined by the Gypsum Association recommended specifications GA-214 and GA-216, per the following: 1. At areas hidden from view, except as otherwise specified: Level 0. 2. At areas hidden from view, requiring a fire rating: Level 1. .w 3. At surfaces scheduled to receive backed vinyl wallcoverings: Level 4. 4. At surfaces scheduled to receive plastic panels: Level 3. 5. At surfaces scheduled to receive egg-shell low-gloss painted finishes: Level 4. 3.7 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation for gypsum board partitions and ceilings from true flatness: 1/8 inch per 10 feet, noncumulative. End of Section .r� so ON Gypsum Board 09250-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts the written instructions of gypsum board manufacturer, together with the additional requirements specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Where fire-resistive rated assemblies are indicated, erect gypsum board systems in strict accordance with the manufacturers' UL listed test constructions for the !11M► required fire rating on each specific assembly. C. Install specified control joints where indicated on Drawings and where run of partitions, or furred surfaces exceeds 30 feet. 1. Locate control joints at corners of head frames of doors. 2. Run vertical control joints continuously to top of partition, shaft wall or furred area, as applicable. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Screw fasten only, gypsum board to framing and furring, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. At all door jambs screw fasten gypsum panels 8 inches on center to both box studs 1. Erect single layer fire-resistance rated gypsum board vertically. 2. Erect standard and moisture resistant layer board in most economical direction. B. Wherever items penetrate the gypsum board surfaces, use extra care in cutting the gypsum board to ensure a uniformly-dimensioned joint between the penetrating item and the gypsum board, and fill joints with specified sealant material. Verify the expected deflection factor of the penetrating members, and cut the gypsum 40 accordingly, to prevent damage thereto from the deflecting members. C. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with approved liquid OR sealer. 1. If shellac is used, apply in thin layers to dry quickly. D. Install corner beads at all exterior corners of gypsum boards. Install casings(metal trim)wherever gypsum board meets a dissimilar material, and in other locations indicated on the Drawings, except at floors where bottom of the board will be concealed by base, integral with flooring, resilient base, wood base or carpeted base. 3.5 APPLICATION OF ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Install sealant and backing in accordance with the requirements of Section 07900- JOINT SEALERS and with the recommendations of ASTM C 919. B. Seal all penetrations in partition types designated for"acoustical" insulation. Penetrations to receive sealant include electrical boxes, plumbing, heating and air conditioning ducts, telephone, intercom hookups and similar items. C. Seal all partition perimeters prior to taping or compounding.Where perimeters are edged with metal trim, apply sealant and backing material between trim and dissimilar material. 3.6 APPLICATION OF JOINT TREATMENT A. Install joint tape at all joints where gypsum boards abut and where boards form internal corners, whether or not such joints will be concealed from view. Gypsum Board 09250-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations + Northampton, Massachusetts 2_ Joint Compound for setting tape: `Speed-setting type compound',field mixed equal to USG "Durabond 20"or Gold bond "Stay Smooth 30." ft 3. Joint Compound for finishing: field mixed joint compound equal to USG "Durabond 90" and Gold bond "Stay Smooth 90", or factory pre-mixed compound equal to USG "Ready-Mixed Joint Compound" and Gold Bond "All Purpose Compound". C. Fasteners: 1. Type W, bugle head screws complying with ASTM C 646,for applying gypsum board to wood framing and furring. a. 1-1/4 inch long for single layer gypsum board b. 1-5/8 inches long for double-layer gypsum board, 2. Ceiling buttons, perforated type, 1 inch diameter, for use at multiple layered gypsum board ceiling systems. .. D. Joint Sealers 1. Interior acoustical sealant type"AA"with backing materials as specified under Section 07900-JOINT SEALERS. E. Liquid sealer for cuts, holes and ends of moisture resistant board; provide one of the following or acceptable equal. 1. Shellac type sealer: mix 4 pounds of orange or bleached shellac dissolved in 1 gallon of denatured ethyl-alcohol. 2. Varnish type sealer: Fast setting marine varnish. aR 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all items which are to be enclosed by Work of this Section, have been permanently installed, inspected and approved. B. Inspect framing and other substrates; verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. During the operation of gypsum board work, protect all wood, metal, glass, flooring, and other finished materials against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. 3.3 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. General: Perform erection procedures for the various gypsum board system conditions, except as otherwise specified, as set forth in GA 201, GA 216,GA 220, Gypsum Board 09250-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install gypsum board until all pipes, ducts, conduits, and other such items which are to be enclosed thereby, have been permanently installed, inspected and approved. B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Gypsum board products: a. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago IL. (USG). b. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Products Division, Charlotte NC. (Gold Bond). c. Georgia Pacific Corporation, Gypsum Division, Atlanta GA. B. The design and details as shown on the Drawings and the model numbers specified herein are to establish the standards of design and quality and not to limit competition. 2.2 BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard gypsum board: UL fire resistance rated, ASTM C 36 `Type X' board, 5/8 inch thick, except where 1/2 inch thickness is indicated on Drawings, of lengths to minimize end joints, with tapered edges,equal to: USG Sheetrock brand 'Firecode C-Core' or Gold Bond brand "Fireshield G, Enhanced Version". B. Moisture resistant(MR) gypsum board (green board): Conforming to ASTM C 630, 5/8 inch thick, of lengths to minimize end joints, with tapered edges. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Gypsum board metal trim accessories: 1. Corner beads: 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 inch corner bead for finishing with joint compound fabricated from galvanized steel conforming with ASTM C-1047, equal USG product"Dur-A-Bead - number 103" or Gold Bond 1-1/4 inch Wallboard Corner Bead. 2. Casing beads: Edge casing bead with 1/2 inch back leg, for finishing with joint compound fabricated from galvanized steel conforming with ASTM C-1047, equal to USG Metal Trim No. 200A, or Gold Bond Wallboard Casing number 100. 3. Control joints: Solid zinc"V-shaped control joint, having 3/32 inch thick perforated grounds, equal to USG Control Joint No. 093. B. Tapes and compound: 1. Joint tape: Nominal 2 inch wide, high strength, cross-fibered paper drywall tape. Gypsum Board 09250-3 lIA1 3/7/01 .w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,w Northampton, Massachusetts 9. GA 201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. 10. GA 214- Recommended Specifications for Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. ` 11. GA 216-Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 12. GA 220- Recommended Specifications for Gypsum Board Winter Related Job Problems. 13. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for fire rated assemblies. * + 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. w" 2. Shop drawings: Details of any special conditions associated with fireproofing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE w A. Applicator, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein. B. Fire resistance ratings: Where gypsum board systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and assemblies of the rating required, tested per ASTM E 119, which are identical to those indicated by reference to Gypsum Association file numbers in "Fire Resistance Design Manual"or to design designation in the Underwriters Laboratories"Fire Resistance Directory"or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and to the Owners' insurance underwriters. 1.6 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside, under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from •" construction traffic and other causes. 1. Neatly stack board materials flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle board materials so to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. D. Protect trim, accessories and corner beads from being bent or damaged. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. In accordance with GA 216, maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit 48 hours before, during taping and compounding, and until completely dry thereafter. �r Gypsum Board 09250-2 3/7/01 M1 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations l Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES so A. Furnish and install:taped, compounded and sanded gypsum board finishes including all trim and accessory components. B. Install access panels occurring in gypsum board work furnished by Section 08310- ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS, and by trades requiring the same. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01732-CUTTING AND PATCHING: Procedural and administrative requirements for cutting and patching. B. Section 01739-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: Removal of existing finishes, partitions and walls as indicated in the Drawings. C. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: 1. Supplemental wood framing and blocking supporting gypsum board. 2. Installation of metal door frames in gypsum board work. D. Section 07210-BUILDING INSULATION:Acoustical batt insulation. E. Section 08310-ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS: Shop primed access panels, occurring in partitions and walls. F. Section 09510-ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS: Suspended acoustical tile ceilings. G. Section 09910-PAINTS: Applied finish coatings. H. Division 15-MECHANICAL: Supply and return air registers. I. Division 16-ELECTRICAL: Independent hangers for suspended lighting fixtures. tt» 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES 1. ASTM C 36 -Gypsum Wallboard. 2. ASTM C 475-Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. 3. ASTM C 557-Standard Specification for Fastening Gypsum Board to Wood Framing. 4. ASTM C 630-Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 5. ASTM C 919- Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 6. ASTM C 1047-Accessories for Gypsum wall board and veneer base. ► 7. ASTM E 90-Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 8. ASTM E 119- Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Gypsum Board 09250-1 OR 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts k instructions of plaster manufacturer, together with the additional requirements specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Wherever fire-resistive rated assemblies are indicated on the Drawings, erect the plaster systems in strict accordance with the manufacturers' UL listed test constructions for the required fire rating on each specific assembly. 3.4 INSTALLATION PLASTER BASE A. Apply plaster base with long dimension perpendicular to framing or furring except at rated partitions with joints falling over a framing or furring member. Screw fasten to metal, or wood, framing and furring. Use maximum lengths of plaster base to reduce joints, stagger ends a minimum of 16 inches. Fit abutting ends and edges neatly with maximum of 1/16 inch gap between boards. B. Install specified control joints wherever plaster surfaces exceed 30 feet in any direction. Locate control joints at corners of head frames of doors, as far as practicable, and show locations of all control joints on shop drawings. Run vertical control joints continuously to top of partition, shaft wall, or furred area, as applicable. C. Install manufacturer's recommended joint treatment for internal corner joints and for all joints between abutting sheets of the boards, whether or not such joints will be concealed from view. D. Install corner beads at all exterior corners of plaster base. Install casings (screeds) wherever plaster meets a dissimilar material, and in other locations indicated on the Drawings, except at floors where bottom of the board will be concealed by vinyl or wood base. E. Wherever items penetrate the plaster base, surfaces, use extra care in cutting the plaster base to ensure a uniformly-dimensioned joint between the penetrating item and the plaster base, install plaster trim, and fill joints with specified sealant material. 3.5 APPLICATION -ONE COAT VENEER PLASTER A. Apply gypsum veneer plaster in accordance with ASTM C 843 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Embed tape with basecoat and fill beads; allow to set. Apply finish coat and immediately double back to a thickness of 1/16 to 3132 inch. C. Finish surface to flat, smooth dense surface ready for applied decorative treatment, free of surface blemishes and irregularities. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Install veneer base partitions with a maximum variation from true flatness of 1/8 inch per 10 feet, noncumulative. End of Section Gypsum Veneer Plaster 09213-5 I 3/7/01 no Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,m Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Corner beads: a. For one coat system: USG Dur-A-Bead, No. 800, or equal, galvanized, ow with expanded or perforated flanges. 2. Edge trim (grounds) w a. For one coat system: USG No. 801 B, or equal, galvanized, with expanded or perforated flanges. 3. Control joints: USG Control Joint No. 093, or equal, and perforated for one- coat veneer plaster application. 4. Vinyl Edge trim USG No. P-1, or equal, PVC, for use at concealed edge with floor in acoustical insulated partitions. C. Plaster board joint reinforcement: Glass fiber mesh reinforcing tape for use with veneer plaster. D. Laminating adhesive: USG Durabond Joint Compound 90, USG Ready-mixed All Purpose Compound, or equal. E. Sealant material: Acrylic latex, permanently elastic, non-staining, non-shrinking, non-migrating and paintable. 2.5 MIXES A. Veneer plaster basecoat: Mix in accordance with water proportions identified on bag. Mix for 2 to 5 minutes with cage-type paddle mixer attached to drill rated for 1000 revolutions per minute. B. Veneer plaster-prepared finish: Add all but 1 to 2 quarts of the required water to a do non-plastic mixing container. Mix for 1 to 2 minutes, add up to 1 to 2 quarts of retained water and then mix for 1 to 2 minutes more. Mix using cage-type paddle mixer attached to drill rated for 1000 revolutions per minute. "► PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION so A. Verify that all items which are to be enclosed by Work of this Section, have been permanently installed, inspected and approved. B. Inspect wood framing and other substrates; verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. a� C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION + A. During the operation of veneer plaster work, protect all wood, metal, glass, flooring, and other finished materials against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. 3.3 INSTALLATION -QUALITY STANDARDS A. General: Perform erection procedures for the various plaster system conditions, except as otherwise specified, as set forth in GA 201, GA206, the written Gypsum Veneer Plaster 09213-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts D. Protect metal trim accessories, plaster screeds and corner beads from being bent or damaged. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit during and 12 hours after plastering . 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install plaster base until all pipes, ducts, conduits, and other such items which are to be enclosed thereby, have been permanently installed, inspected and approved. B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Plaster base,veneer plaster and related items: a. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago IL. b. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Products Division, Charlotte NC. c. Georgia Pacific Corporation, Gypsum Division,Atlanta GA. B. The design and details as shown on the drawings and the model numbers specified herein are to establish the standards of design and quality and not to limit competition. 2.2 BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard plaster base: UL fire resistance rated, Type X board 1/2 inch thick, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings,of lengths to minimize end joints, with enhanced fire resistant core, equal to: USG "Imperial Brand Firecode C' plaster base. 2.3 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Plaster for One coat system: High-strength gypsum plaster complying with ASTM C 587, equal to USG Imperial Finish plaster, applied in one coat to total thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch, over plaster base. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Type S bugle head screws complying with ASTM C646, 1 inch long for single layer plaster base, 1-5/8 inches long for double-layer plaster base, for applying plaster bases to wood framing. B. Veneer plaster trim accessories: Gypsum Veneer Plaster 09213-3 3/7/01 no Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 5. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for fire rated assemblies. .w 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Drawings make no distinction between plaster base or gypsum board products. All board materials supplied under this Section are referred to in the Drawings as gypsum wallboard, "GWB" or such similar terminology. It is required as part of the Work of this Section to have the installer furnish and install the appropriate board materials and provide the correct wallboard finishes for the conditions described herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Required board thickness are indicated on the Drawings and the locations where fire resistant construction is required. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein B. Obtain plaster base and veneer plaster from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of plaster system. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of specified products. B. Fire resistance ratings: Where veneer plaster systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and assemblies of the rating required, tested per ASTM E119, which are identical to those indicated by reference to Gypsum Association file numbers in "Fire Resistance Design Manual"or to design *� designation in the Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Resistance Directory"or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and to the Owners' insurance underwriters 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name , and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. 1. Neatly stack board materials flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle board materials so to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Gypsum Veneer Plaster 09213-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09213 !! GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES r A. Furnish and install: one-coat veneer plaster complete with gypsum plaster base, metal screeds, grounds and expansion/control joints,trim accessories, and all related items. B. Install access panels occurring in veneer plaster work furnished by Section 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS, and by trades requiring the same. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01732- CUTTING AND PATCHING: Procedural and administrative requirements for cutting and patching. B. Section 01739-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: Removal of existing finishes, partitions and walls as indicated in the Drawings C. Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY:Wood framing and blocking supporting plaster substrate. D. Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Installation of metal door frames in plaster work. E. Section 07210- BUILDING INSULATION: Acoustical batt insulation. F. Section 08110- STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: Furnishing steel door frames. G. Section 08310 -ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS,and by trades requiring the same: Shop primed access panels, occurring in partitions and walls. H. Section 09910 - PAINTS:Applied Finish Coatings. I. Section 10810-TOILET ACCESSORIES: Furnishing installation templates for toilet accessories. J. Division 15 - MECHANICAL: Supply, and return air registers. K. Division 16 - ELECTRICAL: Independent hangers for suspended lighting fixtures. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420 - REFERENCES. . 1. ASTM C 442-Gypsum Backing Board. 2. ASTM C 557-Standard Specification for Fastening Gypsum Board to Wood Framing. 3. ASTM E 90-Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 4. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Gypsum Veneer Plaster 09213-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of referenced organizations in article entitled "REFERENCES" of this section. E. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. F. Conform to ANSI 117.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped. go G. During the installation of hardware, protect existing finishes against undue damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions.Clean, or repair all materials which are soiled or otherwise damaged by hardware installation, to match original profiles and finishes. Materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work to match existing. H. Do not permit adjacent work to damage installed finish or operation of hardware. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND ADJUSTING HARDWARE A. Architectural hardware consultant employed by hardware supplier shall inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. B. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door. 1. Ensure proper operation or function of every unit. 2. Notify hardware supplier of items or components which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. Make arrangements for replacement of faulty items or components, and install replacements when received. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Hardware schedules are indicated on the Drawings. End of Section 00 Door Hardware 08710-5 OR 3/7101 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware items packaged individually, complete with proper fastenings and appurtenances. Label and identify each package with door opening code to match approved hardware schedule. B. Receipt of hardware: Obtain receipts for when hardware is received by contractor or by other suppliers/installers as directed by Contractor. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no change in Contract Sum. D. Arrange keying, and schedule delivery of keys, with Owner. Deliver keys to owner by security shipment directly from hardware supplier. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranties for hardware furnished, under the provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Manufacturer's warranties are in addition to and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the contract documents. 1.11 MAINTENANCE ws A. Provide manufacturer's maintenance materials for hardware furnished, under the provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. 2. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by component manufacturer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR HARDWARE .. A. Door hardware is scheduled on the Drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of finish hardware, will be performed under section 06200 -FINISH CARPENTRY. 1. Arrange for a representative of the manufacturers of door closers, automatic release closing devices and exit devices to visit the project prior to the start of the installation of such items and instruct the hardware installers on the proper method of installation. B. Examination 1. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 2. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. Door Hardware 08710-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts thickness, weight, degree of opening, hand of doors, and intended frequency of use. B. Furnish approved hardware schedules to Owner, Architect, Contractor and other trades, after receiving acceptance from the architect, in quantities required, or as needed. C. Prepare template schedules and templates.Template schedule shall be bound and include a index by door number, page, and hardware item numbers for each opening. D. Do not issue hardware templates to door manufacturers until all hardware schedules have been properly submitted, reviewed by the Contractor and approved by architect. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 5 years documented experience, minimum. 1. The hardware supplier shall employ a project representative who is a member of the American Society of Hardware Consultants (AHC), and who is responsible to prepare the hardware schedule and to furnish the proper sizes, weights, quantities and functions of hardware, as recommended by the manufacturers of the supplied products,for the functions specified herein, for a complete and proper installation. 2. The hardware supplier shall have office and distribution facilities located no more than 50 miles from project and shall maintain qualified personnel readily available to service the supplied hardware. B. Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. C. Lock fronts, flush bolt faces, and strikes shall be beveled, rounded, or rabbeted as required by the Drawings. The Contractor shall determine and be responsible for the hand and bevel of all doors. D. Ensure accuracy of the quantities, sizes,finish, and proper hardware to be furnished whether specifically mentioned or not. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes,as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction, for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Hardware shall conform to the requirements of both the United States Department of Justice, N°28 CFR Part 36-American With Disabilities Act, (Public Law 101- 336)and the"Rules and Regulations of the Architectural Barriers Board", latest edition, as published by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Public Safety. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate finish hardware with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and manufacturer of internal reinforcement in doors and frames. Verify that proper screws, bolts, nuts, and the like are furnished in each instance with each hardware item to insure rigid installation and fastening. Door Hardware 08710-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 12. NFPA 252- Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 13. UL publication 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 14. UL publication 205- Panic Hardware. 15. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for exits. B. Applicable reference materials from the following trade organizations are hereby made a part of this section by reference thereto: 1. DHI (Door and Hardware Institute). 2. NAAMM (National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers). 3. SDI (Steel Door Institute). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and cuts for each item to be used hereunder. 2. Certification: manufacturer's written certification stating that finish hardware and all related items to be furnished hereunder, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this section and that all UL Fire-resistive requirements for the indicated labels have been met. 3. Schedule: a complete schedule of hardware, to be furnished as specified herein under the article entitled "Hardware Schedule and Templates", coordinated with the door and frame schedule contained in the Drawings. 4. Manufacturer's instructions: manufacturer's mounting instructions and installation information, indicate required special procedures. 5. Shop drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 6. Samples: provide samples of any hardware item requested by the architect for review. All hardware submittals are to be plainly marked with assigned hardware number from prepared schedule, manufacturer's number, type and size. Samples will be returned to supplier after review. B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01780- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data, including information on operating hardware, lubrication requirements and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE AND TEMPLATES A. Hardware schedule: the Hardware Supplier shall prepare and submit a complete hardware schedule for review and acceptance by the Architect within 21 calendar days from the date of Notice to Proceed. 1. Organize the hardware schedule in a vertical format and list each door opening, door and frame size, materials, fire labels (where appropriate)and other pertinent information. 2. In door schedule, list actual product series numbers. Select hardware based +�+ on manufacturer's specific requirements affected by door height, width, Door Hardware 08710-2 3/7/01 '�""" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Purchase, packaging, delivery, unloading, and storage of door hardware, thresholds, weatherstripping, seals, and gaskets, as shown and scheduled on the drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. B. Preparation and furnishing complete hardware schedule and parts list to Architect for review and acceptance. C. Furnishing templates for hardware reinforcing and cut-outs in doors and rames o respective manufacturers of doors and frames. on 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY: 1. Installation of hardware furnished by this section 08710. _ B. Section 06400 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 1. Furnishing and installing hardware for casework. C. Section 08110 -STEEL DOOR FRAMES: Internal relinforcement and cut-outs from templates furnished by this section 08710. D. Section 08216 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS: Hardware cut-outs from templates furnished by this section 08710. E. Section 08550 -WOOD WINDOWS: Hardware associated with wood windows. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ANSI/BHMA A 117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI/BHMA 156.1 -Butts and Hinges (grade 1). 3. ANSI/BHMA 156.2-Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches (grade 1). 4. ANSI/BHMA 156.3- Exit Devices (grade 1). 5. ANSI/BHMA 156.4- Door Controls-closers. 6. ANSI/BHMA 156.7 -Template Hinge Dimensions. 7. ANSI/BHMA 156.13- Mortise locks and Latches (grade 1). 8. ANSI/BHMA 156.18-Material and Finishes. 9. ANSI/BHMA 156.21 -Thresholds. 10. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors And Windows. 11. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. Door Hardware 08710-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install skylight in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Method of attachment to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and irregularities. to C. Align assembly free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Attach and seal to adjacent air and vapor barrier materials. E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to ensure continuity of thermal barrier. F. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07900- Joint Sealers. G. Provide alignment attachments, shims, and anchors required to permanently fasten skylights to building structure. 3.3 CLEANING A. Protect finished metal surfaces from damage during shipping, storage, and erection. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces at time of Final Cleaning. B. Clean and polish all acrylic surfaces, inside and out. End of Section Unit Skylights 08620-3 /Ilk 3/7/01 .u. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Store all materials in a level-elevated location, protected from inclement weather and to allow examination by Architect. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �* A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited wM to, the following: 1. Dawn Products Company, Littleton CO. 2. Naturalite/EPI Inc., Garland TX. 3. Wasco Products, Inc., Sanford ME. 2.2 SKYLIGHTS .eN A. Skylight description: Factory prefabricated acrylic dome units, sized as indicated on Drawings complying with the following: 1. Curb construction: 040 inch thick aluminum liner; minimum 0.078 inch thick aluminum curb of height to match existing, provided with integral cap flashing and 3 inch metal mounting flange. 2. Top construction: Minimum 0.062 inch thick aluminum framed cover, and glazing as follows: 3. Domes Double thickness clear acrylic plastic glazing with exterior dome "clear"tinted and interior dome"white". 4. Gaskets: Extruded neoprene glazing gaskets, and isbutylene/isoprene between domes, sealed with no weeps. B. Fabricate components free of visual distortion or defects. Weld corners and joints. *" Provide for removal of condensation occurring within components of assembly. Fit components for weathertight assembly. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant and backing materials: Sealant type P2 as specified in Section 07900- Joint Sealers. B. Protective back coating: FS TT-C-494, bituminous.Apply one coat of bituminous coating to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion. Do not use bituminous mastic where rw it might contaminate a joint or surface to receive sealant. C. Fasteners: Type 302/304 stainless steel. D. Flashings: 0.078 inch thick, same metal type and finish as skylight frame. secured with concealed fastening method. E. Anchorage devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, concealed. Unit Skylights 08620 -2 3/7/01 """ Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 08620 UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install plastic double-domed skylight. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood blocking and curbing. B. Section 07534- EPDM ROOFING: Sheet membrane:flashing for flanges of curbs, and sheet membrane roofing and flashing system. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others 40 referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. - 1. ANSI Z 97.1 -Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. ' 2. ASTM B 209 -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy sheet and Plate. 3. ASTM B 221 -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. 4. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for skylights and roofing materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Division1. 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and performance data. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 3. Manufacturer's warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation an resultant damage from failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture. 4. Shop drawings: Include large scale design details showing attachment and flashing details; and complete installation details. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design, fabricate, assemble and erect the skylights, and their interfacing conditions with contiguous work, to ensure that all segments of the skylight assemblies will be free from leakage. am 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in a timely manner to maintain continuous erection. Provide wrapping to protect acrylic and aluminum surfaces. Do not used adhesive papers which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. Unit Skylights 08620 -1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Cover glass to protect it from activities that might abrade the glass surface. C. Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall replace in kind and thickness all glass breakage, caused by the Work, weather, vandalism, accidents, negligence or any other reasons, with the costs being borne by the trade at fault, or the Contractor, as applicable. - END OF SECTION Wood Windows 08550-7 3/7/01 am Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations a„ Northampton, Massachusetts PART 3 -EXECUTION WD 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. *" B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. During the installation of wood windows, protect existing finishes against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Clean, or repair all existing materials which are soiled or otherwise damaged by Work of this Section, to match original profiles and finishes. Existing materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work to match existing. ■* 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install wood windows in accordance with the manufacturers' installation instructions and industry standards. Ensure that all joints are completely weatherproof. B. Erect the wood windows plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Provide shims at bearing locations, anchors, and latch points, install in a manner so they are not dislodged by subsequent operations. Test sash and hardware operation and their alignment prior to permanently anchoring units in place. C. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Install anchors through frame and beside shims.Anchor window frame units to wood blocking with wood screws and to metal framing with toggle bolts; *� countersink anchor heads.All anchors shall be concealed by closed sash, or in the case of fixed units, with plugs. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable sash and hardware for smooth operation and tight fit of sash. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by the manufacturer. B. Clean glass surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to the same. C. Wash down exposed surfaces free of dirt, handling marks, packing tapes, and foreign matter. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. 3.6 GLASS PROTECTION A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Use streamers or ribbons suitably attached to framing and held free of the glass. Do not apply warning markings directly to the glass. Wood Windows 08550-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Balancing System: Individually matched, Coil spring block and tackle system with nylon cord and fiber filled nylon clutch fitted with zinc die cast pins to engage and release the clutches permitting sash to be tilted in and removed. 2. Track:Vinyl extrusion with wood and vinyl inserts. Color: White. 3. Lock: High pressure zinc die-cast cam lock and keeper. Finish: White. Provide two for windows exceeding 3 feet 4 inches in width. 4. Sash lift for lower sash: Cut-in sash ploughs. 5. Sash stiles seal against jamb liners which are backed by resilient foam. L. Weatherstripping: 1. Vinyl compression bulb at top of the upper sash and bottom of lower sash. 2. Vinyl fin weatherstrip on head jamb part stop which seals against top sash. M. Finish: 1. Exterior: Factory applied primer plus flouropolymer modified acrylic top coat complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color: custom color to match existing clad windows. b. Color if alternate 2b (replace existing windows) is selected: standard color as selected by the Architect. 2. Interior: Factory applied 1 coat white acrylic latex primer to all interior surfaces of windows. 2.3 GLAZING A. 5/8 inch thick insulated units, consisting of two thicknesses of 1/8 inch thick clear float glass, separated by a 3/8 inch hermetically sealed dehydrated sealed air space complying with ASTM E774 and IGCC certified Class CBA. 1. Base bid window: 5/8 inch removable grills. 2. Alternate 1 window: simulated divided lights. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Screens: Charcoal colored 18 x 16 aluminum nylon mesh screen cloth set in 3/8 by 15/16 inch heavy wall aluminum screen framing. Color of frame shall be white. B. Attachment fasteners: Provide nonferrous metal attachment fasteners of the required guages and sizes of fasteners. C. Installation components: Provide extension jambs., and trimming members matching window frame finish. Provide other installation components as indicated on the Drawings, or as required for a complete installation with abutting materials. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Check dimensions of openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. B. Fabricate windows allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation. Wood Windows 08550-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ens Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Air infiltration: Grade 60 (0.10 cfm/ft) 2. Water Penetration: Grade 60 (4.43 psf) 3. Structural Pressure: Grade 40 (±40 psf) C. Frame: Finger jointed edge-glued pine head and side jambs sill. D. Hardware: 1. Balancing System: Manufacturer's standard factory installed semi-concealed , system. 2. Track: Vinyl extrusion. Color: White. 3. Lock: High pressure zinc die-cast cam lock and keeper. Finish: White. Provide two for windows exceeding 3 feet 4 inches in width. 4. Provide 2 pivot-lock mechanisms to permit the windows to pivot 90 degrees inward from the bottom. E. Weatherstripping: 1. Vinyl compression bulb at top of the upper sash and bottom of lower sash. 2. Foam weatherstrip on head jamb part stop which seals against top sash. F. Finish: 1. Exterior: Factory applied thermal setting acrylic finish complying with AAMA 603.8. a. Color: custom color to match existing clad windows. b. Color if alternate 2a (replace existing windows) is selected: standard color as selected by the Architect. 2. Interior: Factory applied 1 coat white acrylic latex primer to all interior surfaces of windows. 4W DOUBLE HUNG WINDOWS-ALTERNATE 1 G. Manufacturer and type: Marvin Windows, Warroad MN. 1. Clad Ultimate Double Hung. H. Performance grades based on NWWDA Specifications IS. 2-87(based on 36 x 28 size): 1. Air infiltration: Grade 40 (0.25 cfm/ft) 2. Water Penetration: Grade 40 (4.50 psf) w. 3. Structural Pressure: Grade 40 (±40 psf). I. Frame: Finger jointed edge-glued pine head and side jambs sill. 1. Frame Thickness: 11/16 inch head jambs and side jambs, and 1-3/16 inches sills. J. Sash: 1. Sash tilt-in design for cleaning; thickness, 1-9/16 inches. Corners slot and tenoned and joined with two screws. w K. Hardware: Wood Windows 08550-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/NWWDA IS-2. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver window units in manufacturer's packaging undamaged, complete with installation instructions. B. Store all materials in an elevated dry location, protected by waterproof coverings. Protect exposed pre-finished surfaces without use of adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which may bond to surfaces. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS I NIP A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide the following manufacturer's written warranties under provisions of Section 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Provide a one year warranty which shall include repair or replacement of any window assembly or component which leaks, or exhibits defects in materials, finish, or function. a. Warranty shall exclude glass breakage. and exclude damage resulting from abuse or misuse. b. Warranty shall include all labor and mate rial costs to replace or repair defective window units, including cost of shipping of replacement units and components. 2. Provide standard 10 year written warranty which shall include insulating glass against defects in materials and workmanship, including failure of seals and discoloration of Low E coating. 3. Provide 10 year written warranty for exterior factory applied finish, including wood preservative treatment, primer and finish. Warranty shall include film integrity, including cracking, peeling, flaking and similar defects in the applied finish. ART 1�- RODUCTS x"2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood: Select Western Ponderosa pine or other clear western pine in compliance with ASTM 3110, kiln-dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication_Treat with water repellent preservative in accordance with NWWA IS. 4. B. Metal cladding (exterior surface): Formed aluminum, pre-finished, shop fit to profile of wood members, and exterior exposed surfaces. 1. Solid type 6063-T6 extruded aluminum at sill. 2.2 DOUBLE HUNG WINDOWS- BASE BID A. Manufacturer and type: Eagle Windows& Doors., Dubuque IA. 1. Product: Clad Double Hung Windows. B. Performance grades based on NWWDA Specifications IS. 2-87 (based on 36 x 28 size): Wood Windows 08550-3 3/7/01 no Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Window units shall meet Grade 40 specifications in accordance with NWWDA IS-2, except where more stringent requirements are specified elsewhere. �* C. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind as calculated in accordance with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code to a design pressure/suction of 20 psf as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 330. D. Certify window units have been manufactured to conform with the following thermal values calculated using ASHRAE procedures measuring total window units. 1. Base bid windows: a. Calculated R value: 3.03. b. Calculated U value: 0.33. 2. Alternate 1 windows: a. Calculated R value: 1.96. b. Calculated U value: 0.51. E. Provide tight joints and effectively seal component parts of windows, including their w joints with contiguous work against water leakage and air infiltration. Water leakage is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water. 1. Air leakage, when tested in accordance with ASTM P283, at 1.57 psf must be 0.15 cfm/ft of crack or less. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Manufacturer's sample warranties. 3. Schedule: A complete schedule of windows, to be furnished hereunder, coordinated with the schedule contained in the Contract Drawings, submitted for record only to Architect. 4. Shop drawings:1/4 inch scale elevations , and large scale sections and details of window units, indicating profiles,joinery and cut-outs for hardware and glazing . a. Window sections and details shall clearly show interfacing materials and surrounding conditions. Show all relationships and alignments with existing construction. b. All shop drawings shall bear dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project. 5. Verification samples: a. 12 inch lengths of aluminum framing, window sash having accepted finish in selected custom color. b. Operating hardware (if requested). 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein. Wood Windows 08550-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 08550 WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES t A. Furnish and install shop fabricated, factory finished (interior and exterior),wood windows complete with hardware, factory glazing, weatherstripping, screens, sash ploughs,jamb extensions, and standard or specified anchorages, trim, attachments, and accessories.Work includes: 1. Metal clad, double hung windows with insect screens. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Framed openings,wood blocking and curbing. ! " B. Section 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY: Interior and exterior finish trim around windows. C. Section 07900-JOINT SEALERS: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. D. Section 09910- PAINTS: 1. Field applied finish coatings of interior surfaces of window units. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420 - REFERENCES. 1. ASTM E 283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. ' 2. ASTM E 547-Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference:. 3. ASTM E 330-Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. ASTM E 331 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 5. NWWDA IS-2- Industry Standard for Wood Windows. 6. NWWDA IS-4 -Industry Standard for Water Repellant Preservative (NON- PRESSURE)Treatment for Millwork. 7. AAMA 605.2-Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 1.4 PERFORMANCE A. Design, fabricate, assemble and erect windows, and their interfacing conditions with contiguous work, to ensure continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barriers and that all segments of the assemblies will be free from leakage under every condition of weather and exposure. Wood Windows 08550-1 IP 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts a. Acudor DW-5015 series. b. Karp: 1) Walls: Karp RDW series. 2) Ceilings: Karp KATR series. c. Nystrom RW series. d. Williams WB-DW series. 2. Frame type: 16 gage galvanized bonderized steel frame, with 22 gage galvanized steel drywall bead. 3. Door: Recessed 16 gage galvanized bonderized steel door. with 22 gage galvanized steel drywall bead. 4. Hinge: Concealed pivot rod hinge. 5. Lock: Latch bolt operated by recessed flush key. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Panels fabricated from galvanized bonderized steel: Baked on rust inhibitive gray primer finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive the work of this Section and opening dimensions are as indicated on the shop drawings. Verify that all blocking is set in place and secure. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of project conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install access panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and direction from authorities having jurisdiction. Install miscellaneous specialties absolutely level and in true line, with units securely anchored to the surrounding construction. B. Test each door and latching device, and make adjustments required to ensure a bind-free operation and proper latching. End of Section 4F Access Doors and Panels 08310-3 3/02/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. Cesco Products, North Brooklyn Park MN. 2. J.L. Industries, Bloomington MN. w� 3. Miami-Carey Corp., Monroe OH. 4. Milcor, Inc. Lima OH. 5. Larson Manufacturing Co., Brookings SD. B. Single Source: All work of this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 2.2 ACCESS PANELS - GENERAL A. Keying: All access panels shall be keyed alike; furnish Owner with 3 keys. 2.3 ACCESS PANELS- FOR FIRE RESISTANCE RATED CONSTRUCTION A. For fire-resistance rated wall and ceiling surfaces: Standard flush panel door meeting the following requirements: 1. Panel and frame rating: UL"B" label for 90 minutes. n 2. Frame type: a. For gypsum board and veneer plastered walls and ceilings: 16 gage galvanized bonderized steel frame, with 22 gage galvanized steel drywall bead. 1) Acudor FW-5050DW 2) Karp KRP-350FR series. 3) Nystrom IW series. 4) Williams WB-FR series. b. For plastered walls and ceilings: 16 gage galvanized bonderized steel frame, with 22 gage galvanized steel plaster bead. 1) Nystrom IP series. 3. Door: Insulated Flush panel door as follows: a. Typical wall yp types : Flush door, Sandwich construction with 2 inch thick mineral wool fiber insulation between two layers of 20 gage galvanized bonderized steel. 4. Hinge: Flush continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin. ** 5. Closer: Spring closer. 6. Lock: Latch bolt operated by recessed flush key. 2.4 ACCESS PANELS- FOR NOW RATED CONSTRUCTION A. For non-rated Gypsum board and veneer plastered walls and ceilings: Recessed door type meeting the following requirements 1. Manufacturer's types: Access Doors and Panels 08310-2 3/02/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS, PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire resistive rated and non-rated access panels and frames, as specified under this Section, furnished by Sections requiring the sarne and installed under Section 09250 Gypsum Board and Section 09215 Gypsum Veneer Plaster. so 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 15- MECHANICAL: Furnishing access panels required for plumbing, fire protection and heating/cooling systems. B. Division 16 - ELECTRICAL: Furnishing access panels required for electrical systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications and installation instructions. 2. Schedule: Submit Schedule of all access panels to be furnished hereunder, indicating locations for each size and type of access door. a. The Contractor is responsible to ensure that all of the types/styles of panels and frames specified herein can be furnished by the manufacturer submitted. b. Prior to submitting schedule, coordinate with the work of Division 15, MECHANICAL and Division 16, ELECTRICAL and meet with the on Architect to determine exact quantities and locations required for the installation of access panels. 3. Shop drawings: Large scale details of access doors, indicating all sizes, gages and thickness; provide complete installation details, coordinated to the specific receiving conditions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver access doors to the site, until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. B. Store access door units inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. ON Access Doors and Panels 08310-1 3/02/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 4. Panels: 1-1/2 inch thick panel, with mitered rim, tongue and grooved into edge of particle board panel. Miters reinforced with splines and glued under " pressure. 5. Glue type: Type 1, PVA-waterproof. 6. Finish: Factory primed ready for field applied finish. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors to in dimensions, and profiles indicated in the drawings. '" 1. Tolerances: Maximum diagonal distortion 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. B. Factory machine doors for hardware specified and furnished under Section 08710, obtain templates prior to fabricating doors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of wood doors, including all accessories and related items furnished hereunder, will be performed under Section 06200- Finish Carpentry. End of Section �r so s gas Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08216-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish 3 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780 -CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 00 B. Warranties shall include delamination of veneer,warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacture: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on products of The Maimen Company, Springfield MO. 04 2.2 INTERIOR DOORS A. Interior doors, rated and non-rated, scheduled to receive painted finish: 1. Construction:AWI Custom Quality Grade: 2. Wood: AWI Premium Quality Grade, a. Solid wood:Western Pine, White Birch or Poplar b. Face veneers:White Birch without any knots, plain sliced. 3. Stiles and rails: Veneered stave core with matching edgebands. Veneer 1/8 inch thickness before sanding. 010 4. Panels:Three ply laminated lumber, thickness no less than1-1/2 inch, nor greater than 1-3/4 inch, with mitered rim, tongue and grooved into edge of particle board panel. Miters reinforced with splines and glued under pressure. 5. Door design: MC-106, and MC-106F, and as additionally indicated. 6. Glue type: Type 1, PVA-waterproof. 7. Sound rating: Not less than STC of 30. 8. Fire resistance rating (where scheduled): UL, FM or Warnock Hersey International—rating as indicated on the Drawings. 9. Finishing: Prime doors with alkyd primer compatible with specified field applied finish. 2.3 CLOSET DOORS o A. Interior hinged doors to receive painted finish: 1. Construction:AWI Custom Quality Grade. 2. Wood: AWI Custom Quality Grade. a. Solid wood: White birch. b. Face veneers: White birch, plain sliced. 3. Stiles and rails:Veneered stave core with matching edgebands. Veneer 1/8 inch thickness before sanding. Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08216-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations + Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Door schedule:A complete schedule of doors, to be furnished hereunder, coordinated with the schedule contained in the Contract Drawings. 4. Shop drawings: Elevations, and large scale sections and details of door construction, indicating profiles,joinery and cut-outs for hardware and glazing. 5. Samples: .a a. Corner section and panel of specified stile and rail type door exhibiting profile of panels, stiles and rails, and joinery. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials and workmanship shall conform with Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)quality standards in grades as specified herein. B. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, fabricators offering stile and rail doors which may be incorporated in the work must be AWI members in good standing. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS so A. Fire rated door construction shall conform to UL 10B. B. Install door assembly in compliance with NFPA 80. WX 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for furnishing hardware and installing wood doors. me B. Ensure that the work performed hereunder is coordinated with issued templates authorized by the hardware supplier. on C. Do not fabricate doors before receiving a copy of the approved hardware schedule, submitted by the hardware supplier, reviewed by the Contractor and approved by the Architect.Verify that issued templates are coordinated with the approved so schedule; immediately notify the Architect, in writing, of any conflicts. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING w A. The Contractor is responsible to make certain that wood doors are not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the doors will not be damaged by excessive changes in ambient humidity and relative moisture content. B. Deliver wood doors in resilient non-staining moistureproof packaging, provide protection during transit and job storage. Clearly identify doors with door opening number, matching those indicated on the approved Door Schedule. C. Inspect doors upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the refinished items are equal in respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items. D. Store doors in protected, elevated, dry areas; protect from exposure to sunlight and moisture. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break packaging seal on-site to permit ventilation. * Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08216-2 Wk 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 08216 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES w� A. Furnish stile and rail wood doors, complete with hardware cut-outs for installation under: Section 06200-Finish Carpentry. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY: Installation of steel door frames. B. Section 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY: Wood casing and trim; installation of doors and hardware. C. Section 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: Hollow metal frames scheduled to receive wood doors. D. Section 08710- DOOR HARDWARE: Furnishing finish hardware, and installation templates for hardware cut-outs. E. Section 09910- PAINTS:Applied opaque finish coatings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ANSI A 117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ASTM E 152- Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. AWI Quality Standards,for the following sections: a. Section 1400, Stile and Rail Doors. b. Section 1500, Factory Finishing. "M 4. NFPA publication 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. UL 10B-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. Warnock-Hersey-Certification Listings for fire doors. 7. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for exits. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01:330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Fabricator's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Certification: Fabricator's written certification stating that doors, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section; that specified shop finishing has been performed; and that all fire-resistive requirements for the indicated Labels have been met. Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08216-1 3/7/01 oft Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations 06 Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Anchor clips for frames in wood stud partitions: 18-gage steel with 3/4-inch high bendable straps, or equivalent type standard with the manufacturer, 't contained, for screw attachment to wood studs. a. Anchors for fire-resistive rated frames: Conform to all UL requirements for the specific fire-resistive ratings. b. Provide not less than 3 anchors, clips, or bolts, per jamb, as applicable. 2.3 FABRICATION TOLERANCES .r A. Maximum variation for frames: Maximum diagonal distortion 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Preparation: Pressure-sand all surfaces of all frames, accessory items, anchors, and related items, to remove blemishes and foreign matter and provide paint grip. Spot-fill imperfections with metallic filler, and sand smooth. Thoroughly clean the surfaces by applying hot or cold phosphate treatment standard with the manufacturer. B. Following cleaning apply one dip or spray coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer to all surfaces, including those which will be concealed after erection. Bake, or oven dry, the primer at time and temperature recommended by the manufacturer for developing maximum hardness and resistance to abrasion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 00 3.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION A. Installation of frames will be performed under Section 06100- ROUGH IM CARPENTRY. End of Section Steel Door Frames 08115-4 on 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 4. Friedrich Company, Holyoke MA. 5. Republic Builders Products Corporation, McKenzie TN. B. Unless otherwise specifically accepted by Architect, all frames shall be of one 0 manufacturer. 2.2 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Refer to the Drawings for various types of frames, sizes, and profiles, UL fire-resistive Label frames, and other characteristics of frames and related items. 1. Frame type: Shop welded frames with mitered joints arc-welded, reinforced w and ground smooth. B. Materials for frames, reinforcement, anchors, anchor clips and related items: commercial grade cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366 or commercial grade hot-rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM A569. 1. Frame gage: a. Interior frames for Level 2 and 3 doors: 16-gage, 0.053 inch thick, except as otherwise required for specific U.L. Label. 2. Hinge, lock and strike reinforcement: 3/16 inch thick. 3. Door closer reinforcement: 12 gage, minimurn 0.093 inch thick. 4. Floor clips: 3/16 inch thick. 5. Splice plates or channels: same gage as door frame. 6. Plaster guards: 26 gage, minimum 0.016 inch thick. C. Frame construction: 1. Fire-rated frame assemblies: Modify specified, construction to meet all construction requirements required for fire-resistive rating. a. Affix appropriate UL, FM or Warnock Hersey labels to each rated frame assembly, indicating applicable rating. 2. Shop-fabricate frames as whole single units per door opening, except when frame size is too large to ship as a single unit. Oversized frames may be shipped in large sections as practicable for field assembly with concealed W splice plates or channels. 3. Frame corner construction: As specified in paragraph A, above. 4. Reinforcements, stiffeners, and base angle clips: Welded to interior surfaces of frames to provide a stable base and so as to not interfere with installation of hardware. 5. Provide plaster guards, welded to frame, at back of hardware cut-outs where mortar or other materials may obstruct hardware operation. 6. Appearance of finished frames: Strong, rigid, completely free from warp and buckle,with miters well-formed and in true alignment, and with surfaces smooth and free from defects of any kind. Pa 7. Silencer holes: Punch three holes in stop of strike jamb of door frames for application of silencers. D. Anchorage: Steel Door Frames 08115-3 40 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, for frames and shop applied finishes. ,. 2. Certification: Manufacturer's written certification stating that frames, and all related items to be furnished hereunder, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section; that specified galvanized and shop priming has ft been performed; and that all U.L. fire-resistive requirements for the indicated Labels have been met. 3. Shop drawings: A complete schedule of frames, to be furnished hereunder, so coordinated with the door and frame schedule contained in the Contract Drawings. Large scale details of frame construction, indicating all gages, reinforcing, and anchorage 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire rated door construction shall conform to UL publication 10B. B. Install fire rated door assemblies in compliance with NFPA 80. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 44 A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for furnishing hardware and installing frames. B. Ensure that the work performed hereunder is coordinated with issued templates authorized by the hardware supplier. C. Do not fabricate frames before receiving a copy of the approved hardware schedule, submitted by the hardware supplier, reviewed by the Contractor and accepted by the Architect.Verify that issued templates are coordinated with the approved schedule; immediately notify the Architect, in writing, of any conflicts. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prior to shipping, identify each frame with a removable metal or plastic label which corresponds with door schedule identifying opening number and location. B. Deliver frames boxed or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. C. Inspect frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the refinished items are equal in respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items. D. Store frames at the building site upright and under cover. Place the units on wood dunnage and cover in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc., Garrettsville OH. 2. Ceco Company, Oakbrook Terrace IL. 3. Curries Company/Essex Industries, Mason City IA. Steel Door Frames 08115-2 3/7/01 '""" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 08115 STEEL DOOR FRAMES ®IU PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish the following products to be installed under the designated Sections: 1. Hollow metal frames for doors, UL-Labeled and non-labeled, complete with internal reinforcing; installed under Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY in gypsum board partitions. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY: Installation of hollow metal door frames. B. Section 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY:Wood casing and trim; installation of doors and hardware. C. Section 08216-STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS: Furnishing wood doors to be installed in hollow metal frames. D. Section 08710 -DOOR HARDWARE: Furnishing finish hardware, and installation templates for hardware cut-outs and reinforcing. E. Section 09910- PAINTS: Applied Finish Coatings. F. Building-in of frame anchors to wall and partition construction: By trade responsible for wall and partition erection. wIr 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI A250.8 (formerly SDI 100)- Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3. ASTM E 152- Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. SDI 111 Series (111A-111 F): Recommended Details, Steel Doors and Frames 5. SDI 117-93: Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 6. NFPA Publication 80- Fire Doors and Windows. 7. UL Publication 10B- Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 8. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for exits. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: Steel Door Frames 08115-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts c. Gypsum board to interior door and window frames, AP penetrating conduits and piping, light-fixtures, electrical cover plates, building specialty items, ductwork, grilles, supply diffusers, faucets, piping, escutcheon plates and similar items: d. Gypsum board to plumbing fixtures: SM 2. Plaster Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Plaster to wood trim: AP b. Plaster to abutting surfaces at exposed tops and AA bottoms partitions and walls: c. Gypsum board to interior door and window frames, AP penetrating conduits and piping, light-fixtures, electrical cover plates, building specialty items, ductwork, grilles, supply diffusers, faucets, piping, escutcheon plates and similar items: d. Plaster to plumbing fixtures: SM 3. Architectural millwork and casework Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Casework to abutting materials, kitchens, toilet SM rooms and similar"wet spaces": b. Casework to abutting surfaces (except in"wet' AP spaces): ► c. Countertops to abutting wall surfaces and to abutting SM casework: d. Countertops to plumbing fixtures and fittings: SM 4. Acoustical ceilings: Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Acoustical ceiling edge angle to irregular wall surface AP 5. Tile: Joint Condition Sealant Type .� a. Tile to tile vertical, and horizontal non-traffic joints: SM 6. Sanitary plastic wall and ceiling panels to abutting surfaces Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Sanitary plastic panels to abutting materials: SM 7. Interior Wood: Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Wood to wood (painted opaque finishes) AP or SC b. Wood base to wall surfaces SC End of Section Joint Sealers 07900-6 3/7/01 .. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts D. Apply urethane sealant and latex caulking materials into joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using mechanical or power caulking gun equipped with nozzle of appropriate size, with sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints. 1. The depth of sealant and caulking materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the specific joint function, but in no case exceed 1/2-inch in depth, nor less than 1/4-inch, regardless of the joint width. 2. Maintain the outer edge of the sealant and caulking materials, where side faces of joints are in the same plane, back 1/8-inch from the faces. 3. Apply sealant in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets so as to provide a watertight and airtight seal for the entire joint length. 4. After placement of the sealant and caulking materials, concave-tool the surfaces to uniform density, using a water-wet tool. Do not use detergents or soapy water for the tooling operations. 5. Remove the temporary masking tape immediately after tooling, and before the sealant or caulking material has taken initial set. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean all surfaces of adjacent surfaces which have been marked or soiled by the work of this Section, removing all excess sealant and caulking materials with solvents which will not damage the surfaces in anyway. 3.4 PROTECTION A. During the operation of sealant work, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. General: Seal joints indicated and all interior and ex terior joints, seams, and intersections between dissimilar materials. B. Sealant Colors: 1. Colors for Sealant Type "P1":As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Color for Sealant Types"AX and"AP":White. 3. In concealed installation, and in partially or fully exposed installation where so approved by the Architect, standard gray or black sealant may be used. C. Exterior joints (Listed by primary building material abutting sealant joints): 1. Exterior Wood: Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Wood to wood (painted opaque finishes): P1 V4 D. Interior joints (Listed by primary building material abutting sealant joints): 1. Gypsum Board: Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Gypsum board to metal or wood trim: AP b. Gypsum board to abutting surfaces at exposed tops AA and bottoms partitions and walls: Joint Sealers 07900-5 1A 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,R Northampton, Massachusetts joint. Shape and size of compressible back-up shall be as recommended by manufacturer for the specific condition used. Provide one of the following, or equal. (only closed cell rods will be considered) 1. Applied Extrusion Technologies, Inc., Middletown DE, product"Sof Rod". 2_ Backer Rod Manufacturing, Inc., Denver, CO, product"Denver Foam". 3. Sonneborn Building Products Inc., Minneapolis MN, product"Sonofoam". B. Primers: Furnish and install joint primers of the types, and to the extent, w. recommended by the respective sealant manufacturers for the specific joint materials and joint function. C. Bond-breaker tape, and temporary masking tape: Of types as recommended by the manufacturer of the specific sealant and caulking material used at each application, and completely free from contaminants which would adversely affect the sealant and caulking materials. w� PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Weather conditions must be dry and of the temperature, as recommended by sealant manufacturer, during application of exterior Work. w B. Surface receiving work of this section must be dry and dust free. All joints receiving sealant and caulking materials and be subject to the approval of the material manufacturer for proper use of the specified materials. w C. Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all loose mortar, oil, grease, dust, frost, and other foreign materials that will prevent proper adhesion of primers and sealant materials. D. If so recommended and furnished by the specific sealant manufacturer, apply primer to all joint surfaces, taking care not to stain adjacent surfaces. isu E. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. F. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 804 and C 790 for solvent and latex base solvents, respectively. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install joint bead back-up in all joints in excess of 5/8-inch depth, and joints that have no back-up therein, placing the joint bead in the joint in a manner that will assure a constant depth 1/8 inch greater than the sealant and caulking material depth tolerances. 1. Set beads into joints continuously, by slightly stretching during placement, to permit compression against sides of joint, without surface wrinkles or buckles. 2. Do not stretch back-up material into joints. „ B. Install bond breaker in joints where shown in the Drawings and wherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent bond of the sealant to surfaces where such bond might impair the Work. ,rw C. Apply masking tape or other precautions to prevent migration or spillage of materials onto adjoining surfaces. Joint Sealers 07900-4 3/7/01 w.e Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations 44 Northampton, Massachusetts B. Joint Sealer Type AP (Acrylic painters caulk): One component acrylic latex caulking compound, conforming to FS 19-TP-21 M and ASTM C 834, paintable within 24 hours after application,with a minimum movement capability of±12.5 percent, equal to one of the following: 1. Sonneborn Building Products Inc., Minneapolis MN.; product, "Sonolac". 2. Tremco, Beachwood OH.; product, "Trimflex 834". 3. Bostik; product, "Chem-Calk 600". �w 4. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville PA.; product"AC-20+". C. Joint Sealer Type P1 (Polyurethane 1-component): Low modulus single component gun-grade polyurethane sealant, non-sagging, conforming to FS TT-S-000227E, Type II, Class A, and ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 12-1/2, Grade NS, use NT,M, A and O with a minimum movement capability of±25 percent, equal to the following: 1. Mameco International, Inc., product"Vulkem 116". 2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst NJ; product, "Sikaflex". 3. Sonneborn Building Products Inc., Minneapolis MN.; product, "Sonolastic NP1". 4. Tremco, Beachwood OH.; product, "Dymonic". 5. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville PA.; product"Dynatrol I". D. Joint Sealer Type SC (Silicone, general construction): One-part medium modulus, natural cure, synthetic sealant, having a useful life Expectancy of at least 20 years, ' conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, NS, Class 25, use NT, G,A, M, O with a minimum movement capability of±50 percent, equal to the following: 1. Dow Corning Corporation, Midland MI.; product, 791". 2. General Electric Company (GE Silicones)Waterford NY.; product, "Silpruf'. AIM 3. Sonneborn Building Products Inc., Minneapolis MN.; product, "Sonolastic- OmniSeal". 4. Tremco, Beachwood OH.; product, "Spectrim 2". 5. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville PA.; product,"895". E. Joint Sealer Type SM (Silicone, Mildew-resistant): USDA approved one component acetoxy silicone rubber, mildew resistant, acceptable to local health officials, !!' conforming to U.S. Food and Drug Administration regulation 21 CFR 177.2600, FS TT-S-001543A, Type Non-Sag, Class A, and FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS, use NT,G and A with a minimum movement capability of±25 percent, and a Shore A hardness of 20, equal to the following: 1. Dow Corning Corporation, Midland MI.; product, "786". 2. General Electric Company,Waterford NY.; product, "Sanitary 1700". 3. Sonneborn Building Products Inc., Minneapolis MN.; product, "Sonolastic- OmniPlus". No 4. Tremco, Beachwood OH.; product,"Proglaze". 5. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville PA.; product"898". 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Compressible joint bead back-up: Compressible c!.osed cell polyethylene, extruded polyolefin foam or polyurethane foam rod, 1/3 greater in diameter than width of Joint Sealers 07900-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 4. Selection samples: Sample card indicating Manufacturer's full range of colors available for selection by Architect • 5. Verification samples: 12 inch long samples of sealant for verification of color, installed where directed by Architect. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator specializing in applying the work of this Section with a minimum of 3 years documented experience approved by sealant manufacturer. B. Obtain joint sealers from a single manufacturer for each type specified. Conform to SWRI requirements for installation. 0 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Each container and package must bear an unbroken seal, test number and label of the manufacturer upon delivery to the site. Failure to comply with these requirements shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the material in question, by the Architect and his requiring its removal from the site. New material conforming to said requirements, shall be promptly furnished at no additional cost to the Contract. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install single component solvent curing sealant in enclosed building spaces. B. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and 24 hours after installation. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are below 40 degrees F. 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminates capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from substrates. w 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780- CLOSEOUT aw SUBMITTALS. Warranty shall include coverage of installed sealant and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. w PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint Sealer Type AA (Acrylic acoustical): One component acrylic latex, permanently elastic, non-staining, non-shrinking, non-migrating and paintable. 1. Tremco, Beachwood OH.; product, "Acoustical Sealant". +�► 2. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago IL.; product"USG Acoustical Sealant". 3. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville PA.; product"AC-20 FTR". Joint Sealers 07900-2 3/7/01 """� Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07900 !!! JOINT SEALERS on PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prepare sealant substrate surfaces. B. Furnish and install sealant and backing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ` A. Section 07534- EPDM ROOFING: Sealant used in conjunction with the application am of single ply membrane roofing_ B. Section 07840—FIRESTOPPING: Firestopping sealants and related backing materials. C. Section 09910- PAINTS: Caulks used in preparation of applied Finish Coatings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ASTM C 717-Terms Relating to Building Seals and Sealants. 2. ASTM C 920-Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 3. ASTM C 962- Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C 1193-Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM D 1056-Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 6. FS TT-S-00227E-Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component. B. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. SWRI —Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, chemical and physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Manufacturer's certification that the Products supplied meet or exceed specified requirements. 3. Compatibility and adhesion test reports: Test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that sealant proposed for use have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with actual samples of substrates to be used on to this project. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results, and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation specific to this project ' Joint Sealers 07900-1 1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing). •• 3. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non- combustible insulation (fire safing). 4. Silicone Firestop sealant over wrap strip 5. Mineral fiber/ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) in conjunction with a firestop sealant. G. Insulated metal pipe penetrations (single and multiple)through walls: 1. Firestop mortar with wrap strips. 2. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non- + combustible insulation (fire safing). 3. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non- combustible insulation (fire safing)and Wrap strips. 4. (multiple penetrations through masonry walls only) Firestop pillows with woven wire mesh. H. Duct penetrations through floors or walls: 1. Rectangular and square ducts: Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber /ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing), and steel flanges provided under Division 15. 2. Round ducts: Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing). I. Blank openings: w 1. Firestop mortar. 2. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing). J. Fire rated joints: 1. Silicone Firestop sealant over backer rod or bond breaker. K. Temporary sealing of openings and penetrations: 1. Firestop putty, sticks or pads. w 2. Firestop pillows. End of Section W# 00 O. Firestopping 07840-8 3/7/01 "' Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ' Northampton, Massachusetts 2. For wall penetrations with ABS pipe firestop collars must be installed on both ON sides of the penetration to provide a 3 hour F and T Rating.All other applications required installation on one side only to provide a 3 hour F and T Rating. F. Firesafing insulation: Install firestopping safing insulation on safing clips spaced as needed between each stud and floor slab, leaving no voids. Secure safing clips to slab using fasteners recommended by insulation manufacturer. Install sealant over mineral wool in accordance with test requirements. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. General:Typical penetrations are indicated below with list of standard firestopping approaches.Actual firestopping materials and combination of materials will vary with size of penetration and with individual firestopping manufacturer's approved UL Design System Requirements. Use only UL Design System materials for each penetration that best matches the wall and floor construction. 1. Where penetrations occur for which no listed UL or WH Design System test exists, obtain from the firestop system manufacturer an engineered system 0. acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for firestopping such penetrations. Engineered system from manufacturer shall include a detail drawing showing the engineered system and shall contain no disclaimers . B. Single metal pipe (non-insulated) and conduit penetrations through floors: 1. Firestop mortar. 2. Silicone Firestop sealant. 3. Intumescent firestop sealant. 4. Firestop putty, sticks or pads. 10 5. Mineral fiber/ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing)in conjunction with a firestop sealant. C. Single metal pipe (non-insulated) and conduit penetrations through walls: 1. (masonry and concrete walls only) Firestop mortar and putty. 2. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non- combustible insulation (fire safing). 3. Intumescent firestop sealant with wrap strips. D. Multiple metal pipe and conduit penetrations through floors: 1. Firestop mortar and wrap strips. 2. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non- combustible insulation (fire safing). E. Multiple metal pipe and conduit penetrations through walls: 1. Firestop mortar and putty. 2. (through masonry walls only) Firestop pillows with woven wire mesh. 3. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber/ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing). F. Insulated metal pipe penetrations through floors: 1. Firestop mortar and wrap strips. 00 Firestopping 07840-7 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops, schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction which would conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of firestops. a. Ensure that all firestopping is inspected prior to installation of suspended + ceilings or concealed by other finished materials. B. Dam construction 1. Install dams when re_q uired to properly contain firesto Aping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming material may be left as a permanent component of the firestop system. 2. Placement of dams shall not interfere with function or adversely affect the appearance of adjacent construction. C. Installation of single component silicone firestop 1. Apply with manual or powered caulking gun. w 2. Apply minimum 1/2 inch thickness for 3 hour rating.Apply 1/2 inch to both sides of wall penetrations; one side only in floor penetrations. 3. Use incombustible insulation as required to achieve fire resistance rating. 4. Surface of gun grade silicone firestop may be tooled using clean, potable water. 5. Clean excess material off of adjacent surfaces and tools within 10 minutes using either water or Xylol where the use of such would not be hazardous. " D. Installation of cementitious firestop mortar. 1. Add dry powder to water and mix with mechanical mixer or hand mixing tools as recommended by firestop mortar manufacturer. Allow a average mixing time is 3 minutes and provide a average wet density of 70 pounds per cubic foot, plus or minus 5 PCF. 2. Do not apply if ambient or substrate temperature is less than 35 degrees Fahrenheit during 24 hours after application. 3. Wet all surfaces prior to application of firestop mortar. 4. Mortar may be hand applied or pumped into the opening. 5. Exposed surfaces shall be finished using conventional plastering tools prior to curing. w 6. When installation around layered cables, it is recommended to increase the fluidity of the firestop mortar to provide a better fill around the cables. Vibrate or move the cables slightly to prevent voids from forming between the cables. 7. Allow 48 hours for initial cure prior to form removal. For full cure allow 27 days. 8. Wet material may be cleaned with water. Dry material may require scraping or chipping. E. Installation of firestop collars (plastic pipe only) 1. Firestop collars may be surface mounted to a slab or wall or imbedded in Firestop Mortar to a maximum depth of 2 inches. .�w Firestopping 07840-6 3/7/01 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts H. Mineral fiber/ ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing): Provide US Gypsum Company product"Thermafiber" having a minimum density of 4 pounds per cubic foot, Fibrex product"FBX Safing Insulation" having a minimum density of 4 pounds per cubic foot, or provide Manville Corporation product"Ceramic Fiber Insulation" having a minimum density of 6 pounds per cubic foot, or approved equal product to suit conditions and complying with firestop manufacturer's requirements. 1. Provide galvanized steel Safing clips as required for installation of insulation. 2. Material shall be classified non-combustible per ASTM E-814. I. Elastomeric Firestopping: Non halogenated latex based elastomeric coating applied by airless spray, Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal Elastomeric Firestop Spray". 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Forming and damming materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type as recommended by firestopping manufacturer. B. Primer, sealant and solvents:As recommended by manufacturer. C. Woven wire mesh: Galvanized 20 gage woven wire mesh "chicken wire" or"poultry fencing", 1 inch spacing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. M 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface to receive firestops shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil,form release agents, or other matter that would impair the bond of the firestop material to the substrate or penetrating item(s). B. Voids and cracks in substrate shall be filled and unnecessary projection removed prior to installation of firestops. C. All penetrating items shall be permanently installed prior to firestop installation. D. Substrate shall be frost, free and,when applicable, dry. 3.3 INSTALLATION 4 A. General 1. Installation of firestops shall be performed by applicators/installers qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures. 2. Apply firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. Meet building code requirements. 3. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire rated t Firestopping 07840-5 1► 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts d. Tremco Inc., product product"Tremsil" (Gun Grade)or"Tremsil S/L" (Self Leveling). ,,, 2. Sealants will not dissolve in water. C. Intumescent firestop sealant and caulks: Acrylic based, water resistant sealant, „ which will not re-emulsify after drying. 1. Acceptable products, or as approved: a. Bio Fireshield, Inc., product"Biostop 500". b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal S100 and S500 Sealant". c. 3M Company, product"Fire Barrier Caulk CP25WB+". e d. Tremco Inc., product"Tremstop 1A". D. Firestop putty: sticks or pads. 1. Acceptable products, or as approved: a. Bio Fireshield, Inc., product"Moldable Putty", b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal Putty Bars and Pads". c. 3M Company, product"Fire Barrier Moldable Putty". d. Tremco Inc., product"Flowable Putty" E. Firestop collars: Pre-manufactured fire protective pipe sleeve, UL classified as"fill, void, or cavity material"for through penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479. 1. Provide separated (two piece)firestop collar for application when plastic pipe system is already in place. Provide non-separated firestop collar for application prior to installation of plastic pipe system. 2. Acceptable products, or as a pproved: a. 3M Company, Inc., product"Fireshield Firestop Sleeve" b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal Collars". c. 3M Company, product"Fire Barrier PPD's". d. Tremco Inc., product"Fyrecan sleeve" F. Firestop pillows: UL Classified as "fill, void, or cavity material"for through ' penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479. 1. Acceptable products, or as approved: a. Bio Fireshield, Inc., product"Fireshield Firestop Pillows" b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal Pillows". c. Tremco Inc., product"Tremstop P.S." G. Wrap strips: 1. Acceptable products, or as approved: a. Bio Fireshield, Inc., product"FS-195" b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal Wrap Strip". c. 3M Company, product"Fire Barrier FS195 Wrap Strip". „ d. Tremco Inc., product"Tremco W.S." Firestopping 07840-4 3/7/01 ""�" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Obtain certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of combustibility. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store firestopping materials in original, sealed, packages showing manufacturer's identification and date of packaging. B. Store and handle materials following manufacturer's recommended procedures, and in accordance with material safety data sheets. on PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Bio Fireshield, Inc., Concord, MA. 2. Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, MI. 3. Hilti Corporation, Tulsa, OK. 4. 3M Company, Saint Paul, MN. 5. Specified Technologies, Inc., Somerville NJ. 6. Metacaulk, (The Rectorseal Corporation), Houston TX. 7. Tremco, Inc., Cumberland RI. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Firestop mortar: asbestos free, cementitious mortar, U.L. classified as a "fill, void, or cavity material"for through penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM/UL1479. 1. Acceptable products, or as approved: a. Bio Fireshield, Inc., product"Novasit K-10". b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal Mortar". 40 c. Tremco Inc., product"Tremstop M". B. Silicone Firestop sealant: Single component, non-combustible silicone elastomer firestop sealant, U.L. classified as a"fill, void, or cavity material"for through penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479. 1. Acceptable products, or as approved: a. Bio Fireshield, Inc., product product"Biotherm 100" (Gun Grade)or "Biotherm 200" (Self Leveling). b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product"Spec Seal Pensil 300 Sealant (gun grade)" or"Spec Seal Pensil 300SL" (Self Leveling). c. 3M Company, product"Fire Barrier Silicone Sealants". Firestopping 07840-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. As necessary to achieve fire rating as tested and rated. 2. In conformance with installation requirements for type of floor, wall, and partition construction. 3. As recommended by firestop/smokeseal manufacturer. E. Combustible damming materials, if used, must be removed after proper curing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance ,. data, and physical properties. a. Indicate requirements for manufacturer's descriptive data for products and related materials with FM, UL or Warnock-Hersey illustrations showing systems and approval of materials in systems. 2. Certification: Manufacturer's written certification stating that firestopping materials, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section and that all fire-resistive requirements for the indicated combustibility, Flame(F- rating)and Temperature (T-rating) Ratings have been met. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Test reports: Submit fire test reports from recognized, independent testing agent(s) indicating the following: a. Fire test report of firestop material applied to substrate and penetration materials similar to project conditions. Tests to indicate both Flame (F- rating)and Temperature (T-rating) Ratings. b. Test reports of products to be used shall indicate conformance to ASTM E-814. 5_ Shop drawings indicating requirements for penetrations in wall/deck intersections, change of planes, control joints, expansion joints and blank openings. No 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain firestop and smokeseal products from a single manufacturer, except as 4 otherwise approved by Architect. B. Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards and existing materials, and existing methods of construction. wa C. Special Inspections: Allow for 3 percent of each type of firestopping system to be removed and inspected for conformance with approved submittals. wed 1. All firestopping shall be inspected prior to installation of suspended ceilings or concealed by other materials. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer, a specialized subcontractor having not less than 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein. 1. The manufacturer of the firestop material shall submit written certification that the firm to be used for the firestop products has been trained in the application of the products by the manufacturer. wee Firestopping 07840-2 3/7/01 """ 148 Newton Street•So. Hadley, MA 01075 Tel: (413) 533-1320• FAX 532-1149 tions !' isetts PART 1 -GE 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install fireproof firestopping, firesafing materials, smoke seals and related accessories required for this Project for all penetrations through fire resistance rated construction, including, but not limited to, penetrations for plumbing,fire suppression, heating,ventilating and air conditioning, and electrical systems. 1. Fire resistance rated construction requiring firestopping includes, but is not limited to:floors, rated partitions, passageways and stairs, shaft partitions, and temporary fire resistant rated partitions and barriers. B. Furnish and install firestopping/smoke seals at construction joints occurring at tops of fire resistance rated partitions, and temporary partitions between top of partition and underside of deck above. C. Furnish and install all firestopping, firesafing, and smoke seals where required by applicable codes and as additionally required by authorities having jurisdiction at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ASTM E-84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E-119- Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E-814-Test Method of fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 5. UL- Fire Resistance Directory 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials and work to conform to Building Code Requirements in fire resistant wall and floor assemblies. B. Manufacturer's certified product test requirements: 1. All firestop/smokeseal material shall be tested by a recognized, independent testing agency and shall conform to both Flame (F-rating)and Temperature (T-rating) requirements of ASTM E-814. 2. Conform to UL Fire Hazard Classification Requirements. 3. Tested and classified non-combustible per ASTM E-84. C. Firestops in place shall be of sufficient thickness, width, and density to provide a fire resistance rating at least equal to the floor,wall, or partition construction into which it is installed. D. Non-combustible dams shall be constructed: Firestopping 07840-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces of units in contact with dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic corrosion. D. Perform the installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation specifications. Install units plumb, level in alignment and plane without warp or r rack. E. Anchor units securely, fill voids between ribs in steel decking with mineral fiber fireproofing. t 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Test operation of vents and hatches upon completion of the installation. Make any and all adjustments necessary to ensure proper operation. B. Touch up damaged coatings and finishes. 40 End of Section e Roof Accessories 07720 -3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations �. Northampton, Massachusetts 1.6 WARRANTY we A. Provide 5 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.Warranty shall include repair or replacement of roof accessories which exhibit defects in materials or workmanship. Defects is defined as uncontrolled leakage or water and abnormal aging or deterioration. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, and Architect's approval, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc., Arlington MA. 2. The Bilco Company, New Haven CT. 3. Dur-Red Products, Cudahy Ca. 4. Milcor, Inc. Lima OH. 2.2 ROOF SCUTTLE/HATCH A. Description: Factory prefabricated roof scuttle/hatch unit having a clear opening dimension of 2'6"wide by 3'-0"complying with requirements specified below. 1. Products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc., model N°. 6-104. b. Bilco Company, model "S-50" c. Dur-Red Products, model "LH". d. Nystrom Inc., model "RHA." B. Factory finish: mill finish aluminum. C. Curb construction: 22 gage galvanized steel liner; 14 gage galvanized steel curb, 12 inches high, containing one-inch thick rigid insulation, and provided with integral cap flashing and 3 inch metal mounting flange. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION w A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. w� B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION - ROOF HATCH r■ A. Examination: Ensure that all receiving nailers have been completely installed and are in proper condition to receive the unit. B. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings for weathertight installation. Roof Accessories 07720 -2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install prefabricated roof scuttle,with insulated hatch cover and prefabricated insulated curb. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood nailers and blocking. B. Section 07534- EPDM ROOFING: Sheet membrane flashings for flanges of curbs, and sheet membrane roofing and flashing system. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ASTM B 209-Aluminum and Aluminum-Allow Sheet and Plate. 2. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for ratings of roof assemblies B. The following reference materials are hereby made:a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. NRCA- Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 2. SMACNA-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1. 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each roof specialty item and related accessories furnished hereunder, include data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate interface with adjacent components, and perimeter conditions. 3. Shop drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work. Provide details bearing dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Store under cover and protect from weather damage. B. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage time. C. Store all materials in an elevated dry location, protected by waterproof coverings. Roof Accessories 07720 -1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts D. Cleat and seam all joints. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings, asphalt shingle roofing or asphalt roll roofing. E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. F. Solder metal joints at gutters and rain leaders watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. Seal all metal joints watertight. G. During the installation of work of this Section, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Except as otherwise shown on the reviewed shop drawings or specified herein, the workmanship of sheet metal work, method for forming joints anchoring, cleating, provisions for thermal movement, etc., shall conform to the standard details and recommendations of the sheet metal producer and those of producer organizations 4P and research institutions and associations concerning the sheet metal used, in addition to the standards and details set forth in the referenced materials specified this Section. B. Face nailing will not be permitted, concealed cleating or other concealed method must be used to attach sheet metal work to structure. C. Ensure that fastenings do not exceed 8 inches on centers. Use flat head fasteners throughout, and seal all fastener heads after installation thereof. D. Fill all slip joints and overlapping surfaces in the assembly with specified sealant material, removing all excess sealant material from the prefinished surfaces immediately, to prevent staining the finish. End of Section go 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts G. Plastic cement as recommended by roofing manufacturer and eave protection manufacturer. H. Solder: Conforming to ASTM B 32 with non-acid flux, 50 percent tin /50 percent lead solder. 2.3 FLASHING FABRICATION -GENERAL A. Form flashings as required, or to profiles indicated on the Drawings, to protect materials from physical damage and shed water. B. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.To the w greatest extent applicable, fabricate sheet metal components in shop, and thoroughly clean all joints on both sides of the sheet metal work. C. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet. D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths,with flat lock seams. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/4 inch, miter and seam corners. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs, solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. 2.4 FABRICATION -GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. General: Fabricate gutters and downspouts in accordance with SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual, referred to below as the"Sheet Metal Manual" wA B. Gutters: having a girth support not to exceed 32 inches, fabricate in accordance with the following Sheet Metal Manual plates: 1. Gutter design and shape: Plate 3, Figure A C. Downspouts: nominal 4 inches in diameter, fabricated in accordance with Sheet Metal Manual Plate 31 or 32. D. Hangers: Provide"Imperial' hangers with rod and nut, as manufactured by Berger Bros, Feasterville, PA, 1-800-523-8852. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips in place and nailing strips located. rw B. Beginning of work shall constitute acceptance of the conditions of the surfaces to which this work is to be applied. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabrication. B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. + C. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2 -PRODUCTS > 2.1 MATERIALS A. Copper: CDA numbered alloy 110, cold-rolled sheet copper conforming to ASTM B 370, having a minimum weight as specified herein below, for the applications indicated: 1. Edge strips: 20 ounces per square foot. 2. Flashing, a. Apron flashing, 12 ounces per square foot. b. Base flashing, 20 ounces per square fool. c. Window head flashing, 12 ounces per square foot. d. Valley flashing, 24 ounces per square foot. e. Roof penetrations: 16 ounces per square foot. f. Step flashing: 20 ounces per square foot. 3. Gutters, 20 ounces per square foot. 4. Rain leaders, leader heads, leader straps, 16 ounces per square foot. B. Aluminum: FS QQ-A-250d sheet aluminum, mill finish, having a minimum thickness as specified herein below, for the applications indicated: 1. Termite shield: 0.080 inch thick. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Underlayment:Asphalt saturated building felt, non-perforated, 15 pounds per square as recommended for use in waterproofing and in construction of built-up roofs. B. Flashing cement: Trowel grade, composed of selected asphalt, solvents, and non- asbestos fillers, conforming to FS SS-C-153 Type 1,ASTM D 2822, Type 1 and ASTM D 4586, Type 1 (Non-asbestos)as manufactured by Karnak Chemical Corporation, product N°. 19"Flashing Cement' , or equal as manufactured by Koch Materials Company, J & P Petroleum Products Company or other approved manufacturer. C. Dampproofing mastic: Trowel grade, self-priming type composed of selected asphalt, solvents, fibers and non-asbestos fillers, conforming to ASTM D 2822, Type 1 and ASTM D 4586, Type 1 (Non-asbestos) as manufactured by Karnak Chemical Corporation, product N°. 86 "Fibrated Trowel Mastic" , or equal as manufactured by Koch Materials Company, J & P Petroleum Products Company or other approved manufacturer. D. Nails shall not be smaller than N°.2 of 12 stub gauge (1.109 inches), with large flat heads, and of sufficient length to penetrate the woDd nailers a minimum of 7/8-inch. Nails shall be stainless steel. po E. Screws: Stainless steel wood screws, of sizes most appropriate for the specific application, and equipped with soft neoprene washers. F. Sealant in conjunction with metal work: Sealant Type "P1" as specified under Section 07900 -JOINT SEALERS. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-3 3/7/01 .F Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Literature: Manufacturer's data sheets for each metal type and accessories furnished hereunder, include material specifications, performance data, *" physical properties and finishes. 2. Certification: Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with the specified requirements for the use indicated. 3. Shop drawings: a. Fully dimensioned large scale design details showing material profiles, splices, flashing terminations and otherjointing details, fastening methods and installation details. Indicate material type, sizes, and weights or gages. Indicate extent of adjacent work specified under other Sections of the Specifications. b. Fully detail methods of relieving stresses due to thermal movement, including sealing of expansion seams. C. All details bearing dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project. 4. Verification Samples: a. 12 inch long samples of formed gutters and downspouts. B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Manufacturer's warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation and resultant damage from failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Company specializing in fabrication and installation of sheet metal flashing work with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Flashing and sheet metal applicator,with a minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide sufficient quantity of each color finish coat material, for field touch-up work after erection, and pack the additional coating materials with the components to be furnished hereunder. B. Clearly label and package extra materials securely to prevent damage. w Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES t A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Copper gutters and rain leaders (downspouts). 2. Copper flashings and running sheet metal work, for all non-specified locations in conjunction with the roofs. 3. Aluminum termite shields. 4. Sealant in conjunction with sheet metal work specified herein. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood blocking, nailers. B. Section 07317-SLATE SHINGLES: Repair and new slate roofing. C. Section 07534-EPDM ROOFING: Sheet membrane flashings for flanges of curbs, and sheet membrane roofing and flashing system. D. Section 07900-JOINT SEALERS: Requirements for sealant and backing materials. E. Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical and electrical items protruding through roofing: By respective trade sections furnishing them. e0 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ASTM B 32-Solder Metal. 2. ASTM B 370-Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 3. ASTM D 226-Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 4. ASTM D 4586-Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free. B. The following reference materials are hereby made;a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. CDA-Copper in Architecture Handbook. 2. Revere Copper Products, Inc., Rome NY. -Copper and Common Sense, seventh edition. 3. SMACNA-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, referred to herein as"Sheet Metal Manual". 4. NRCA- Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. po 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts L. At valley, fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 18 inches on center. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all flux, scraps and dirt immediately. Neutralize excess flux with solution of washing soda and clean water as recommended by CDA. End of Section 00 so OP OW Sheet Copper Roofing 07612 -7 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.6 INSTALLATION -STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. Conform to SMACNA details, Plate Number 85, 86, and 87. B. Space seams at intervals indicated. C. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans at beginning at eaves. Lock cleats into seams and flatten in direction of drainage. D. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. E. Finish standing seams 1 inch high by brake forming. Bend up one side edge 1-1/2 inch and other edge 1-3/4 inch. Make first fold 1/4 inch wide single fold and second ,■, fold 1/2 inch wide, providing locked portion of standing seam,five plies in thickness. F. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle. Terminate standing *+ seams at ridge and hips by turning down with tapered fold. G. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 6 inches in direction of drainage. ' ! H. Extend valley sheet minimum 6 inches under roofing sheets. I. At valley, fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 18 inches on center. 3.7 INSTALLATION - FLAT SEAM ROOFING A. Conform to SMACNA details, Plate Number 84. B. Fabricate sheets into 16 by 18 inch rectangles, notch corners and fold over pretinned edges 3/4 inch. C. Lay sheets over 15 pound asphalt impregnated roofing felt, with long dimension horizontal with cross joints staggered. Fasten sheets with cleats. D. Place cleats on the long side at the center of each sheet and adjacent to the intersections of the cross seams. On cross seams place two cleats per seam. E. Lock cleats into seams; flatten smooth in direction of water flow, Sweat seams thoroughly with solder, producing watertight joints. F. Notch corners and turn up [pretinned] edges 3/4 inch. G. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular[parallel]to eaves.Apply pans at beginning at eaves. Lock cleats into seams and flatten in direction of drainage. H. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. I. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle. J. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 6 inches in direction of drainage. K. Extend valley sheet minimum 6 inches under roofing sheets. Sheet Copper Roofing 07612 -6 w 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Concrete substrate: Prime surfaces with manufacturer's recommended water- based primer. B. General: Apply protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, starting application at low point and working upwards.At ridges and valley, start a center and work outwards. Lap sides a minimum of 3-1/2 inches and lap ends 6 inches. 1. Extend eave protection membrane over decking for 100 percent coverage beneath metal roofing system. 3.4 TINNING AND SOLDERING REQUIREMENTS. A. Tin edges of plain copper sheets to be soldered for a width of 1-1/2 inches both sides with solder. PW B. Perform soldering slowly with well-heated coppers, thoroughly heat the seam and sweat the solder through its full width. When soldering lead-coated copper brush a liberal amount of flux into the seam. IP 3.5 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Except as otherwise shown on the reviewed shop drawings or specified herein,the workmanship of sheet metal work, method for forming joints anchoring, cleating, provisions for thermal movement, etc., shall conform to the standard details and recommendations of the sheet metal producer and those of producer organizations and research institutions and associations concerning the sheet metal used, in addition to the standards and details set forth in the referenced materials specified this Section. B. Face nailing will not be permitted, concealed cleating or other concealed method must be used to attach sheet metal work to structure. C. Fill all slip joints and overlapping surfaces in the assembly with specified sealant material, removing all excess sealant material from the prefinished surfaces immediately, to prevent staining the finish. D. Apply slip sheet in single layer laid perpendicular to slope; weather lap edges 2 inches and nail in place. Minimize nail quantity. E. Cleat and seam all joints between metal and bitumen or metal and felts. F. Stagger transverse joints of roofing sheets. G. Solder lap and intersection joints. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution rinse with water. H. Face nailing will not be permitted, concealed cleating or other concealed method must be used to attach work to structure. I. Ensure that flashing fastenings do not exceed 8 inches on centers. Use flat head fasteners throughout, and seal all fastener heads after installation thereof. J. Fill all slip joints and overlapping surfaces in the assembly with specified sealant w material, removing all excess sealant material from the prefinished surfaces immediately, to prevent staining the finish. Sheet Copper Roofing 07612-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .s Northampton, Massachusetts construction. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of the work as indicated. Shop-fabricate materials to the greatest extent possible. B. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.To the greatest extent applicable, fabricate sheet metal components in shop, and thoroughly clean all joints on both sides of the sheet metal work. C. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet interlockable with sheet. D. Form fleshings as required, or to profiles indicated on the Drawings, to protect materials from physical damage and shed water. • E. Fabricate flashing corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs, seam and solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to valley or eaves. B. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify joints in wood deck are solidly supported and fastened. C. Verify correct placement of wood nailers and blocking. w. D. Verify curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roofing are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place. E. Beginning of work shall constitute acceptance of the conditions of the surfaces to which this work is to be applied. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabrication. B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. *� C. During the installation of work of this Section, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Preparation: 1. New substrate: Remove all dust, dirt, loose nails and other protrusions from the deck/sheathing. 2. Existing substrate: Remove all old roofing materials and nails from deck area. Sweep thoroughly to remove dust and dirt. Sheet Copper Roofing 07612 -4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER ROOFING MATERIALS A. Copper: CDA numbered alloy 110, cold-rolled sheet copper natural finish, conforming to ASTM B 370, having a minimum weight of 24 ounces per square foot. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Slip sheet: Rosin sized building paper. B. Fasteners: Copper, of sizes most appropriate for the specific application, and equipped with soft neoprene washers. C. Sealant in conjunction with metal work: Sealant Type"P1" and backer materials as specified under Section 07900-Joint Sealers. D. Solder: Conforming to ASTM B 32 with non-acid flux, 50 percent tin/50 percent lead. 2.3 BRACKET AND RAIL SNOW FENCE SYSTEM A. Brackets: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, 1 3/4 inch wide, and 20 inch long. Fabricate of stainless steel, predrill for attachment to roof deck, and bolt to a base and flange assembly which supports 3 rails. Provide stainless steel lag bolts to fasten to deck. B. Rails: Fabricate of 1 inch diameter, 1/8 inch thick stainless steel in longest available lengths, and provide tapered non-threade d pipe couplings. Provide stainless steel pipe retainer collar at the beginning and end of each pipe run. Provide stainless steel pipe end caps at each end. C. Provide products by Snow Management Systems, Morrisville,VT, or approved equal. D. Membrane for ice-dam and wind-blown rain protection "Protection Membrane": W.R. Grace Company, Cambridge MA., product'Vycor Ultra".Sheet barrier of high density cross laminated polyethylene with butyl-based rubber adhesive, minimum 30 mil thickness, with strippable plastic release liner; having the following minimal " characteristics: 1. Minimum tensile strength (tested in accordance with ASTM D 412)250 pounds per square inch, 2. Minimum elongation to ultimate failure of 250 percent, and unaffected pliability when tested per ASTM D 412 Die C modified. 3. Minimum adhesion of 3 pounds per inch width (528 N/m), tested per ASTM !! D903 to plywood. 4. Maximum permeance when tested in accordance with ASTM D96, 0.05 perms (2.9ng/m2sPa). 2.4 FORMWORK AND FLASHINGS -GENERAL A. General: Form and fabricate sheets, seams, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings and other components to profiles, patterns and drainage arrangements shown and as required for permanently leakproof Sheet Copper Roofing 07612 -3 3/7/01 no Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ®„ Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Shop drawings: a. Fully dimensioned large scale design details showing material profiles, so splices, flashing terminations and other jointing details, fastening methods and installation details. Indicate material type, sizes, and weights or gages. Indicate extent of adjacent work specified under other 4K Sections of the Specifications. b. Fully detail methods of relieving stresses due to thermal movement, including sealing of expansion seams. 3. Verification sample: 36 by 36 inch square sample of(unfinished)copper roofing mounted on plywood backing illustrating typical seam, and material and workmanship. a. Maintain sample on site as an acceptable example of work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and Installer: Companies specializing in fabrication and installation of custom copper roofing with minimum 5 years documented successful experience. B. Perform work in accordance with CDA and SMACNA standard details and requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, and protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements, B. A Store preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, . , staining, or damage. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the installation of sheet metal roofing work with the various trades responsible for installing interfacing materials, and install the work at appropriate times so as not to delay the progress of related work. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide 3 year warranty under the provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS for metal roofing. Warranty shall include provision to repair or replacement metal roofing work which demonstrates defects in structure, watertight integrity, or appearance, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Failure to meet specified performance requirements. 2. Loose parts. 3. Leaking. 4. Wrinkling. 5. Buckling. 6. Non-uniformity of color or finish. 7. Galvanic action between roofing and dissimilar materials. Sheet Copper Roofing 07612 -2 3/7/01 �w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07612 SHEET COPPER ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Remove existing asphalt shingles, and existing flat seam copper including all coatings. B. Furnish and install: 1. Custom fabricated, (natural)copper roofing, associated integral fleshings an underlayment. 2. Snow guards. 3. Sealant in conjunction with metal work furnished hereunder, and plastic wedges for cap flashings terminating in reglets. 12 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Roof deck construction with sheathing, wood blocking, battens, and nailers. B. Section 07620- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIIv1: Gutter, rain leaders and flashing for non-specified locations in conjunction with the roofs. C. Roof curbs, flashing sleeves, Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical and electrical items protruding through roofing: By respective trade sections furnishing same. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ASTM B 32-Solder Metal. 2. ASTM B 152 -Specification for Copper, Sheet, Strip, Plate and Rolled, Bar. 3. ASTM B 370 -Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 4. ASTM B 486- Paste Solder. 5. ASTM D 4586-Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. 6. CDA-Copper in Architecture Handbook. 7. SMACNA-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 8. Revere Copper Products, Inc., Rome NY. -Copper and Common Sense, 7th edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's data sheets for each metal type and accessories furnished hereunder, include material specifications, performance data, physical properties and finishes. Sheet Copper Roofing 07612 -1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts End of Section 04 t: yw EPDM Roofing 07534-9 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Mix sealer components as instructed by manufacturer. Apply at rate of 1 gallon/100 linear foot, 12 inch. back from sheet edges on exposed substrate. 2. Embed membrane in sealer and apply continuous pressure with 2-1/2 inch tubing filled with sand. Pull sheet free before continuing permanent installation. 3.6 INSTALLATION - ELASTOMERIC FLASHINGS A. Elastomeric Flashings. Provide elastomeric sheet flashings at elastomeric sheet roofing work, as indicated. 1. Use longest practical lengths and widths of elastomeric sheet flashing material to eliminate or minimize joints. Complete splices between flashings and main- roof sheet before bonding flashings to vertical surfaces. Splices shall be sealed 3 inches beyond fasteners that attach membrane to horizontal nailer in same manner as splices within roofing membrane. Flashings shall be bonded 100 percent to subsurfaces, except at coves where movement is anticipated. ' a. Install flexible tube at coves where movement is anticipated. 2. Apply bonding adhesive to flashing and surface to which it is being bonded. When bonding adhesive has dried to the point where it does not string or stick to a dry finger touch, roll flashing into adhesive. Do not bridge flashing at changes of direction. 3. Nail top of flashing 12 inches on center under sheet metal copings, counter flashing, and other sheet metal work. 4. Expansion Joints: Treat expansion joints as indicated in expansion joint manufacturer's standard details and published instructions for specific conditions. 5. Sheet metal copings, fascias, gravel stops, and flashings will be furnished and installed under Section 07610-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Roofing Subcontractor to correct all deficiencies in roof as determined by roof sample analysis and as prescribed by roof system manufacturer. Should additional samples be required, these cost will be borne by the roofing applicator. B. Field inspection will be performed under the provisions of Section 01400-QUALITY w CONTROL. C. Visual inspection of the Work will be provided by Owner. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove elastomeric adhesive markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced, or disfigured finishes caused by the work of this Section. 3.9 PROTECTIONr A. Provide special protection or avoid traffic on completed work. Restore to original. condition, or replace, work and roofing materials damaged. EPDM Roofing 07534-8 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Cements and bonding adhesive contain petroleum distillates and are extremely volatile and flammable. Avoid breathing vapors and do not use near fire or flame. 4. Ensure that splicing and bonding surfaces are dry during installation, 3.5 MEMBRANE ADHERED INSTALLATION A. Secure overlayment board to existing deck with mechanical anchors of type and a spacing indicated by membrane manufacturer; but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 square feet of surface area, or less anchorage than required by FM "Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28." B. Apply adhesive at a rate of 60 square feet per gallon in manner recommended by manufacturer. C. Roll out membrane and allow it to relax. Inspect sheet for defects as it is being rolled out. Align sheet to that it overlaps the previous sheet by the lap width recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches. D. Fold membrane back on itself and coat the bottom side of the sheet and the top side of the deck with adhesive. Avoid getting adhesive in the lap joint area E. After adhesive has been allowed to set in accordance with the manufacturers requirements, roll the membrane into the adhesive,free from air pockets,wrinkles, or tears. Firmly press sheet into place without stretching. F. Bond sheet to substrate except those areas directly over or within 3 inches of a control or expansion joint. G. Clean and dry splice joint areas of both membrane sheets.Apply splicing cement as recommended by manufacturer, and seal joint permanently waterproof.Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint splice. H. Provide additional membrane securement at the perimeter of roof, at expansion joints, curbs, skylights, and similar roof top penetrations, at interior wall and penthouse perimeters, and at any angle change which exceeds 2 inches in on horizontal foot. 1. Install continuous reinforcement strips 3 inches to 6 inches from inside and outside corners where additional membrane securement is required and where recommended by roofing manufacturer. Secure reinforcement strips with 2-inch diameter aluminum or stainless steel seam fastening plates; space fastening plates not greater than 12 inches on center. 2. Install reinforcement strips either horizontally into deck or vertically into curbs as recommended by roofing manufacturer. �r 3. Cement EPDM flashing over installed fastening plates and reinforcement strips as recommended by roofing manufacturer, and in no case provide flashing of less than 6 inches in width, and at ends of flashing, provide a minimum 2 inch splice from edge of plate/strip. I. Extend membrane up cant strips and a minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces. J. Seal membrane around roof penetrations. K. Provide daily night seal at loose edges to prevent water flow beneath finished roofing. EPDM Roofing 07534-7 3/7/01 Aft Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts D. Any condition requiring correction or completion shall be corrected or completed prior to the installation of the roofing system Notify Contractor of unacceptable conditions. E. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 4k 3.2 PREPARATION A. During the operation of work of this Section, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. B. Carefully broom clean substrate immediately prior to roofing application. w C. Where surface joints at roof and wall substrates exceed 1/4-inch width, fill flush with surface with pourable sealer before proceeding with the installation. 3.3 EMERGENCY MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES A. Maintain continuous temporary protection prior to and during installation of new roofing system. Do not leave unfinished roof areas uncovered over-night or during inclement weather. 1. Provide temporary protective sheeting over uncovered deck surfaces. 2. Turn sheeting up and over parapets and curbing. Retain sheeting in position with weights or temporary fasteners. 3. Provide for surface drainage from sheeting to existing drainage facilities. 4. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or repaired deck surface. .s B. Maintain on site equipment and materials necessary to apply emergency temporary coverage in the event of sudden storms or inclement weather. 3.4 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. The entire work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the best standards of practice relating to trades involved. B. Follow local, state and federal regulations, safety standards and codes. When a conflict exists, the more restrictive document shall govern. C. Follow insurance underwriter's requirements acceptable for use with specified products or systems. D. Review all special conditions, such as at projections, at connections to sheet metal gravel stops, flashings, etc. with the Roofing Manufacturer, submit the Roofing Manufacturer's recommendations and details to the Architect for approval. E. Special Cautions: 1. Do not use oil-based or plastic roof cement. 2. Do not subject elastomeric materials to contact with petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, nor animal fat. Prevent contact with hot pipes, and ducts. EPDM Roofing 07534-6 AM 3/7/01 Smith College go Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts recommended by manufacturer, including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealant. D. Flashing material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with flexible sheet membrane. E. Membrane adhesive: As recommended by EPDM membrane manufacturer for particular substrate and project conditions, formulated to withstand min. 60 psf uplift force. F. Overlayment (recovery) Board: Manufacturer's recommended rigid high density wood fiber board with asphalt coated facer,1/2 inch thick, 4 foot by 8 foot size. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding adhesive shall be as recommended by manufacturer.Adhesive shall be compatible with all materials to which the elastomeric membrane is to be bonded. B. Splicing cement and inseam sealant shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Lap sealant for sealing the exposed edge of the splices shall be trowel on gun consistency as recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Water cutoff mastic shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. E. Night sealer shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. F. Pourable sealer for preparation of decking shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. No G. Prefabricated elastomeric accessories (pipe seals, inside and outside comers, etc.) shall be as manufactured and recommended by membrane manufacturer. H. Nailing Strips and Fasteners: Nailing strips shall be extruded rubber and fasteners shall be non corrodible. I. Screws: Steel fastener with fluorocarbon coating. Minimum thread diameter 0.22 inches and minimum shank diameter of 0.172 inches. w J. Miscellaneous materials: Best grade or quality approved by the roofing manufacturer for the specific application. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. B. Verify edge nailers, curbs and penetrations are in place prior to roofing, so that the roof system can be installed as continuously as possible. C. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent maximum moisture content. EPDM Roofing 07534-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not remove existing roofing when weather conditions threaten the integrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy. B. Apply roofing in dry weather; do not install roofing in inclement weather or when precipitation is predicted with greater than 20 percent possibility. C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface. D. Apply roofing when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work. dM B. Notify manufacturer's representative 48 hours in advance for deck acceptance. Plan the lay-up roofing membrane with respect to deck slope.Avoid situations where excessive drainage could pass into completed roofing. C. The Roofing applicator shall maintain communication with roofing manufacturer's representative to inform of progress and to schedule period sample testing. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Deliver to the Owner upon completion of the work of this Section, an unconditional aw warranty, on the work of this Section agreeing to promptly repair the roofing as necessary to prevent penetration of water through it. 1. Warranty shall cover product quality, performance, and workmanship for a period of 15 years. 2. Warranty shall cover total roofing system including membrane, adhesives, sealant, fasteners, membrane flashings, and other materials furnished and installed under this Section. 3. Warranty shall provide coverage for uplift created by maximum wind speed of 72 miles per hour(measured 10 meters above grade). PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Plans and specifications are based on products of Carlisle Syntec Systems, Carlisle PA. Substitutions will not be considered. 2.2 ROOFING MATERIALS A. EPDM membrane: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D 4637 and ANSI/RAM IPR-1, with a nominal thickness of 60 mils. B. Sheet seaming system: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges. C. Cant strips, tapered edge strips and flashing accessories: Types recommended by manufacturer of EPDM material, provided at locations indicated and at locations ow EPDM Roofing 07534-4 .w 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Roofing applicator's foreman with a minimum of 5 years documented experience of the type specified herein, and trained by product manufacturer. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide a final inspection at the completion of the project to insure, that the project has been completed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Upon approval and acceptance of the project, then a manufacturer's warranty certification shall be written, executed and furnished to the Owner. B. Submit Manufacturer's field quality control reports of field inspections, including, revised"as-built"shop drawings and manufacturer's final punch list. C. All roofing shall be as described in this Section and shall be provided and approved by the roof system manufacturer. Any materials not manufacturer or provided by manufacturer shall have written approval from the manufacturer stating the the materials are acceptable and are compatible with the other materials and systems required. D. UL listing: Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory"for application indicated,with "Class A" rated materials/system for roof slopes shown. 0 E. The roof system manufacturer's Technical Specifications shall be considered a part of this specification and should be used as a reference for specific application procedures and recommendations. Where a conflict does exist between the manufacturer's written specifications and those procedures specified in this Section, the more stringent requirements meeting the Manufacturer's minimum requirements for the provided warranty shall apply. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels and package seals intact and legible. �A B. Store all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Store rolled goods on clean, raised platforms. Store other materials in dry areas, protected from water and direct sunlight. C. Do not expose stored curable roofing materials and accessories, including uncured flashing, adhesives, sealant and pourable sealer, to a constant temperature in excess of 80 degrees Fahrenheit. D. Provide continuous protection of stored materials against deterioration for duration of project. E. Distribute any materials stored on roof levels for immediate use to prevent concentrated loads that would impose excessive strain on deck or structural members. Protect roof stored materials to prevent displacement by the wind and protect from exposure to inclement weather and sun. F. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages, or show other evidence of damage, unless Architect specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project. EPDM Roofing 07534-3 3/7/01 .R Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations , Northampton, Massachusetts 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fully adhered Ethylene propylene diene monomer(EPDM) roofing system, shall meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Hazard Classification"Class A" roof. 1.5 SUBMITTALS �► A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Manufacturer's specimen warranties: Provide sample copies of manufacturers' actual warranties for all materials to be furnished under this Section, clearly defining all terms, conditions, and time periods for the coverage thereof. 3. Review statement: Written statement, signed by the roofing applicator, stating that the Contract Drawings have been reviewed by an agent of the roofing system manufacturer; accompanied by a pre-installation written statement from the manufacturer that the selected roof system is proper, compatible, 40 and adequate for the application shown. a. The roofing applicator will notify the Architect and Owner in writing if the existing conditions when exposed are in conflict with the Contract Documents for the proper application of the selected roofing system or the warranty requirements. 4. Project roofing superintendent's resume and project experience list for similar installations. 5. Shop drawings: a. Fully dimensioned 1/4-inch scale plans of roof. Indicate on plans, major areas of patching existing roofing and all areas of new roofing. Plans shall show changes in level, key locations of details, all roof penetrations, roof slopes and direction of slope. Indicate on plans any areas of proposed staging and material storage on roof. ,w„ b. Large scale design details, minimum of 1-1/2 inch per foot scale, showing perimeter flashing conditions and penetrations. Details shall show dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project and reflect actual conditions; manufacturer's standard preprinted details will not be accepted as substitute for shop drawings. B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Manufacturer's field quality control reports of field inspections, including, revised "as-built"shop drawings and manufacturer's final punch list. 2. Manufacturer's warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Roofing manufacturer, with a minimum of 10 years documented experience ! demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein. B. Roofing applicator, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer. EPDM Roofing 07534-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07534 ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER(EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Remove existing membrane roofing system as required for preparation of new membrane roof system where indicated. Removal work includes removal of existing membrane, perimeter flashings, base flashings. po B. Furnish and install the following: 1. Ethylene propylene diene monomer(EPDM) single ply membrane roofing system. 2. Flashing at all penetrations through the roofing system and at all materials which abut roofing system. C. Clean-out all existing roof drains. D. Provide field testing of fasteners. ok E. Provide manufacturer's pre-construction and final inspection as specified herein. These inspections are to be included in the base bid; additional inspections, or work incurred as a result of the final inspection shall be without additional cost to the Owner. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Pressure trE:ated blocking, curbing and nailers. B. Section 07620- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: Metal flashing, trim, gravel stops, scuppers, and downspouts. C. Section 07900-JOINT SEALERS: Sealants other than those specified in this Section 07534. D. Division 15- MECHANICAL: Prefabricated curbs for roof mounted mechanical equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. FM Roof Assembly Classifications and Loss Prevention requirements I-28 and 1-29S 2. UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for fire- resistance roof ratings. B. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, latest printing. EPDM Roofing 07534-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations w Northampton, Massachusetts 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Stainless steel (type 304) nails only, with siding type head. Staples may not be used. Fastener length shall be adequate to provide a minimum penetration of 1-1/2 inches into solid wood. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 4W A. Verify adequacy of sheathing, backing and support framing for all siding work. 3.2 INSTALLATION 40 A. Examine sheathing, do not install clapboards if sheathing is wet.Allow sheathing to thoroughly dry before installing clapboards. on B. Install clapboards with evenly spaced weather exposure matching existing exposure. Double clapboards at first course above foundation. 1. Make all joints tight. on 2. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work closely. Refinish cut surfaces in prefinished items. 3. Except where abutting trim,Vertical joints in any given course shall not be +w less than 1-1/2 inches away from vertical joints above and below. C. Install clapboards with specified nails by hand; use of pneumatic nailers is prohibited. In general, nail each board independently, do not nail through two so overlapping pieces of siding. Nail through siding into plywood sheathing with a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center. Nails shall be driven flush and snug, but not so that the nail head crushes or splits the wood. Predrill holes for nails near ends of boards. 3.3 INCINDENTAL SITE FINISHING A. Carefully set exposed nails flush with siding coating. B. Touch-up blemished siding materials to match siding color. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation for siding from true position of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb. 3.5 CLEANING A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of scraps and sawdust. • End of Section Wood Siding 07468-2 3/7/01 MW Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07468 WOOD SIDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install clapboard siding. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS W A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood sheathing, and blocking. B. Section 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY: Exterior wood trim. C. Section 07900-JOINT SEALERS: Sealant, other than those specified herein. D. Section 09910- PAINTS: Field applied finish coatings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and performance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Discard lengths of material which are unsound, warped, bowed,twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship and handle all materials and fabricated items in a manner which will prevent damage thereto, and store all materials and fabricated items at a dry, elevated, ventilated, and protected interior location maintaining 60 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SIDING A. Moisture content: Wood clapboards shall have a moisture content between 9 to 14 percent, when delivered. Test at least 10 percent of stock and take average; average moisture content cannot exceed 12 percent. B. Clapboards: Plain bevel siding, nominal 1/2 by 6 inch, Western Red Cedar, vertical grain WWPA"Grade A", Factory primed. Wood Siding 07468-1 !fit 3/7/01 • LNG' loom s�a�G:I%o co +, Go .So dad\e 532.1149 c�8 Ne�ie131t5331320•�PX • Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations !! ! Northampton, Massachusetts C. Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement, items projecting through or "M mounted on roof. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SNOW FENCE t A. Snow fences shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. Install without damaging in-place roofing. Locate brackets as indicated on Drawings. 1. At new roof construction: Lag bolt through plywood decking into structural framing, or provide through-bolt brackets at plywood decking. 2. At existing roof sheathing: Lag bolt brackets into existing wood plank deck. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF SLATE SHINGLES A. Slate shingles shall be installed in accordance with NRCA Steep roofing Manual. 1. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern having exposure and headlap matching existing. 2. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. PRO 3. Hips and ridges: Type matching existing without metal flashing beneath. B. Cover all exposed nailheads with elastic cement. C. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of counter flashings. D. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. End of Section �4 Slate Shingles 07317-5 t 3/7/01 as Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. B. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler at areas of bonded eave protection. B. Broom clean deck surfaces under eave protection and underlayment. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL FLASHING A. Place eave edge and gable edge metal flashings tight with fascia boards. B. Weather lap joints a minimum of 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic * cement. C. Secure flange with nails spaced 6 inches on center, conceal fastenings. D. Flash and seal work projecting through or mounted on roofing with plastic cement, weather tight. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Preparation: 1. New substrate: Remove all dust, dirt, loose nails and other protrusions from the deck/sheathing. 2. Existing substrate: Remove all old roofing materials and nails from deck area. Sweep thoroughly to remove dust and dirt. „w B. General: Apply protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, starting application at low point and working upwards.At ridges and valley, start a center and work outwards. Lap sides a minimum of 3-1/2 inches (90 mm) and lap ends 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Extend eave protection membrane minimum of 3 feet up-slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. At valleys, install protection membrane using 3 feet width sheets centered on valley center line. 3. At ridges, install protection membrane using cut 12 inch width sheets centered OR on peak. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT 40 A. Place one ply of underlayment over area, with ends and edges weather lapped a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. B. Install protective underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof and weather lap a ift minimum of 4 inches over eave protection. oft Slate Shingles 07317-4 3/7/01 u® Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Non-perforated, N°. 30 asphalt-saturated building felt. C. Membrane for ice-dam and wind-blown rain protection: Sheet barrier of rubberized membrane bonded to sheet polyethylene, minimum 40 mil (1.13 mm), one total thickness, with strippable treated release paper; having the following minimal characteristics: 1. Minimum tensile strength (tested in accordance with ASTM D 412, Die C modified)of 250 pounds per square inch, 2. Minimum elongation to ultimate failure of 250 percent, and unaffected pliability when tested per ASTM D 146 over 180 degree bend at minus 25 degrees Fahrenheit (-32 1C.). 3. Minimum adhesion of 3 pounds per inch width (528 N/m),tested per ASTM D903 to plywood. 4. Maximum permeance when tested in accordance with ASTM D96, 0.05 perms (2.9ng/m2sPa). 5. Subject to conformance with the above requirements, acceptable products include the following: a. W.R. Grace Company, Cambridge MA., product"Vycor Ice &Water Shield". b. Nicolon/Mirafi Group, Norcross GA., product"Miridri WIP". c. Polyken Technologies, Division of Kendall Company, Mansfield MA., product"Polyken 640 Underlayment Membrane, Ice-O-Late". 2.2 BRACKET AND RAIL SNOW FENCE SYSTEM A. Brackets: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, 1 3/4 inch wide, and 20 inch long. Fabricate of stainless steel, predrill for attachment to roof deck, and bolt to a base and flange assembly which supports 3 rails. Provide stainless steel lag bolts to fasten to deck. B. Rails: Fabricate of 1 inch diameter, 1/8 inch thick stainless steel in longest available lengths, and provide tapered non-threaded pipe couplings. Provide stainless steel pipe retainer collar at the beginning and end of each pipe run. Provide stainless steel pipe end caps at each end. C. Provide products by Snow Management Systems, Morrisville,VT, or approved equal. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Nails/ Fasteners: 1. Nails, to install slates:4d Copper slating nails with smooth shank and diamond point, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing. 2. Nails, to install flashing: Roofing type, copper, minimum 19/64 inch head diameter and 0.104 inch shank diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate 1/2 inch into wood substrate. B. Tape, plastic cement, bituminous paint or other accessories required for the proper and complete installation for work of the Section shall be as recommended by NRCA Steep roofing Manual and the Copper Development Association. Slate Shingles 07317-3 3/7/01 .w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts installation instructions indicating preparation required and installation procedures. r 2. Manufacturer's warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation and resultant damage from failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture. 3. Samples: *■ a. Full size late shingles to verify match with existing. Submit sufficient quantity to demonstrate proposed range of each specified color. b. Snow guards. Submit minimum 24 inch long sample, which may be incorporated into the work if acceptable. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer specializing in slate roofing work with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. Mr B. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store all materials in an elevated dry location. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install eave edge protection and roofing materials when ambient temperatures are below 45 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Deliver to the Owner upon completion of the work of this Section, an unconditional warranty on the work of this Section agreeing to promptly repair the roofing as necessary to prevent penetration of water through it for a period of 3 years following installation. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide to the Owner, 20 extra shingles of each color and type installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING MATERIALS A. Slate shingles: Hard dense rock slates as fabricated by The New England Slate ' Co., Pittsford, VT. (888)-637-5283. 1. 18 by 10 inches, except 18 by 12 inches at woven dormer valleys. 2. Punched for two nails, without cracks or broken corners. " 3. 1/4-3/8 inch thick. 4. Grade 'S1'. 5. Colors: a. Field: "Unfading grey/green b. Accent 1: Red. c. Accent 2: Vermont grey. Slate Shingles 07317-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07317 SLATE SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Strip existing roofing materials and underlayment for installation of slate roofing if Alternate No. 3 is selected. Turn over all intact removed slates to the Owner. B. Patch slate roofing in areas of roofing to remain where new plumbing vents, attic vents, dormers, and other similar items are removed or installed, and metal flashings work described under Section 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. C. Furnish and install; 1. New slate roofing at new East elevation infill, and new slate roofing at existing areas of slate if Alternate No. 3 is selected. 2. Moisture shedding underlayment and protection membrane at repaired, patched and new slate roofing. 3. Snow guards and fences. D. Install metal flashings furnished by Section 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01100- SUMMARY: Repairs to existing flashing and roofing under separate contract with Owner. B. Section 01230—ALTERNATIVES: Administrative requirements for alternates. C. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY:Wood blocking, nailers, patching existing roof sheathing. D. Section 07620- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: Furnishing sheet metal flashing for installation by this Section 07316. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. UL 580 -Tests for Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 2. NRCA-Steep Roofing Manual. 3. CDA-Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished. Include manufacturer's Slate Shingles 07317-1 #IAI 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 4. Where insulation is located between joists/rafters and is not to be covered, install wire insulation supports to keep insulation in place. C. Blown-in insulation: Installed framing cavities using blowing machines in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 1. Do not place insulation until completion of air sealing work in attic spaces, including inspection and.acceptance by Architect. 2. Fill soffits at building overhangs full of insulation taking care to prevent clogging or otherwise obstructing soffit vents. Coordinate with vapor barrier and vent baffles. D. Insulation at exterior of foundation walls: ,u 1. Place insulation boards at the interior perimeter of foundation walls. Extend insulation 24 inches inside of perimeter of concrete slabs and to a depth of 48 inches at perimeter foundation walls. 2. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent boards. Bevel insulation to allow snug fit at cants. 3. Place soil as a perimeter restraint to minimize movement of insulation. E. Acoustical insulation: 1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install in interior walls, and ceiling spaces where indicated. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation tight in spaces. Leave no gaps or voids. F. Foamed-in-place insulation installed around door frames, window frames, and .� penetrations in exterior walls including, but not limited to: electrical boxes and conduit, ducts, fans, and piping. 1. Apply insulation in froth method to a uniform monolithic density without voids, ,■, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply to a minimum cured depth of 3 inches at windows and door frames;fill voids at other penetrations. G. Sheet plastic vapor barriers: 1. Place vapor and air barrier on warm side of all insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal all sheet joints. + 2. Extend vapor and air barrier tight to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of membrane. Tape seal in place. H. Sill sealer: Install as recommended by manufacturer beneath sills with corrugated side facing down and ends butted. End of Section w ow Building Insulation 07210-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Nominal 5-1/2 inch with R-19 thermal rating at walls. 2. Nominal 9-1/4 inch with R-30 thermal rating at roofs. C. Acoustical batt insulation: Unfaced glass fiber insulation 3-1/2 inches thick conforming to ASTM C-665 Type I, Class C (non-thermal), of width appropriate for spacing of framing or furring members with which used. D. Foamed-in-place insulation installed around door frames, window frames, and penetrations in exterior walls. Foamed-in-place insulation shall be UL Class I fire- rated, two component urethane self frothing foam insulation equal to: BASF Corp.: Foamular. E. Insulation for blown-in applications: Glass fiber blowing insulation conforming to ASTM C764, Type I, Category 1, equal to CertainTeed "Insul-Safe III" and Schuller "Climate Pro Blowing Wool". 2.3 VAPOR BARRIERS A. Sheet plastic vapor barrier: Clear polyethylene film, 0.006 inches (6 mil)thick provided in full-wall length and width pieces, without joints, wherever possible. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Staples, tape, adhesives and fasteners required for the proper and complete installation for work of this Section shall be as recommended by each respective manufacturers of each insulation type and vapor barrier. 00 B. Insulation baffles: Expanded polystyrene insulation baffles, sized for width of framing. equal to: 1. Foam Plastics of New England., Prospect, CT. product"Dura-Foam Rafter Vent." 2. Poly Foam Inc., Prairie, MN. product"Propervent." C. Sill sealer: Compressible polystyrene strip equal to"Amofoam"sill sealer as manufactured by Amoco Foam, Products Company, Atlanta GA. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation baffles between roof framing members, scheduled receive #r batt/blanket insulation. Install as recommended by baffle manufacturer in manner to provide continuous free flow of air from bottom of joist spacings to top. B. Batt and blanket insulation: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not compress or "stuff' insulation into voids, compressed insulation has less thermal resistant value. 2. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation, do not cut around electrical boxes. Leave no gaps or voids. 3. Where faced insulation is specified, apply membrane facing on warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and staple side flanges of membrane between framing members. Building Insulation 07210-3 OR 3/7/01 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations 4M Northampton, Massachusetts 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight and damage from construction traffic and other causes. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers • offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Glass fiber batt/blanket insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge PA. b. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp., Toledo OH. c. (Goldline brand) Schuller International, Inc., Denver CO. d. USG Corp./USG Interiors Inc., Chicago IL. 2. Foamed-in-place insulation: rye a. BASF Corp., Polymers Div., Styropar Group, Parsippany NJ. b. Insta-Foam Products Inc., Joliet IL. c. Universal Protective Coatings, San Rafael CA. 3. Blown-in insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge PA. b. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp., Toledo OH. + c. Schuller International, Inc., Denver CO. 4. Acoustical mineral fiber insulation: a. Fibrex Inc.,Alexandria, IN. b. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company, Leeds, AL. c. USG Corp./ USG Interiors Inc., Chicago IL. 5. Reinforced vapor barrier: a. Reef Industries Inc., Houston TX., 2.2 MATERIALS 40 A. Rigid extruded polystyrene insulation: Closed cell foam board, square edge, self- extinguishing, conforming to ASTM C 578-87a, Type IV, with a compressive 40 strength of 25 pounds per square inch when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621 equal to Dow Chemical Corp., Styrofoam Brand "Square Edge" insulation. 1. Provide insulation boards used at masonry construction of size to suit spacing of through-wall reinforcement. 2. Thickness: 2 inches. B. Thermal batt/blanket glass fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C-665 Type I, un- faced,. Provide width appropriate for spacing of framing or furring members with which used. .r Building Insulation 07210-2 3/7/01 �s Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ! ' Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 40 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Rigid at perimeter foundation walls to a depth of 4 feet. 2. Thermal batt insulation between roof and attic framing with insulation baffles. 3. Thermal batt insulation between wall framing. 4. Acoustical insulation where indicated. 5. Blown-in insulation in existing walls and above ceilings. oft 6. Foamed-in-place insulation installed around door frames, window frames, and penetrations in exterior walls. 7. Vapor barrier beneath floor slabs and in walls. 8. Sill sealer. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07534- ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER(EPDM) ROOFING: roof insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ASTM C 518 Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties !� by Means of the Heat Flow Meter. 2. ASTM C 578- Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM E 96-Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 5. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for thermal insulation and vapor barriers. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. The"R-Value" referred to herein refers to the thermal resistance of the insulation alone and does not allow consideration of air spaces or other factors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. Building Insulation 07210-1 40 3/7/01 am o. Ir/ s RRO,S TIpN Cp ►N C, e an 148 Newton Street Tel: (413)533-1320 So. Hadley,.FAX 32 MA 01075 we 1149 wee go m w!r w 00 wir w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Apply first row of board horizontally starting at base of foundation and continue up wall to a height of 6 inches below finish grade. Adhere board to membrane as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect applied sheet membrane waterproofing and composite drainage board fabric from damage by other trades, construction materials or backfill. End of Section Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07134-5 3/7/01 .w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty or surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer. •• D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Perform all preparation work on receiving surfaces as required, including removal of fins, scaling, and projecting rough spots, and removal of all dirt, oil, and other WX foreign matter from the concrete surfaces. B. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer at a rate of 250 to 350 square feet per gallon; areas not covered with membrane in 24 hours must be reconditioned. s C. Prepare inside corners by installing a fillet of liquid membrane, latex modified cement mortar or epoxy mortar, extend 6 inches in all directions beyond the corner. Ab D. Cracks and joints in substrate surface must be properly sealed with waterstop,joint filler and sealant as recommended by the sheet membrane waterproofing manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION - MEMBRANE A. Perform the application of the sheet membrane waterproofing system in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation specifications, details, and recommendations, and as specified herein. B. At all external and internal corners, apply a continuous strip of sheet membrane, at least 12 inches wide, centered on the axis of the corner, before the general application of the membrane. C. Apply 8 inch wide strips of the sheet membrane over all cracks greater than 1/16 inch in width. D. Apply a double layer of the sheet membrane around all penetrations in the surface. Apply a bead of compatible sealant between the top layer of membrane and the clamping rings of penetrating items and at all terminations. E. Apply the sheet membrane in strips of 8 feet in length or less, overlapping edge seams at least 2-1/2 inches. Stagger all end laps. Roll the entire surface of the membrane firmly and completely, as soon as possible after application thereof. Seal all tee joints at the end of each working day. Seal all daily terminations, and permanent terminations with manufacturer's recommended sealant material. F. After application of membrane is completed, carefully inspect the entire waterproofed surface for defects therein. Patch tears and inadequately lapped seams with membrane material. Slit fishmouths, repair with a patch extending at least 6 inches in all directions from the slit, and seal all edges of the patch with manufacturer's recommended sealant. 3.4 APPLICATION - PROTECTION BOARD A. Where rigid insulation is not indicated, apply protection board in a manner acceptable by the membrane manufacturer and as recommended by the composite ► board manufacturer and following the general guidelines specified herein. B. Install board on same day sheet membrane waterproofing is applied. Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07134-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet membrane: Prefabricated composite sheet, minimum of 60 mils thick, consisting of 56 mils thickness of rubberized asphalt and 4 mils thick cross laminated polyethylene film, self-adhering after removal of release paper, and furnished in 36 inch wide rolls, meeting or exceeding the following physical properties: 1. Pliability: Unaffected when tested by ASTM D 146. 2. Tensile strength for membrane, as per ASTM D 412, modified: 250 pounds per square inch, minimum. 3. Tensile strength for film, as per ASTM D 412, modified: 5,000 pounds per square inch, minimum. 4. Elongation, as per ASTM D 412, modified: 300 percent, minimum. 5. Cycling over crack at minus 25 degrees Fahrenheit: No effect at 100 cycles. 6. Cycling over one-inch wide joint at minus 15 degrees Fahrenheit: No effect at 1,000 cycles. 7. Peel adhesion,when tested for 7 days dry at 70 degrees Fahrenheit and 120 ! degrees Fahrenheit and for 7 days wet at 70 degrees Fahrenheit: 5.0 pounds per inch width, minimum. 8. Puncture resistance for membrane, (ASTM E 154): 50 pounds, minimum. OF 9. Resistance to hydrostatic head of water: 150 feet, minimum. 10. Exposure to fungi in soil for 16 weeks, as per GSA-PBS 07111: Unaffected. 11. Permeance as per ASTM E 96, Method B: 0.05 (grains/sq.ft./hr./in. Hg), maximum. 12. Water absorption, as per ASTM D 570: 0.1 percent by weight, maximum. + B. Protection board: 1.0 pound per cubic foot density, 1 inch thick expanded polystyrene protection board. C. Primer, crack filler, mastics, and adhesives: As recommended by the sheet ! !! membrane manufacturer. 1. Primer: Rubber based low VOC content primer formulated with high solids content which shall comply with regulatory VOC requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. 1. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are rigidly installed. 2. Verify surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves, or projections which may be detrimental to successful installation. B. Notify the Contractor in writing if concrete substrate requires patching of holes over 1/2 inch in diameter or length and over 1/4 inch deep. Do not proceed until patching is completed. Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07134-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,, Northampton, Massachusetts B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01780- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Manufacturer's and Applicator's warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation and resultant damage from failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store waterproofing materials in new, sealed, containers showing manufacturer's identification, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. B. Store all materials in an elevated, dry location, protected by waterproof coverings. Following manufacturer's recommended storage procedures for humidity and temperature conditions, protect materials from freezing. 1. Store protection board flat, on a wood platform, protected by waterproof coverings. 2. Protect primers, mastic and adhesives from high heat, flames or sparks. .. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before and during application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year Manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Division 1 and Conditions of the Contract. Warranty shall include replacement of defective materials. B. Provide 2 year Applicator's warranty or bond under provisions of Division 1 and Conditions of the Contract. Warranty shall include removal and replacement of defective materials, and repairs or replacement of Owner's materials and products w damaged due to failure of waterproofing installation to resist water or moisture penetration. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Primary manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on W.R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division, Cambridge MA, Product: "Bituthene 3000"sheet membrane waterproofing. Similar products which may be considered as equal .e include the following: 1. Nicolon Corp, Mirafi Group, Norcross GA: product"Miradri 860/861". 2. Polyguard Products, Inc., Ennis TX.; Product: "650" membrane. •• 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin IL.; Product: "Mel-rol" Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07134-2 3/7/01 �` Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 07134 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install: 1. Self-adhesive elastomeric sheet membrane waterproofing system, including specified sheet membrane, protection board, required fillets, counter flashing, and all required primers and adhesives, applied to exterior surfaces of foundation walls. 2. Protection board over membrane waterproofing system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ASTM D 146-Sampling and Testing Felted and Woven Fabrics Saturated with Bituminous Substances for Use in Waterproofing and Roofing. 2. ASTM D 412-Tests for Rubber Properties in Tension. 3. ASTM D 570-Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 4. ASTM C 578-Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. u 5. ASTM D 1621 -Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 6. ASTM D 1682 -Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics. 7. ASTM E 96-Tests for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form. 8. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL OR PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties. 2. Manufacturer's application instructions including data for surface conditioners, joint and crack treatment and application temperature range. 3. Review statement:Written statement, signed by the waterproofing applicator, stating that the Contract Drawings have been completely reviewed with an agent of the waterproofing system manufacturer; accompanied by a written statement from the manufacturer that the selected sheet membrane waterproofing system is proper, compatible, and adequate for the application shown. a. The waterproofing applicator will notify the Architect and Owner in writing that the as-built field conditions when exposed are in conflict with the Contract Documents for the proper application of the selected waterproofing system or the warranty requirements. Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07134-1 4P 3/7/01 on Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts scratches and sander markings, buff with nylon buffing pads as recommended by polymer manufacturer. Wipe surfaces clean and dry with cloths. I. Finished work shall be free from visible adhesive and pencil marks. J. Field touch-up: Shall be the responsibility of the installer and shall include the filling, and touch-up of exposed job made nail or screw holes, refinishing of surfaces resulting from job fitting, repair of job inflicted scratches and marks, and final cleaning up of the finished surfaces. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL .s A. General: Install work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Solid surfacing shall be installed plumb, level, true and straight without distortions: 1. Use concealed shims as required. 2. Work shall be installed to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and levelness, including tops. 3. There shall be no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Tops and trim shall be scribed and trimmed to fit adjoining work. 1. Where cuts occur, refinish surfaces and repair damaged finishes. D. Secure polymer fabrications to blocking directly attached to substrates. 1. Secure fabrications using concealed fasteners. 2. Anchor tops securely to base units and to other support systems.as required. E. After installation and leveling of polymer fabrications has been completed; apply a continuous bead of specified sealant to all joints which abut walls or partitions. Tool the sealant to a uniformly dense surface, level with the edges of the casework. Immediately remove all excess sealant from polymer surfaces. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true position 1/16 inch with a maximum of 1/32 inch offset from true alignment with adjoining surfaces intended to be flush. 3.3 CLEANING A. Wash down polymer surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed fabrications in a manner acceptable to fabricator and installer, wu which shall ensure no damage or deterioration at the time of Final acceptance of Project by the Architect. End of Section Solid Surfacing 06650-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts D. Adhesive for build-up of polymer sheets: color matched two-component seam adhesive as provided by polymer manufacturer. E. Adhesive for installation of trim components, neoprene panel adhesive or structural silicone glazing sealant, as recommended by polymer manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant, for joints between countertops and dissimilar materials: Joint Sealer Type M as specified in Section 07900 -JOINT SEALERS. B. Bolts, nuts,washers, lags, pins, and screws: Of size and type to suit application chrome finish in exposed-to-view locations. C. Fir plywood for backing:APA C-C PLUGGED EXT. D. Concealed supports for edge and corner backing shall be kiln dried birch or poplar. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Coordinate the fabrication of solid surfacing products with that of the various trades responsible for installing materials and items which will be inserted into, or applied to, the countertop surfaces. Obtain and verify templates, dimensions, and instructions from the respective trades before making cut-outs, holes, slots, and other cutting in the countertops. B. Shop fabricate all solid surfacing items in strict accordance with the details on the Drawings, the approved shop drawings, and recommendations of the polymer manufacturer 1. Shop install sinks using seamed undermount design, ensure edges of sink are smooth and flush with counter; lipped design is not acceptable. of 2. Prepare polymer fabrications for installation of plumbing fixtures. C. Fit corners and joints hairline. Make all field joints and miters tight, secure with concealed fasteners. D. Provide shop fabricated counters, shop mitered components, closure trims with ample allowance for field cutting and fitting. Provide additional trim as required for scribing and site cutting. E. Route all edges to be butted for a smooth, clean fit. Sand edges with 120 grit sandpaper to rough up surfaces for adhesive bonding. Clean with denatured alcohol. F. Prepare and apply adhesive in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. Clamp all components using manufacturer's approved clamping methods at all joints and build-up laminations, maintain clamping until adhesive is set. Avoid over tightening clamps and squeezing out adhesive. G. Remove excess adhesive when dry with router. Follow with belt sander using 120 grit, diagonal to joint. After adhesive is leveled and smooth with surface, proceed with final shaping and finishing. H. After shaping, bring finish of all surfaces equal to manufacturer's original satin finish. Sand surfaces smooth with wet 400 grit sandpaper. Remove superficial Solid Surfacing 06650-3 W 3/7/01 w� Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations WX Northampton, Massachusetts C. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays and to minimize on-site storage. w 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature above 55 degrees Fahrenheit for 5 calendar days before, during, and after installation of polyumer fabrications; maintain temperature IN until Owner's Final Acceptance. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS .e� A. Field dimensions: The fabricator is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by Project conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. 1. The Contractor shall acknowledge the fabricator's need for accurate field dimensions prior to custom fabrication. 2. The Contractor and the fabricator shall cooperate to establish and maintain ww these field dimensions. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work. air PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacture: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on E.I. du Point Nemours & Co., Inc., Wilmington DE product"Corian," no substitution will be accepted. ■• 2.2 SOLID SURFACING MATERIALS A. Solid surfacing material: Non-porous surfacing material homogeneously composed of natural minerals and high-performance polymer, (methyl methacrylate binder), fabricated sizes and profiles as shown on the Drawings, colors as scheduled on the Drawing. 1. Solid surfacing material shall be NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) listed under publication 51 - Plastic Materials and Components used in Food Equipment and bear the"component" mark. 2. Colors and patterns shall be as selected by the Architect. B. Sheet thicknesses shall be as specified below or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Countertops: One piece monolithic design 3/4 inch thick,with integral cast-in sinks. 2. Backsplashes: 3/4 inch thick in locations and heights as shown on the Drawings. C. Sinks Undermount-design bowls having square edge top. Corian model 809S having a bowl size of 10-1/2 inch length by 12-1/2 inch width by 6-11/16 inches deep. Color shall match counter. Solid Surfacing 06650-2 3/7/01 " MAROIS ith College NSTRUCTION CO. INC. nnex Renovations )n, Massachusetts aion 06650 SURFACING E and integral sinks. 148 Newton Street•So. Hadley, MA 01075 countertops, backsplashes and abutting surfaces. Tel: (413) 533-1320• FAX 532-1149 E5. wrare arrcar=uuTs-vomm sons olymer items as required to accommodate sinks, and other plumbing fixtures, from templates provided by the respective trades. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood blocking and nailers. B. Section 06400-ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: Cabinetry, shelving and other shop fabricated casework. C. Division 15- MECHANICAL: Plumbing fixtures and piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data. Identify available colors, shades, and gloss. 2. Shop drawings: Large scale design details of minimum 1-1/2 inch-to-1 foot scale, showing abutting materials, installation conditions, clearances. Show profiles,jointing and fastening methods. 3. Selection samples: a. Solid polymer samples for initial color selection by Architect. b. Sealant material: Manufacturer's standard strips of sealant, in all available colors, for selections by the Architect. c. Provide additional samples as requested by Architect for initial selection of material colors and finishes. 4. Verification samples: a. 12 by 12 inch samples of solid polymer materials. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Concrete, masonry, plaster,tile and marble setting and polishing and other wet work shall be completed and dry before delivery, storage and installation of polymer items. B. Ship and handle all materials and fabricated items in a manner which will prevent damage thereto, and store all materials and fabricated items at a dry, elevated, ventilated, and protected interior location. Solid Surfacing 06650-1 OR 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ! "! Northampton, Massachusetts be damaged or soiled, and is completely free of defects at the time of final acceptance of Project by the Architect. End of Section OR OP Architectural Woodwork 06400-9 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Tops and woodwork shall be scribed and trimmed to fit adjoining work. 1. Where cuts occur, refinish surfaces and repair damaged finishes D. Secure woodwork to anchors or built-in blocking or blocking directly attached to substrates. 1. Secure woodwork to grounds, furring, stripping and blocking as required with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing performing a complete installation. 3.4 INSTALLATION -CASEWORK A. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately and evenly aligned. B. Adjust casework hardware centering the doors and drawers in the openings, and provide unencumbered operation. C. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. D. Tops: Anchor tops securely to base units and to other support systems as required. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true position 1/16 inch with a maximum of 1/32 inch offset from true alignment with adjoining surfaces intended to be flush. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. To whatever extent work was not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork, perform and complete the specified finishing of woodwork. B. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible eliminating defects .w functionally and visually. 1. Where not possible to repair damaged or defective work, replace with matching new work. 2. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. C. Adjust doors and drawers for smooth and balanced movement, lubricate hardware for use. 3.7 CLEANING A. Carefully clean exposed and semi-exposed wood surfaces, in strict accordance with fabricator's instructions. Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas, matching adjoining finish. B. Wash down plastic laminate with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Clean and polish hardware. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed woodwork and maintain specified conditions, in a manner acceptable to both fabricator and installer. Ensure that work of this Section will not Architectural Woodwork 06400-8 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts and workmanship standards set forth in the AWI Quality Standards Section 400, for specified Quality Grade. C. Shop fabricate all plastic laminate clad items. Adhere plastic laminate to particle board backing sheets by cold-press-method. Use of contact cements are not permitted.Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of all laminated, panels, shelving and tops. D. Fit corners and joints hairline. Make all joints and miters tight, secure with concealed fasteners. 2.9 SHOP APPLIED FINISHING A. Opaque Finish 1. Items: All exterior casework surfaces not receiving plastic laminate. 2. Finish system: Custom Grade, AWI Factory Finish System N° OP-1, "Standard Lacquer" system having a satin gloss sheen of 30° to 50° gloss units per ASTM D523. 3. One coat primer-surfacer. 4. Two coats topcoat: Alkyd nitrocellulose lacquer equal to Sherwin Williams product"L61 series OPEX Lacquer". B. Concealed surfaces:Thoroughly coat all concealed surfaces of finish woodwork before assembling with two coats of clear wood preservative. C. Field Touch-up: Shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor and shall include the filling, and touch-up of exposed job made nail or screw holes, refinishing of raw surfaces resulting from job fitting, repair of job inflicted scratches and marks, and final cleaning up of the finished surfaces. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of blocking, backing and support framing for all finish carpentry work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installing work under this section,woodwork shall be conditioned to average prevailing humidity conditions in areas of installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install work in accordance with the specified AWI quality standards. B. Woodwork shall be installed plumb, level, true and straight without distortions. 1. Use concealed shims as required 2. Work shall be installed to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and levelness, including tops. 3. There shall be no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. OR Architectural Woodwork 06400-7 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Concealed joint fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.6 FABRICATION -GENERAL A. Coordinate the fabrication of casework with that of the various trades responsible for installing materials and items which will be inserted into, or applied to, the casework surfaces. Obtain and verify templates, dimensions, and instructions from the respective trades before making cut-outs, holes, slots, and other cutting in the casework. �. B. Shop assemble custom casework for delivery to site. Deliver in assemblies as large as possible for entrance into the designated areas. Provide for concealed job connections of adjacent units. C. Fabricate, install and finish all work so that both sides of panels, doors, shelves and other casework are of balanced construction, to prevent warping. w D. Fit corners and joints hairline, secure with concealed fasteners. E. Finish all solid wood and plywood surfaces smooth, and free from all machine and tool marks that will show through facing materials. F. Make all joints tight, and form to conceal shrinkage. Glue all miters having a dimension of 4 inches or more from heel to point. G. Provide shop fabricated counters, shop mitered components, closure trims with ample allowance for field cutting and fitting. Provide additional trim as required for scribing and site cutting. H. Finished work shall be free from visible adhesive and pencil marks. 2.7 FABRICATION -CASEWORK w A. Fabricate casework in accordance with requirements of specified AWI Grade and the following additional requirements: 1. Cabinets shall be in flush overlay construction, with drawer fronts and hinged doors overlapping openings a minimum of 1/4 inch all four sides. 2. Fabricate cabinets in integral units, each completely enclosed, without the use of common partitions. 3. Wall cabinets: Provide same finishes as base cabinets, with 3/4 inch thick top and bottom veneered plywood panels. Top and bottom panels shall be glued and doweled and let into routed end panels. Back of case shall be recessed 4W and let into routed end panels and further secured with glue blocks. 4. Door and drawer spreaders: Provide minimum 3/4 thick full width cabinet body spreaders immediately behind all door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal .A joints to maintain exact body dimensions, and close off reveal. Front edge to be match face of adjacent cabinet doors/drawers. 2.8 FABRICATION OF PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD ITEMS " A. Do not fabricate materials until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. B. Except as otherwise specified hereunder, fabricate plastic laminate clad items in strict accordance with the details on the Drawings, the approved shop drawings, Architectural Woodwork 06400-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts b. Knape &Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI. c. (Lamp) Sugatsune America, Inc. Carson, CA. d. Outwater Plastic Industries Inc., Woodridge NY. e. Stanley Hardware, New Britain CT. B. Door and drawer pulls: Staple-shape wire pull, 4 inches long, solid brass with US26D, brushed chrome finish,with one-inch finger clearance. C. Catches: Magnetic touch latch type. D. Casework hinges: 1. General: Hinges shall be nickel plate over die-cast and formed metal. Assemblies made from plastic parts are not acceptable. Provide face frame adapter plates where face frames are indicated. a. Wall cabinets: provide 3 hinges for each door leaf. 2. Hinge for full overlay cabinet doors: Self closing concealed hinge having maximum 125 degree angle of opening. Hinges shall be equal to Blum "Modul 125 Series", with straight arm, model N°. 95M5550. E. Pad silencers for doors: 10 mm (3/8 inch)diameter, self-adhesive resilient plastic or nylon buttons, at least 2 per door, in clear color. F. Drawer Slides: Full extension type, 150 pounds per pair minimum rated capacity (for drawers over 30 inches, provide 175 pounds rated capacity), steel ball bearing rollers, drawer hold in feature. Finish: clear lacquered zinc.Acceptable slides are limited to: a. For drawers up to 24 inches wide: 1) Accuride N°. 4032. b. For drawers over 24 inches and up to 30 inches wide: 1) Accuride N°.4032. c. For drawers over 30 inches wide: 1) Accuride N°. 4437. G. Shelf supports. +! 1. Shelf standards with clip-type supports: a. Standards 5/8 inch wide by 3/16 inch high steel standards with 1/2 inch centers for shelf supports, zinc of lengths required for conditions applied, equal to Knape &Vogt model N°. 255 steel standards. b. Shelf clips for wood shelves: Knape&Vogt model N°. 243 in finish matching standards. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for installation of plastic laminate: Rigid bond Polyvinyl acetate (PVA) type only. B. Glue for lamination and fabrication of wood and plywood items: Exterior Grade, phenolic resin glue. C. Bolts, nuts,washers, lags, pins, and screws: Of size and type to suit application chrome finish in exposed-to-view locations. Architectural Woodwork 06400-5 !!IA 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2.3 POLYESTER LAMINATE (MELAMINE) A. Polyester laminate (melamine): Thermosetting acid resistant polyester resin impregnated laminate, permanently bonded to substrate. 1. Polyester laminate to be 9 to 11 mils in thickness, 62% resin content, colorfast. 2. The following requirements, standards and tests shall apply: a. U.S. Federal: F.S.L. P-508 b. ASTM: D-1300-53T c. U.S. Food & Drug: Section 175.300 d. NEMA: LQ1-1977 •+ e. NEMA: LD3-1980 B. Provide colored polyester laminate for where indicated on Drawings. Color shall be a■r white, black, buff or grey as selected by Architect. 1. Polyester laminate shall be used for the interior surfaces of all closed cabinets and drawers, where general purpose grade laminate is not required. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE A. Manufacture: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on companies and products named under each particular hardware item. Manufacturers offering similar products which may be considered as equal, include the following: 1. Catches and latches: a. H.B. Ives Company, Wallingford CT. b. Knape&Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI. c. Stanley Hardware, New Britain CT. 2. Clothes poles and brackets: a. Knape &Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI. w 3. Drawer slides: a. Accuride Corp., Santa Fe Springs, CA. b. Grass America Inc., Kernersville NC. c. Hafele America Company, Archdale NC. d. Knape &Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI. .s 4. Hinges: a. Grass American Inc., Kernersville, NC b. Julius Blum, Inc. , Stanley NC. c. (Lamp) Sugatsune America, Inc. Carson, CA. 5. Pulls: a. Engineered Products Company, Flint MI. b. H.B. Ives Company, Wallingford CT. c. Hafele America Company, Archdale NC. .A 6. Shelf supports: a. Hafele America Company, Archdale NC. Architectural Woodwork 06400-4 3/7/01 '"'" " Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. General requirements: New, dressed four sides (S4S), and free from warping and other defects. 1. Moisture Content: a. Typical (hardwood and softwoods): Moisture content of wood shall be !! between 5 and 10 percent when delivered to the project. B. Exposed wood scheduled for opaque finish (for frames, shelves, fillers, edge trim and drawer construction): White Birch, plain sliced, meeting AWI Premium Grade Standards. Additionally,wood shall be clear without knots, and other natural defects. C. Exposed plywood panels scheduled for opaque finish: Medium density overlay plywood, in thicknesses indicated in Drawings. D. Concealed supports for edge and corner backing shall be kiln dried birch or poplar, meeting AWI Premium Grade Standards. E. Blocking and furring at base and walls shall comply with American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20-70 and with specific grading requirements of SPIB: Kiln tp dried (KD15), Structural Light Framing, N°. 2 grade,free of warping and large knots. F. Internal concealed framing for casework: Kiln-dried, (KD15), eastern pine, poplar, eastern spruce, or southern pine, conforming to AWI Premium grade. G. Fir plywood for concealed from view applications in conjunction with the various casework items: APA C-C PLUGGED EXT. 2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACING AND BACKING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Formica Corp., Cincinnati, OH.. 2. Laminart, Elk Grove Village, IL.. 3. Pioneer Plastics Corp. (Pionite), Auburn ME.. 4. Nevamar Corp., Odenton MD.. B. Plastic laminate, general purpose, conforming to NEMA LD3.1 -1991 Grade GP50, nominal 0.050 inch thickness, colors and textures as scheduled on the Drawing. 1. General purpose grade laminate shall be used for all exposed to view surfaces including a. Exposed outward face of cabinet fronts and closure trim. b. Cabinet doors (all sides). c. Drawer fronts (all sides). C. Backing: Mattformed three layer medium density wood particle panel, general use grade per ANSI A 208.1 with an minimum density of 48 pounds per cubic foot. Architectural Woodwork 06400-3 PRO 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .� Northampton, Massachusetts b. Provide additional information required for fillers and finish products: Include, chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, *� limitations and special application requirements. Identify available colors, shades, and gloss. 2. Shop drawings bearing dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project, include at least the following: a. 1/4 inch scale elevations and plans of each casework item. b. Large scale design details of minimum 1-1/2 inch to 1-foot scale, showing abutting materials, installation conditions, clearances. Show woodwork profiles,jointing and fastening methods; details of drawers and doors. C. Full size or half-full size sections, showing individual components, profiles and jointing. 3. Selection samples: a. Plastic laminate chips for initial color selection by Architect. b. Provide additional samples as requested by Architect for initial selection of material colors and finishes. .w 4. Verification samples: a. 12 by 12 inch samples of plastic laminate. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator: AWI member specializing in architectural woodwork of type specified herein having a minimum of 5 years documented experience. B. Quality Standards: All work performed under this Section shall be Custom grade as defined in the referenced AWI "Quality Standards. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING w A. The woodwork manufacturer, woodwork installer and the Contractor are jointly responsible to make certain that woodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in ambient humidity and relative moisture content. B. Plaster, tile and other wet work shall be completed and dry before delivery, storage and installation of woodwork items. C. Ship and handle all materials and fabricated items in a manner which will prevent .. damage thereto, and store all materials and fabricated items at a dry, elevated, ventilated, and protected interior location. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field dimensions: The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by Project conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. 1. The Contractor shall acknowledge the woodwork fabricator's need for accurate field dimensions prior to custom fabrication. 2. The Contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. Architectural Woodwork 06400-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 4" A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Wood casework. 2. Plastic laminate casework. 3. Exposed blocking and blocking concealed by the work of this Section required for the installation of architectural woodwork. 4. Hardware for work of this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Concealed wood blocking and nailers. B. Section 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY: Interior and exterior wood trim. Poo C. Section 06650 - SOLID SURFACING: Solid surfacing material countertops. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-References. 1. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) Quality Standards, Seventh edition, version 1.0, for the following sections: qIX a. AWI Section 400: Casework. b. AWI Section 1500: Factory Finishing. c. AWI Section 1700: Installation. 2. APA Grades and Specifications. 3. National Lumber Grades Authority, American Lumber Standards, and Grading Rules and Standards of the various lumber associations whose species are being used, with grade-marks for same. 4. U.S. Department of Commerce Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16, for sizes and use classifications of lumber; and Product Standard (PS): a. PS-1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood Standard. b. PS-20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL P0 PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, for each item furnished hereunder, including, but not limited to: Fastenings, adhesives, hardware, and accessories a. Provide installation instructions for hardware and field applied items. l Architectural Woodwork 06400-1 !P 3/7/01 wa w w MAROIS CONSTRUCTION CO. INC. w an 148 Newton Street•So. Hadley, MA 01075 Tel: (413) 533-1320• FAX 532-1149 w W w w at we ww .s w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.8 PROTECTION A. During the operation of finish carpentry, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled. End of Section Ob on P4 PP P0 Finish Carpentry 06200-7 op 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,. Northampton, Massachusetts E. All nails in interior finished work shall be blind nailed wherever possible. Nail trim with finish nails only, set using appropriate nailpunch and fill with matching wood Mier. Sand smooth wood filler. Do not fasten trim with screws or bolts unless otherwise directed, or is to be subsequently covered with smaller trim. F. Woodwork shall be properly framed, closely fitted and accurately set to the required lines and levels and shall be rigidly secured in place. Shim as required using concealed shims to achieve specified tolerances_ w0 G. Cover exposed edges of plywood shelving with 3/8 inch hardwood edging.Width of edging to match thickness of shelving. 3.4 INSTALLATION -WOOD HANDRAILS A. Secure brackets to wall with flat head countersunk toggle or molly bolts secured into continuous steel plate concealed in wall construction,with heads matching finish of bracket . 1. Provide brackets for 2'-6"centers with minimum 2 brackets for any single length of run. 3.5 INSTALLATION - DOORS AND HARDWARE A. Install doors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,ANSI/SDI- 100, SDI-105, and the Door Hardware Institute recommendations. B. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of referenced organizations, and the requirements of Section 08710- DOOR HARDWARE. C. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. D. Conform to ANSI 117.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped. E. Tools for maintenance: All special tools packaged with hardware items shall be saved,tagged/identified as to product use, and turned over to the Owner upon •• completion of the Work. F. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. G. Prior to Final Inspection make final check and adjustment of all hardware, clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation for wood work from true position of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with a maximum of 1/16 inch offsets in adjoining surfaces intended to be flush. B. Maximum variation for doors and frames: Maximum diagonal distortion 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced movement. R Finish Carpentry 06200-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts c. Corrosion rates: Less than one mil per year for carbon steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, copper and red brass in contact with the fire retardant treated wood when tested in accordance with Federal Specification MIL- L-19140E Paragraph 4.6.5.2. d. The fire retardant treated wood must have an equilibrium moisture content of not more than 25 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3201 procedures at 95 percent relative humidity and 80 degrees Fahrenheit. 04 e. Fire retardant chemical: Registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. f. Testing: Fire performance and strength properties for both lumber and plywood, of the fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report. Fire retardant chemical must not damage the middle lammella of the wood structure when exposed to 170 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 percent relative humidity for 23 days. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of blocking, backing and support framing for all finish carpentry work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Back prime with alkyd primer all exterior wood trim . B. Prime with alkyd primer, all surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Dress and sand woodwork until free from machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grain, or other defects that will show through the finish on surfaces exposed to view. Wherever possible, carry out sanding on a shop belt sander, not in the field. Sandpaper field joints and leave in perfect condition for finishing. B. Make all joints tight, and form to conceal shrinkage. Glue all miters having a dimension of 4 inches or more from heel to point. Joints shall be glued tight and so formed as to conceal shrinkage. Cope trim at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. C. Make a minimum of splices and joints in running trim, and where such splices and joints occur, fasten securely,with all exposed surfaces having smooth, continuous planes. Stagger joints in adjacent or relate members. Use scarf joints for end-to- end joints. D. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work closely. Refinish cut surfaces in prefinished items. Finish Carpentry 06200-5 3/7/01 .. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Nails: 1. Nails for interior trim items: 6d and 8d coated or galvanized finish nails, except as otherwise specified herein. 2. Nails for exterior trim items: 6d and 8d epoxy coated or hot dipped galvanized finish nails. Electro-plated nails are not acceptable as equal. D. Screws: Flat-head wood screws of the appropriate sizes, galvanized finish for interior use and stainless steel for exterior use. we E. Bolts, nuts, washers, blind fasteners, lags: Galvanized, of size and type to suite application as indicated in the drawings. 2.6 FABRICATION -WOOD HANDRAILS ..� A. Fabricate as detailed on the drawings. Construct end returns and all joint conditions where railing changes direction, with mitered corners, pressure glued with concealed splines or dowelled. Ease all edges. 2.7 WOOD TREATMENTS A. Treated wood products shall be produced by a single treatment plant, fully licensed by the chemical manufacturers, and conforming to the requirements specified herein. 1. Kiln dry all treated lumber and plywood to the following maximum moisture .� content after treatment. a. Lumber: 19 percent. .* b. Plywood 15 percent. c. Discard pieces with defects which might impair quality of work. 2. Quality marks: Each piece of lumber and plywood shall be permanently we affixed with a quality mark, containing the following information: a. Identification of the inspection agency. b. Standard to which material was treated. an c. Identification of the treating plant. d. Fire retardant treated wood shall include: e. Preservative treated wood shall include: Retention and end use for which product is suitable. B. Fire retardant treated wood. Designated as"FRTW" 1. Chemical Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, Products which.may be incorporated in the work include: a. Hickson Corporation, product, "Dricon". ► b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc., product"PyroGuard". 2. Fire retardant treated wood shall comply with the following requirements: a. All fire-retardant lumber and plywood must have an Underwriters Laboratories stamp signifying a FR-S rating certifying a 25 or less flame spread and smoke developed value, when tested in accordance to ASTM E-84, or UBC Standard No. 42-1. b. Fire retardant chemical: Free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. as Finish Carpentry 06200-4 3/7/01 ON t Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2— PRODUCTS 0 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Quality Standards: All materials and workmanship scheduled to receive transparent r± finishes shall meet AWI Premium grade quality standards. All other materials and workmanship shall meet AWI Custom grade quality standards. B. Moisture content: 1. Wood for interior use shall have a moisture content between 5 and 10 percent,when delivered to the project. 2. Wood for exterior use shall have a moisture content between 9 to 15 percent, when delivered to the project. 2.2 BOARD AND PANEL MATERIALS A. Interior trim to receive paint: Clear straight-grained poplar, C-Select or better. B. Exterior finish lumber: Pine graded B & better per WWPA grading rules, except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or herein. 1. Stair treads:APA RATED SHEATHING, STRUCTURAL 1 exposure durability classified, EXPOSURE 1, having a minimum span rating 32/16, touch-sanded, 314 inch thickness, or of laminated thicknesses required to match dimensions indicated in the Drawings. Glue edge banding on exposed edges with 3/4 inch thick Douglas Fir or Poplar. C. Provide other finish carpentry products, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. ON 2.3 WIRE SHELVING A. Vinyl coated wire shelving: 1. Manufacturer: Closet Maid, Ocala FL., Schulte, Cincinnati, OH, or as approved equal. 2. Shelving: Cold-drawn-steel wire shelving, polyvinyl chloride coated having a minimum coating thickness of 7 to 11 mils. 3. Provide intermediate support brackets so that span does not exceed 36 inches. 2.4 CLOSET HARDWARE A. Metal closet rods and brackets: 1. Closet pole: Equal to Knape and Vogt N°. 770-1, heavy wall steel tubing, of lengths required for full width of closet,with flanges. 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND HARDWARE A. Handrail brackets: Ives No. 162, PA28 finish, or brackets manufactured by Rangine Corp., Millis, MA, (tel: 1-800-826-6006). Furnish with stainless steel 1/4 inch 20 button head socket screws and stainless steel self-locking hex nuts. B. Glue for lamination and fabrication of wood, plywood and particle board items: Exterior Grade, phenolic resin glue. Finish Carpentry 06200-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 5. SDI 122- Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 6. SPIB Grading Rules, current edition. 7. U.S. Department of Commerce Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16, for sizes and use classifications of lumber 8. American Lumber Standards Committee, National Lumber Grades Authority for Canadian Lumber, and applicable grading rules and standards of the various lumber associations whose species are being used for grades specified. 9. AWPA C-20-Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. 10. AWPA C-27- Plywood, Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. 11. UL Building Materials Directory. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: wA 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, installation instructions for hardware, adhesives and accessories furnished hereunder. „ 2. Certifications: Written certification from the respective treatment plants indicating types of fire-retardant treatment used, treatments method, applications instructions, and conformance to the requirements specified , herein. a. Provide certification that fire retardant treatment materials do not contain ammonium phosphate. b. Provide report from National Evaluation Service Committee on fire retardant treated wood flame spreading, strength, corrosion and hygroscopic properties. .w 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install work in accordance with the latest specified AWI quality standards, except that standing and running trim joints shall be field mitered and fitted. B. Discard lengths of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry materials to the project until all concrete, masonry, plaster, and other wet work has been completed and dry. B. Ship and handle all materials and fabricated items in a manner which will prevent damage thereto, and store all materials and fabricated items at a dry, elevated, ventilated, and protected interior location maintaining 60 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. w�a Finish Carpentry 06200-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install: 1. Exterior trim at new windows. 2. Interior finish wood trim. 3. Storage and closet shelving, coat rods and related hardware. 4. Wood handrails with metal brackets, as indicated. 5. Wood stairs and aprons, and associated trim. 6. Back-priming prior to installation. B. Install Owner-furnished (OFCI)wardrobe hook at each student room door, mirror at each closet door, and room numbers for each interior entry door. C. Install the following furnished under the designated Sections: 1. Wood doors furnished by Section 08216-STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS. 2. Door hardware, thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and gaskets furnished by Section 08710—DOOR HARDWARE. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood blocking,framing, curbs, nailers, and backer boards. B. Section 06400-ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: Casework. C. Section 07900-JOINT SEALERS: Sealant and backing materials, for joints between casework, countertops and abutting surfaces. D. Section 08216- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS: Furnishing wood doors. E. Section 08550-WOOD WINDOWS: Furnish and installing wood windows. F. Section 09910- PAINTS: Field applied primer and finish coatings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. AWI Quality Standards, Seventh edition, for the following sections. a. AWI Section 100: Lumber. b. AWI Section 300: Standing and Running Trim (Interior and Exterior). c. AWI Section 1700: Installation. 2. APA-applicable grades and specifications. 3. PS-1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. 4. PS-20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard. Finish Carpentry 06200-1 3/7/01 w .Ar MYA 00 ma MAROIS 40 CON S-C71ON CO. iNC. 4w 148 Newton Street•So. Hadley, MA 01075 . 0 Tel: (413)533-1320• FAX 532-1149 Wk on .awr Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.8 TOLERANCES A. Framing members: Maximum deviation more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet from true or plumb position. Nb B. Door frames: Maximum diagonal distortion 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.9 SCHEDULES A. Wood treatment schedule: 1. Pressure preservative treat all concealed or exposed-to-view: a. Lumber and plywood which comes in contact with concrete, or earth. b. Lumber and plywood nailers, blocking and curbing directly related to roofing, flashing, and roof accessories. 04 2. Fire retardent treat all equipment backer boards, additionally provide fire retardent treated lumber and plywood where indicated or noted on Drawings. B. Wood blocking schedule:The following schedule lists common items for which blocking is required and may not be indicated on the Drawings. It is not the intention of this schedule to list all conditions requiring blocking or limit the extent of blocking required for completion of the Work; provide all wood blocking, edgings, go nailers, required for receipt of various finishes and surfacing materials. Securely anchor wood blocking and run continuous between framing. Items Nominal size of blocking with fastener notes g„ Mirror and shower rods 2 by 4 inch. Soap dispensers 1 by 3 inch. Paper towel dispensers 1 by 3 inch. Toilet paper dispensers 2 by 4 inch. Grab bars 2 by 6 inch, with 1/4 inch dia. toggle bolts. Lavatories 2 by 8 inch,with 1/4 inch dia.toggle bolts Wall mounted door stops 1 by 3 inch. Window treatment 2 by 4 inch. End of Section !R Rough Carpentry 06100-9 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts centers around panel edges, and 12 inches on centers throughout the remainder of the panel. Spacing at panel edge joints shall be as follows; provide staggered *" panel end joints. 1. Beneath tile finish floors: 1/4 inch spacing at all panel edge joints and 1/8 inch spacing at end joints) 2. Beneath resilient floors and carpeting: 1/16 inch (minimum)to 1/8 inch (maximum)spacing all edge and end joints. B. Secure subfloor sheets perpendicular to floor framing with end joints staggered and ends over firm bearing. Attach sheets to joists with subfloor adhesive and screw in accordance with the above paragraph. C. Place 15 pound felt paper between subfloor and underlayment. D. Install underlayment after dust and dirt generating activities have ceased. Apply perpendicular to subflooring, stagger joints, secure to joists with Number 8, 2-1/2 do inch long flat-head wood screws, countersunk, spaced per this Article. 3.6 INSTALLATION - ROOF SHEATHING AND DECKING A. Install plywood decking, in accordance with APA installation standards, using Number 8 screws or 8d ring shank nails, spaced 6 inches on centers around panel edges, and 12 inches on centers over framing, throughout the remainder of the panel. B. Secure sheets perpendicular to roof framing with end joints staggered and ends over firm bearing. Attach sheets to joists with subfloor glue and screw with Number w 8, 2-1/2 inch long flat-head wood screws, spaced 6 inches on centers around panel edges, and 12 inches on centers throughout the remainder of the panel. 3.7 INSTALLATION -METAL DOOR FRAMES ► A. Place in position all steel frames, furnished under Section 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES, in accordance with the approved shop drawings and frame schedule. +�!+ B. Coordinate installation of frames with the various trades installing abutting wall construction for anchor placement. C. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware under Section 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY and as furnished under Section 08710—DOOR HARDWARE. D. Install frames and doors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, ANSI/SDI-100, SDI-105, and the Door Hardware Institute (DHI) recommendations. 1. Provide rigid temporary bracing for frames as required to ensure maintenance of positioning, and remove only after frames have been permanently anchored. 2. Secure frames, occurring in existing masonry,with expansion bolts and sleeves. .■ 3. Where exposed fastener heads occur in frames, fill with automotive body filler and sand smooth. Rough Carpentry 06100-8 3/7/01 !I Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts E. Install blocking, grounds and furring, as required for proper attachment of the work of other trades, in accordance with the requirements provided by the respective related trades. 1. Spacing for furring and strapping shall not exceed 16 inches on center. F. Field cuts of fire retardent treated lumber: Do not rip or mill fire retardent treated lumber. Only end cuts, drilling holes and joining cuts are permitted. 04 G. Field cuts of inorganic arsenical pressure-treated lumber: Apply solution of copper naphthenate containing a minimum of 2 percent metallic copper in-solution, in accordance with AWPA standard M4. Brush liberally all cuts and holes. u H. Install concealed from view plywood with specified fasteners spaced not more than 10 inches on centers. I. Install fire-treated plywood backer boards with counter-sunk galvanized fasteners, of specified sizes, spaced not more than 12 inches on centers. 3.3 FRAMING A. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. B. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up. C. Construct framing and curb members full length without splices. D. Double members at openings over 24 inches wide. Space jack studs over and under opening to stud spacing. E. Construct double joint headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joints. F. Bridge joists which span in excess of 8 feet; fit bridging at midspan of joists. Provide solid blocking between framing which vertically spans in excess of 10 feet. G. Curb roof openings, except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. Coordinate curb installation with installation of interfacing work of other Sections. 3.4 INSTALLATION -WALL SHEATHING A. Install wall sheathing, in accordance with APA construction standards, using Number 8 screws or 8d ring shank nails, spaced 6 inches on centers around panel edges, and 12 inches on centers at intermediate supports. B. Secure sheathing with long dimension either parallel or perpendicular to wall studs with ends over firm bearing, stagger joints where possible. C. Apply building paper vertically over wall sheathing following manufacturer's directions.Weather lap edges and ends, tape joints with sheathing tape. 3.5 INSTALLATION - SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Install plywood subflooring and underlayment, in accordance with APA installation standards, using Number 8 screws or 8d ring shank nails, spaced 6 inches on ON Rough Carpentry 06100-7 1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Screws for interior applications: Flat head electroplated-galvanized wood screws of the appropriate sizes. we 2. Screws for exterior applications: Flat head hard aluminum, or stainless steel, wood screws, of the appropriate sizes. E. Anchor bolts, expansion bolts and lag screws: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, of the following types: 1. For lumber having actual thickness of 1-1/2 inches or greater to masonry and concrete: Anchor bolts or expansion bolts, as most applicable for the specific receiving surface material, 3/8-inch minimum diameter, spaced as shown on drawings, and staggered as far as practicable. Countersink all bolt heads, and provide head washers of matching material. 2. For lumber having actual thickness of 7/8-inch and less: Anchor bolts or expansion bolts, at least 1/4-inch in diameter; or screws, of the most appropriate sizes; in lengths most suitable for the specific application, countersunk, spaced, and staggered. F. Building paper: ASTM D 226, Non-perforated, No. 15 asphalt-saturated building felt. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. All materials shall be inspected before use, with all checked, split and otherwise deficient stock rejected, or used only for miscellaneous blocking, furring or other incidental use. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all lumber which, due to warpage, twist, splitting, or checking, results in unsatisfactory work. Such replacement shall be required at any time, whether before or after application of finish material under other Sections. B. Verify exact locations of toilet accessories, door stops and similar items with Architect prior to installation of blocking for accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION -GENERAL .w A. Closely coordinate the installation of the rough carpentry work with the work of other trades responsible for the installation of interfacing or overlaying materials, so a* as not to delay the work of the related trades. B. Erect all rough carpentry work plumb, level, and true with tight, close fitting joints, ,i securely attached and braced to surrounding construction, all in a first class workmanlike manner. Counterbore for bolt heads, nuts, and washers where required to avoid interference with other materials. Bear complete responsibility for structural integrity, connections, and anchorage of all rough carpentry work. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. + � D. Use as long lengths as practicable for wood nailers, blockings, and curbs, to minimize number of joints, and attach the members with the types, and spacing, of fasteners specified herein. '* Rough Carpentry 06100-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts b. Fire retardant chemical: Free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. c. Corrosion rates: Less than one mil per year for carbon steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, copper and red brass in contact with the fire retardant treated wood when tested in accordance with Federal Specification MIL- L-19140E Paragraph 4.6.5.2. d. The fire retardant treated wood must have an equilibrium moisture content of not more than 25 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3201 procedures at 95 percent relative humidity and 80 degrees Fahrenheit. e. Fire retardant chemical: Registered for use as a wood preservative by �1e the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. f. Testing: Fire performance and strength properties for both lumber and plywood, of the fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report. Fire retardant chemical must not damage the middle lammella of the wood structure when exposed to 170 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 percent relative humidity for 23 days. C. Pressure preservative treated wood. Designated as"PT" 1. Chemical Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, Products which may be incorporated in the work include: a. Hickson Corporation, product, "Wolmanized Pressure Treated Wood". b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc., product"CCA Outside Wood". 2. Treatment: Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA)Type C in accordance with AWPA Standard P5,free of sodium and sulphates. Registered by the United States Environmental Protection Agency as a pesticide containing inorganic arsenic. 3. Minimum preservative retention: a. All pressure preservative treated lumber and plywood must have an ALSC-recognized agency Quality Mark signifying a chemical retention level of 0.40 pounds per cubic foot of oxide chemical, rated for"Ground Contact'. 4. Fixation of Chemical: Treated wood shall not be shipped from treatment plant until fixation of the preservative has occurred in the wood. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for lamination and fabrication of wood and plywood items: Exterior grade, phenolic resin glue. B. Adhesive for subfloors and underlayment: High strength,waterproof and non- freezing adhesive complying with AFG-01 "Frozen Lumber Test' and ASTM 3498, equal to W.W. Henry Company, Huntington Park, CA., product"217 -Subfloor& Construction Adhesive". C. Nails (interior and exterior): Galvanized common nails, of size and type to suit application and as required by state and local building codes. go D. Screws: Rough Carpentry 06100-5 llll 3/7/01 .o Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations an Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Subflooring:APA RATED SHEATHING, STRUCTURAL 1, exposure durability classified, EXPOSURE 1, 3/4 inch thick having a minimum span rating 48/24, touch-sanded. 3. Flooring underlayment: Square edge APA UNDERLAYMENT, Exposure 1 Species Group 1 with sanded face, 1/2 inch thick, except as otherwise +■ indicated on the Drawings. 4. Flooring underlayment beneath tile: Square edge APA graded C-C PLUGGED EXT Species Group 1 touch sanded, 1/2 inch thick, except as otherwise so indicated on the Drawings. 5. Exterior wall sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING, 112 inch thick having a minimum span rating 32/16, oriented strand board, or 5 ply/5 layer plywood touch-sanded. *� 6. For electric panel board mountings and similar uses: APA graded B-D INT, Group 2 species, touch-sanded, fire-retardent treated, 3/4 inch thick, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 7. For unspecified interior concealed from view locations:APA graded C-D PLUGGED INT, Group 2 species, thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 2.2 WOOD TREATMENTS A. Treated wood products shall be produced by a single treatment plant, fully licensed by the chemical manufacturers, and conforming to the requirements specified Aw herein. 1. Kiln dry all treated lumber and plywood to the following maximum moisture content after treatment. a. Lumber: 19 percent. b. Plywood 15 percent. c. Discard pieces with defects which might impair quality of work. 2. Quality marks: Each piece of lumber and plywood shall be permanently affixed with a quality mark, containing the following information: a. Identification of the inspection agency. b. Standard to which material was treated. c. Identification of the treating plant. d. Fire retardant treated wood shall include: stamp signifying a FR-S rating e. Preservative treated wood shall include: Retention and end use for which product is suitable. w B. Fire retardant treated wood. Designated as "FRTW" 1. Chemical Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, Products which may be incorporated in the work include: a. Hickson Corporation, product, "Dricon". b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc., product"PyroGuard". 2. Fire retardant treated wood shall comply with the following requirements: a. All fire-retardant lumber and plywood must have an Underwriters Laboratories stamp signifying a FR-S rating certifying a 25 or less flame spread and smoke developed value, when tested in accordance to ASTM E-84, or UBC Standard No. 42-1. Rough Carpentry 06100-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Have a moisture content not exceeding 19 percent when delivered to the aW project. 3. Be in accordance with the grading rules of the lumber manufacturer's association under whose jurisdiction the lumber is produced and bear the mark of grade and mill identification. B. Plywood: Conform to the requirements of Product Standard PS-1, and bear applicable APA grade trademarks. 1. Plywood for electrical boards treated for retardance, meet Class I or a flame spread rating of 25 or less and bear U.L. label "Classified FRS". 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store all materials in an elevated dry location, protected by waterproof coverings. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the various trades responsible for applying finish materials and other items to rough carpentry work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BOARD AND SHEET MATERIALS A. Lumber for joists and rafters: No. 2 Hem/Fir, or No. 2 Southern Pine, Grade- stamped S-Dry or other surface dried wood species, Number 2 grade or better having a minimum bending stress Fb of 1000 PSI (1150 PSI repetitive)and modulus of elasticity E not less than 1400 KSI. B. Lumber for beams and headers: No. 1 Hem/Fir, or No. 2 Southern Pine, Grade- stamped S-Dry or other surface dried wood species, Number 1 grade or better having a minimum bending stress Fb of 1200 PSI. C. Lumber for studs: Hem-Fir, Eastern Hemlock, Eastern Spruce, or Southern Pine, surface dried Number 2 Grade or better,with an Fc parallel to the grain of 550 PSI or greater. D. Lumber for blocking, nailers and curbs as indicated or required: Hem-Fir, Douglas Fir, Eastern Spruce, Eastern Hemlock, or Southern Pine, surfaced dried stud or utility grade. Wood members shall be of sizes indicated on the Drawings or of the same size as the members being braced. E. Furring: Nominal 1 by 3 inches or 1 by 4 inches Douglas Fir, Eastern Spruce, !► Eastern Hemlock, or Southern Pine, surfaced dried construction grade. F. Plywood and sheet products: 1. For roof sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING, STRUCTURAL 1, exposure durability classified, EXPOSURE 1, 5/8 inch thick having a minimum span rating 40/20, touch-sanded. a. At conditions where sheathing is continuation of existing, provide laminated thickness required to match existing sheathing. Rough Carpentry 06100-3 3/7/01 No Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations „o Northampton, Massachusetts 1.4 REFERENCES am A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. APA-applicable grades and specifications. as 2. APA PRB-108 Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use Panels. 3. AWPA Standards and references for preservative treated wood. 4. AWPA C-20- Structural Lumber Fire Retardent Treatment by Pressure so Processes. 5. AWPA C-27- Plywood, Fire Retardent Treatment by Pressure Processes. 6. SDI 122- Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors ow and Frames. 7. SPIB Grading Rules, current edition. 8. US. Department of Commerce Voluntary Product Standard PS1 for .A Construction and Industrial 9. US. Department of Commerce Voluntary Product Standard PS2 for Wood- Based Structural-Use Panels. No 10. US. Department of Commerce Voluntary Product Standard PS-20-American Softwood Lumber Standard. 11. U.S. Department of Commerce Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16, for as sizes and use classifications of lumber 12. American Lumber Standards Committee, National Lumber Grades Authority for Canadian Lumber, and applicable grading rules and standards of the so various lumber associations whose species are being used for grades specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Certifications: Written certification from the respective treatment plants indicating types of wood preservative treatment and fire-retardent treatment used, treatments method, applications instructions, and conformance to the requirements specified herein. a. Provide certification that fire retardent treatment materials do not contain ammonium phosphate. b. Provide report from National Evaluation Service Committee on fire retardent treated wood flame spreading, strength, corrosion and hygroscopic properties. C. Provide report from National Evaluation Service Committee on pressure preservative treated wood strength, corrosion, anti-fungi, and anti-insect properties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All lumber shall: 1. Be new, dressed four sides (S4S), clear and free from warping and other defects. w Rough Carpentry 06100-2 3/7/01 w. Smith College sions Annex Renovations MAROIS thampton, Massachusetts N STRUCTION CO. INC. Section 06100 LOUGH CARPENTRY go Ilowing: eas of new construction and to supplement existing 148 Newton Street•So. Hadley, MA 01075 :d Plywood backer panels for mounting of electrical Tel: (413) 533-1320• FAX 532-1149 Cher equipment. underlayment. 4. Various wood blockings, edgings, nailers, curbs, cants, grounds,furring, sheathing, framing members including wood preservative, as required for receipt of various finishes and surfacing materials, not described herein above. 5. Rough installation hardware, including bolts, screws, spikes, nails, clips, and connection assemblies, as needed for installation of the rough carpentry work. B. Install the following furnished under the designated Sections: 1. Steel frames furnished under Section 08110 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. 2. Concealed anchorage devices for handicap handrails in toilet rooms: Section ft 10810 -TOILET ACCESSORIES. 1.2 UNIT PRICES- MEASUREMENT, AND PAYMENT A. Refer to Section 01025- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT, for requirements applicable to unit prices Work of this Section. B. Repair existing wood roof deck due to unanticipated rotted or damaged roofing sheathing: 1. Basis of measurement: By the square foot. 2. Basis of payment: Includes removal of existing rotted or damaged roofing sheathing, legally dispose, and replace with new sheathing material of same total thickness. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY:Wood interior and exterior trim. B. Section 06400-ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: Casework. C. Section 07210- BUILDING INSULATION:Thermal insulation between framing, and vapor barrier. D. Section 09910- PAINTS: Applied primer and finish coatings to exposed to view rough carpentry work. fo E. Section 10810-TOILET ACCESSORIES: Providing anchorage devices an mounting templates for toilet accessories. OP Rough Carpentry 06100-1 ill! 3/7101 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts ` 3.4 LAYING NEW MASONRY A. Rebuild the chimneys to match existing construction including coursing,joints and bond patterns. B. Lay out coursing before setting to minimize cutting closures or jumping bond, Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units. C. Laying masonry units: 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints; uniformly joint with other work. 2. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. wM 3. Interlock intersections and external corners. 4. Cut all exposed masonry with a motor-driven carborundum blade saw to ensure straight and clean, unchipped edges. a. Lay no unit having chipped edges or face defects where such unit would be exposed to view. Remove any such unit, if installed, and replace with an undamaged unit, and bear all costs therefor. 5. Do not spread any more mortar than can be covered before surface of mortar has begun to dry. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove entirely, clean off mortar, and reset with fresh mortar. 7. Except for cleaning down and repointing, finish all masonry as the walls and partitions are carried up. 3.5 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and on completion, remove excess mortar, droppings, smears, stains, efflorescence, or other unsightly excess resulting from the work of this Section. B. Clean surrounding surfaces. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. Cleaning methods are subject to Designer's approval. D. Daily, sweep up and remove: mortar droppings, sand, cleaning compounds, and mixtures, dirt debris and rubbish. .�. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry Restoration 04910-6 3/7/01 '"" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Remove loose and disintegrated mortar beyond the raked-out depth. C. Power grinders shall not be used to remove mortar from joints less than 5/16 inc wide or for the raking out of vertical (head) mortar joints. For narrow joints 1/8 inch or less, mortar shall be raked out manually with a sharp knife blade or cutter made for this purpose. The cutter may be used with or without the aid of a hammer. 1. Do not use blades thicker than 3/32 inch for scoring joints. 2. The initial power tool cut shall be in the center of the joint. Remove the !! remaining mortar using hand tools. The Contractor shall set the depth of the blade so that the resulting kerf does not exceed the minimum depth. z. 3. Stop the kerf a minimum 3/4 times the blade diameter from inside corners and projecting elements. Remove the remaining mortar using hand tools. 4. The Contractor may construct jigs to guide the power tools and to prevent damage to adjacent masonry. D. Do not damage existing masonry units. Sound brick damaged by the cutting process shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. All raking shall cease if, in the judgment of the Architect, the methods employed by the Contractor are causing damage to the brick or stone. No work shall commence until tools, workmen, and methodology are corrected to meet the quality standard of the test panel E. When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material by pressured air or brushing. F. Prepare Joints: Premoisten joints (free of standing water). G. Repoint Joints: Pack joints, holes and cracks tightly with specified mortar in maximum 1/4 inch layers. Pack back corners of joints. H. Pack joints, holes and cracks tightly with specified mortar in maximum 3/8 inch layers. Pack back corners of joints. 1. First apply mortar to areas where the existing mortar is either missing, or depth is greater than 1 inch. 2. Permit each layer to become stiff(thumb print hardness) before applying next layer. 3. Where existing masonry units have worn and rounded corners, recess the final layer slightly, so as not to fill in the worn areas. 4. Perform work with fresh mortar; do not use dead mortar droppings. Do all pointing while mortar is still soft and plastic. If hardened, chisel defect out and refill solidly with fresh additional mortar. 5. Leave a smooth, uniform appearance, compacted and tooled to match original appearance of joints.After tooling, brush lightly mortar joints to roughen mortar surface slightly, to simulate natural weathering of existing adjacent mortar 40 6. Moist cure for 72 hours. I. Additional to repointing work, remove and replace existing bricks which are loose, cracked through, or otherwise seriously deteriorated as determined by the !w Architect. Install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. Replace removed brick with new or salvaged brick to match bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. Unit Masonry Restoration 04910-5 40 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1 part by volume, Portland Cement 1 parts by volume, hydrated lime (Type S) 6 parts by volume, fine sand (selected to match sand in original mortar). Oxide pigments as required to match original mortar color. 2.4 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Measure mortar ingredients carefully to control proportions, and maintain proportions throughout the work. Mix mortar with power operated batch mixer. Provide not less than 5 minutes mixing time to ensure a homogeneous plastic mortar. Provide at least 2 minutes mixing time for dry material. Use a minimum amount of water to product a workable consistency for the mortars intended purpose. ON 1. Provide mortar with equal or up to 10 percent less compressive strength than the existing mortar. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive the work of this Section. B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of receiving surfaces and built conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION w A. During the operation of work of this Section, protect existing materials from mortar drippings, stains and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Clean, or repair all existing materials which are soiled or otherwise damaged by Work of this Section, to match original profiles and finishes. Existing materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work to match existing. B. Protect roofing and flashings: Protect roof membrane and flashings from damage. Lay 1/2 inch plywood on roof surfaces over full extent of work area adjacent to flat roofs. C. Immediately remove stains, efflorescence or other excess resulting from the work of this Section. w 3.3 REPAIR AND REPOINTING EXISTING MASONRY A. Rake out loose or disintegrated mortar, including corners and openings. During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes. 1. Rake out loose or disintegrated mortar in joints to a depths specified, including corners and openings. During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes. 2. Joints 3/8 inch or less in width, rake to minimum 1/2 inch deep, for wider joints rake to a minimum 1 inch depth, but in all cases all weathered and loose material shall be removed. 3. Special precautions shall be taken to ensure that brick faces and rubble stone shapes and profiles are not damaged during the process of raking out or repointing. Unit Masonry Restoration 04910-4 3/7/01 '"" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Store cement, lime and similar products under cover and from direct contact with earth or floor slabs. Store metal accessories and the like under cover and from direct contact with ground, and in manner to prevent rust. D. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages, packages containing water marks, or which show other evidence of damage, unless Architect specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project. ! " 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. In ambient temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit make provisions to adequately protect the masonry materials and the finished work from frost by heating materials, enclosing the work or heating the enclosed spaces. No frozen work shall be worked upon nor shall anti-freeze admixtures be permitted in the mortar mix.Any completed work found to be affected by frost shall be removed and replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. PART 2—PRODUCTS so 2.1 BRICK UNITS A. Salvage and clean all brick units that are sound, unbroken, and without cracks. 1. Use whatever means needed to clean existing salvaged brick without damage to their color or finish. 2. Any new brick shall match the existing for size,texture, blending, color, and special shapes if employed. 2.2 MORTAR COMPONENTS A. Portland Cement: Type I, or Type III, ASTM C150, non staining, white or natural color as required to match existing, without air entrainment. 1. Use type III as necessary for laying masonry in cold weather. B. Sand shall conform to the color, grade, composition and particle sizes results of laboratory analysis of existing mortar. C. Water: Clean and potable without contaminants D. Lime:Approved brand of plastic hydrated lime, conforming to ASTM C 207, Type ,I5" E. Oxide pigments: Oxide pigments shall be stable, non-fading, and alkali resistant, conforming to ASTM C979. 2.3 MORTAR A. Mortar for pointing and setting masonry, General: Mortar mixes for pointing and setting masonry shall be hopper batch, preblended mortar to exactly match existing pointing mortar composition,formula, color, porosity, density, such as SpecMix, Inc., or approved equal. Pointing shall be completed in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions and all materials stored, transported, and used in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Mortar for pointing brick masonry: Unit Masonry Restoration 04910-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts a. Masonry materials: Product data sheets, specifications, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Material certificates: Provide for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each material complies with requirements. a. Masonry materials: Each different cement product required for mortar, '* including name of manufacturer, brand, and type. 3. Material test reports from a qualified independent laboratory employed and paid by Contractor indicating and interpreting test results relative to r. compliance of field prepared mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 4. Samples: Prepared and cured mortar samples demonstrating color and shade. The Architect reserves the right to reject samples, and request resubmissions, until a sample having the desired color and shade is considered an acceptable match to the existing mortar 5. Samples: a. Mortar: (minimum three for each mortar mix) Prepared and cured mortar samples demonstrating color and shade. Set mortar in 1/2 by 1/2 by 6 inch channels (aluminum or plastic). The Architect reserves the right to reject samples, and request resubmissions, until a sample for each mortar type has the desired color, shade, texture and composition matching the original pointing mortars. 6. Contractor's cold weather and hot weather masonry procedures: Show evidence of compliance with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restorer: Company specializing in performing the masonry restoration work of the type specified herein, with minimum of 5 years documented experience. Work shall be done by skilled workmen, fully instructed as to the requirements specified herein and adequately supervised during the work. B. Field Supervised Work: Contractor shall notify Architect before beginning work of this Section. Obtain Architect's approval of Contractor's procedures before proceeding with the work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-source responsibility for mortar materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Do not deliver cement, lime, and similar perishable materials to the site until suitable storage is available. Store such materials in weatherproof structures, and ensure that materials are in perfectly fresh condition when brought for use. 40 Protect masonry units and manufactured products of all types from wetting by rain or snow, and keep covered when not in use. B. Aggregates: Deliver, store and handle aggregate materials so as to prevent .m contamination with earth or other foreign materials. Unit Masonry Restoration 04910-2 3/7/01 """ MAROIS Smith College � STRUCTION CO. INC. ;ssions Annex Renovations '1' )rthampton, Massachusetts Section 04910 MASONRY RESTORATION ration work where shown on the Drawings and as specified but is not limited to the following: 148 Newton Street•So. Hadley, MA 01075 ourses of brick, salvaging and cleaning brick units. Tel: (413) 533-1320• FAX 532-1149 nasonry mortars for composition, and provide pointing mortar ,L.-T Tuz-UrTffTnr 7S. 3. Re-construct 2 brick chimneys. 4. Repoint brick at all surfaces of the 2 chimneys. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ! ' A. Section 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: copper and lead flashing. B. Section 07534-Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer(EPDM) Roofing: Membrane flashing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section 01420 - REFERENCES.Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), as referenced herein. 2. American National Standards Institute Building Code requirements for Masonry, ANSI 41.4. 3. ASTM C144-Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 4. ASTM C150 -Standard Specification for Portland Cement 5. ASTM C207- Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 6. ASTM C270 -Standard Specification for Mortar for Masonry Units 7. ASTM C780-Test for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry 8. ASTM C979-Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete 9. BIA 1 -Technical Notes on Brick Construction, Cold Weather Masonry Construction, Introduction 10. BIA 1A-Technical Notes on Brick Construction, Cold Weather Masonry Construction, Construction and Protection Recommendations 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL P PROCEDURES: 1. Literature Unit Masonry Restoration 04910-1 3!7101 .o Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .r Northampton, Massachusetts 3.5 FINISHING A. General Requirements for flatwork: OR 1. Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips accurately and sufficiently rigid to support screeds and so that proper surface elevations and concrete thicknesses are achieved allowing for dead load deflection and camber of formwork. 2. Take measurements and control tolerances by the use of transit instrument. 3. Upon completion of leveling, remove screeds and fill spaces with concrete. B. Broom finish slab unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation of surface flatness for exposed concrete floors 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. " 3.8 PATCHING A. Allow Architect to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301, or as otherwise directed. w End of Section .A ON 00 so as Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. For securing forms where surfaces will not be exposed: Use either bolts or wires. Use ties of such type that when forms are removed, no metal is closer than 1-1/2 inches from the finished concrete surface. B. Waterstops: Extruded shapes formed of virgin polyvinyl chloride, minimum tensile '! strength 1900 pounds per square inch, elongation 200 percent, with prefabricated corners, equal to Progress Unlimited: Plastigrip Type N, as approved by Architect. C. Filler strips for expansion joints: Non-extruding type conforming to ASTM D 1751. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK ERECTION A. General: Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements, and in accordance with ACI 301. 1. Forms shall conform to the lines, dimensions and shapes of concrete shown providing for openings, recesses, keys, slots, beam pockets and projection as required. 2. Make forms clean and free of foreign material before placing concrete. 3. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. 4. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. 5. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork.Shore or strengthen formwork subject to over stressing by construction loads. B. Design of Formwork: Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 4. C. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 4. 3.2 REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 5. B. Placing tolerances: Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 5. C. Minimum reinforcement: Where no other reinforcement is shown for concrete fill or toppings, provide 6 by 6 inch, W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete in conformance to ACI 301; place continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints Do not interrupt successive placement, do not permit cold joints to occur. B. Vibrate concrete during deposition with internal type. Supplement all vibration by wooden spade muddling between reinforcing and forms, and into corners. 3.4 FORM REMOVAL A. Remove forms when concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-3 3/7101 .X Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Literature: Manufacturer's complete product data specifications, clearing stating product compatibilities and limitations, for portland cement, each admixture proposed to be used, and other manufactured items including the following: a. Curing compounds, b. Curing mats, papers and films, c. Compressible fillers, PART 2 -PRODUCTSw 2.1 CONCRETE MIX A. Concrete materials: 1. Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, Type II -Normal. 2. Fine aggregates conforming to ASTM C 33; natural sand. ■* 3. Course aggregates conforming to ASTM C 33; crushed stone or gravel. 4. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. B. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94; ready mixed concrete. C. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance ASTM C 94, meeting the following criteria: .o 1. Minimum compressive strength: 28 day strength: 3,000 psi. 2. Aggregate size: 3/4 inches maximum. 3. Water/Cement ratio: 0.35, maximum. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing steel:ASTM A 615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel, .. unfinished, of sizes shown on the drawings. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric conforming to ASTM A 185 welded wire fabric; in flat sheets, unfinished, of sizes shown on the drawings. C. Tie wire, minimum 16 gage annealed type. s. D. Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: adjacent to weather exposed to concrete surfaces, plastic coated steel type; preformed to size and shape as required. 2.3 FORMWORK A. APA graded B-B PLYFORM CLASS 1 EXT, Grade (Concrete Form) Plywood, minimum 3/4 inch thick, or undressed lumber, No. 2 common or better. . 4M 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Form ties: 1. For securing forms where surfaces will be exposed in the finished work: Use tie screws with removable plastic cones, removable bolts, special removable tie wires or type 302/304 stainless steel snap ties. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-2 3/7/01 "" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 03300 90 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation and perform all operations necessary to: 1. Design and provide formwork for all concrete work on the project. 2. Furnish and place all concrete reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric. 3. Complete all concrete work as shown on the drawings and as specified. 4. Install anchor bolts, inserts, cast-in plates and other hardware furnished under +l* other Sections for attachment to concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements,the most so restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ACI 211 - Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. 2. ACI 247-Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. +! ' 3. ACI 301 -Structural Concrete for Buildings. 4. ACI 302- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 5. ACI 304- Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,Transporting and Placing Concrete. 6. ACI 305R-Hot Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 306R-Cold Weather Concreting. 8. ACI 308- Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 9. ACI 309.2R-Identification and Control of Consolidation-Related Surface Defects in Formed Concrete. 10. ACI 315- Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 11. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 12. ACI SP-66-Detailing Manual. 13. ASTM C 309-Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 14. CRSI - Manual of Practice. 15. PCA Publication-"Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures." 16. PCA Publication-"Construction Joints" (AC 19.3) 17. PCA Publication-"Curing Concrete" (ST95) 18. PCA Publication-"Specification for Vibrating Concrete" (ST26) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts F. Replacement Cost, Obligations: Except as otherwise indicated, costs of replacing or restoring failing warranted units or products is Contractor's obligation,without regard for whether Owner has already benefited from use through a portion of anticipated useful service lives. G. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right, at time of substantial completion or thereafter, to reject coincidental product warranties submitted by Contractor, which in opinion of Owner tend to detract from or confuse interpretation of 10 requirements of Contract Documents. H. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or sub-subcontract for material or units of work for project r where a special project warranty, certification or similar commitment is required, until it has been determined that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.5 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver materials to on-site location designated by the Owner; obtain receipt. ear PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section 00 Closeout Submittals 01780-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .� Northampton, Massachusetts 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Categories of Specific Warranties: Warranties on the Work are in several categories, including those of General Conditions, and including (but not necessarily limited to)the following specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 16 of these Specifications: 1. Special Project Warranty (Guaranty):A warranty specifically written and signed by contractor for a defined portion of the work; and,where required, countersigned by subcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor. 2. Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by Contract Documents, to be provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the .� work; regardless of whether manufacturer has published a similar warranty without regard for specific incorporation of product into the work, or has written and executed a special project warranty as a direct result of Contract Document requirements. ®, 3. Coincidental Product Warranty:A warranty not specifically required by Contract Documents (other than as specified in this Section), but which is available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer or product has published warranty in connection with purchases and use of product without regard for specific applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty. B. Refer to individual section of Divisions 2 through 16 for the determination of units of work which are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific requirements and terms of those warranties(or guarantees). C. General Limitations: It is recognized that specific warranties are intended primarily to protect Owner against failure of the work to perform as required, and against deficient, defective, and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources. .. Except as otherwise indicated, specific warranties do not cover failures in the work which result from: 1) Unusual and abnormal phenomena of the elements, 2)The Owner's misuse, maltreatment or improper maintenance of the work, 3)Vandalism after time of substantial completion, or 4) Insurrection or acts of aggression, including war. D. Related Damages and Losses: In connection with Contractor's correction of warranted work which has failed, remove and replace other work of project which has been damaged as a result of such failure, or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. 1. Consequential Damages: Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, special project warranties and product warranties are not extended to cover damage to building contents (other than work of Contract)which occurs as a result of failure of warranted work. E. Reinstatement of Warranty Period: Except as otherwise indicated, when work covered by a special project warranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement r.► for the following time period, starting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored work. 1. A period of time ending upon date original warranty would have expired if there had been no failure, but not less than half of original warranty period of time. Closeout Submittals 01780-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Submit one copy of completed volume in final form 21 days prior to Final OR Inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection with Architect's comments; Revise and submit all volumes to Owner. C. For each item of equipment, include description of equipment, component parts and accessories. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. Additionally provide the following for each item: 1. Panelboard circuit directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications. 2. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. 3. Operating procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer,winter, and any special operating instructions. 4. Maintenance requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble- shooting; disassembly, repair, and re-assembly instructions; alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. a. Maintenance drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relation of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 5. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 6. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. 7. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 8. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. 9. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. 10. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 11. Provide original manufacturer's parts (OEM)list, illustrations assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts (OEM), current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. b. Include local source of supplies and replacement parts, and any other data pertinent for procurement procedures. 12. Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification Sections. D. Standards: 1. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet and inches, pounds, and cfm; provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). 2. Abbreviations: Provide complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment; include part numbers of all replaceable parts. OR Closeout Submittals 01780-3 3/7/01 do Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts W" Documents shall transmitted to the Architect as a condition precedent to final payment, and include documents prepared by the fire protection, plumbing, • mechanical and electrical trades. 1. Submittal requirements for Record Drawings: a. 2 sets of Drawings in AutocadTM version 14 format. Verify release version and disc type with Owner prior to submittal. b. 1 print set of Drawings. 1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. Furnish separate manuals for each of the following groups of equipment: 1. Wheelchair lift. 2. Fire protection system. 3. Utilities and plumbing systems. 4. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning system. 5. Electrical systems. B. Furnish 2 bound and properly identified Manuals prior to request for Final Acceptance. 1. Manuals shall be in 8-1/2 by 11 inch pages and bound in three"D ring" capacity binders with durable plastic covers. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers. a. Arrange content by section number and systems, process flow, under section numbers and sequence as listed in the Table of Contents of this Project Manual b. Drawings: Preferable 11 inches in height bound in with text with reinforced punched binder tab. Fold drawings larger than 8-1/2 by 11 inches to size of text pages. Provide a drawing pocket for Drawings larger than 11 by 17 inches; locate pocket inside rear cover or bound in with text. 2. Each manual shall include the same following minimum information: a. Table of Contents. b. Directory of Contractor, subcontractors, and major equipment supplies listing addresses, phone numbers and appropriate emergency phone numbers. 1) Include local sources of supplies and replacement parts. ** c. Directory of Architect and consultants listing addresses and phone numbers. d. Operation and maintenance instructions. Provide schematic diagrams of control systems, circuit directories for each electric panel and charts showing the tagging of all valves. e. Air and water test and balancing reports. f. Maintenance and cleaning instructions for finishes. g. Product and manufacturer's Certificates. h. Photocopies of all extended warranties and bonds. Closeout Submittals 01780-2 3/7/01 '"�" Smith College W Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01780 !! CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ON A. Project record documents. B. Operation and maintenance data, preventive maintenance instructions. C. Product warranties and bonds. D. Maintenance contracts. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The General Contractor is responsible to maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and shop drawings for preparing the record drawings. W 1. Where shop drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Documents. W_ B. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes; protect from loss in a secure location. Mark-up these drawings to show clearly and completely the actual installation reflecting all changes made in the Work during construction. 1. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions accurately. 2. Record all variations and deviations to the Contract Documents, including changes made to schedules, details, and all architectural changes to structure, exterior enclosure, interior partitions and ceilings. 3. Record new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on the Contract Drawings or shop drawings. 4. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to W measure and record at a later date. C. The fire protection, plumbing, mechanical and electrical trades shall be responsible to the Contractor to keep the record documents for their portions of the work marked currently to record all changes in the mechanical and electrical work made during construction. W D. The Architect may periodically inspect these record drawings, and their proper maintenance may be a condition precedent to approval of applications for periodic payments. E. Deliver all Project Record Documents, shop drawings, product data, and samples to the Architect for the Owner's use, upon completion of the Work and prior to request for Final Acceptance of the Work. F. In addition at the completion of the work, the General Contractor is responsible for the preparation and submittal of neat, clean well drafted, and complete record drawings, at no additional costs to the Owner. These reproducible Project Record Closeout Submittals 01780-1 317101 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations CAI Northampton, Massachusetts a. The Architect will notify the Contractor in writing, stating the reasons listing the incomplete or defective work. b. The Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the deficiencies and send a second written notice of request for Final Acceptance to the Architect. c. Costs relative to the Architects re-inspection due to failure of Work to comply with claims made by the Contractor, will be compensated by the Owner, who will deduct the amount of such compensation from the Final Payment due to the Contractor. C. After the Architect finds the Work acceptable, the Architect will review the Final 4a Close-out submittals. D. Application for Final Payment: Submit Application for Final Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 1. The Architect will prepare a Final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum not previously made by other Change Orders. 1.4 CONFERENCES AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ON A. The Owner reserves the right to call for conferences commencing with the date of Substantial Completion and continuing for one year thereafter, for purposes of - inspecting the Work and to plan correction of any deficiencies or failures discovered during this period. am 1. Attendance is required by Contractor's Project Manager, Architect, Owner's Project Representative and each applicator, installer, and supplier as the Owner may direct or the Contractor may wish to have present.All representatives attending such meetings shall be the same persons, or shall have the same powers and authority, as those attending progress meetings occurring prior to the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section Closeout Procedures 01770-3 3/7/01 .iw Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton; Massachusetts GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, accompanied by the Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified by the Architect. 2. The Architect will submit the Certificate to the Owner, and to the Contractor, for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Final Acceptance and final payment, perform the following: 1. Completion of incomplete Work. Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 2. Prove that all taxes, fees and similar legal obligations have been paid. w 3. Submit final payment requests with release of all liens, and supporting documentation. 4. Provide written assurances that all unsettled claims are in the process of and will be resolved. 5. Submit updated final statement, including accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. Show additional Contract Sum, additions and deductions, previous Change Orders, total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments and Contract Sum due. 6. Submit consent of surety to Final Payment. 7. Remove remaining temporary facilities and services. 8. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipts for: a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for items so listed in individual Sections of the Specifications, and for other items when so directed by the Architect. b. Project Record Documents (as-builts), including autocad format drawings on discs and prints ■„ c. Warranties and bonds specified in individual Sections of the Specifications. d. Keys and keying schedule. w e. Spare parts and materials extra stock. f. List of subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors, including names, addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for emergency service at all times including nights weekends, and holidays. 9. Submit Certification stating Work has been inspected for compliance with the *■ Contract Documents. 10. Submit Certification stating equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative and are fully operational. 11. Submit Certification stating that Work is 100 percent complete and ready for final inspection. B. Within 2 weeks after receipt of the request for Final Acceptance from the Contractor, the Architect will inspect to determine status of completion. 1. Should the Architect determine that the Work is incomplete or defective: Closeout Procedures 01770-2 3/7/01 '"� Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES on A. Closeout procedures. B. Conferences occurring after Substantial Completion. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following: 1. On Application for Payment, show 100 percent completion for portions of work claimed as substantially complete. Submit list of incomplete items, value of incomplete work, and reasons work is not complete. 2. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Certificate of Final Inspections. #W b. Certificate of Occupancy. 3. Submission of product and installation warranties,workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, installer certifications and similar documents 4" specified in individual sections. 4. Submission of test/adjust/balance reports. 5. Change-over permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. 6. Remove temporary facilities and services that are no longer required. 7. Remove mock-ups, field samples and similar items. 8. Complete Final Cleaning, including repair and restoration, or replacement of damaged Work. 9. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 10. Application for reduction of retainage. 11. Consent of Surety. 12. Advise the Owner of the change-over in security provisions. on B. Within 2 weeks after receipt of the notice of Substantial Completion from the Contractor, the Architect will inspect to determine status of completion. a� 1. Should the Architect determine that the Work is not substantially complete: a. The Architect will notify the Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefore. b. The Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies and send a second written notice of Substantial Completion to the Architect, requesting re- inspection. C. When the Architect concurs that the Work is substantially complete: 1. The Architect will prepare AIA Document G 704-CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, in accordance with the requirements of the Closeout Procedures 01770-1 3/7101 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Notify Architect and Owner 7 days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. rs D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. B. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months . C. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) w PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section Starting and Adjusting 01750-2 3/7/01 '"' Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01750 STARTING AND ADJUSTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Demonstrating equipment. C. Operation, maintenance, and service. D. Instruction and training of owner's personnel. 1.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A. General:Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. Pill B. Contractor will employ services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting and balancing. Submit to Owner at least three qualified testing firms for Owner's Fill review and acceptance. C. The independent firm will perform services specified under Division 15- Mechanical. D. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non- compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract JIM Documents. 1.3 DEMONSTRATING EQUIPMENT "ill A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel 2 weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review 10 contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals go specified under Section 01780- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.4 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE,AND SERVICE A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. Starting and Adjusting 01750-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts E. Do not throw trash from windows or from roof. Erect chutes to dumpster for containing debris. Keep dumpster covered and wet down to prevent fires caused by vandals. F. As work progresses, regularly remove demolished materials from site, except salvaged materials as noted. Do not burn or bury materials on site, arrange for legal disposal of the same. G. Repair any damage done to elements of building to remain, except repairs on specified to be provided under other Sections. Repairs shall be done in such manner as to closely match construction, appearance and quality of original work. IN 3.6 CLEANING A. Daily clean interior work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris. B. Upon completion of work, remove tools, equipment, and temporary work, remove all debris and surplus materials; leave areas in clean condition. End of Section IW Selective Demolition 01739-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring. 1. Protect existing active utility services and structures from damage during selective demolition work including during installation of bracing and removal of same. Repair or replace damages to satisfaction of Owner. wr 3.3 GENERAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas, in compliance with governing laws and buildings,with prime consideration given to the safety, protection and convenience of the public and Owner's personnel. B. Carefully observe existing structure during demolition operations, cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect and do not resume operations until directed. C. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work at all times. 3.4 DUST CONTROL A. Wet down debris to prevent air pollution by dust rising from demolition work. Employ tarpaulins on trucks carrying debris to prevent spreading duct or debris. Clean up loose debris daily to prevent the wind spreading debris. 3.5 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Carefully salvage and provide safe storage for equipment and materials designated for reuse, as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, or as requested by Owner for reuse on the project, or to be stored for Owner's future use. Take particular care with finished items and items requiring special handling. C. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Carefully cut materials to be removed to eliminate damage to portions to remain. Protect existing structure designated to remain. 1. Pull nails and fasteners which remain after removal of attached material. Remove lath, strapping and other substructures associated with finishes to be removed. 2. Where existing finishes are indicated to be removed, remove down to bare subsurface without causing damage to the subsurface. a. After removal of non-asbestos finish flooring materials. Remove underlying mastic and prepare substrate to receive new flooring materials by Shot Blasting method. Create a uniform 20 mil profile. Mechanically scarify areas which cannot be profiled by shot blast .. method. Thoroughly wash all flooring substrate and leave clean and dry ready for application of new flooring materials. D. Disconnect existingequipment and fixtures to be removed, or services abandoned, and piping, wiring, and conduit which would otherwise be exposed in the finished work. Remove from site disconnected equipment and fixtures and piping not to be reused. 1. Contractor to remove and dispose of all equipment not tagged or scheduled for reuse. Selective Demolition 01739-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Removal or containment of the hazardous materials or contaminated substances shall be performed by an abatement specialist under separate contract with the Owner. B. Obtain and pay for required permits and licenses required from authorities prior to commencing demolition work. Arrange and pay for legal disposal of removed materials and equipment, obtain proper disposal receipts for verification. C. Notify affected utility companies and Owner before starting work and comply with "s utility company requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits_ Do not disable or disrupt building fire 00 or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notification to the Owner. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING PW A. Conduct the work in a manner giving prime consideration to protection of the public; protection from the weather, control of noise, shocks and vibration; control of dirt and dust; orderly access for and storage of materials; protection of existing buildings; protection of adjacent surfaces and property; coordination and 1W cooperation with the Owner at all times. B. Comply with all requirements of this contract relative to protection, scheduling and coordination with the Owner. C. Coordinate and arrange with mechanical and electrical trades for their disconnecting, rerouting and maintenance of existing services in the buildings as required, as part of the work of this Contract. D. Provide necessary protection to completely cover all remaining adjacent surfaces, existing equipment, furniture and furnishing during demolition operations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The Contractor shall have examined the existing conditions per requirements of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements, and reviewed Contract Documents prior to commencement of demolition. Coordinate and verify scope of selective demolition with other portions of work specified in other sections, and under separate Contract. Change orders will not be issued for the removal of any exposed to view materials or equipment, which are either indicated on the Drawings for removal, or not indicated, but necessary to remove for the Work of this Project. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect and maintain temporary barriers as required to protect non- construction related pedestrian and vehicular traffic using the adjacent portions of the site and building. B. Protect existing structures which are not to be demolished. Protect designated materials and equipment to be removed and retained by Owner. Selective Demolition 01739-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Disconnection and dismantling designated mechanical systems and components. F. Division 16 -ELECTRICAL: Disconnection and dismantling designated electrical systems and components. G. Individual specification sections: Cutting and patching incidental to work of individual specification sections shall be performed by respective trades, except as specified in Section 01732. H. Individual specification sections: Utility shutoffs by respective trades. 1.3 OWNERSHIP OF REMOVED MATERIALS A. If during the work, articles of unusual value, or of historical or archaeological significance, are encountered the ownership of such articles is retained by the Owner, and information regarding their discovery shall be immediately furnished to ! the Architect. Resolution shall be handled as a Change in the Work. B. Ownership of materials, equipment and furnishings designated for salvage for re- use in this Project or designated for Owner's use is retained by the Owner. C. Ownership of materials, equipment and furnishings to be removed from the Project which are not defined by the above two paragraphs is retained by the Contractor; if any of these are considered of salvageable value to the Contractor, they may be removed from the Project as work progresses. 1. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 7w A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: us 1. Shop drawings: Indicate demolition sequencing and locations of salvageable items. 2. Schedule: Within 7 days after receiving the Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of work, prepare a schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition work. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as �.. required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations. Receive acceptance from Architect prior to commencing work. B. Submit Project record drawings under provisions of Section 01780-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, Indicate actual location of capped utilities. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition work, safety of structure, dust control, and disposal of debris. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous materials or contaminated substances. 1. The Contractor is directed not to disturb or attempt removal of any discovered hazardous materials or contaminated substances. Immediately notify both the Owner and the Architect upon discovery of such conditions. Selective Demolition 01739-2 3/7/01 ** Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01739 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES on A. Selective demolition and removal work includes, but is not limited to: 1. Remove designated masonry, doors, frames, and stairs. 2. Remove designated wood siding. 3. Remove designated toilet partitions. - 4. Remove existing basement access bulkhead. 5. Remove designated exterior walls, interior partitions, ceilings, floors, and interior finishes. 6. Remove all furnishings, utilities, equipment and fixtures, not indicated for salvage or re-use, and abandoned materials of all kinds. 7. In addition to demolition specifically shown, cut, move or remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Coordinate such relocation's and removal to accommodate the demands and requirements of other trades. 8. Remove from site all abandoned, disconnected and dismantled plumbing and mechanical equipment, including piping, conduits, wiring, meters and other devices 9. Remove from site all abandoned, disconnected and dismantled electrical fixtures and equipment, including conduits, wiring, meters and other devices. 10. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete. B. Remove, salvage, and furnish to Owner for it's own future use, existing stained glass windows at basement level. C. Identify locations of utilities for work of other sections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01732-CUTTING AND PATCHING: Procedural and administrative requirements for cutting and patching. B. Section 07317-SLATE SHINGLES: Removal of existing slate roofing and building paper. C. Section 07534- EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING: Removal of existing roofing and roof insulation, and wood nailers. am D. Section 07612—SHEET COPPER ROOFING: Removal of existing asphalt shingles prior to application of copper roofing. "! E. Division 15- MECHANICAL: 1. Disconnection, salvage, re-working and re-installation of roof-top ventilator ducts. Selective Demolition 01739-1 IR 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by- pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. 3.4 FINISHING OF PATCHED AREAS: A. General: Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break; for assemblies, refinish entire unit. 1. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible, showing no evidence of patching and refinishing. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction Comply with specified tolerances. a. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated materials in accordance to applicable codes and regulations, and compatible to surrounding ow construction. b. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. Provide vapor and air seal when penetrating existing vapor and air seals. c. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. Extend re-painting to entire surface plane up to where plane changes direction. 3. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.5 CLEANING W A. Cleaning patched areas: Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty and similar items. End of Section Cutting and Patching 01732-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts w 1. All materials used shall be approved by the Architect for consistency with the existing surfaces. 06 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Pre-bid examination: General Contractor and Filed Subcontractors shall inform themselves of existing conditions before submitting bids, and are fully responsible for carrying out all work required to completely and properly execute the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work. No claim for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of actual conditions which are inconsistent with those assumed, except for fully concealed conditions. B. Examination: Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. 2. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 3. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions. 4. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. 3.3 GENERAL CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Performance: Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive repairs, patching, and finishing. ■* B. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete the work. 1. Cut rigid materials using saw or drill. Pneumatic tools are not permitted without prior approval, from Architect 2. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. 3. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 4. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. 5. Remove samples of installed work for testing, when requested. 6. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. C. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer; comply with the original Installer's recommendations. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as Cutting and Patching 01732-4 3/7/01 *� Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Exposed elements: 1. Employ original installer of new construction to perform cutting and patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. 2. Employ an appropriate tradesperson to perform cutting and patching of existing weather-exposed and moisture-resistant construction, and exposed- to-view surfaces. D. Penetrating elements: Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated materials in accordance 04 to applicable codes and regulations, and compatible to surrounding construction. E. Visual requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1. General: Restore work with new products in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Engage a firm recognized and experienced in the trade or specialty operation required to cut and patch the exposed-to-view work listed below. a. Gypsum and ornamental plaster. 3. Engage a firm recognized and experienced in firestopping for patching of existing firestopping, smoke seals and firesafing in compliance with applicable codes and as additionally required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Operational and safety limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety components in a manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as 4M intended, or would increase maintenance, or decrease operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Fire resistance rated barriers and smoke barriers. b. Fire protection systems. c. Electrical wiring systems. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void existing applicable warranties. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Patching Materials: Use patching materials identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of the existing materials. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. Cutting and Patching 01732-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts a. Structural integrity of any element in the project. b. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. c. Integrity of any fire suppression, fire alarm, or life safety system. d. Interruption or disturbance of utilities service. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. e. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements and systems. f. Aesthetic and visual qualities of exposed-to-view elements. g. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. h. Work of Owner or work performed under separate Contract. i. Owners on-going operations or schedule. 2. Include in the request: a. Identification of project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. �+ d. Alternatives to cutting and patching. e. Scope of proposed cutting, patching, alteration or excavation. f. List of tradespeople who will execute the work. g. Description of products to be used. h. Extent of refinishing and cleaning to be performed. i. Effect on work by Owner or work performed under separate Contract, and written permission of affected party. j. Date and time cutting and patching is scheduled to be executed. k. Cost proposal, when applicable. I. Written permission of separate contractor(s)whose work will be affected. 3. Review by the Architect does not waive the Architect's right to later require on complete removal and replacement of Work found to be unsatisfactory. 4. Should conditions of Work or the schedule indicate a change of products from original installation, Contractor shall submit a request for substitution in +■ accordance with Section 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General performance requirements: Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Structural elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce the load-carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. Always obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements. 1. Do not drill through structural beams, slabs or columns. Core drilling through concrete block walls and stair platforms must be approved by the Architect. 2. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. Cutting and Patching 01732-2 3/7/01 �" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination of existing conditions and acceptance of conditions. B. Administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill as required to complete the Work. Contractor is responsible for all cutting and patching work, including but not limited to: 1. Perform all cutting, altering, patching, and fitting of the Work(new and existing)as necessary for the Work and the existing improvements. Fully integrate with existing and new construction, all cutting, alterations and patching, to present the visual appearance of an entire, completed, and unified project. a. Make all products and their components of the work fit together properly. 2. Provide openings in elements of the Work, and the patching of same,for penetrations required by all trades, including but not limited to mechanical, plumbing,fire protection and electrical work. a. Individual trades are responsible for designated types of coring an drilling penetrations for piping, conduit, ducts and other penetrations as defined elsewhere in this Section. 3. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work; 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents or as otherwise determined to be defective. #Is 5. Patch and match all surfaces and products disturbed or damaged by the Work. 6. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01739- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: Demolition of selected portions of the building for new construction. B. Individual product specification Sections: 1. Cutting and patching of not-exposed-to-view materials incidental to work of the Section. 2. Core drilling (up to 8 inches in diameter)of interior building components, incidental to work of individual Sections. 3. Cutting and Patching work of particular exposed-to-view finish work, performed by trades as specified herein. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written proposals to perform cutting and patching under provisions of Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Describe cutting and patching procedures in advance of the time cutting and patching. 1. Submit a written request when cutting work affects the following: Cutting and Patching 01732-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 5. Polished surfaces: Apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. E. Exterior building surfaces: 1. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil,waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. 3. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. 4. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water,the Architect may require light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Concrete: Clean exposed concrete free of all foreign matter. If, in the opinion of the Architect, further cleaning of specific areas is required, they shall be scrubbed with water or other cleaning agents.Acid cleaners shall not be used, +�►� except as may otherwise specifically permitted in the trade sections. F. Bright metal: Clean metal surfaces, hardware, fixtures, appliances, equipment, and similar items free of all foreign matter. As required, lightly scrub specific stains with clean water, mild soap, and soft rags, thoroughly rinsed and wiped with clean, soft white rags. Do not use abrasive cleaners. G. Glass: Replace broken, chipped and defective glass. Remove from glass: stains, spots, marks, paint smears; dirt and foreign materials. Clean and polish both surfaces of all interior and exterior glass. Clean and polish mirrors. H. Carpet: Vacuum clean carpet and remove all spots and stains. I. Hardware: Clean and polish finished hardware, remove marks, stains, scratches and blemishes. J. Tile: Clean and polish floor and wall tile, remove grout film and excess grout. K. Woodwork: Dust and clean [architectural woodwork and]finish woodwork items, remove all stains, spots, and foreign matter using methods and cleaning agents which will not harm the various finishes. L. Site: Sweep exterior paved surfaces broom clean; rake clean unpaved surfaces. M. Equipment: Thoroughly clean all items of mechanical and electrical equipment; remove excess oils and grease from exposed surfaces. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if ventilating units were operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils, if units were operated without filters during construction. 1.9 PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK '! A. Floor and Finished Surfaces Protection: Replace protective coverings which may become wet, torn, or ineffective. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section Execution Requirements 01700-5 11 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts N. Handle material in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not drop or throw materials from heights. O. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not damage surrounding surfaces. +.N 1.7 SITE MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition, free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. 1. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering public streets and Owner's parking areas and access. B. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction. 1. If any street or private way shall be rendered unsafe by the Contractors operations, the Contractor shall make such repairs or provide such temporary w ways or guards as shall be acceptable to the governing authority. 2. Promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition. 1.8 FINAL CLEANING A. Scheduling: Perform final cleaning immediately prior to the Architect's review of the project for issue of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. Re-clean all surfaces, materials and products of the Work immediately prior to Owner's occupancy of the Project. 40 a. Should the Owner occupy any portion of the Work prior to completion of the Contract, the responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Qualifications: Commercial cleaning firm, with a minimum of.3 years experience specializing in the post-construction cleaning of facilities. C. Protection: During the operation of final cleaning, protect surrounding materials and finishes against undue damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Clean, or repair all products and surfaces which are soiled or otherwise damaged by Work of this Section, to match original profiles and finishes. Materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work in conformance with the Contract Documents. D. General cleaning requirements: 1. Remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. 2. Remove all advertising matter and temporary instructional material from exposed surfaces throughout. 3. Use only methods and cleaning materials which are compatible with and as recommended by the manufacturer of the material being cleaned. 4. Finished surfaces: Remove paint smears, spots, marks, dirt, mud and dust and similar disfigurement created by the Work, from all exposed to view existing or new interior and exterior finished surfaces. Execution Requirements 01700-4 3/7/01 '�" 0 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts L. Clean and maintain completed construction as often as necessary through the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 1.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. �w 1. Unless otherwise specified under the various trade Sections of the Specifications, the General Contractor shall perform clean-up operations during construction as herein specified. B. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off- site. The General Contractor shall bear all costs, including fees resulting from such disposal. C. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. D. Maintain project in accordance with all local, Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and Federal Regulatory Requirements. E. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily. F. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. G. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. 1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 2. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and 40 continue cleaning to eliminate dust. H. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti- pollution laws. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in 01 storm or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. I. Use only those materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. J. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface material to be cleaned. K. Execute cleaning to ensure that the buildings, the sites, and adjacent properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. L. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. M. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site at least once weekly, and dispose off-site. Comply with NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste. Execution Requirements 01700-3 lIII1 3/7/01 Ak .ft Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations an Northampton, Massachusetts D. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. E. Protect all existing landscape areas [not indicated to be cleared]. Do not deface, injure, or destroy trees or other plant life. Do not remove or cut trees or other plant life, without authorization from the Owner. Do no attach any anchorages, ropes, cables or guys to any trees scheduled to remain. 1. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. F. Protect non-owned vehicles, stored materials, site and structures from damage. G. Refer to respective Sections for other particular protection requirements. 1.5 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION, APPLICATION AND ERECTION A. Inspection of conditions: The Installer of each component shall inspect the substrate and conditions under which Work is performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting installation. C. Manufacturer's instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that they are more stringent than requirements + in Contract Documents. D. Inspect material immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation Reject damaged and defective items. w. E. Install each component during weather conditions and project status that will ensure the best results. Isolate each part from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. + ! F. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests, to minimize uncovering completed construction for that purpose. G. Limiting exposures: Supervise operations to ensure that no part of construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful or deleterious exposure. H. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing each construction element. Secure each construction element true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. I. Visual effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints to obtain the best effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for decision. J. Mounting heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, review heights with .� Architect, prior to commencement of Work. K. Cleaning and protection: During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. w Execution Requirements 01700-2 3/7/01 �"' Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES go A. Examination of existing conditions and acceptance of conditions. B. Project preparation. ! C. Execution of the Work. D. Cleaning. on E. Protecting installed work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01100- SUMMARY:Work performed by Owner or under separate contract(s). B. Section 01732- CUTTING AND PATCHING: Administrative and procedure requirements for cutting and patching. C. Section 01739- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: Demolition of selected portions of the building for new construction. 1.3 EXAMINATION OF AND ACCEPTANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor, its subcontractors shall inform themselves of existing conditions before submitting his bid, and shall be fully responsible for carrying out all work required to completely and properly execute the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work. No claim for extra compensation or ' extension of time will be allowed on account of actual conditions inconsistent with those assumed, except those conditions described in the General Conditions. B. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing damage to structure surfaces, equipment, or to surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file with Architect prior to starting work. 1.4 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT ELEMENTS A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where called for in individual so specification Sections. B. Protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction and demolition operations. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products and occupied areas. C. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. Coordinate with requirements under individual specification sections. Execution Requirements 01700-1 3/7/01 oil I Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Items noted in Drawings as"Not in Contract" or"N.I.C.", identify work or products which either exist, or are furnished by Owner; such work requires coordination with the Work of this Contract and may even require installation by this Contractor. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and 00 as specified in individual specification sections. B. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays in installation of products, to minimize long- term storage and prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, ON quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle and store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified in individual specification sections. 1. Provide all necessary equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement and damage. B. Store and protect products with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. H. Store heavy materials in locations and in a manner that will not damage or disfigure existing, or new construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section w 4P Product Requirements 01600-3 3/7/01 go Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts E. Provide all products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 1.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS w A. Product selections: Comply with the following for selection of products: 1. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Provide any acceptable product meeting those standards or description. .� 2. Products specified by performance requirements only: Provide any acceptable product which has been tested to show compliance with specified requirements, including indicated performances. 3. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Provide products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions are allowed. 4. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Provide products of manufacturers named, or submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer or product not named. B. Visual matching: Where Specifications require matching a sample, the Architect's decision on whether a proposed product matches is final. Where no product matches and complies with other requirements, comply with provisions for "substitutions"for selection of a matching product in another category. ' 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner Furnished Products:As provided in the General Conditions, the Owner will provide products by others under a separate agreements. 1. Owner's responsibilities regarding Owner furnished products: a. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, w and samples to Contractor. b. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. do c. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. d. Submit claims for transportation damage, and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. .R e. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties, inspections, and service agreements. 2. Contractor's responsibilities regarding Owner furnished products: a. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor. b. Receive and unload products at site, inspect for completeness or damage,jointly with Owner. c. Handle, store, and provide temporary protection. d. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. e. As required by this Contract, finish, install, and clean products; provide protection of installed work. f. When not installed under this Contract, the Contractor shall coordinate Owner installed work with interfacing work of this Contract. The Contractor shall provide temporary protection and final cleaning of Owner installed products, except as directed otherwise. Product Requirements 01600-2 3/7/01 """ Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations 111 Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic product requirements. B. Product options. C. Product substitution procedures. D. Owner furnished products. e0 E. Product delivery requirements. F. Product storage and handling requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. "Products" is defined as new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems used in the Work. Products do not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for re-use. B. "Materials" are products that are shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. C. "Equipment' is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated,that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. D. Definitions in this article are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in Contract Documents, including "specialties","systems","structure", "finishes", "accessories", "furnishings", "special construction", and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1.3 BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. D. When the Contractor has the option of selecting two or more products, ensure that products selected shall be compatible with products previously installed or approved. Product Requirements 01600-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) w PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section 40 rw w r0 w r w Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-8 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts required. Do not store welding or cutting materials within the building when work is not being performed. D. Permanent fire protection system may be activated to meet these requirements. Replace fusible link heads and other expended or discharged components at time !s of Substantial Completion. E. Open Flame: Cutting and welding torches will be allowed only under the following conditions: 1. Contractor shall provide continuous and adequate supervision, fire watches, and emergency fire protection apparatus to assure that sparks or drops of hot metal do not start fires. 2. A new permit shall be required each day, issued by the Owner's Representative, for each location where cutting or welding is to occur.A permit will not be issued until the following conditions are satisfied: 40 a. The work area is cleared of flammable materials. b. Fire watchers with extinguishers are posted for the duration of the work and for 30 minutes after completion of work. c. Cutting and welding operations cease 2 hours prior to the close of construction each day to minimize the risk of undetected smoldering fire. F. Paint Removal Devices: The use of open flame devices, heat plates, and hot air guns to remove paint shall be prohibited. 1.22 SECURITY MEASURES A. Protect Work, existing premises and Owner's operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. B. Initiate a security program in coordination with Owner's existing security system at job mobilization. C. Maintain security program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance precludes the need for Contractor security. 1.23 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE A. Signs other than those required by law or expressly authorized by the Owner. 1. At all times during the project, signage must clearly direct occupants and the general public in the safe use of the building. Signs must clearly indicate areas of no admittance, and further must clearly define and direct users to building entries, exits, and [school offices]and other important destinations. All such interim signage must be painted by a professional sign painter on 3/4- inch medium density overlay plywood with letters no less than 3 inches in height. Coordinate required signage with Architect/Engineer. 1.24 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, CONTROLS, AND FACILITIES A. Remove temporary materials and construction at Substantial Completion. B. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original conditions. Restore eur permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. V Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-7 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts w 1. Excavate and legally dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. 1.20 PEST CONTROL A. Provide rodent control as necessary to prevent infestation of construction and storage areas. Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the site or on adjoining properties. B. Provide marked metal containers with lids for all edible rubbish and enforce their use by all employees. Empty containers and legally dispose of contents off site as required to maintain rodent control. C. If the Contractor's basic rodent control program proves to be ineffective, obtain the services of a professional exterminator, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Should rodentcides be considered necessary, submit copies of proposed program to Owner and Architect. Use of rodentcide shall comply with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. Clearly indicate: 1. Area or areas to be treated. r. 2. Rodentcides to be used. 3. Manufacture's printed instructions. 4. Pollution preventive measures to be employed. *� 1.21 FIRE PREVENTION MEASURES A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the prevention of fire during construction. Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire eau protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes.Ascertain and comply with requirements of Project insurance carrier, local fire department and the state fire marshal. 1. Maintain the area within contract limits orderly and clean. ` a. Remove combustible rubbish promptly from the site and when required, store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 2. Maintain clear access to exits from within the building. 3. Smoking is not permitted in the building or adjacent areas. B. Establish procedures for fire protection for welding, cutting and open torch work, and other potentially hazardous operations. Obtain permission from local authorities having jurisdiction for such work as required by law. Provide special fire extinguishers at welding and torch cutting work. w► 1. Maintain a fire watch when existing fire protection and warning systems have been temporarily de-activated. Maintain watch during all working hours for full period of de-activation. 2. The Contractor will assign personnel to inspect all construction areas at the end of each day's work for fire hazards prior to lock-up. C. Provide for outside storage of gas tanks, sufficiently clear of any structure. «+� Promptly remove welding and cutting equipment from the building when no longer Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-6 3/7/01 ""' Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.16 NOISE CONTROL A. Develop and maintain anoise-abatement program and enforce strict discipline over all personnel to keep noise to a minimum. B. Execute construction work by methods and by use of equipment which will reduce excess noise. 1. Equip air compressors with silencers, and power equipment with mufflers. 2. Manage vehicular traffic and scheduling to reduce noise C. Interior work involving cutting, drilling, hammering or noise generating procedures shall be completed during times schedule with the Owner in advance. 1.17 TEMPORARY BARRICADES A. Provide barriers and barricades to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas. 1. Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of barricades, where required provide lighting, including flashing lights. B. Provide temporary enclosures, as required, for protection of existing facilities and new construction from exposure to weather, other construction operations and similar activities. Where heat is needed and the building envelope is incomplete, provide enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. 1. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks. w C. Provide temporary roofing as needed to maintain the building water tight. 1.18 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Protect all plant life by placing boards, planks, poles or fencing around them,where such plant life may be defaced, bruised, injured, or otherwise damaged by equipment, or construction operations. 1. Plant life or landscape feature scarred or damaged by the Contractor's equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to its original condition at the expense of the Contractor. 2. The Architect will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of. 1.19 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by, the discharge of noxious substances from construction go operations. 1. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, County, and municipal laws regarding pollution. 2. Prevent pollution of streams, lakes, or reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids,waste products, effluents, chemicals or other harmful substances. Prevent from such substances from entering storm drains and sanitary sewers. B. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.13 CONSTRUCTION AIDS - SCAFFOLDING, PLATFORMS, STAGING, CHUTES A. Provide all ladders, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, chutes, and other mounted or installed construction aids as specified herein and as required to facilitate the Work. Furnish and erect construction aids and maintain in safe condition for the use of all subcontractors, installers and applicators. B. Furnish and erect scaffolds, staging, and maintain in safe condition, dismantle when no longer required. The Contractor shall provide scaffolds, staging, and other similar raised platforms, required to access the Work. C. Ladders, temporary stairs, platforms and railings, shall comply with OSHA guidelines. w� 1. Provide and maintain temporary stairs until permanent stairs are in place and functional. When permanent stairs are erected, provide temporary railings and guards. Protect permanent stairs with temporary covers and protective treads. 2. Portable ladders and mobile platforms of all required heights, shall be provided by individual users. 1.14 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC CONTROL 00 A. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct any portion of any street public or private, without obtaining permits therefore from the proper authorities. 1. Provide and pay for police traffic details at anytime that construction takes place in a public street(right of way). The Contractor is responsible for coordinating, requesting. and paying the prevailing rate of wage for police traffic details directly with the Northampton Police Department. B. Haul routes: Consult with governing authorities and establish public thoroughfares which will be used as haul routes and site access. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. 1. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. 2. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to expedite traffic flow and to minimize interference with normal public traffic. C. Provide traffic control and directional signs as needed to direct construction and public traffic. 1.15 DUST CONTROL A. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1. Take all necessary measures and provide equipment and materials to minimize dust from rising and blowing across the site and also to control surface water throughout the operation so that it does not run onto paved ways without being filtered. Control all dust created by construction operations and movement of construction vehicles, both on site and on paved ways. 2. During the progress of the work, maintain the areas of construction activities including sweeping and sprinkling of streets as necessary. Provide and use calcium chloride for more effective dust control, when deemed necessary by regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-4 3/7/01 "'" Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1. Availability: Provide offices ready for occupancy within 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed. B. Contractor's field office(s): Provide habitable office(s) or space, of size to accommodate personnel, include as a minimum the following: 1. Size and furnishings: For Contractor's needs and to provide space for project meetings. 2. Outdoor weather thermometer. 3. Hard-hats for site visitors. C. Storage and fabrication sheds: Provide as required, sheds, equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved. 1. Subcontractor's are responsible for their own storage facilities, coordinate locations. 40 D. Maintain approach walks to field office and storage/fabrication sheds free of mud, water, and snow. E. When permanent facilities are enclosed with operable utilities, relocate offices and storage into building, with written agreement of Owner, and remove temporary buildings. 1.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Sanitary facilities: Designated existing facilities may be used. 1. At times when existing facilities are not available: Provide self-contained single-occupant chemical toilet units,wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. B. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, cleaning compounds and similar materials. C. Maintain facilities and keep clean, provide covered waste containers for used material. 1.11 FIRST AID AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. First aid supplies: Comply with governing regulations. B. Fire extinguishers: Provide and maintain on site, adequate fire extinguishers UL rated for A-B-C type fires. Provide red-painted plywood standards for each extinguisher. Additionally provide a dry chemical fire extinguisher at each location where welding, torch cutting and other similar hazardous work is in progress. 1.12 CONSTRUCTION AIDS-TEMPORARY HOISTS AND CRANES A. Hoisting equipment and machinery: Furnish all hoisting equipment, crane services and lift machinery required to perform the Work of this Contract. Install, operate OR and maintain in safe condition. 1. Do not charge applicators and installers for these services during normal working hours. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations * Northampton, Massachusetts licensed where project is located to provide temporary feeders of sufficient capacity from the facility's power lines, at the point coordinated with the Owner, to furnish electric light and power requirements for the work, while under construction. 1. The Owner reserves the right to require separate metering and for the Contractor to pay for electricity used, if, in the Owner's opinion, electricity is being wasted. 2. Heavy electrical loads such as welding and other equipment with similar special power requirements must be powered by individual installers using portable electric generators at each users own cost. 3. Except as otherwise specifically provided, all additional costs resulting from such use shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.6 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, LIGHTING A. Temporary lighting: Provide lighting with local switching to fulfill security requirements and provide illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1. Maintain a minimum lighting intensity of at least one 200 watt lamp per 1000 " square feet of floor area of building. Provide higher lighting intensities necessary for finish work or special construction operations,when required. 2. Permanent building lighting may be utilized. Immediately prior to the Architect's inspection for substantial completion the Contractor is required to replace all used lamps which are broken or have burned out. 1.7 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, WATER A. Temporary water: Contractor is permitted to use existing hose bib(s). Owner will pay for water necessary for the Work; exercise measures to conserve water. B. Protect piping and fittings against freezing. 1.8 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, HEATING, COOLING AND VENTILATING A. Temporary heat: Provide heat for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Provide vented self-contained liquid propane gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control, UL approved and acceptable to local fire department. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander type units is prohibited. 1. Vent heaters directly to outside air, in areas where concrete is less than 15 days old. 2. In enclosed areas, maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit; provide higher temperatures where required by individual specification sections. B. Temporary ventilation:Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.9 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. General: Designated existing spaces may be used for field offices and for storage. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-2 3/7/01 1!M Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 00 A. Requirements for temporary facilities and controls. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary facilities, controls, and construction aids as specified here-in, until they are replaced by permanent work, or until Project Substantial Completion, as appropriate. on 1. Additional temporary facilities and controls which may be specified under individual filed sub-bid sections are the responsibility of the respective subcontractors. 2. Temporary facilities removed from the Project shall remain the property of the Contractor. B. Except where specifically noted otherwise, cost or use charges for temporary facilities, utility services, controls, and construction aids and similar items specified in this Section or as required to perform the Work, are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. ' C. Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper performance of the Work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time when they are no longer needed, or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the temporary facilities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS OR A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 2. Schedule showing implementation and termination of each temporary utility within 15 days of commencement of the Work. 3. Shop drawings for all temporary signage. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420- REFERENCES. 1. ANSI A 10 - Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition. 2. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 3. NFPA 241 - Building Construction and Demolition Operations. 1.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, ELECTRICITY A. Temporary electricity: The Owner will pay for electrical energy required for temporary light and power. The Contractor is required to hire an electrician Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. Demolish and remove from site prior to requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, all Mock-ups which are not permitted to remain as part of the finished work. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. When called for by individual Specification Sections, provide at no additional cost to the Owner, manufacturers' or product suppliers' qualified staff personnel, to observe site conditions, start-up of equipment, adjusting and balancing of equipment, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, and as specified under the various Sections. 1. Individuals shall report all observations, site decisions, and instructions given to applicators or installers. Immediately notify Architect of any circumstances which are supplemental, or contrary to, manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Submit full report within 30 calendar days from observed site conditions to Architect for review. 1.6 TESTING LABORATORY AND INSPECTION SERVICES w A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect. B. Cooperate with independent firm;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 1. Notify Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. C. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) go PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section r w Quality Control 01450-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01450 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ! ' A. General quality assurance. B. Field samples and mockups. C. Source quality control. D. Contractor's quality control. go E. Manufacturer's field services and quality control. F. Testing laboratory and inspection services. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including performance of each step in sequence. Notify Architect when manufacturers' instructions conflict with the provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents; obtain clarification before proceeding with the work affected by the conflict. C. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate high standards or more precise workmanship. D. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. E. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.3 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples demonstrating quality level for the Work, at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review and acceptance by Architect. Remove field samples prior to date of Final Inspection, or as directed. 1.4 MOCK-UPS A. Where requested by Architect, or as specified in individual specification sections, assemble and erect specified items,with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. Remove mock-up assemblies prior to date of Final Inspection, or as directed. B. Mock-ups, when approved by the Architect/Engineer, will be used as datum for Or comparison with the remainder of the Work for the purposes of acceptance or rejection. Quality Control 01450-1 on 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Road,Cleveland,OH 44145-1967 (440)899-0010 SGCC Safety Glass Certification Council RMS, P.O. Box 9 Henderson Harbor, NY 13651 (315)938-7444 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 401 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 2400, Chicago, IL 60611 (312)644-6610 SJI Steel Joist Institute - 312710 th Ave. N., Myrtle Beach,SC 29577 (843)626-1995 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 4201 Lafayette Center Dr., Chantilly,VA 22022-1209 (703)803-3732 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway, Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 (850)434-2611 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4024 1h Street,6th Floor, Pittsburgh PA 15222-4623 (412)281-2331 SWRI Sealant,Waterproofing&Restoration Institute 2841 Main Street, Suite 585, Kansas City, MO 64108 (816)472-7974 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. 100 Clemson Research Blvd.,Anderson, SC 29625 (864)646-8453 TPI Truss Plate Institute 583 D'Onofrio Dr., Suite 200Madison WI (608)833-5900 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road, Northbrook, IL 60602 (847)272-8800 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W.Varns Road, Box 23145, Portland, OR 97223 (503)639-0651 WDMA Window&Door Manufacturers Association (formerly National Wood Window&Door Association, NWWDA) 205 E.Touhy Avenue,Suite G-54, Des Plaines, IL 60018 (708)399-5200 WRCA Western Red Cedar Association 1200-555 Burrard St., New Brighton, MN 55122 (612)633-4334 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 522 SW Fifth Avenue,Yeon Building, Portland, OR 97204 (503)224-3930 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section References 01420-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .. Northampton, Massachusetts 60 Revere Drive, Suite 500, Northbrook, IL 60062 (847)480-9138 MIA Marble Institute of America, Inc. 33505 State Street, Farmington, MI 48335 (614)228-6194 MIL Military Specification Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19120 ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association c/o National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 S. Federal Street, Chicago, IL 60605 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 South Federal Street, Suite 400, Chicago, IL 60605 (312)332-0405 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 2302 Horse Pen Road, Herndon,VA 20171-3499 (703)713-1900 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8575 Government Circle, Gaithersburg,MD 20877-4121 (301)977-3698 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers'Association 1300 N. 17th St., Suite 1846, Rosslyn,VA 22209 (703)841-3200 NFPA National Fire Protection Association 1 Battery March Park, PO Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269 (800)344-3555 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. PO Box 3009, Memphis,TN 38173-0009 (901)526-5016 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association O'Hare International Center 10255 W. Higgins Road,Suite 600, Rosemont, IL 60018-5607 (847)299-9070 NSF National Sanitary Foundation PO Box 1468.Ann Arbor, MI (313)769-8010 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 110 E. Market St.,Suite 200A, Leesburg,VA 20176 (800)323-9736 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association 1400 E.Touhy Ave., Suite 470, Des Plaines. IL 60018 (800)223-2301 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road,Skokie, IL 60077-1083 (847)966-6200 PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute 4004 Hillsboro Pike,Suite 224B, Nashville,TN 37215 (615)-385-5357 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 25, Fox River Grove, IL 60021-0025 (847)462-1930 w References 01420-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts BIA Brick Industry Association 00 11490 Commerce Park Drive, Reston,VA 22091-1525 (703)620-0010 CDA Copper Development Association 260 Madison Ave., 16th Floor, New York, NY 10016 00 (212)251-7200 CISCA Ceilings& Interior Systems Construction Association 579 W.North Ave.,Suite 301, Elmhurst, IL 60126 (630)833-1919 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N. Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 (847)517-1200 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commision 5401 Westbard Ave., Bethesda, MD 20816-1469 (301)504-0580 CSSB Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau P.O. Box 1178, Sumas,WA 98295-1178 (604)462-8961 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 Newbrook Dr. Chantilly,VA 22021-2223 (703)222-2010 FM Factory Mutual Engineering&Research Corp. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 (781)762-4300 n FS Federal Specification General Services Administration(WFSIS) Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197,Washington, DC 20407 GA Gypsum Association 810 First Street, N.E.,Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 (202)289-5440 GANA Glass Association of North America 2945 S.W.Wanamaker Dr., Suite A,Topeka, KS 66612-5321 (785)271-0166 GICC Glazing Industry Code Commitee 3310 Harrison St.,Topeka, KS 66611-2279 (785)266-7013 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 3933 US Route 11, PO Box 2040, Cortland, NY 13045 (800)345-3851 IMIAC International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council International Masonry Institute 815 15th Street, N.W.,Washington, DC 20005 ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400, Bedford, IN 47421 (812)275-4426 LSGA Laminators Safety Glass Association 3310 Harrison Street,Topeka KS 66611-2279 (913)266-7014 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association 1300 Sumner Ave, Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216)241-7333 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association References 01420-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 12200 E.Lliff Ave, Suite 204,Aurora, CO 80014-1252 (800)-468-7732 ' AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, DC 20006-5292 (202)626-7426 w� AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1 E.Wacher Dr., Suite 3100,Chicago,IL 60601-2001 (312)670-2400 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 W. University Drive,Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893 (847)394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 W.42nd Street, 13 Floor, New York, NY 10036 (212)642-4900 APA The Engineered Wood Association (formerly American Plywood Association) P.O. Box 11700,Tacoma,WA 98411-0070 (253)565-6600 ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 04 4301 N. Fairfax Dr., Suite 425,Arlington,VA 22203 (703)524-8800 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 7012 S. Revere Parkway, Suite 140, Englewood, CO 80112 (303)792-9559 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association 6000 Executive Blvd., Suite 201, Rockville, MD 20852-3803 (301)2331-9050 *® ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association 230 West Wells Street, Suite 311, Milwaukee WI 53203 (414)273-3430 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 1015 15"St. N.W.,Washington, DC 20005 800-548-2723 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017-2392 (212)705-7722 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive,West Conshohocken, PA 19428 (610)832-9500 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 1952 Isaac Newton Square W., Reston,VA 20190 •!R (703)733-0600 AWPA American Wood Preservers'Association P.O. Box 286,Woodstock, MD 21163-0286 (410)465-3169 AWPI American Wood Preservers' Institution 1945 Old Gallows Rd., Suite 150,Vienna,VA 22182 (703)893-4005 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W., Miami, FL 33126 (800)443-9353 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. 355 Lexington Ave., 17 Floor New York, NY 10017 (212)661-4261 References 01420-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01420 REFERENCES !-! PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reference Standards. B. Abbreviations and Acronyms. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For products or workmanship specified by association,trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by DATE OF ISSUE for Contract Documents, current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. OW D. The contractual relationship to the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. E. Schedule of References 1. Listed below are abbreviations for the names and titles of trade association e names, federal government agencies and similar organizations which are referenced in the individual specification sections.The addresses and phone numbers provided are for the Contractor's convenience and are believed to be current and accurate, however addresses and phone numbers frequently change, and no assurance is made on their accuracy: AA Aluminum Association 900 19th Street N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 (202)862-5104 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 104 Schaumburg, IL 60173- 4268(847)303-5859 ext. 21 AASHTO American Assoc.of State Highway&Transportation Officials 444 N. Capitol Street NW,Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 (202)624-5800 III ADC Air Diffusion Council 104 S. Michigan Ave, Suite 1500, Chicago, IL 60603 (312)201-0101 AFPA American Forest&Paper Association (FormerIX NFPA National Forest Products Association) 1111 19t St. N.W.,Suite 800,Washington, DC 20036 (202)463-2700 AGA American Gas Association Inc. 1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington,VA 22209-2469 (800)-841-8430 AGAI American Galvanizers Association Inc. References 01420-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01410 OR REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Regulations include laws, ordinances, statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work, whether lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not. 1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest version, by DATE OF ISSUE for Contract Documents, current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, except as indicated otherwise, of all applicable codes including the following: 1. Massachusetts State Building Code, Sixth edition, as amended. 2. Town of Northampton Zoning Bylaws, as amended. 3. Massachusetts Fuel, Gas, and Plumbing Code. 4. Massachusetts Electrical Code (1999 National Electrical Code,with Massachusetts amendments from 527 CMR 12.00). 5. Massachusetts Fire Prevention Regulations (527 CMR). 40 6. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Regulation 521 CMR:Architectural Access Board, effective 2/23/96, as amended. 7. United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): Standard N°. 29-CFR-1926.59-Hazard Communication Standard. 8. United States Department of Justice, NO 28 CFR Part 36-Americans with Disabilities Act, (Public Law 101-336). 00 B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a code or regulation is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents, or as otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section Regulatory Requirements 01410-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS IN A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, handling, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificates and installer certificates to Architect for review. �r B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.12 EMERGENCY ADDRESSES A. Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit in writing, the name, addresses and telephone numbers of key members of their organization including Contractor's Superintendent and personnel at the site, to be contacted in the event of emergencies at the building site, which may occur during non-working hours. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section 10 o 40 Submittal Procedures 01330-7 3/7/01 40 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations +► Northampton, Massachusetts Name of project- SMITH COLLEGE SESSIONS ANNEX RENOVATIONS Architect- R.E. Dinneen Architects & Planners Contractor- Subcontractor/supplier- ` Date of submission - G. Each drawing shall have a clear space on the right hand side for review stamps of .w. both the Architect and Contractor. _ — = END INSERT #2 a ------------_ —= START,EDIT s— u ..k n., Q v NOTE: END EDIT = -- --_----_ 1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit Product data as specified, and as the Architect may additionally prescribe. Product data includes, but is not limited to: 1. Catalog cuts. 2. Complete specifications. 3. Standard color charts. 4. Performance data. W* 5. Certified laboratory test report data. 6. Health and safety precautions. 7. Illustrated capacities, characteristics, wiring diagrams, controls, and other pertinent information for complete product and product use description. B. If more than one size or type is shown on any printed sheet, indicate clearly intended item(s). C. When accepted or disapproved, the Architect will retain three copies. Submit sufficient copies for all other parties. No copies stamped REJECTED or 00 RESUBMIT shall be sent to the job site. 1.9 SAMPLES r� A. Submit samples clearly labeled as to its material, type or make, manufacturer, size or gauge, and other pertinent data, accompanied by an appropriate transmittal form. Samples shall show full range of color and texture variation that can be expected. 1. When accepted or disapproved, the Architect will retain one set of samples and return the other to the Contractor. Samples will not be permitted for use in the project. Submittal Procedures 01330-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts C. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS Olk A. General: Provide accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings prepared specifically for this Project. Show adjacent conditions and related work. Show accurate field dimensions where appropriate. Identify materials and products on shown. Note all conditions where require coordination with other trades and special installation procedures. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project are not considered shop drawings. 1. Shop drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. 2. Show every component of fabricate items, notes regarding manufacturing process coatings and finishes, identifying numbers conforming to the Contract Documents (i.e. stair numbers, door numbers and similar items), dimensions, and appropriate trade names. Show anchorage and fastening details, including type, size and spacing. Show material gage and thickness. Indicate welding details and joint types. 3. Review each submittal for conformity with the Contract requirements prior to submittal, certify such review on each shop drawing with Contractor's stamp, signature and date. Reference on shop drawings to other sections, installers, suppliers, or trade(s) shall designate the appropriate specification sections, and the term"by others"shall not be used. w B. Size of Format: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, and no larger than 30 by 42 inches, except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings. C. The Architect's criticisms and comments will be made on the transparency copy and returned to the Contractor. If necessary, the Contractor then shall make the necessary corrections on the original drawings and resubmit the corrected drawings in manner specified.All additional prints of any sepias required for the Architect's own use, and those of engineering consultants, will be made without cost to the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible to furnish (at no additional cost to Owner)all prints needed for use by the Contractor, subcontractors, installers, vendors and suppliers. _—__—START ED{T_ _ -----------=2.1.2000 Q v NOTE: D. Transparencies returned"REVIEWED" or"FURNISH AS CORRECTED" as set forth below: Contractor shall obtain and distribute adequate prints for construction, including one print of each for the Owner's project representative, and then return the transparencies to the subcontractor or supplier from whom he originally received them. E. Transparencies returned "REJECTED" or"REVISE AND RESUBMIT", as set forth below: Contractor shall first obtain a record print and then forward them to source for correction of original drawings, and resubmission of a new transparency and prints as above. F. Each drawing shall have a title block on the right hand side containing the following data: Submittal Procedures 01330-5 3/7/01 .o Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Contractor shall number submittals sequentially by Specifications Section prior to submittal. Resubmitted items shall retain number and be noted as resubmitted (example 15400-1 R1) G. Contractor's review: Review all shop drawings, product data and samples. Include, without limitation, verification of the following: 1. Proper title, original date, drawing number(which shall be changed if resubmitted), revision numbers and dates, designation of project contractor, subcontractor and/or supplier. 2. Identification of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by Specification Section and subsection or paragraph where appropriate and identification of Contract Drawings by number and detail. + ► 3. On each submittal, as a minimum, Contractor shall identify the following: a. Errors, inconsistencies, and omissions discovered in the contract documents and field conditions must be reported at once to the Architect. b. Any variations from code requirements contained in the contract documents must be reported promptly in writing to both the Architect and owner. c. Promptly report to the Architect information that any design, process, or product infringes on a patent. d. Names of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be given in writing to the Architect as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, preferably at the pre-construction meeting. (Note: If objection is made, a change order is possible.) List shall include name(s)of contact person(s), address, telephone and fax number(s). H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties; instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. ------------------= END INSERT, #1 F 1.5 SUBMITTAL QUANTITY REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish Architect with the following quantities of each submittal: 1. Shop drawings: 1 reproducible and 4 prints per drawing. 2. Product data, manufacturer's instructions and certificates and similar ;W submissions: 5 copies. 3. Samples: Sets of 2 identical samples of each submission required. 4. Emergency addresses: 1 copy to Architect, and 1 copy direct to Owner. 1.6 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 21 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. Within 21 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. Submittal Procedures 01330-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts B. Provide space for Contractor, Architect and engineering consultant review stamps, on the front page of each item's submittal copy. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. The Architect's stamp shall contain the following data: REVIEWED FURNISH AS CORRECTED FURNISH AS NOTED REVISE AND RESUBMIT REJECTED 1. The Architect will insert the date of action taken and an identification of the person taking the action. 2. Submittal grading: a. REVIEWED- No corrections, no marks. b. FURNISH AS CORRECTED -Resubmission not required. Minor amount of corrections; all items can be fabricated without further corrections to original submission; checking is complete and all corrections are deemed obvious without ambiguity. III c. REVISE AND RESUBMIT-Resubmission required. Minor amounts of corrections; checking is not complete; details of items noted by checker are to be clarified further before full review can be given. Correct and resubmit, do not fabricate noted items requiring correction. d. REJECTED-Submittal is rejected as not in accord with the Contract Documents,too many corrections, or other justifiable reasons.When returning submission, Architect will state reasons for rejection. Correct and resubmit, do not fabricate. 3. Review/approval neither extends nor alters any contractual obligations of the Architect, Engineer or Contractor. C. Identify all variations from Contract Documents, and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. D. Coordinate related submittals and schedule submissions to expedite the Project; deliver to Architect, per the following address: Firm 00 Road Avenue Street CityTown, Massachusetts, 00000 E. Transmit submittals to Architect at the above address, with individual transmittal forms for each submission, using AIA Document G810. F. Transmit submittals to Architect at the above address, with individual transmittal forms, Document 01331 - Submittal Transmittal for each submission. Document PP 01331 is bound into the Project manual, at the end of this Section; unbound copies are available from the Architect- 1. On transmittal form, identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, installer, or supplier, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. Transmittals received by the Architect from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without any action taken. Submittal Procedures 01330-3 3/7101 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts schedule of submissions shall be related to the entire Project, and shall contain the following: 1. Shop Drawing Schedule (for shop and setting drawings to be provided by the Contractor). 2. Sample Schedule (for samples to be provided by the Contractor). 3. With respect to portions of the Work to be performed by Subcontractors, such schedule of submissions for the work of each Subcontractor shall be submitted for approval within 30 calendar days after execution of a subcontract with such Subcontractor. B. List all submissions required of each trade: 1. Include the Specification Section number, name of subcontractor or vendor, submittal type, item, description, type, quantity and size (where applicable)of each submission. 2. For each submission, provide the following dates, as estimated: a. Scheduled date of submission. b. Required date of approval. (permit time for appropriate review and 4% resubmissions as may be required). c. Estimated date of beginning fabrication or manufacture of product(where applicable). 00 d. Required date of submission of product to testing laboratory. e. Required date of testing laboratory approval. f. Required date for delivery of product to site. g. Required date for beginning of installation of product. h. Required date for completion of installation (and in-place testing). C. For each submittal, schedule to allow adequate time for review by the Architect and its consultants. The Architect will not be responsible for Work performed in shop or field prior to approval. Long-lead items requiring expedited action must be clearly indicated. 1. The schedule shall be reviewed and resubmitted as necessary to conform to approved modifications to the construction Project Schedule, and shall be updated as may be required by the Architect. D. Posting of submittal schedule: Print and distribute the submittal schedule to Architect, Owner, subcontractors and other parties affected. Post copies in field. E. Update schedule throughout progress of the Project, coordinated with scheduling changes in the Work, and redistribute monthly in conjunction with submittal of Application for Payment. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND GRADING A. Prepare and submit to the Architect a Construction Schedule, a Schedule of Values, and a Schedule of shop drawings, product data, and samples. - START EDIT =_ _ = 2.1.2000 Q V NOTE: Submittal Procedures 01330-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01330 ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES !► A. Submittal coordination. B. Submittal procedures and grading. C. Schedule of Submissions. D. Shop drawings, product data and samples. E. Proposed products list. F. Manufacturer's instructions. G. Manufacturer's certificates. H. Emergency addresses. 1.2 SUBMITTAL COORDINATION A. Make submittals in a proper and timely fashion, allowing for administrative procedures, Architect's review, corrections to submissions and resubmittal, if necessary, and fabrication of products without delaying the project. Minimum processing times required by the Architect are as follows: 1. Review for Architect's Office only:Allow a minimum of 10 working days for review and processing. 2. Review by Architect and its consultant: Allow 10 working days for review and processing of submittals by Architect plus an additional 5 working days for review by each consultant. 3. Reprocessing of submittals: For submittals requiring resubmittal, re- processing time required shall be the same as first submittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of Work. B. Make submittals of similar items, systems, or those specified in a single specification section together. C. Make submittals for products which other products are contingent upon, first. D. The Contractor is fully responsible for delay in the delivery of materials or progress of work caused by late review of shop drawings due to failure of the Contractor to submit, revise, or resubmit shop drawings in adequate time to allow the Architect checking and processing of each submission or resubmission. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF SUBMISSIONS OR A. Schedule procedure: Immediately after being awarded the Contract, meet with the Architect to discuss the schedule of submissions and then prepare and submit within 14 calendar days for approval a schedule of submissions for the Work. The Submittal Procedures 01330-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section VIII o Construction Progress Documentation 03120-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 5. Conclude all activities on one common end date, show contract completion date as a milestone activity on the Schedule. r 1.4 CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORTING A. Construction schedule updates: *�! 1. During progress of Work, revise and resubmit with Applications for Payment in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 2. Maintain progress schedule with project progress and utilize the plan in planning, coordinating and performing the work under this Contract. 3. Furnish copies of the Progress schedule, and revisions, to all subcontractors, + installers, equipment vendors and suppliers. 4. Update schedule showing actual progress of Work in progress, identify Work started and completed during the previous update period. Show the estimated time required to complete each activity started but not yet completed, and reflect any changes in the schedule. 5. Prepare a Schedule Analysis for submission with revised project schedules. The Schedule Analysis shall include a description of problem areas, current and anticipated delaying factors and their estimated impact on performance of other activities and completion dates, and an explanation of corrective action to be taken.All activities that are behind schedule by more than two weeks ,,, shall be addressed individually in the Schedule Analysis. 6. Submit revised schedules with attached Schedule Analysis, with each Application for Payment; clearly identify changes since previous version. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. 1.5 PERIODIC SITE OBSERVATIONS A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record the following: 1. Specification section number, product(s), and name of subcontractor or w installer. 2. Name of testing agency and name of inspector. 3. Name of manufacturer's representative present. 4. Date, time and duration of tests. 5. Type of test and results. 6. Retesting required. B. Observe startup and adjustments; record time and date of equipment start-up and results. C. Observe equipment demonstrations to Owner; record times and additional information required for operation and maintenance manuals. D. Assist Architect/Engineer with final inspections. Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected. Construction Progress Documentation 03120-2 3/7/01 �"` Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01320 W CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ,", PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Survey and layout data. B. Scheduling of the Work. !! C. Contract progress reporting. D_ Periodic site observations. 12 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA A. Prior to starting any construction work, stake out all limits of cut and fill, the limits of proposed walkways and site improvements. Promptly upon completion of layout work and before any construction work is begun on the site, notify the Architect and Clerk of Works, who shall conduct a field inspection of the stake-out. The Architect reserves the right to adjust the location of such layouts as it deems necessary to comply with the intent of the Contract Documents. 1.3 SCHEDULING OF THE WORK A. Submit Gantt/Bar progress schedule in triplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for Architect's review. Revise and resubmit as required. '? B. Schedule shall be of format approved by Architect showing complete sequence of construction activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. For each separate phase, stage of Work and individual W activities, indicate the early and late start dates, early and late finish dates,float dates, and duration. 1. The Schedule shall show the sequence and phasing of activities required and reflect the manner in which actual work will be performed. The number of JP activities shown in the Schedule must be at least equal and related to the number of items listed in the Schedule of Values including back-up detail. 2. Indicate implementation and termination of each temporary utility. 3. Define portions of work which are dependent on the schedule of other related activities and phasing. 4. Define activities on which the work is dependent, including: IFIF a. Submittal of shop drawings, equipment schedules, samples, color submission, coordination drawings, templates, fabrication and material delivery times. b. Architect/Engineer's review of shop drawings, equipment schedules, samples and templates. c. Delivery times of equipment furnished under separate Contracts with Owner,where the Contractor has responsibility for installation or coordination. Construction Progress Documentation 03120-1 3/7/01 MW Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations MW Northampton, Massachusetts a. Subcontractors and supplier representatives present at meetings shall have authority to act for and make commitments for, the entity which they represent. 2. Items of Agenda: a. Review minutes of previous meetings. b. Review of Work progress. c. Field observations, problems, and decisions. d. Identifications of problems which impede planned progress. e. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. f. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. w g. Maintenance of progress schedule. h. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. i. Coordination of projected progress. "f" j. Maintenance of quality and work standards. k. Progress of Work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. *4 I. Other business relating to Work. B. The Contractor shall conduct special project meetings as required throughout the " course of the Work. Special meeting issues may include, but are not limited to: 1. Safety issues. 2. Labor issues. + ? 3. Special schedule issues. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section Project Management and Coordination 01310-4 .r 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts required to attend as the Architect may direct or the Contractor may wish to V have present. 2. Items of Agenda: a. Use of premises by Owner, Contractor, and subcontractor(s). b. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy considerations, c. Demolition procedures, identity tagging of existing furnishings and Ok equipment for salvage or disposal. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. SELECT Q SOME OWNER FURNISHED PAID UTILITIES Q OR b NOT b " e. Temporary utilities. f. Barricading and protection of the public, dust barriers. g. Survey and building layout. h. Potentially difficult areas of work. i. Project coordination. j_ Security and housekeeping procedures. k. Construction schedules. I_ Work beyond Contract Limit. m. Procedures for testing and inspection. n. Procedures for maintaining record documents. o. Requirements for equipment start-up. p. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 0 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification sections, prior to commencing the work of that trade, convene a pre-installation conference at work site, if possible, on same day as weekly progress meeting. B. Notify Architect a minimum of 48 hours in advance of meeting date. C. Attendance is required by Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendent, and parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the Section. 1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Architect or its representative shall schedule and administer meetings throughout the progress of the Work at weekly intervals; make arrangements for r meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within one week to Contractor, Owner and participants of meeting only. Contractor is responsible for distribution to subcontractors, vendors, suppliers and others who are affected by decisions made. > 1. Attendance is required by Contractor's Project Manager and Project Superintendent, and each applicator, installer, and supplier whose work is on- going or scheduled. Owner, Architect, engineering consultants, and other persons are required to attend as the Architect may direct.Architect, engineering consultants, subcontractors, vendors, suppliers shall be present at meetings upon request of Contractor. Project Management and Coordination 01310-3 3/7/01 40 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.3 UTILITIES, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work of Divisions 15 and 16 with Work of other Divisions. B. Give all advance notice to public utility companies as required by law, and provide proper disposition, subject to Architect's approval of all existing pipe lines, conduits, sewers, drains, poles, wiring, and other utilities that in any way interfere with the Work, whether or not they are specifically shown on the Drawings. C. Notify Owner and appropriate authorities when coming across an unknown utility line(s), and await decision as to how to dispose of same. D. When an existing utility line must be cut and plugged or capped, moved, or relocated, or has become damaged, notify the Owner and Utility company involved, and assure the protection, support, or moving of utilities to adjust them to the new work. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused to existing, active utilities located within the limits of this Contract, whether or not such utilities are shown on the Drawings, including resultant damages or injuries to persons or properties. F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 1.4 PROJECT ADMINISTRATION A. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining required coordination procedures. Include required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. B. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their Work is required. " C. Conduct conferences among subcontractors and others concerned with the Work, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress. Such activities include: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Closeout activities. 1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A. In addition to the pre-bid conference specified under Section 00130- INVITATION TO BID, the Architect may, prior to commencement of the Work, schedule a meeting at a meeting room provided by the Owner. 1. Attendance is required by Owner's Representative, Architect, engineering consultants, Contractors' Project Manager and Superintendent, and major subcontractors, applicators, installers and suppliers. Other persons are Project Management and Coordination 01310-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES eA► A. Project coordination. B. Project site administration. C. Project meetings. 1.2 GENERAL PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordination: The Contractor is fully responsible for coordinating the Work of this Contract including scheduling, submittals, Work and other activities included in various Sections to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating actual installed location and interface of work, and to make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where installation of one component depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation, schedule activities in the sequence required to obtain efficient installation with the least amount of alterations, or cutting and patching, to completed Work. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible to uncover work completed, to install ill- timed work, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Where space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for maintenance, service and repair. D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and Owner's occupancy. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize as disruption of Owner's activities. Project Management and Coordination 01310-1 3/7/01 w Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations fty Northampton, Massachusetts C. Measurement by volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness. D. Measurement by area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. E. Linear measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. F. Stipulated sum/price measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.6 PAYMENT A. Payment includes: Full compensation for all required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation services and incidentals; erection, application or *� installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. B. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities accepted by the Architect/Engineer multiplied by the unit sum/price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION M ,. I. Unit Prices 01270-2 3/7/01 10 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01270 UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY +AA A. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to portions of the Work performed under a unit price payment method. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY: Measurement for additional roof sheathing requiring unit price payment. B. Section 06200—FINISH CARPENTRY: Measurement for interior and exterior window trim and casings at replacement windows, requiring unit price payment. 1.3 AUTHORITY A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections are intended to complement the criteria of this Section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section shall govern. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. The Owner will verify measurements and quantities C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required. 1.4 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work and verified by the Owner shall determine payment. B. If the actual Work requires more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated, provide the required quantities at the unit sum/prices contracted. 1.5 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement devices: „ 1. Weigh scales: Inspected, tested and certified by applicable weights and measures department within the past year. W 2. Platform scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle. 3. Metering devices: Inspected, tested and certified by applicable department within the past year. B. Measurement by weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight. Unit Prices 01270-1 3/7/01 go Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .. Northampton, Massachusetts Section 08550. Provide exterior and interior wood trim as specified in Section 06200 for the new windows. C. ALTERNATE 3— ROOFING 1. Base bid: Provide slate roof work at the new building infill only. +� 2. Alternate number 3: Provide a new slate roof to replace existing as specified in Section 07317. Remove asphalt shingles and replace it with copper roofing specified in Section 07211. Remove existing membrane roof and replace it 4, with a new membrane roof specified in Section 07534. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) • PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION oft .a w M .0 Alternatives 01230-2 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01230 ALTERNATIVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section consists of: 1. Submission procedures for scheduled Alternates. 2. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time. B. The description of Alternates herein below and through the Specifications are intended to set the intent and to describe the major work only. Such descriptions 40 are not to be taken as limiting the work required under any of the alternates, and all work required to carry out the intent of each of the accepted Alternates shall be done without cost additional to that agreed upon as the alternate price 40 1.2 REQUIREMENTS A. Submit Alternates with full description of the proposed alternate and the affect on adjacent or related components. B. Alternates quoted on Proposals will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate. 1.3 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATES A. Indicate variation of Guaranteed Maximum Price for Alternates described below and list where provided for in the Proposal,which requests a difference in Contract Price by adding to or deducting from the price. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. ALTERNATE 1 —WINDOW MANUFACTURER 1. Base bid: Provide windows,manufactured by Eagle Windows & Doors in custom color as specified in Section 08550. 2. Alternate number 1: Provide windows manufactured by Marvin Windows in — custom color as specified in Section 08550. B. ALTERNATE 2—WINDOW SCOPE 1. Base bid: Provide windows manufactured by Eagle Windows & Doors as specified in Section 08550 where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Alternate number 2a: Provide additional windows as indicated on the Drawings manufactured by Eagle Windows & Doors in standard color as specified in Section 08550. Provide exterior and interior wood trim as of specified in Section 06200 for the new windows. 3. Alternate number 2b: Provide additional windows as indicated on the Drawings manufactured by Marvin Windows in standard color as specified in Alternatives 01230-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01210 ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Work performed on an allowance basis shall be included in the Base Bid - Stipulated Sum or in a Bid Alternate as specified. Whenever the actual cost is more than or less than the allowance,the Contract shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. Procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders are included in Article 7 of the General Conditions. 1. Except as otherwise specified herein, or under individual specification Sections,the allowance shall include the cost of all materials and equipment required, delivered and installed, less any applicable trade discount and plus all applicable taxes. B. Cash allowance provisions: 1. Costs included in cash allowances: Cost of product to General Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts; delivered to site and applicable taxes. 2. Architect responsibilities: a. Consult with General Contractor in consideration and selection of products and suppliers. b. Select products in consultation with Owner, and inform General Contractor of decision. c. Prepare Change Order. 3. General Contractor Responsibilities: a. Assist Architect in selection of products and suppliers. b. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations. c. On notification of selection by Architect execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. d. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and samples. Arrange for delivery. e. Promptly inspect Products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. 4. Funds will be drawn from Cash Allowances only by Change Order. 1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES DESCRIPTION A. CASH ALLOWANCE 1 - Furnishing and installing [�], for the stipulated sum of$ 00,000, for PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section X11► Allowances 01210-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations !! Northampton, Massachusetts 3. Parking on lawn areas is prohibited. #!t 4. Designated areas adjacent to site will be restricted to Owner's use only. C. Keep all public roads and walks, and access drive to facility clear of debris caused by this Work during building operations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section Summary 01100-3 3/7/01 am Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ND Northampton, Massachusetts 1.4 WORK BY OWNER so A. Related work under separate agreements:The Owner will award a separate contract which will commence prior to or during the work of this Contract; which in general includes: 1. Asbestos materials abatement(except for abatement work incidental to roofing work). 2. Testing Laboratory Services B. Owner Furnished -Contractor Installed (OFCI) Products: The Contractor shall install the following Owner furnished items. 1. Kitchen appliances. 2. Signage. 3. Locksets and cylinders. 4. Toilet Accessories: a. Lavatory soap dispenser. b. Paper towel dispenser. 5. Miscellaneous accessories: a. Room numbers. b. Closet mirrors. + c. Wardrobe hooks. C. Owner Furnished and Installed (OF[) Products: The Contractor has coordinating responsibility for the following work, provided by others under separate agreement(s)with the Owner: 1. Furnishings and equipment, artwork, loose case goods and similar items. 1.5 USE OF SITE A. Use of, and access to, site is subject to special requirements of the Owner, as directed. 1. Prior to beginning the Work of this Contract, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and the Architect to determine procedures regarding access and use of the site, locations and access to staging and storage areas, tree protection, temporary barriers and fencing, and any special site conditions or restrictions regarding the use of the site areas surrounding the construction. 2. Hours of construction, 7:30 AM to 4:30 PM local time, Monday to Friday. Provisions for working hours other than those specified, must be pre- arranged with the Owner. 3. Security: Owner access must be permitted at all times in all construction areas, for purposes of security. B. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated on the Drawings. Portions of the site and building beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. 1. Use of on-site areas for storage of materials must be pre-arranged with Owner. Schedule deliveries to minimize requirements for storage of materials. w 2. Some parking will be available on site for Contractor's use for"lay-down" and "critical"vehicles only. All other parking will be the Contractor's responsibility. Summary 01100-2 .w 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 01100 SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project description. B. Definitions—Owner and Architect. ! " C. Work by Owner. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 40 A. Work covered by Contract Documents: The Project is a complete renovation of the existing builidng; including major mechanical pluming,fire protection and electrical work. Work includes new interior finishes, improved fire separation construction, egress stairs and alarms.. Alternates for additional windows and roofing are included in Section 01230. 1. Completeness: The Work shall be as shown on the Drawings and be complete in every respect and in conformance with all applicable requirements of the governing laws and codes. B. Contract time: The Contractor may begin on-site work on, or after receipt of a written Notice to Proceed, or suitable Letter of Intent. After commencement of work, the Contractor shall pursue the Work continuously and with diligence, and bring the Project to Substantial Completion prior to August 24, 2001. 1. Substantial completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.This includes any and all permits required by governmental agencies necessary for occupancy and use. 1.3 DEFINITIONS-OWNER AND ARCHITECT A. Wherever the term "Owner" is used in this specification, it refers to: The Trustee's of The Smith College c/o Physical Plant ob 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01063 1. All papers required to be delivered to the Owner shall, unless otherwise specified in writing to the contrary, be delivered to the office of the Architect: B. Wherever the term "Architect" or"Architect/Engineer"is used in the Contract Documents, it refers to: R.E. Dinneen Architects & Planners, Inc. 160 N. Washington Street Boston, Massachusetts 02114 Summary 01100-1 3/7/01 Appendix B.7 Smith College Project Monthly Contract Accident Summary Contract: Contractor: Report Period: This Month Year to Date Project to Date (mm/dd to mm/dd) ' (mm/dd to mm/dd) (mm/dd to mm/dd) to to to Hours Worked First Aid Cases OSHA '! Recordables Lost Time Cases Days Lost Comments/ Explanations: (Any OSHA Recordables this month should be listed in this section with worker name, employer, date of accident,and nature of injury.Attach separate sheet as needed.) 1 ! ' Prepared by: Date: Contractor Superintendent: Date: Mail or Fax to the OC/P Administrator by the 5 day of each month. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 7 am (Appendix B.6) g. Smith College Project OCIP Notification / Contact List Summary Smith College Project Representative: The Contractor Representative: Contractor Project Manager: Contractor Safety Representative: Acordia Safety Auditor: Acordia OCIP Administrator: Smith College Project Construction Master Safety , Program Guidelines Manual 6 (Appendix B.5) OSHA 200 Log — Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses Each Contractor is required to maintain an OSHA 200 Form -The OSHA Log. The form can be obtained at a local OSHA office or from the Acordia Safety Auditor. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 5 .. (Appendix BA) Contractor First Aid Log 00 All First-Aid Treatment should be logged by the care provider. The form should be maintained on site for the duration of the Contract. Date Injured Worker Treatment Provider Signature Additional copies of this form should be made as necessary. Note,all injuries to non-workers should be reported to the Contractor Safety Representative. way Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 4 (Appendix B.3) Weekly Toolbox Meeting Attendance Roster Name (print) Signature Craft w Signatures should be continued on back page and/or additional page(s). Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 3 .. (Appendix B.3) .* Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda Smith College Project Date Contract Contractor Topics Discussed: 1. Upcoming work, safety hazards, safety controls. 2. Safety related Incidents since last meeting. 3. Observed Safety non-compliance issues. 4. Actions Taken/Planned as a result of this meeting. Foreman's Signature Safety Representative's Signature. Copies of completed forms, with attendees signatures should be forwarded to the Safety Auditor Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 2 (Appendix B.2) Contractor Safety Survey Checklist A Contract Safety Checklist will be available from the Acordia Safety Auditor. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 1 (Appendix 13.1 Smith College Project— Supervisors Accident Investigation Report Contract: Date of Report: Contractor: Incident date/time: Weather Conditions: Incident Location (specific): Incident Type (Circle): Worker injury Non-worker injury Near miss incident Property damage Fire Explosion Other Describe Injury (Injury/Illness type, body parts affected): Injured Person / Property Owner: Address/Phone: Description of Incident: (Brief factual description of incident. Use Separate sheet if necessary.): Incident Causes: (Immediate, Contributory,Root) Corrective Action(s): Witnesses (Name, Address, Phone): Police Report filed? Y / N Photos taken? Y / N OSHA or other Agency involved?: Foreman / Supervisor: Date: Project Manager / Superintendent: Date: The entire form should be completed and additional paper used as necessary. Smith College 4p Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 1 specialized equipment, or jackhammers be utilized? Will explosives be stored on site, or transported on the site? Will licensed blasters be used? What is the company and blasters' experience? Explain how the public will be warned and informed that blasting will be conducted in the area. When blasting operations are being conducted, consideration should be given to damage created by flyrock, vibration, or air blast. Precautions taken to lessen the possibility of damage due to these causes should be commented upon in description. Explain the extent to which these precautions are to be taken. If pre-construction surveys are being conducted, explain the detail that will be involved. Will an outside blasting consultant be used? Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 23 .. safeguards to be taken. If any specialized equipment is to be installed, describe this equipment and the operations required putting it into place. Hazards involved with plumbing and mechanical type work come from various operations; such as, welding and cutting, heavy material handling, work in tight or close quarters, and work with high pressures involved with testing and startup of plumbing or mechanical systems. Steam Fitting: Steam fitting operations have hazards similar to plumbing operations with the difference being that the piping will carry steam. Pressures and temperatures within this piping can be quite high and, therefore, safeguards should be taken to protect workers from these hazards. When commenting upon steam fitting operations, describe the operations to be conducted and the safeguards to be used. Painting: Painting operations can create a number of hazards and/or exposures on a job. Over spray from painting operations should be controlled to present damage to adjacent exposures (cars, buildings,pedestrians) and adjacent work areas. Paint fumes should be properly exhausted and/or the workers should wear proper respiratory protection when paints contain chemicals, which can be dangerous when inhaled. This is particularly important when working with lead based paints as on bridge painting operations. Paint flammability should be considered so that appropriate safeguards and fire prevention measures can be taken. Be sure to describe any on- site storage of any flammable paints. Describe work at heights and fall protection concerns and controls. Drywall/Plastering: Explain how materials will be brought to the site (crane, material hoist, manually). ' Plaster may be pumped and sprayed on. Can floors be overloaded with construction materials? For powder actuated tools, have workers been trained and certified? (Documentation should be on site) Will employees use eye, hearing, and respiratory protection? Explain any unusual scaffolds required. Street & Highway: This may cover excavation, drainage operations, or bridgework as well as paving. Street and highway operations pose a variety of hazards and exposures. Areas, „ which should be emphasized, are traffic control procedures, incidental bridgework, underground utilities, and adjacent exposures. If traffic will be rerouted, explain signing, barricades, after hours warning lights, and maintenance of traffic control devices. Review equipment security procedures to be used to control theft and vandalism. Blasting: OSHA 1926.900-914 Give an estimate of the volume of rock, in cubic years, to be blasted. Also describe adjacent structures. Can alternate methods of rock removal such as ripping, use of .. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 22 Roofing: OSHA 1926.500 Describe the type of roofing system to be installed. Tell what precautions will be used to safeguard roofing operations. Hazards normally associated with roofing operations include falls from heights,bums from hot materials (hot asphalt), fumes from coal tar pitch, and fire potential from asphalt heating equipment. Describe safeguards. Workers should be properly clothed for work on roofs, particularly during summer months. Roofing operations can create injury and property damage from windblown or dropped debris, water leakage, or splatter from roofing materials. Describe the safeguards to be taken in these areas. Determine method for lifting materials to roof level. If membrane roof, determine types of solvent, cleaners, and cements to be used. Describe controls of hazards associated with these items. Electrical: OSHA 1926.400-405 Explain what electrical work will be taking place, who will be performing this work, and what safeguards will be taken. Tell if any "hot work" will be performed or if tie-ins will be made to existing systems. Comment upon any work, which may be conducted on or around electrical utilities. Describe the work to be performed and the safeguards to be taken. Will a utilities locator service be used(i.e., DIGSAFE)be notified? If temporary wiring is involved, another area to consider is the type of grounding program to be utilized on the project. Describe how if ground fault protection will be implemented on site. What type of inspection/testing of GFI's and installations will be conducted? What testing will be done of installations, and what records will be maintained? ' Describe energizing procedures of buildings and/or processes. What controls will be in place to protect workers from the release of hazardous energy? (Lockout/Tagout) HVAC (Heating, Ventilating,Air Conditioning): Work of this nature normally involved work with sheet metal duct sections which can be quite large at times. Fiberglass ductwork is also used. Many hazards are involved with this type of work but the most prevalent are cuts from sharp edges; material handling; problems due to heavy and bulky materials; and foreign body in eye accidents from metal shavings created by cutting, drilling, or screwing into duct sections. What testing will be done of installations and what records will be maintained? Will hoisting units to the roof involve special rigging considerations? Plumbing: Describe any plumbing or mechanical work which will be performed and the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 21 No stripping of forms. Explain how forming materials will be stored before and after use. Tell if any form releasing agents are being used and what precautions are being taken to reduce splatter or ignition of combustible agents. Often, concrete forming operations have a history of poor housekeeping. This is caused by the presence of scrap lumber, nails, fasteners, excess concrete splatter, and other materials. How will these issues be controlled. Describe fire prevention/protection and fall protection issues. Concrete Placement: OSHA 1926.700 702 Describe how the concrete will be placed (bucket, pump, conveyor, buggy). Tell of precautions to be used to reduce concrete splatter. This is particularly important on high rise construction. Describe safeguards to be taken to protect workers who are placing concrete. For columns,piers, and building perimeters, how will fall exposure be controlled? Explain temporary heating methods and controls for cold weather pouring operations. Carpentry: Explain the type of carpentry work to be performed. Tell of any unusual carpentry operations to be conducted, and operations which may present a serious hazard to workers; (e.g., working at heights). Explain proposed safeguards to protect workers "' from these hazards. Major hazards associated with carpentry operations include housekeeping machinery, and material handling. Areas where work is being performed and carpentry shop areas should be kept clear of scrap lumber, sawdust, and debris. Debris should be removed on a scheduled basis. Masonry: Tell type of masonry to be used (HCB,brick). Consider access of scaffolds, hoists, and material handling equipment at working levels above ground level. Describe overhead protection for areas below where work is being performed. Tell how free standing masonry walls will be braced against winds. Hazards normally associated with masonry operations are falling debris and collapse of unbraced walls during construction. Structural Steel: OSHA 1926.750-752, 1926.550 Outline work to be done, and describe hoisting equipment to be used and method to bring steel to site. Will there be any offsite storage of materials? Describe how workers will be protected from falls during steel erection. Tell what protective measures will be taken to protect surrounding exposures from hazards associated with steel erection; (e.g., planking to protect surrounding buildings/persons from accidentally dropped members/tools/materials). What precautions will be taken to contain sparks and slag from welding operations. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 20 Contractor/Subcontractor knows what they are drilling into. When shoring is used, will movement (horizontal, vertical, or rotational) of the shoring system be monitored. This is particularly important when there are adjacent exposures that could be affected by soil movement. If ground water may build up behind shoring, has the shoring been designed for this load? Pile Driving: OSHA 1926.603 Describe the type of piles and either the number of piles or the linear feet of piles to be driven. Describe the method in which they will be driven. How will piles be brought to the site? Will there be a designated lay-down area? State the depth to which they will be driven. What is the distance to nearby ., structures? Describe measures to be used to control impact of vibration on surrounding exposures and effect of noise on workers. Are pre-construction surveys required? Underpinning: Explain the type of structure to be supported and the method by which it is supported normally. Explain the type of underpinning to be used and its method of installation. Describe any problems anticipated. Who designed the underpinning and what is their experience? Are confined space issues expected? Grading: Grading is normally considered to be the light (relatively) movement of soil around a given site. Cuts and fills may only be a couple of feet in depth. For greater depths, the work would be classified as excavation. Hauling of any quantity of soil or rock on to or away from the site would also make the work fall into the excavation category. A lawn or parking area might be graded while a basement would be excavated. Will structures and/or adjacent vehicles be at risk of damage? How will the public be kept from work areas during operations? Caissons: OSHA 1926.801 Will these be vertical shafts that are hand dug or drilled, or will these be of the pneumatic type used on large bridge foundations? To what depth will the caisson go? Any potential for explosive or toxic gases? Will personnel or inspectors have to go into the caissons? If shaft caissons have to be belled out at the bottoms, will it be done mechanically or by hand? Explain how workers will be protected from soil collapse. Describe air monitoring plans and planned rescue procedures. Also describe perimeter fall protection. If the caissons involve compressed air, give details. Concrete Form Work: OSHA 1926.700-702 Describe the type of forming system to be used; such as,built in place, flying forms, pre-engineered panel forms, slip forms, or pan forms. Determine the schedule for forming,placement of reinforcing steel, concrete pouring, and Smith College 0P Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 19 an .w Work From Heights: OSHA 1926.500 Describe work and areas from which workers will be exposed to fall hazards. Identify methods of fall protection including planned controlled access zones and Fall Protection Plans. Any work requiring documented Fall Protection Plans (OSHA 1926.502) should not commence without submittal of the Plan to Safety Auditor for review. Also discuss specific training as required in OSHA 1926.503. Body belts will not be an acceptable means of fall protection on the Smith College Project. Scaffolding: OSHA 1926.450 Describe scaffolding to be used on the project. Who will erect/dismantle and what type of fall protection will be used. Is the scaffolding owned by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or rented/leased? Who will inspect and maintain the scaffolding at what intervals? Who will be allowed to use the scaffolding? Excavation: OSHA 1926.650-653 Explain the excavation work involved, including depth of excavation and type of material to be excavated. Will a utilities locator service be used (ie, DIGSAFE)be notified? Explain how the material will be excavated. Will material be hauled off site or brought in from off site? If de-watering is to be performed, explain method or system to be used and planned safeguards. Will support of excavation be specially designed? By whom? Who will maintain responsibility of the competent person? Will excavations be covered during off- hours. What are the expected fall hazards associated with the excavations? Will areas have perimeter protection? Do you expect environmental hazards such as hazardous materials and/or air quality issues? How will these be addressed? Another item to consider during excavation is the surrounding exposures. Buildings, structures and utilities may all be subject to vibration from excavation operations or to soil subsidence due to de-watering or soil slope failure. If the possibility of these hazards exists,pre-construction surveys should be considered. If shoring or de-watering will be involved, a program for monitoring movement of the shoring system of surrounding buildings should be implemented. Another area to consider is silt and mud runoff from the project. Identify measures taken (silt settling ponds, woven plastic fabric fences, etc.) used to contain silt runoff. Excavation Shoring: OSHA 1926.650-653 Describe the method of shoring to be utilized. Who designed it? State whether there will be any wales, cross bracing, rakers, or tie backs. (A simple sketch may be helpful.) If tie backs are used, describe the material into which they are being anchored. One caution regarding tie backs, check to be sure the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 18 C. Specific Operations Planning For each of the following operations, identify which will be self-performed by the Contractor, and which will be subcontracted. In addition describe, the methods, anticipated safety and health concerns (hazards), and controls to be used when performing the operations. In areas where specific information is unknown, describe when the expected information will become available and plans to be followed in forwarding the information to the Safety Auditor prior to initiation of the involved phase(s). For topics listed below that are not applicable to the Contract, the topic should be listed with an N/A designation. To assist in determining related OSHA requirements, some general section reference numbers have been given under listed operations. ANSI, state, local, and ru manufacturers (equipment, materials) should also be consulted for appropriate hazard control methods also. Land Clearing: OSHA 1926.604 Involves the removal of trees and brush. Grubbing also includes removal of stumps. Describe the size of the area to be cleared, site conditions, and methods which will be used to clear and dispose of materials. No open fires will be permitted without specific approval from the local Fire Department, other agencies having jurisdiction, and the Safety Auditor . How will materials be removed from the site and how often? Wrecking/Demolition: OSHA 1926.850-860 Describe any wrecking/demolition operations which may be performed. Describe the type of demolition to be done (salvage, use of heavy equipment, wrecking ball or blasting). Remember that wrecking/demolition is a very hazardous operation. Hazards such as collapse, falling objects,poor housekeeping, sharp objects, and possible use of explosives can all exist at one time. Demolition should be well planned before operations begin. This planning should include procedures for searching the structure prior to beginning demolition to clear the area of vagrants, children, or other unauthorized personnel. One particular area of concern is the demolition of pre-stressed or post-tensioned concrete structures. When demolishing'structures of this type, special attention should be given to tendons or steel stands under stress. Remember that wrecking/demolition operations not only occur during the demolition of an entire structure but also during renovation, remodeling, and addition work. The method for transporting rubble from the site should be described. Where is the debris disposed of? Will asbestos lead abatement be involved? Describe fire prevention/protection plans. Has the wrecking plan been reviewed by a qualified person, and the necessary regulatory officials, if required, to evaluate the collapse exposure. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 17 Appendix A Contract Safety Planning Guide In developing a site specific construction safety and health plan, it is important that a systematic approach be taken to identify and evaluate potential hazards with each phase of the construction process. With potential hazards identified,plans can be developed to control expected hazards, and sometimes eliminate them altogether. As described in Section 1.2.2 of the Guidelines, Contractors are required to identify operations to be performed under the Contract. The following outline shall be used as a template by the Contractor in organizing the site-specific description of Contract operations, expected hazards, and planned controls on the Smith College Project. Each phase of the work should be described in detail with special attention given to expected hazards and controls. All applicable topics should be discussed in brief narrative form. Non-applicable topics should be listed and noted with "N/A". A. General Contract Information I. Give contract price, start date, completion date, and overall scope of the Contract, and the expected level of workforce that is anticipated. Attach a job progress schedule illustrating a rough sequence of the primary phases and operations of the contract II. Describe any significant known structural or unusual hazards as well as any pre-construction surveys that have been or will be conducted . Is groundwater expected to be a concern? ., III. What site security precautions will be taken for the term of the contract. Will the site have perimeter fencing? How will the public be separated from the work area? How will equipment and materials be protected from use by trespassers? Will alarms/guards be used? Include any on-shift and off-shift activity. Are multiple work shifts anticipated? Be sure to discuss weekend night security and protection. B. Pre-Construction Surveys Pre-construction surveys are a method used to document the conditions of adjacent facilities prior to construction so that, in the event of a liability claim for damaged facilities, it will be possible to determine if damage has occurred and the extent of it. Typical construction operations that may lead to losses include blasting,pile- driving, excavating, de-watering adjacent to structures, operation of heavy equipment, and underpinning. Will any pre-construction surveys be conducted for this contract? Describe. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 16 7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases When a Contractor or Subcontractor employee is referred to a physician or medical facility for treatment of an occupational injury/illness, the following forms should be completed and copies forwarded to the OCIP Coordinator : Worker's Compensation Form (First Report of Injury) -This form should be forwarded immediately to the OCIP Administrator and must be completely filled out. Instructions for completing necessary insurance forms will be provided by the OCIP Coordinator . Supervisor's Incident Investigation Report- This form shall be completed by the injured/ill employee's Supervisor immediately upon report of an occupational injury/illness that requires treatment by a physician. Worker's Description of Incident - This should be completed by the worker in his/her handwriting, describing the circumstances and events leading to and +! including the cause of, the injury or illness. This document must be signed and dated by the employee. 7.6 OSHA 200 Log- Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses OSHA requires that each employer maintain records of occupational injuries and illnesses. This log and summary shall be maintained by each Contractor and Subcontractor at their work sites and shall be provided to the Safety Auditor upon request. In addition, OSHA requires that these forms be posted, in an area available to employees, for the month of February each year. 7.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary The Contractor shall complete and submit the Smith College Monthly Contract Accident Summary as shown in Appendix B.7. Data on the report should include information for the Contractor and all Subcontractors. The report shall be submitted to the Safety Auditor no later than 5 days after the month summarized. For months with no accidents, a completed report with zeros in the appropriate columns is required. Assistance in completing this report is available from the Safety Auditor. 7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies In addition to audits conducted by the Safety Auditor and Insurance Representatives, Contractor activities are subject to periodic inspection by OSHA and other safety and health regulatory agencies. Upon notification of an on- site inspection,the inspector should be directed to the Safety Representative to discuss the purpose and objectives of the visit. The Safety Representative should immediately notify the Owner, Construction Manager, and the Safety Auditor to determine if their presence is necessary. The Safety Representative shall document all inspection activities from inception to completion and will take photos where appropriate. The Contractor will forward, to the Safety Auditor copies of any and all inspection reports and/or citations by regulatory agencies. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 15 documentation of all adverse safety and health incidents resulting from activities that occur on the work site. 7.2 Notification The following incidents require notification to the Owner and the Safety Auditor by the most rapid means available: • Fatalities • OSHA Recordable Injuries (Includes all lost time injuries) .� • General public injuries requiring medical attention • Property Damage over$1000 • All fires and explosions �*+ 7.3 Investigation Investigation of workplace incidents, including injury, illness, property damage,and significant near-misses, is a key to improving safety and health programs. Investigation is different from reporting in that it is an effort to determine incident causes through analysis of conditions, witness accounts, and other facts surrounding specific happenings. Investigation of the following shall be conducted to determine immediate, " contributing, and root causes. The Plan should specify a system for preventing recurrence of investigated incidents. All investigations must be conducted by appropriate supervisory personnel and must be documented on the Contractor's Incident Investigation Report (Appendix B.1) or similar document (approved by Safety Auditor). • All incidents other than non-OSHA recordable injuries/illnesses and property damage under$1000 shall be investigated thoroughly to determine the circumstances, nature, and extent of injuries, illnesses, or property damage. .r • All incidents involving medical attention to the general public shall also be thoroughly investigated to determine the circumstances, nature, and extent of injuries, illnesses, or property damage. • All other potentially serious incidents, including near misses, shall be investigated to identify their circumstances, causes, and corrective actions. 7.4 Documentation and Reporting All incidents requiring investigation will require a preliminary written report to the Safety Auditor by the end of the following work day and a final report within 5 working days. Documentation of all other incidents, including first-aid, will be maintained on file at the Contractor's office and be available for review by the Safety Auditor at any time. All completed "First Report of Injury" forms will be ,■,, sent to the OCIP Coordinator by the end of the following day of notification of injury. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety , Program Guidelines Manual 14 personnel should be encouraged to be current first aid and CPR card holders. 6.3 Reporting All on-site workers, whether employed by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, shall be instructed to report all injuries, no matter how minor, to their supervisor. The supervisor shall then notify the Safety Representative. Treatment shall be rendered by qualified persons and the incident recorded on the ,_ ► Contractor's First Aid Log. A monthly summary of First Aid incidents is required as described in section 7.7 of the Guidelines. 6.4 Transportation The Contractor shall provide transportation for employees needing medical treatment for work-related injury or illness on their initial visit to the doctor/medical facility. The Plan shall indicate what doctor or medical facility the Contractor plans to utilize. For emergency transportation,the local ambulance service should be used for the emergency transportation of injured or ill employees. The Plan shall designate who will be responsible for notifying the ambulance and providing information describing the exact location of the injured employee. The Plan shall also provide a system for assigning responsibility for emergency notification in the absence of designated persons. 6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers The Plan shall identify the following telephone numbers which shall be conspicuously posted at the work site and provided in the Contractor's site telephone book. In addition active phone service or equal communication system must be in place at all times during the operations. • Ambulance • Fire Department • Police • Hospitals (Emergency Room) • Poison Control Center • Pollution, Toxic Chemical and Oil Spill Response • Owner • Safety Auditor The list shall be reviewed at least quarterly and updated as necessary. 7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping 7.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall establish procedures for notification, investigation, report, and Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual U am hazard warnings. • A training program regarding hazards of substances that are used in the workplace and the protective measures that must be taken by the employee or any other persons potentially exposed to the hazardous substances. 5.4 Hazard Communication Training The Contractor shall ensure that each employee prior to working with, or being , potentially exposed to, hazardous substances receives initial training on the HCP and the safe use of these hazardous substances. Additional training must be provided to employees whenever new substances are introduced to the workplace. In addition, the training program must include the following: • Methods that can be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous substance in the work area. These methods include: monitoring, automatic alarms, visual appearance or odor of hazardous substances when being released, etc. " • The physical and health hazards of the substances in the work area. • Examples of protective measures, including specific procedures the Contractor has implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous substances (e.g., appropriate work practices, emergency p rocedures and personal protective equipment) to be used. • The details of the HCP developed by the employer shall include an explanation of the labeling system and how to use the MSDS for exposure prevention and emergency response. 5.5 Record Keeping Permanent records shall be maintained by the Contractor, describing all HCP training sessions. Persons conducting the training shall verify attendance by circulating an attendance sheet. 6. First Aid and Medical Services 6.1 Purpose and Scope .. The Plan shall include written procedures for providing first aid treatment, medical services, and transportation of workers who incur occupational injuries or illnesses at the work sites. 6.2 Staffing The Plan shall describe how the Contractor will ensure that first-aid is readily available to all Contractor and Subcontractor employees during all work shifts. Names and qualifications of designated First-Aid/CPR responders shall be included in the Plan and posted on site to facilitate quick response. All supervisory ., Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 12 • Safe Work Areas • Safe Work Practices • Emergency Response • Accident Investigation 00 • Safety Inspection • Safety Training • Fire Prevention and Protection 40 • Enforcement • Equipment Safety • Safety Equipment Use and Maintenance 4.2.6 Documentation Retention All safety meeting and training shall be documented with records maintained by the Contractor and retained on-site for the duration of the Contract. 5. Hazard Communication 5.1 Purpose and Scope In order to protect workers who may use or be exposed to hazardous substances, the ! " Plan shall include a written Hazard Communication Program. 5.2 Responsibilities The Contractor shall ensure that each worker is informed of the Hazard Communication Program including the required list of hazardous substances, and the associated Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that hazardous substances and/or their containers in the workplace are marked with the identity of their contents. The means of identification must provide warnings appropriate for employee protection. The Contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a system that will ensure that employees of any other contractors, visitors or vendors who are exposed to its hazardous substances are informed of the hazards of those substances. 5.3 Hazard Communication Program ("HCP") The Contractor shall ensure that a written HCP is developed and that it contains the following elements: • The name of the program coordinator. • A formal written system that ensures that MSDSs are obtained and made readily accessible to all employees, including lower tier Subcontractor personnel, on each shift. In the event of an emergency, MSDSs shall be made available on an immediate basis. • A labeling program that ensures that containers of hazardous substances in the workplace are properly labeled with the name of the substance and any applicable Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 11 S" .�r prevention of unsafe acts and conditions. All plans shall be site specific. 4.2 Training Elements The Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following elements: w 4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation Prior to entering the work area for the first time, each on-site employee of the Contractor and any Subcontractor shall receive a safety and health orientation, which shall provide basic information regarding the Plan, OSHA Standards, emergency procedures, and applicable Contract rules and procedures. Additional safety and health instructions shall be required for the performance of hazardous or unfamiliar tasks. Documentation of this and all training shall be kept on site for the duration of the Contract. 4.2.2 Weekly Tool Box Safety Meetings The Contractor is required to ensure each on-site worker, whether employed by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, attends a weekly"Tool Box Safety Meeting". Subject material will be furnished by the Contractor and shall follow the "Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" and be documented. A member of the Contractor's supervisory staff, above the level of the foreman, should attend each Tool Box Safety Meeting and attendance documentation shall be recorded on copies of the "Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" form. Copies of completed forms should be sent to the Safety Auditor each week. 4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings Contractor Safety Meetings shall be conducted at least weekly and may be in conjunction with other meetings. The Contractor and Subcontractor supervisory personnel and the Safety Representative will be required to attend. A written agenda shall be provided and minutes kept on actions taken. An attendance sheet should be signed by those present and retained by the Contractor. 4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training Hazard Communication Training shall be conducted prior to employees being subjected to an exposure to, or use of, a known hazardous substance. Specific requirements of this training are described in section 5.4 of these Guidelines. 4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors Contractor shall design and implement a program to orient supervisors on their roles in the safety program. This orientation, which shall be documented, will ft outline his/her duties and responsibilities for safety and health in daily work activities. At a minimum, this orientation will address their responsibilities and procedures for the following: no • Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines • Contractor Safety and Health Plan .w Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 10 soils tracking, and other debris associated with the Construction operations. The Plan should also describe methods of control for the identified hazards, including vehicle wheel-washes, wet-down methods, debris nets, covered debris containers, and rodent control methods. 3. Emergency Procedures 3.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall include emergency procedures for the protection of all persons on site (including the general public, vendors, visitors, and employees of other + contractors), equipment, structures, and materials on the Project. 3.2 Site Specific Procedures Site- specific emergency procedures shall be developed and implemented for,but not limited to, the following: • Fire • General evacuation of the worksite. • Confined space rescue. •Personal injury. • Workplace violence. •Explosion. •Bomb threats. •Release of hazardous substances. • Severe weather. •Public demonstrations. • Interruption of public utilities. The Plan should discuss what procedures are in place for emergency situations and how the procedures are continually communicated to workers. The Plan should discuss methods of communication and documentation of emergency events as well as responsibility chains of command. The Plan should identify responsible personnel by name and title where possible. All emergency phone numbers should be conspicuously posted at the work site and employees should be aware in their responsibilities. Should a serious accident or emergency occur, the Contractor shall contact the Owner immediately upon securing the required emergency assistance. If an emergency requires the presence of an ambulance,the Fire Department or Police, the Contractor shall secure the 40 appropriate service and then notify the Owner, and the Safety Auditor . 4. Safety and Health Training 4.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall establish and implement programs for the education and training of employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors in the recognition, avoidance, and Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 9 Aw 4W Respiratory Protection- when respirators are necessary, the Contractor shall have a respiratory program that complies with OSHA 1926.103 (Revised 1998). Employees shall be fitted for and instructed in the proper use of respirators that will afford them the maximum protection for the environmental hazard in which they are working. Copies of this program shall be given to the Safety Auditor. The program shall contain the reason for and the conditions under which such equipment shall be worn and discuss methods of enforcement and disciplinary w actions for non-compliant workers. 2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures The Plan shall include effective controls to prevent workplace injury, illness, and property damage in special hazardous work environments. Specific procedures shall address supervisory control over hazard recognition, isolation, testing, evacuation, and monitoring. Detailed emergency procedures shall identify available emergency equipment and personnel responsible for rescue operations. The Plan shall also provide for the development and implementation of hazardous work permit procedures. These special permits shall be issued by the Contractor and retained at the project site for the duration of the contract. They will include written Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) to be completed and approved prior to the issuance of permits. The Safety Auditor may request a written Job Hazard Analysis, any time during the Contract, for operations expected to, or shown to involve hazardous operations. Examples of Special Hazardous work environments include, but are not limited to: ma • Confined Spaces • Maintenance of Energized Equipment (Lockout/Tagout) • Critical Crane/Hoist Lifts • Burning, Welding, Grinding • Excavations • Work from Heights • Hazardous Materials Handling • Building Demolition The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in the development of Special Hazardous Work Procedures during the course of the contract. 2.9 University Community Public Protection The Plan should specifically identify hazards to be anticipated by visitors, vendors, trespassers, and the general public and describe actions planned to control these hazards. 2.10 Dust/Debris Control Plan The Plan should outline hazards/concerns to be expected through creation of dust, Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 8 Project or to use, possess, conceal, transport,promote or sell any of the above substances will be grounds for disciplinary action, up to and including termination from employment on said project. In support of this policy, the Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to maintain an effective employee substance abuse program. The Contractor is also responsible for reporting to the Owner, via the Safety Auditor, any incidents in violation of the substance abuse program and the disposition of the violation. The Contractor shall submit to periodic audits by the Owner or its Designee of the Contractor's substance abuse program. 2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items The Owner prohibits the use, possession, concealment, transportation,promotion or sale of the following controlled items at the jobsite: • Firearms,weapons, and ammunition- except when authorized for security reasons. • Unauthorized explosives including fireworks. 40 • Stolen property or contraband. 2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions The Plan shall include procedures for enforcement of safety rules. The Safety Representative shall continually monitor the construction safety performance of the Contractor and all Subcontractors. Should the Contractor or a Subcontractor continually be in non-compliance with Safety and Health requirements of their Plan,work operations should be ordered to be stopped by the Safety Representative (at the Contractor's expense), until all concerns are abated. Persistent non-compliance may result in termination of the Contract. 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment The Plan shall include a written personal protective equipment program. The program shall address,but is not limited to the following: Hard Hats -mandatory at all work sites, at all times. Hearing Protection -mandatory in all operations creating noise above 85 DBA; Eye Protection-mandatory in all situations where potential eye injury exists. Specifically required when welding/burning/cutting, performing tasks near activity producing flying debris (including dusts) and when handling chemicals; Safety Harnesses - shall meet ANSI Standards and be worn by employees who are exposed to any fall exposure six feet (6) or more in height that cannot be properly guarded with rails or other means, body belts will not be an acceptable method of fall protection; Footwear- shall be sturdy and made of leather; Shirts - only those with sleeves are allowed, no tank tops or mesh shirts; Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 7 NOTE: No requested advice from the representatives of the OCIP Administrator, the ,w Safety Auditor, Project Architects, Engineers, the Owner, or Insurance Carrier shall in any way relieve, alter, change or amend any of the Contractor's expressed, implied or inherent legal and/or contractual obligations. Furthermore, the authority vested in �w the Owner and its designated representatives, including the OCIP Administrator and the Safety Auditor, to act on, or notify the Contractor with respect to, safety matters, shall not in any way reduce the Contractor's responsibility for safety and accident prevention 2. Hazard Control ^ 2.1 Purpose and Scope The Contractor shall establish controls for the recognition and elimination of unsafe �+ practices by employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors, and shall maintain safe physical conditions for all persons at the work site. 2.2 Supervisory Control Continued safety monitoring of each Contract work area will be accomplished by the Contractor's supervisors and Safety Representative. The Contractor's supervisors shall conduct daily surveys of operations to detect any potential sources of injury or property damage. A written record of the daily surveys shall be kept and shall include corrective actions for corrected deficiencies. Systems shall be in place for developing, implementing, and tracking corrective actions. 2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification A system shall be in place by which Contractor's employees are able to notify their supervisors and the Safety Representative immediately of the existence of any hazards at the worksite. This system shall include provisions for timely corrective actions and for providing feedback to employees. 2.4 Substance Abuse Policy A policy shall be in place for the establishment and maintenance of a safe and efficient work environment for all personnel, free from the effects of alcohol, illegal drugs, and other controlled substances. The Contractor's policy shall specifically prohibit the use, possession, concealment, „ transportation, promotion, or sale of any of the following: • Alcoholic beverages. • Marijuana and other illegal drugs, look-alikes and designer drugs. • Drug paraphernalia. • Controlled substances such as medications when usage is abused or when the ,■, substance is possessed without proper prescription labeling. To be under the influence of any of the above substances while working on the .� Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 6 ill duties, the Owner reserves the right to request additional site safety management assistance, including the appointment of another full-time, site dedicated, qualified safety professional. The Safety Representative's duties shall include,but are not limited to: • Conducting and documenting at least daily, safety and health inspections of the Contractor's site. • Ensuring Subcontractor compliance to all applicable safety and health requirements of the Guidelines and the Plan. • Verifying and documenting safety and health orientations for employees, visitors, and vendors. • Monitoring employee compliance with applicable safety and health requirements. • Coordinating workplace injury, illness, and property damage reports. • Training and advising personnel on safety and health regulations, inspections, and activities. •Providing information to employees regarding emergency response duties and procedures. • Attending and participating in project safety and toolbox meetings. •Verifying and documenting safety and health meetings. • Maintaining the Contractor's Safety Bulletin Board. •Posting safety notices, bulletins, and emergency telephone numbers in designated areas. • Interpreting safety and health requirements for the Contractor. 1.2.5 Safety Auditor The Safety Auditor,hired by the OCIP Administrator to assist the Owner in assuring that the Contractor implements its safety program, will monitor compliance with applicable safety and health regulations including Federal, State, and local standards and the Plan. The Safety Auditor's duties shall include: •Reviewing the submitted Plan for compliance to the Guidelines. •Reporting unsafe working conditions, or safety hazard exposures, when observed,*to the Safety Representative or Contractor management. • When deemed necessary, notifying the Contractor of non-compliance with requirements of the Plan. Notification shall be in writing with copies to the Owner. •Reviewing incident reporting and claim information submitted by the Safety Representatives for completeness. ` • Evaluating accident frequency and severity data, and recommend appropriate corrective action as necessary. •Providing quarterly reports to the Owner, containing an evaluation of the status of the program and of accident frequency and severity. • Assisting the Contractor with investigation of safety related incidents. • Participating and assisting in Contractor's training efforts, including occasional safety meetings and "Tool Box" meetings. • Providing assistance with OSHA Construction Safety Requirement interpretations. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 5 Subcontractors, vendors, and visitors. In this regard, supervisors have the highest level of management responsibility for ensuring workers conduct their work in a safe and efficient manner. The supervisory responsibility for safe performance requires that supervisors be trained in hazard recognition and safe work practices, and have the skills to convey these elements to the worker. The Plan must address safety and health responsibilities at all levels of supervision. These responsibilities shall include,but not be limited to the following: • Providing safety supervision during all work shifts. • Providing an effective administrative and managerial structure to administer the Plan. • Implementing hazard prevention in all aspects of job planning. • Instructing employees in the recognition and avoidance of hazards on the worksite. • Verifying that the employees are trained in the recognition and avoidance of hazards on the worksite. • Enforcing the requirements of the Plan. • Encouraging the active participation of employees in safety meetings. • Developing and implementing procedures for proper treatment, investigation, documentation, and reporting of all employee injuries and illnesses. • Taking appropriate corrective action when unsafe acts or conditions are identified. • Maintaining open lines to communicate management and employee safety concerns effectively. • Maintaining all equipment in safe condition. • Issuing appropriate personal protective equipment and training employees in its use. • Performing or assisting in the investigation of all incidents. • Cooperating fully with the Safety Auditor . • Monitoring employee safety and health. 1.2.4 Designation of Safety Representative The Contractor shall propose, in writing, a member of its organization to serve as Safety Representative, who will be responsible for enforcing the Contractor's safety and health obligations and its Plan. The Safety Representative shall be an on-site, full-time member of the Contract supervisory staff. This person's name and qualification shall be submitted to the Safety Auditor by the Contractor. In addition, each Subcontractor shall also be required by the Contractor to designate a responsible supervisory representative to assist the Safety Representative in the performance of duties described below. The Safety Representative shall have authority to correct immediately unsafe conditions and/or unsafe acts throughout all phases of the contract, including those involving Contractors, Subcontractors, employees, visitors, vendors, and the general public. The Safety Representative shall be involved in the construction planning process. In the event of substandard performance by the Safety representative in its Smith College Project Construction Master Safety *�+ Program Guidelines Manual 4 1. Administration & Organization 1.1 Purpose and Scope The Contractor shall develop and implement a written, site-specific, safety and health plan(the "Plan") for its work under the Project. The Contractor shall establish an administrative and organizational structure for implementing its Plan. 1.2 Duties and Responsibilities 1.2.1 Contractor Requirements The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local safety requirements and its Plan. Upon receipt of a notice by the Owner or the Safety Auditor of non-compliance under its Plan, the Contractor shall initiate corrective actions as soon as possible. 1.2.2 Contractor's Safety and Health Plan The Contractor shall submit its Plan to the Safety Auditor for review within fifteen (15) days of selection and conditional designation for Contract award. The Plan, which shall include details commensurate with the work to be performed, must clearly describe the Contractor's commitments for meeting its obligations to provide - a safe and healthy work environment for its employees and Subcontractor employees, and its obligations to protect vendors, visitors, and members of the general public. The Plan shall reference Federal OSHA standards, and any other rules or regulations applicable to the Smith College Construction Project, including state and local requirements. In fulfilling its obligation to develop and implement the Plan, the Contractor is required to follow the Guidelines. The Plan shall specifically describe operations to be conducted, and whether this work will be self-performed or subcontracted. A brief description of the expected hazards of each task should be given, followed by steps to control these hazards. The Contract Safety Planning Guide (Appendix A) should be used as a template in identifying and describing construction operations, expected hazards, and planned safety controls for all activities under the Contract. The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in all phases of Plan development and implementation. The Contractor's contractual safety and health requirements and these Guidelines will be highlighted during the Pre-Construction Conference. The Plan shall be revised by the Contractor on an as-needed basis and will be submitted to the Safety Auditor immediately for review. 1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities The Contractor is responsible for providing safety supervision of its employees, Smith College 0 Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 3 MW .m be responsible for thorough safety and loss control training and instruction of its employees. The objective of this policy is to establish, throughout the entire Project, that the prevention of accidents and protection of property is paramount and, shall, ! therefore, be made top priority and obtain the active support and participation by Contractors and Subcontractors. PROJECT OBJECTIVES The Guidelines have been created to coordinate the elimination or reduction of hazards and risks associated with the construction project,prevent accidents, reduce employees' injuries, prevent damage to property, promote maximum efficiency, and effect savings by the reduction of unplanned business interruption. Active participation by the Owner, The Contractor, Contractor management, supervisory staff and employees will make the Project not only effective, but also successful by coordinating the participants' efforts in performing the following tasks: • Provide a safe environment for employees to perform high quality work. • Use safety planning as a tool to reduce bodily injury and property damage. • Provide inspections to locate and abate unsafe conditions and practices. • Protect the public and property immediately adjacent to all construction sites. • Educate and train employees through: i. New hire orientation; ii. Safety meetings; iii Safety training(i.e., Hazard Communication, Fall Protection, Lockout/Tagout, Etc.); iv. Mandatory personal protective equipment programs; ., V. Injury reporting and record keeping to maintain up-to-date accident experience information, trend analysis, etc. vi. Using accident investigation information to abate deficiencies and .� eliminate any additional losses. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 2 Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines FOREWORD Smith College Construction Safety Program Guidelines (the "Guidelines") have been compiled to set forth safety and health requirements to be utilized by ON Contractors performing work under the Smith College Project, (the "Project"). The _ Guidelines specifically include required elements of a site-specific safety and health plan which must be developed by Contractors working on the Projects included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program ("OCIP") established by Smith College. The information and standards summarized in these Guidelines were compiled from sources believed to be reliable. It cannot be assumed that this material includes every loss potential, code violation or exception to good practice and, therefore, is not guaranteed. It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that its site-specific safety and health plan is in conformance with the provisions of the Guidelines and standards set forth under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as amended, and any other federal, state and local safety and health standards as they apply. The Contractor shall ensure that each of its Subcontractors complies with ' the requirements of these Guidelines. It should also be emphasized that, as with all other aspects of the work, the Contractor's selection of means and methods is his own, and that any and all suggestions contained in these Guidelines are only representative of the types of techniques and practices which the Contractor may choose to employ on this proj ect. Smith College Project Policy Statement The principles of safety and loss control included in the Guidelines reflect a determination by Smith College (the "Owner") to prevent injuries to the general public and workers, as well as to prevent damage to property and equipment. The Owner considers no phase of construction or administration of greater importance than accident prevention, and asserts that accidents which result in personal injury and damage to property and equipment represent needless waste and loss. It shall be the policy of the Owner to conduct all operations safely and thereby prevent injuries to persons and damage to property. Planning for safety shall start with the design and continue through purchasing, fabrication and construction in all phases of the Project. All practical steps shall be taken to maintain a safe place to work. The Contractor must accept the responsibility for the prevention of accidents on work under its direction and shall Smith College Project Construction Master Safety ko Program Guidelines Manual 1 Mw 5. Hazard Communication ! 5.1 Purpose and Scope 5.2 Responsibilities 5.3 Hazard Communication Program (HCP) 5.4 Hazard Communication Training 5.5 Record Keeping 6. First Aid and Medical Services 6.1 Purpose and Scope 6.2 Staffing " 6.3 Reporting 6.4 Transportation 6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers 7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping 7.1 Purpose and Scope " 7.2 Notification 7.3 Investigation 7.4 Documentation and Reporting 7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases 7.6 OSHA 200 Log 7.7 Monthly Accident Summary 7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies Appendix A. Contractor Safety Planning Guide B. Project Forms B.1 Contractor Incident Investigation Form B.2 Contractor Safety Survey Checklist . B.3 Weekly Toolbox Meeting Sign-In Sheet B.4 Contract First Aid Log B.5 OSHA 200 Log- Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses • B.6 Safety Program Notification / Contact List B.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Table of Contents i. Forward ii. Policy Statement iii. Program Objectives 1. Administration and Organization 1.1 Purpose and Scope ! 1.2 Duties and Responsibilities 1.2.1 Contractor Requirements 1.2.2 Contractor Site Specific Safety and Health Plan 1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities 1.2.4 Designation of Contractor Safety Representative 1.2.5 Safety Auditor 2. Hazard Control 2.1 Purpose and Scope 2.2 Supervisory Control 2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification 2.4 Substance Abuse Policy 2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items 2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures and Job Hazard Analysis 2.9 Community Public Protection 2.10 Dust/Debris Control Plan 3. Emergency Work Procedures 3.1 Purpose and Scope 3.2 Site Specific Procedures 4. Safety and Health Training 4.1 Purpose and Scope 4.2 Training Elements 4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation 4.2.2 Weekly Toolbox Safety Meetings 4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings 4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training 4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors 4.2.6 Documentation Retention Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines 0P Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program OR Note: All Contractors are responsible for providing a copy of this manual to their subcontractors. Owner: Smith College OCIP Administrator: Acordia Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Applicable in Arizona For your protection,Arizona law requires the following statement to appear on this form.Any person who know- ingly presents a false or fraudulent claim for payment of a loss is subject to criminal and civil penalties. Applicable In Arkansas,Kentucky, Maine,Michigan,New Jersey,New Mexico,New York, Pennsylvania and Virginia Any person who knowingly and with intent to defraud any insurance company or another person,files a state- ment of claim containing any materially false information,or conceals for the purpose of misleading, informs- bon concerning any fact,material thereto,commits a fraudulent insurance act,which is a crime,subject to criminal prosecution and[NY:substantial]civil penalties.In Maine and Virginia,insurance benefits may also be denied. Applicable In CalHomis Any person who knowingly files a statement of claim containing any false or misleading information is subject to criminal and civil penalties. Applicable In Colorado It is unlawful to knowingly provide false, incomplete, or misleading facts or information to an insurance company for the purpose of defrauding or attempting to defraud the company. Penalties may include imprisonment, fines, denial of insurance, and civil damages. Any insurance company or agent of an insurance company who knowingly provides false, incomplete, or misleading facts or Information to a policy holder or claimant for the purpose of defrauding or attempting to defraud the policy holder or claimant with regard to a settlement or award payable from insurance proceeds shall be reported to the t Colorado Division of Insurance within the Department of Regulatory Agencies. Applicable In Florida and Idaho Any person who Knowingly and with the intent to injure,Defraud,or Deceive any Insurance Company Files a State- ment of Claim Containing any False,Incomplete or Misleading information is Guilty ofa Felony.' 'In Florida-Third Degree Felony Applicable In Hawaii For your protection,Hawaii law requires you to be informed that presenting a fraudulanet claim for payment of a loss or benefit is a crime punishable by fines or imprisonment,or both. IR Applicable in Indiana A person who knowingly and with intent to defraud an insurer files a statement of claim containing any false, incomplete,or misleading information commits a felony. Applicable In Minnesota A person who files a claim with Intent to defraud or helps commit a fraud against an insurer is guilty of a crime. Applicable in Nevada Pursuant to NRS 686A.291, any person who knowingly and willfully files a statement of claim that contains any false,incomplete or misleading information concerning a material fact is guilty ofa felony. Applicable In New Hampshire Any person who, with purpose to injure, defraud or deceive any insurance company, files a statement of claim containing any false, incomplete or misleading information is subject to prosecution and punishment- for insurance fraud,as provided in RSA 638:20. Applicable In Ohio Any person who, with intent to defraud or knowing that he/she is facilitating a fraud against an insurer, submits an application or files a claim containing a false or deceptive statement is guilty of insurance fraud. 1 Applicable in Oklahoma WARNING: Any person who knowingly and with intent to injure, defraud or deceive any insurer, makes any claim for the proceeds of an insurance policy containing any false, incomplete or misleading information is guilty ofa felony. ON AMR Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program go AC R GENERAL LIABILITY NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE/CLA M DATE am PRODUCER No 7-330-100.5 OCCURRENCE DATE OF OCCURRENCE ANOTI AM OATEOF, NOTICE OF CLAIM PM NO Acordia EFFECTNEDATE EXPIRAnONDA POLICY TYPE RETROACTIVE DA 125 Summer Street,16th Floor occuRRENCE cuIMSMADE Boston, MA 02110 COMPANY NAK:COOM MISCELLANEWS INFO(Sib&locedan-d•) CODE: SUB CODE: POLICY NUMBER REFERENCE NUMBER CUSTO M RI INSURED CONTACT coNracTlNSUREO NAMEANDADDRESS SOC SECT NAMEANDADDRESB WHERE TOCONTA WHEN TOCONTACT RESIDENCE PHONE(A/C,NW) BtISW ESS PHONE(MC.No,Eat) RESIDENCE PHONE(/UC,Ho) BUSINESS PHONE(AIC,Na,E0 OCCURRENCE IIM LOCATIONOF AUTHORITY GONTACTED OCCURRENCE (Include city a etaY) DESCRIPTION OF OCCURRENCE 4lb..aparaM an..L n«...aryi POLICY INFORMATION COVERAGE PART OR FORMS(bren Tai Y atnt edNbn daYS) GENERAL AOGREGA PRODOCOMPOPAGG PERS&ADV INJ I EACH OCCURRENCE FIRE DAMAGE MEDK:AL EXPENSE DEDUCTIBLE PO EXC UMBRELIA I I EXCESS I CARRIER: LIMRS: AC.GR CLA MCC TYPE OF LIABIUTY PREMISES:INSURED 13 1 1 OWNER I ITENANT I I OTHER TYPE OF PREMISES O DES NAME pI not Inc—d) OWNUM AK No PRODUCTS:INSUREDIS MANUFACTURER VENDOR OTHER TYPE OF PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS NAME&ADDRESS pt not ImwN) N AIC No WHERE CAN PRODUCT BE SEEN? OTHER LIABILITY IN- OPERATIONS(Expel ED INJUREDIPROPERTY DAMAGED ADDRESS PHONE(A/C,No,Ertl (Inlw•m01•neo AGE I SEX I OCCUPATION YER'S p ���EI DDRESS DESCRIBE INJURY WHERETAKEN WHATWASWJUREDDOING? FATALITY DESCRIBE ESTIMATEAMOUNI WHERE CAN WHEN CAN PROPERTY BE PROPERTY PROPERTY (Type.madN,•e) BE SEEN? WITNESSES NAME&ADDRESS SUSIHESS PHONE(A/C,No,Eaq RESIDENCE PNONE(AIC,No A REMARKS REPORTED SY REPORTED TO SIGNATURE OF INSURED SIGNATURE OF PRODUCER EI!! Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program ItOitM 101 MB COb&ONWBALTROP MA BOARD NO.: DwAR7mm;rcwm asnuALACCmmm-DwARmaNT201 - 600 WASSIri n,oN S1R1B3'P-Tm PLocit BOsTm.MA o21 it OR EmPLQYRR`S FIRST RFPnRT OF INJURY OR FATALITY EMMgKN0WN File this form if injury has mswted m loth en in 5 or more calendar days of total ar parl al mtapac ity ftnm easing wages, =TRucn0NS AND CODES ON TIM RBVMM SIDS PLP.ASB PRINT OR TYPE E 1. Employm's Name(Ls4 Fits MI) - 2. llama 3. SmW Sacatity Number- 4. Sex M ( ) - MC] F❑ . LS HomaAddzc=(M.aadS� .ClsAstartZip) 6. M-4- DU s 7.NmabeadDepmdems O M Q S Y ate p a 9. Date of Birth(mm/dd/yy) - 10. Are[age aga S E _ Esdrusied C3 AcMW E IL Employers MX M 13.Employees Addtesa(No.and Sauer,City.Stater Zip) 10. IkWioy&x Telephow P - L 1S. bdiaaay Code _ O '16 Wads'Camperoszdcn Insmaooe Clu f (Not I-'A guat(Adjosaa) _ 17_ W.0 Poiky Number Y E 1L Se]f4kWMrsd7 []Yes.- No 19. Self-InsmcNamber:- 20. Desotibe Ns=0 afBasiaaa ac Attila Maaubtcmtad(cisacY ax) 22. Dept No Flour No R ❑Stsvlee ❑Wbolc>ato ❑Rmu7 ❑Mumoabcmtm; 22. DamofInjary(Wn%M4" I 73. l.omdoa Whore Iajaty Occ=ed(If DiffetmtTbs d II3) 24. Injured an Employees Pz=akW N ❑Ycs ON- 1 25.Empbyces[vc"tancode 26.IfEmpbyceHasDied.Deft otDeadt(mm/dd/y» U . . a m ages 2g.-FItWDayotTatalotP=tialIaa�eitytoEatnW.S. R (n nt/ddlyyy) / . z Y 29.Somra O(Ujc cy(Chemicals.Maudiiuety,F=e 3(L Dest U HAWlajatyA bVo=c0cc=cd.(Sun&By_-eIIFmm_Expc=dTo_) I N F 31.To aslo ) 33. Datal(tpatsedas adcRelsoed O't Pusklac: R 34.Itt*yCoda(s) 35.Body PatGbde(f 1N a b. C. A 36.1]mbPtiasp eslsg S.oWerSacl J T I 37.Wltnets(as)T*TJiclg)rcyf 0Yes 0 No M YBS'Pl".sp=lfy_ ( O N 3L!Hers Empbym Rsamml b Wald Yes No 39.Data of Rut®(wwW4 7) 40• RegdwOowpadoa 40A.Returned io RcVdmr0ctupsdoa7 ❑Yes a N- 41. ReMes fat Eatpiayat(Please Plot or Type) 42.Tide 43. PteQare't SlZme me 44. Dsa Ptapaed(ssm/ddlyy) 'Dbdosing Social Seadq Number is♦otmsaty.It will assist is the ptoceabg of yours-*- REPRODUCEASNEEDED Fb=#101 (2193) .a Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Holyoke College - OCIP Monthly Contract Accident Summary Contract: Contractor: Report Period: This Month `Year to Date Project to Dat (mm/dd to mm/dd) , (mmfdd to m n/dd) (mm/dd to mm to to to Hours Worked First Aid Cases OSHA RECORDABLES Lost Time Cases Days Lost Comments/Explanations: (Any OSHA Recordables this month should be listed in this section with worker name, employer,date of accident, and nature of injury.Attach separate sheet as needed.) w w Prepared by: Date: Contractor Superintendent: Date: Mail or Fax to the OC/P Administrator by the 5th day of each month. -14- Smith College — Supervisors Accident Investigation Report Contract: Date of Report: Contractor: Incident dateltime: Weather Conditions: Incident Location (specific): Incident Type (Circle): Worker injury Non-worker injury Near miss incident Property damag Fire Explosion Other 00 Describe Injury (Injury/Illness type, body parts affected): Injured Person / Property Owner: Address/Phone: Description of Incident: (Brief factual description of incident. Use Separate sheet if necessary.): Incident Causes: (Immediate, Contributory,Root) 40 Corrective Action(s): Witnesses (Name, Address, Phone): Police Report filed? Y / N Photos taken? Y / N OSHA or other Agency involved?: Foreman / Supervisor: Date: 0 Project Manager/ Superintendent: Date: -13- no Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program ,. Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form for Change Orders Contractor Name: Phone Address: Fax#: w Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Change Order Man-Hours: Total Contract Change Total Change Order Order Amount: Est. Payroll: ** NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. Class Code Description Straight Time OR On site Payroll SIGNED BY: TITLE: 40 PRINT NAME: DATE: wo ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent,or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors, then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. The insurance costs am identified in the Contractor's/Subcontractor's original Insurance Information Form will be applied accordingly to the change order information shown above. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: - 12 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Owner Controlled Insurance Program Monthly Work Site Payroll Report Company Name: Project: Reporting Period: to NOTE: The reported payroll should include the employee's straight time pay plus the straight time portion of any earned overtime pay. Payroll for the premium portion of overtime pay should not be included in the report. Total Manhours for the month of: A. Hourly Employees WC Class Code Manhours Classification Actual WC Payroll w B. Salaried Employees WC Class Code Manhours Classification Actual WC Payroll OR Location of Payroll Records: Individual providing information: Telephone: I hearby certify that the payroll figures and information contained above are true and complete as shown for the period of this report. Date: Print Name: Title: Signature: - 11 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program .0 INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM A. Workers' Compensation Premium: so Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium On site Payroll .w Deviation(if applicable) Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification(Attach Copy) Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) Standard Premium ARAP(if applicable) Less other discounts(Describe) Total Discounted WC Premium DIA Assessment Total WC Cost B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = GL Premium Amount: X = w C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium X = Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than$2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to$2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST$ The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: Workers' Compensation($1,000,000 Employers Liability) $ General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations (3 Yr.After Substantial Completion) $ 4D Umbrella/Excess Liability($2,000,000 limit) $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead&Profit on Insurance Premium: $ , TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent, or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: - 10- Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: Contract Amount: Est.Payroll: Est. Contract Start Date: Est.Contract Completion Date: ** NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns, transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right, title and interest to any and all returns of premium, dividends,discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to W review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information, actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor, or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants, additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. -9- Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program H. Certificate of Insurance Checklist: (For Contractors/Subcontractors Provided Coverage Under the O.C.I.P.) NOTE: Each certificate must be on an Acord Form and contain the following information for each corresponding section: ➢ Companies Affording Coverage: Must be acceptable to Smith College ➢ Workers' Compensation: Statutory Limits so ➢ Employers' Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 ➢ General Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence ➢ Automobile Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence ➢ Excess Liability: Limits: $2,000,000 each occurrence w ➢ Additional Insureds: All contractors and subcontractors of every tier must include Smith College its agents,employees and directors,and ow the General Contractor as Additional Insureds. Contractor shall provide waiver of Subrogation against the Owner, the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents and employees. ➢ Certificate Holder: Smith College C/O Acordia 125 Summer Street Boston,MA 02110 Attn: Wendy O'Brien Notice of Cancellation: Must provide 30 days advance written notice. w - 8 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program G. O.C.I.P. Administration Contact List: If there are any questions concerning the O.C.I.P.,its coverages and/or requirements, please contact one of the following O.C.I.P.Administration Team personnel. Acordia Phone: (617)330-1005 125 Summer Street Boston,MA 02110 ➢ Project Manager: Bonney Hebert,Acordia Sr. Vice President (617)330-1005,Ext. 212 !! Daily Contacts: Account Manager: Pamela Anderson,Acordia Insurance Program Issues Vice President (617)330-1005,Ext.281 r OCIP Administration Manager: Wendy O'Brien,Acordia !'! Enrollment/Administrative Issues OCIP Administration Mgr. (617)330-1005 Ext.229 ➢ Project Safety Consultant: Fran McCormack,CSP Safety Issues Acordia Manager, Safety and Health Services (617)330-1005 Ext.237 - 7- Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program .. �w 6. Payroll Reporting Procedures: ➢ Each Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier insured under the O.C.I.P. shall report the payrolls of all non-excluded employees performing Contract work at the Project-Site. ➢ Each Contractor and subcontractor will complete payroll reporting forms w for each month worked ➢ Payroll reports are due to Acordia on a monthly basis by the 10`n ■o Contractors must provide O.C.I.P.payroll report for each month they are enrolled in the O.C.I.P. If no payroll is generated during an enrolled month a payroll report indicating Zero(0)payroll must be provided. No Please note"Final'on the final month of payroll reported to indicate that work has been completed. OR r� w� -6- 0 Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Pro,;ram RM 40 F. Summary of Contractor/Subcontractor Responsibilities: 1. Identify ALL estimated insurance costs for those coverages provided under the O.C.1.P.from the Contract Price: (include deductions for all Subcontractors of any tier). 2. Enrollment into the Owner Controlled Insurance Program: ➢ Complete Insurance Information Form ➢ Notify Acordia of all Subcontractors being used ➢ Require all Subcontractors to complete Insurance Information Form ➢ Send completed Insurance Information Forms to Acordia OCIP Administrator ➢ Complete(if applicable)Change Order Insurance Information Form 3. Resources for Completing Insurance Enrollment Form: �w • Your insurance policies • Your insurance agent ➢ Acordia's O.C.I.P.Administrator 4. Certificate of Insurance Requirements: ➢ Provide to Acordia a Certificate of Insurance displaying proof of required insurance coverages. (Automobile Liability and Off-Site Coverages) ➢ Proof of coverage must be provided to Acordia before access to the Project-Site is allowed. ➢ NOTE: Every Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier must comply 0 with this requirement. ➢ See"Certificate of Insurance Checklist". 5. Claims Reporting Procedures: ➢ Within 24 hours,report and provide the necessary documentation for all losses occurring on the Project-Site. ➢ Severe accidents should be reported immediately! ➢ Complete and provide Acordia with the following information in the event of a loss: (See Contact List A. Workers' Compensation Claims—"Employer's First Report of Injury" B. General Liability Claims—"General Liability Loss Notice" NOTE: A"Supervisor's Accident Report"should accompany all loss notices - 5 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program E. Insurance Requirements of all Contractors, Subcontractors,Vendors, Suppliers, Truckers, Delivery Men and Others NOT COVERED under the Smith College O.C.I.P. ➢ Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. ➢ NOTE: Proof of coverage must be provided to the O.C.I.P.Administrator before W access to the Project-Site is allowed. 1. Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability: �r Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 2. Comprehensive General Liability: OR Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability OR Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. sm 4. Contractor's Equipment Floater(optional) Providing coverage for all equipment and tools being used both at and away from the Project-Site. 5. Any other insurance required by your contract and not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program iwe iw w -4- Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program IM D. Other Insurance Requirements for all Contractors/Subcontractors ENROLLED under the w Smith College O.C.I.P. Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. 1. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability: Providing coverage for operations away from the Project-Site. 2. Comprehensive General Liability: Providing coverage for operations away from the Project-Site. 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 4. Contractor's Equipment Floater(optional): Providing coverage for all equipment and tools being used at the Project-Site. 5. Any other insurance required by your contract and not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program l P -3 - .m Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program B. O.C.I.P. Coverage EXCLUSIONS: ➢ 1. No insurance coverage provided by the Owner under the O.C.I.P. shall extend to M the activities or products of contractors,subcontractors of any tier,suppliers, materiahmn,vendors, haulers, truckers and"owner/operators"whose employees perform no on-site work and/or are engaged solely in the delivery, loading, stocking,testing or hauling of equipment,supplies or materials. " ➢ 2. Contractor and Subcontractor employees not working at the project-site(such as delivery men,truckers, haulers,etc.)and others who occasionally visit the project- site are excluded by the O.C.I.P. Such persons are required to provide evidence of their own insurance before access to the project-site is allowed. C. Insurance NOT Provided by the Smith College O.C.I.P.: ➢ Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. 1. Automobile Liability Coverage: Automobile coverage is not provided for any Contractor's/Subcontractor's vehicles at or away from the Project-Site. NOTE: Evidence of such coverage must be provided to the O.C.I.P. ■u Administrator before access to the Project-Site will be allowed. 2. Contractor's Equipment Coverage: Property coverage is not provided for any Contractor's/Subcontractor's equipment or tools being used at or away from the Project-Site. 3. Other Coverage: Insurance coverage for office equipment,bonding or any other coverage not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. w wr -2- I0 Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program (O.C.I.P) Coverage Summary A. Insurance Provided by Smith College (herein called the Owner): NOTE: The full cost of the following O.C.I.P. coverages are paid for by the Owner. The Contractor hereby warrants that the insurance costs(including ALL Subcontractors of any tier)for the coverage provided under this 4„ prograin are to be removed from its bids. 1. Workers' Compensation/Employer's Liability Insurance: " Covers: Statutory limits required by the Workers' Compensation laws of the applicable jurisdiction,with Coverage B—Employer's Liability Limit of$1,000,000 2. Commercial General Liability&Excess Liability Insurance: Covers: Third Party Personal Injury,Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability Includes: Premises/Operations Coverage,Completed Operations(three years after substantial completion),Contractual Liability,Personal Injury Liability Total Limits: Limits of at least: $50,000,000 Each Occurrence—All Insureds $50,000,000 General Aggregate—All Insureds Loss Assessment: The Contractor/Subcontractor agree that any payment made by the Owner arising out of third party bodily injury and/or property damage losses caused by the Contractor and/or Subcontractor of any tier,will be withheld from the Contractor/Subcontractor. The total sum withheld shall not exceed$2,500 for each occurrence. The sum shall be assessed to the Contractor/Subcontractor causing the damage and/or injury and shall become property of the Owner. - 1 - PD Table of Contents Contents: Pam SECTION I: A. Insurance Provided 1 h B. OCIP Coverage Exclusions 2 C. Insurance Not Provided 2 1. Automobile 2. Contractors Tools and Equipment 3. Other D. Insurance Requirements for Enrolled Contractors 3 E. Insurance Requirements for Contractors Not Enrolled 4 F. Summary of Contractor Responsibilities 5 Bidding Insurance Information Form Certificates of Insurance Claim Reporting Payroll Reporting G. OCIP Administration Contact List 7 H. Certificate of Insurance Checklist 8 �IIII Insurance Information Form 9 Payroll Reporting Form 11 Insurance Information Form for Change Orders 12 Supervisors Accident Investigation Report 13 Monthly Contract Accident Summary 14 Attachments: Workers' Compensation First Report of Injury General Liability Notice of Occurrence/Claim SECTION II. A. Sample Policies(GL, WC, Umbrella,Builders Risk) SECTION II: A. Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines T:5C0LLEGES/Smith PRO(EDUREYMEROLD PROCEDURES MANUAL'JJUI ON 5 Colleges — Smith College Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Bidding & Enrollment Procedures O.C.I.P. Coverage Summary Contractor Responsibilities Presented By: Acordia 125 Summer Street Boston, Massachusetts 02110 Phone: (617) 330-1005 - Fax: (617) 330-5339 (a) In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,or in the event of a claimed violation of any federal or state safety or health law or regulation, arising out of or in any way connected with the work or its performance,the Contractor shall act immediately to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and to remedy said violation.Failing such action the Owner or its designee may immediately take whatever steps it deems necessary including,but not limited to,suspending the work as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. (b) The Owner or its designee may offset any and all costs or expenses of whatever nature,including attorneys'fees,paid or incurred by the Owner or its designee(whether such fees are for in-house counsel or counsel retained by the Owner),in taking the steps authorized by Section 3.3 above against any sums then or thereafter due to the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend,indemnify and hold the Owner,its officers, agents, employees and the O.C.I.P.Administrator harmless against any and all costs or expenses pursuant to this Section 3.3,by whomsoever incurred. If the Contractor shall be entitled to any additional compensation or extension of time claimed on 40 account of emergency work not due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor or its Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors, it shall be handled as a claim as provided for in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. ON Section 3.4 OWNER'S STANDARDS: (a) The Owner and its designee reserves the right,but assumes no duty,to establish and enforce guidelines and to make the appropriate changes in the Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines,for the protection of persons and property and to review the efficiency of all protective measures taken by the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with all guidelines and changes made by the Owner or its designee. The issuance of any such guidelines or changes by the Owner or its designee shall not relieve the Contractor of its duties and responsibilities under this Contract, and the Owner or its designee shall not thereby assume,nor be deemed to have assumed,any such duties or responsibilities of the Contractor. as 18 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 In any and all claims against those indemnified hereunder by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,the indemnification obligation under this 3.1.6 shall not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier under any workers'compensation act, disability benefit or other employee benefit acts. 3.1.7 PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR GENERAL CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS (a) Any General Contractor or sub-contractor regardless as to tier with a Workers' Compensation Experience Modification factor as promulgated by the Workers' Compensation Rating Bureau of 105%or less will be eligible to participate in the OCIP and the project. If a General Contractor or sub-contractor,regardless as to tier,has a modification over 106%the Owner may include such General Contractor or sub-contractor in the OCIP and the project provided that the General Contractor or sub-contractor is approved by the Owner or its designee. The Owner or its designee will evaluate the General Contractor's or sub-contractor's adverse modification to determine any mitigating circumstances, such as but not limited to,a single loss causing a high modification,etc. 3.1.8 ALTERNATIVE/LIGHT DUTY WORK AVAILABILITY (a) Contractor shall endeavor to provide alternative work or light duty for injured employees with temporary physical restrictions. Section 3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY/RESPONSIBILITY FOR LOSS: 3.2.1 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTION OF WORK. (a) The Contractor shall,throughout the performance of the work, maintain adequate and continuous t protection of all work and temporary facilities against loss or damage from whatever cause,shall protect the property of the Owner and third parties from loss or damage from whatever cause arising out of the performance of the work, and shall comply with the requirements of the Owner or its designee and its insurance carriers,and with all applicable laws,codes,rules and regulations,with respect to the prevention of loss or damage to property as a result of fire or other hazards. The Owner or its designee may,but shall not be required to,make periodic inspections of the Project site. In such event,however,the Contractor shall not be relieved of its aforesaid responsibilities and the Owner or its designee shall not assume, nor shall it be deemed to have assumed, any responsibility otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract. 3.2.2 SURFACE OR SUBSURFACE WATER. (a) Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations or under the structures except where required by the Contract Documents for the Project. Should such conditions develop or be encountered, the water or other fluid shall be controlled and suitably disposed of by means of temporary pumps,piping, drainage lines, ditches, dams or other methods approved by the Owner or its designee in writing, and in accordance with all regulatory requirements. The proposed location and coordination of temporary channels and conduits diverting accumulated water from the Project site shall be submitted to the Owner or its designee for its prior written approval. All such work shall be done as a reimbursable cost of the work. Section 3.3 EMERGENCIES: 17 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 3.1.3 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGNATION OF SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE. (a) In accordance with the requirements of the Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines,the Contractor shall designate a qualified member of its organization at the Project site,whose duties shall be to enforce the Contractor's safety programs,to assure compliance with this Article 3 and to prevent accidents. This person's name and qualifications shall be submitted to the Owner or its „ designee in writing by the Contractor for approval. The Contractor shall further cause each of its Subcontractors of any tier to designate a responsible supervisory representative to assist the Contractor's representative in the performance of its duties as described above. 3.1.4 SUSPENSION OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK. (a) Should the Contractor fail to provide a safe area for the performance of the Work or any portion thereof,the Owner or its designee shall have the right,but not the obligation,to suspend work in the unsafe area. All costs of any nature(including,without limitation,overtime pay,liquidated damages or other costs arising out of delays)resulting from the suspension,by whomsoever incurred,shall be bome by the Contractor. 3.1.5 CONTRACTOR'S ASSURANCE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT. (a) The Contractor and each subcontractor of every tier shall provide to each worker on the Project site the proper safety equipment for the duties being performed by that worker and will not permit any worker on the Project site who fails or refuses to use the same. The Owner or its designee shall have the right,but not the obligation,to order the Contractor to send a worker home for the day,or to discharge a worker, for his/her failure to comply with safe practices or anti-substance abuse policies, and the Contractor shall promptly comply with all such orders. 3.1.6 CONTRACTOR'S INDEMNITY OF THE OWNER FOR CONTRACTOR'S NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY PROGRAM. (a) Contractor recognizes that it has sole responsibility to assure its Safety Program is implemented and to assure its construction services are safely provided. The Contractor shall indemnify,defend and hold the Owner and its designee harmless, from and against any and all liability(whether public or private),penalties(contractual or otherwise),losses,damages,costs,attorneys'fees, expenses,causes of action, claims or judgments resulting,either in whole or in part,from any failure of the Contractor,its Subcontractors of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,to comply with the provisions of this Article 3. The Contractor shall not be relieved of its responsibilities under this Article 3 should the Owner or its designee act or fail to act pursuant to its rights hereunder. The Owner and the OCIP Administrator shall not assume,nor be deemed to have assumed, any responsibilities otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract,by virtue of providing the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines. Contractor shall not raise as a defense to its obligation to indemnify under this 3.1.6 any failure of those indemnified hereunder to assure Contractor operates safely, it being understood and agreed that no such failure shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to assure safe operations or from its obligation to so indemnify. The Contractor also hereby waives any rights it may have to seek contribution,either directly or indirectly, from those indemnified hereunder. a► w. 16 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM TO ENSURE PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM: 3.1.1CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES. (a) The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising safety,property loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions and programs in connection with the work. Contractor shall provide all protection to prevent injury to all persons involved in any way in the work and all other persons, including,without limitation,the employees, agents, guests,visitors, invitees and licensees of the Owner who may visit the job site or be affected by the work. These precautions shall include,but in no event be limited to: (1)those set forth in the most current provisions of the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines,which is incorporated by reference as a Contract Document and which the Owner will have on file before bid opening, and which will be provided to the successful bidder after award; (2)the posting of danger signs and personal notification to all affected persons of the existence of a hazard of whatever nature; (3)the furnishing and maintaining of necessary traffic control barricades and flagman services; (4)the use,storage,removal or disposal of required explosives or other hazardous materials only under the supervision of qualified personnel and after first obtaining permission of all applicable governmental authorities; (5)and the maintenance of adequate quantities of both hose and operable fire extinguishers at the Project site. The Contractor shall set forth in writing its safety,property loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions,programs, and action plans in connection with the work and submit the same to the Owner or its designee for review. The Contractor shall not be permitted on the Project Site for the performance of work until these precautions,programs and plans have been reviewed by the Owner or its designee. The Owner or its designee may,but shall not be obligated to,make suggestions and recommendations to the Contractor with respect thereto. 3.1.2 COMPLIANCE OF WORK, EQUIPMENT, AND PROCEDURES WITH ALL LAWS. (a) All work,whether performed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors of any tier,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,and all equipment,appliances,machinery,materials,tools and like items incorporated or used in the work, shall be in compliance with and conform to: (a) all applicable laws, ordinances,rules,regulations and orders of any public,quasi-public or other governmental authority relating to the safety of persons and their protection against injury, specifically including,but in no event limited to,the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended,and all rules and regulations now or hereafter in effect pursuant to said Act; and(b)all rules,regulations and requirements of the Owner or its designee and its insurance carriers relating thereto. In the event of conflicting requirements,the more stringent shall govern. 15 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 .M Section 2.16 SUBROGATION AND WAIVER: (a) Contractor shall require all policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by Contractor and all tiers of Subcontractors,to include clauses providing that each underwriter and carrier shall waive all of its rights of recovery,under subrogation or otherwise,against the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator,their officers, agents and employees,the Contractor, and all tiers of Subcontractors. (b) Contractor waives all rights of recovery against the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, and all Subcontractors regardless of tier which Contractor may have or acquire because of deductible clauses in or the inadequacy of limits of any policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by Contractor. „ (c) Each Contractor shall require all tiers of Subcontractors to waive the rights of recovery in the same manner(as waived in the preceding paragraph by Contractor)against the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, Contractors, and other Subcontractors regardless of tier. Section 2.17 COVERAGE DETERMINED BY POLICY: .w (a) The coverages referred to above are set forth in full in the respective policy forms,and the foregoing descriptions of such policies are not intended to be complete, or to alter or amend any provision of the actual policies, and in matters,if any,in which the said description may be conflicting with such instruments,the provisions of the policies of the insurance shall govern. Section 2.18 MISCELLANEOUS: 00 2.18.1 CONTRACTOR'S OTHER CONTRACT OBLIGATIONS. (a) Nothing contained in Article 2 or 3 of this "Attachment to Construction Specification"shall relieve the Contractor, and its Subcontractors of any tier,of their respective obligations to exercise due care in the performance of their duties in connection with the Work or to complete the Work in strict compliance with the Contract. 2.18.2 FURTHER O.C.I.P.INFORMATION. r�. (a) At the time of pre-bid conference,the Owner will make its O.C.I.P.Administrator available to bidders so that they may resolve any questions they may have about the O.C.I.P. The Owner will also have on file prior to bid opening, a more detailed description of the O.C.I.P. as set forth in a booklet listing the Contractor's Insurance Guidelines. The successful bidder will be provided a copy of and must satisfy these guidelines. w w ws 14 **M T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (b) For insurance purposes, each Contractor agrees, and will require each Subcontractor to agree: (1) to keep and maintain an accurate and classified record of its payroll, (2)to furnish to Administrator and to the insurance company or companies full and accurate payroll data and information in accordance with the requirements of the insurance company or companies,and(3)to permit its books and records to be examined and audited periodically by the insurance company or companies or Administrator and'their respective representatives. (c) Prior to the respective parties'commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish and cause each Subcontractor at any tier to furnish to Administrator or their designees, in a form satisfactory to them, an estimate of labor cost(listed by Standard Workers'Compensation Insurance classification)to be incurred in connection with the Work at the Project site by each Subcontractor, and the total price due each Subcontractor under its contract. (d) Contractor shall furnish each bidding and negotiating Subcontractor,vendor, supplier,material dealer or other party a copy of this Article 2 describing the insurance requirements for the Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers under the O.C.I.P.,and shall require each to impose the same requirement with respect to their subcontracting and procurement procedures. Section 2.15 NOTICES,COSTS,AND LOSSES: (a) All policies of insurance that either Contractor(s), Subcontractors, or the Owner is required to secure and maintain under the terms of this Agreement shall be endorsed to provide that the insurance company shall notify the Owner,Contractor, and the Named Insured, at least thirty(30) days prior to the effective date of any cancellation or modification of such policies. (b) The Contractor and its subcontractors shall not be permitted on the Project site for the performance of work until the OCIP Administrator issues appropriate certificates of insurance.Prior to the date on which Contractor or any Subcontractor,regardless of tier,commences performance of its part of the Work, Contractor shall cause to be furnished to the Owner certificates of insurance maintained by Contractor and each such Subcontractor in connection with the performance of the Work. As and when the Owner may direct,copies of the actual insurance policies,or renewals or replacements thereof, shall be submitted to the Owner and shall be in form and content acceptable to the Owner. (c) The cost of the premiums for the insurance specified above to be obtained by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner,and the Owner shall receive and pay,as the case may be,all adjustments in such costs, whether by way of dividends or otherwise. Each Contractor shall execute such instruments of assignment as may be necessary to permit Owner's receipt of such adjustments and shall cause all Subcontractors covered by such insurance to do the same. (d) The cost of any losses sustained because of clauses that specify Contractor deductible amounts in any of the insurance policies furnished by the Owner shall be paid by the Owner. If the Owner- provided O.C.I.P.policies described in Subsections 2.1.2 and 2.1.3 have deductible amounts above the Contractor deductible amounts,such excess amounts shall be paid by the Owner provided that Contractor shall be responsible for losses greater than policy limits. (e) Payments by the insurer for all losses covered under the All Risk Builder's Risk policy,as specified in Section 2.1.3, will be made to The Owner. The Owner will make monies from the Builder's Risk policy available to the contractor for rebuilding work damaged by covered perils. 13 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 an a. 2.12.5 UMBRELLA LIABILITY: Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE, and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1 (c)(iii)through(vi),by the Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier as referenced in Subsections 2.12.3 and 2.12.4 and for all operations referenced in Subsection 2.12.1. Total limits of$2,000,000 each occurrence. Section 2.13 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSURE VENDORS TO JOBSITE HAVE . INSURANCE: (a) The Contractor,or its Subcontractor of any tier, shall require their respective vendors,suppliers, material dealers, truckers(whether owners or operators)and others who merely transport,pick-up, deliver or carry materials,personnel,parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site to maintain the following insurance: (i) Workers'Compensation Insurance providing coverage for Statutory Limits of the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction,with Coverage B - Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000),insuring operations of the party required to furnish same performed in connection with the Work at the Project site. (ii) Automobile Liability Insurance covering all owned,non-owned and hired automobiles, trucks and trailers of the respective parties required to provide and maintain this insurance. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less than that of the Standard Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy in limits not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000)Combined Single Limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property * damage. (iii) General Liability Insurance for all operations(including products liability for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site unless such manufacturing or assembly is called for in the Contract Documents)in a form providing coverage not less than that of the Standard Commercial General Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")for operations of the party required to furnish same, including hazards of operations(including explosion, collapse and underground coverage), elevators,independent contractors,products and completed operations,with contractual liability coverage(for any contracts related to the Work)for claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage in a policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits combined shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)combined single limit. w (iv) Other. Owner reserves the right to add or subtract coverages required by the Contractor. If such additions or deletions are made,an equitable adjustment to the contract amount shall be made by change order. (v) The Contractor shall require its subcontractor's compliance with the foregoing requirements. �s. Section 2.14 CONTRACTOR OBLIGATIONS: (a) The Contractor shall not violate,or knowingly permit to be violated, any conditions of the policies of insurance provided by the Owner under the terms of the contract issued pursuant to this specification, and shall at all times satisfy the requirements of the insurance companies issuing the same. All requirements imposed by the policies referred to above which are to be performed by ontractor, shall likewise be imposed upon,assumed and performed by each of its Subcontractors. 12 T.5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (b) The insurance may be provided in a policy or policies,primary and excess,including the so-called umbrella or catastrophe form. As and when the Owner may direct copies of the actual insurance policies or renewals or replacements thereof shall be submitted to the O.C.I.P.Administrator in form and content acceptable to the O.C.I.P.Administrator. Liability covered shall be as stated below,unless,prior to commencement of any work,written approval is granted by the Owner, acting through its Administrator,for variance from those limits. 2.12.1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: (a) Insurance covering all owned,non-owned and hired automobiles,trucks and trailers of the respective parties required to provide and maintain automobile liability coverage. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less than that furnished under the Standard Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy form and in limits not less than,as respects Contractor and all tiers of Subcontractors,One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)Combined Single Limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. Such insurance shall cover occurrences both at and away from the Project site. 2.12.2 AIRCRAFT LIABILITY: (a) If aircraft of any kind is used by the Contractor,any tier of Subcontractor or by anyone else on their behalf,the Contractor or Subcontractor shall maintain,or cause the operator of the aircraft to maintain, aircraft public liability insurance insuring passengers and the general public against personal injury,bodily injury or property damage arising from aircraft owned,used, operated or MM hired in connection with the Work by the Contractor, Subcontractor or anyone else,in limits of Ten-Million Dollars($10,000,000)Combined Single limit for any one occurrence,each aircraft. 2.12.3 GENERAL LIABILITY: Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE,and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1(c)(iii)through(vi),by the Contractor,or any tier of Subcontractor(including products liability for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site unless such manufacturing, assembly or otherwise is called for by the Contract Documents between the Owner and Contractor),under a form providing coverage not less than that of the Standard Commercial General Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")for operations of the party required to furnish same,including hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and underground coverage),elevators,independent contractors,products and completed operations,for claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage in policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits combined shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)per occurrence. 2.12.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION: (a) Insurance in Statutory Limits of the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction, with Coverage B--Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000), covering operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE, and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1 (c)(iii)through(vi), of the Contractor or any tier of Subcontractor. T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (b) If the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors of any tier should fail to comply with their respective obligations,under this specification,the Owner may withhold any payments due the Contractor until such time as the Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall have performed their obligations to the Owner's reasonable satisfaction. Section 2.12 CONTRACTOR-PROVIDED INSURANCE NECESSARY FOR THE WORK,BUT OUTSIDE THE O.C.I.P.: (a) Each Contractor shall, at all times during the period in which the contract award pursuant to this specification is in force and effect,provide and maintain insurance, and shall require all Subcontractors of any tier to provide and maintain insurance, of the type and in limits as set forth below in Subsections 2.12.1 to 2.12.4. Except as otherwise provided in Subsection 2.12.1,this insurance is intended to cover employee injury,personal injury,bodily injury and property damage liability for Project Work performed away from the Project site and to cover such liability arising when on the Project site but explicitly not covered by Owner-Provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1(c)(iii)through(vi). Such insurance shall name the parties required to secure same as insureds and shall be in a form and issued by companies acceptable to the Owner. Such insurance shall contain a defense of suits provision. The submitted policy shall contain provisions,either in the original policy or by endorsement,substantially as follows: "(i) Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this endorsement is attached, or any endorsement or certificate now or hereafter attached hereto, it is agreed that the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator, their officers,agents and employees,(and M such other persons or interests as the Owner may specifically designate)are additional insureds hereunder, and that coverage is provided for all operations,uses, occupation, acts and activities of the insured under the Contract for Construction and under any amendments,modifications, extensions or renewals of said Contract for Construction, regardless of whether liability is attributable to the insured or a combination of the insured and an additional insured. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4. , (ii) The policy to which this endorsement is attached shall not be canceled or reduced in coverage until the Owner has been given thirty(30)days prior written notice by registered mail addressed to the Owner; (iii) The coverage provided by the policy to which this endorsement is attached is primary coverage and any other insurance carried by the Owner is excess coverage; (iv) In the event one of the named or additional insureds incurs liability to any other named or additional insured, this policy shall provide protection for each named or additional insured against whom a claim is or may be made, in the same manner as if separate policies had been issued to each named or additional insured. Nothing contained herein shall operate to increase the company's limit of liability. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4. w� (v) Notice of occurrences or claims under the policy shall be made to the person designated by the Owner." , so 10 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 Section 2.9 ALTERNATIVE INSURANCE: (a) In the event the Owner for any reason is unable to furnish,or after commencement of work elects not to furnish or to continue to furnish,the insurance as specified in this Article, and upon thirty (30)days written notice from the Owner,the following shall be required: (i)Contractor shall secure at Owner's cost and thereafter maintain during the performance of this Agreement all or any part of the insurance described in this Article 2 as specified by Owner, and the Owner shall no longer be obligated to furnish that part of the insurance specified. (ii)All insurance secured by Contractor or its Subcontractors pursuant to the Owner's requirement under the provisions of this Section 2.9 shall be in policies subject to the Owner's approval,(acting through its OCIP Administrator) as to form,content, limits of liability,cost and issuing company. Section 2.10 PROCEDURES AND SERVICES: (a) The Owner shall formulate and publish its statement of procedures and services relating to the insurance coverages to be provided pursuant to this Article. The Contractor shall fully comply with,and shall require its Subcontractors of any tier to fully comply with,all of said plans, procedures and services, including but not limited to, completion of all necessary applications for coverage,prompt and full compliance with all audit requests and claim reporting procedures, and full compliance with the safety,loss prevention and loss control programs implemented by, or at the request of,the Owner. Section 2.11 COOPERATION: (a) The Contractor and each of its Subcontractors of any tier for whom insurance is provided by the Owner pursuant to this Article shall: (i)Furnish to the OCIP Administrator, its designees or the insurance carriers all information and documentation which the OCIP Administrator may reasonably require from time to time in connection with the issuance of any policies,pursuant to this agreement,in such form and substance as the Administrator may prescribe; (ii)Furnish to the OCIP Administrator, its designees or the insurance carriers certified payroll and accident summary reports as required once a month on the forms provided by the OCIP Administrator and any payroll records required to assist the carriers in any audits. The Contractor will be required under this subsection to segregate its respective reports relating to the Project from records relating to any other work which it may be performing and for which insurance is not provided by the Owner pursuant to this specification; (iii)Promptly comply with the recommendations of the insurance carriers so that said insurance carriers will continue to provide the coverage to be maintained by the Owner pursuant to this Article at a reasonable premium. 9 OP T.5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 No Im Section 2.5 OWNER'S RIGHT TO AUDIT: (a) The Contractor hereby warrants to the Owner the accuracy of the information provided on the "O.C.I.P. Insurance Information Form"and agrees that the Owner,its insurance carriers and/or the O.C.I.P.Administrator may audit the records of the Contractor and its subcontractors to confirm the accuracy of all insurance information provided,including,without limitation, any affect on insurance resulting from changes in the Work. If an audit warrants, additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor, or Subcontractors of any and all tiers. If an audit warrants, additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers. The Contractor further warrants and agrees that the Owner is entitled to all credits in ' O.C.I.P. insurance premiums which accrue from the audit of Contractor's records related to the Owner provided coverage. Contractor acknowledges that even if the Project described in this specification is included under the O.C.I.P., Contractor will be required to provide those insurance M coverages described in Section 2.12 below. Contractor agrees that the Owner may audit all records related to such policies Section 2.6 ASSIGNMENT: (b) The Contractor,and each of its Subcontractors of every tier,shall assign to the Owner all return premiums,premium refunds,dividends and other monies due or to become due in connection with the insurance which the Owner provides or the Contractor provides pursuant to Section 2.12 below, to the extent such monies result from Contractor's inaccurate assumptions or from changes in the Work,all of which shall inure to the benefit of the Owner. The Contractor and said Subcontractors of any tier shall execute such other further documentation as may be required by the Owner to effectuate this assignment. Section 2.7 O.C.I.P.CLAIMS: (a) The Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall assist and cooperate in every manner reasonably necessary in connection with the adjustment of all claims arising out of the operations conducted under, or in connection with, the Project, and shall cooperate with the insurance carrier or carriers of the Owner,the Contractor and its Subcontractors in all litigated claims and demands which arise out of said operations which the insurance carrier or carriers are called upon to adjust or resist. Section 2.8 O.C.I.P.COVERAGES: (a) Although the scope of coverages afforded under this program may provide coverage beyond the scope required in the Contractor's agreement awarded pursuant to this specification,the Owner makes no warranty or representation that such broad coverage will remain in effect throughout the duration of the work. The Owner further does not warrant or represent that the O.C.I.P.coverages constitute an insurance portfolio which adequately addresses all the risk faced by the Contractor or its Subcontractor(s). The Contractor and Subcontractors of every tier shall satisfy themselves as to the existence, extent and adequacy of the O.C.I.P. coverages prior to the commencement of work on the Project under any contract. w M ws g *.► T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/M/01 tll� Section III: Excess/Umbrella Liability Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be "per$100 of payroll" or"per $1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. Excess/Umbrella Liability Insurance limits of$2,000,000 per occurrence must be provided. This$2,000,000 limit requirement may be lowered as applicable to subcontractors of all tiers upon agreement between Contractor and OCIP Administrator.OCIP Administrator's agreement will not be unreasonably withheld. Section IV: Completed Operations(3 Years) Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be "per$100 of payroll" or"per $1,000 of sales." Completed Operations extension of three(3)years must be provided. Section V: Lower-Tier Contractor Premiums and Allocated Losses(excluding Automobile) If lower-tier contractors are included in your bid,please provide them with a set of ok these forms and instructions. Attach the lower-tier contractors'forms to your submission. The aggregate premiums must equal the amount report in this section. NOTE: Please see section 2.1(c)to determine which entities are not eligible for coverage under the OCIP. If lower tier contractors have a deductible or retention level within their insurance program,they must also include allocated losses, which they would expect within that deductible/retention on this project. OR Section VI: Total Premiums Sum sections I,II, III,IV and V. Section VII: Overhead&Profit on Insurance Premiums Please enter the overhead and profit your firm adds to the insurance premiums. Section VIII: Total Amount Excluded from Bid This represents the amount of insurance being excluded from the bid price due to the coverages being provided under the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This amount also represents the amount added to the Contract Sum in the event the Owner elects not to include this project in its OCIP. (e) It is recommended that this form be referred to your agent/broker if your estimating staff is unfamiliar with this method of premium computation. Carefully review the "AGREEMENT" portion of this form because it allows for bid adjustments if major variances exist between the estimated and audited payrolls. 7 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/Ml M Section 2.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK: (a) Until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner pursuant to this specification, the Contractor shall have full and complete charge and care of, and shall bear all risk of loss, injury or damage to,the Work or any portion thereof(specifically including Owner-furnished supplies, equipment or other items to be utilized in connection with,or incorporated in,the work) from any cause whatsoever. (b) The Contractor shall rebuild,repair,restore and make good all losses, injuries or damages to the Work or any portion thereof(specifically including Owner-fumished supplies,equipment or other items to be utilized in connection with, or incorporated in,the Work)before final acceptance of the Work. Such rebuilding, repair or restoration shall be at the Contractor's sole cost and expense provided,however,the Owner shall make available the monies from the Builder's Risk policy(ies)which the Owner carries for reconstruction. Section 2.4 NAMED INSUREDS AND INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY BIDDERS: (a) The Named Insureds on the Owner-provided O.C.I.P.policies shall include the Owner, the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, Contractors and Subcontractors of any tier(but excluding suppliers,vendors,materialmen,truckers or haulers)for whom the Owner has agreed to furnish an O.C.I.P. d* (b) Coverage shall be limited to the Project site and any locations incidental thereto. (c) Bidders shall complete and include with their bid the Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form set forth in Exhibit A hereto to provide estimated payroll, premium data and such other information as the OCIP Administrator deems necessary. The form is provided with the bid documents so that bidders can contact their carriers immediately and raise any questions at the pre-bid meeting which Contractors or their carriers may have. (d) Specific Instructions for completing the Contractor's "Insurance Information Form": Section I: Workers'Compensation A. For project site operations only,reports the classifications, codes, experience modifier and rates used in your current workers compensation policy. Provide the name of your regular workers'compensation carrier,along with your policy effective dates and Federal Employer ID#. B. If your regular W.C.program includes a deductible or retention level, include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention on this project. OR Section II: General Liability A. Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be "per$100 of payroll" or"per$1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. General w Liability Insurance limits of$1 Million per occurrence must be provided. B. If your regular G.L.program includes a deductible or retention level, include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention on this project. 6 �. T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (b) Coverage will include all materials, supplies and equipment that are intended for specific installation in the project,while such materials, suppliers and equipment are located at the Project Site, in Transit or while temporarily located away from the Project Site for the purpose of repair, adjustment or storage at the risk of one of the insured parties. (c) This insurance will not include coverage for any tools or clothing of workmen or any tools,equipment, protective fencing, scaffolding,temporary structures, forms and equipment owned,rented or used by the Contractor or Subcontractors or any tier and used in the performance of the Work, unless such items are specifically identified in the Contract Documents between The Owner and Contractor and their value is included in the cost of the work. (d) The Owner, its OCIP Administrator, their officers,agents and employees, and Consultant shall not be liable or responsible for any loss or damage whatever to the items excluded in the above paragraph and the to Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless The Owner,their officers, agents and employees,and Consultant, other Contractors and Subcontractors from any claims or causes of action brought by any person or parties as a result of loss or damage to such excluded items. 0 (e) The Builder's Risk policy will be endorsed(a)waiving the carrier's rights of recovery under subrogation against the Owner, its OCIP Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, and Consultant,Contractor and Subcontractors whose interest is insured under such policy,and(b)so as to provide that the insurance company will not cancel such insurance without giving at least ninety(90)days prior written notice to The Owner and any additional insureds as their interests may appear. (f) Contractors shall be liable for a deductible of$5,000 each loss for fire,extended coverages and vandalism and malicious mischief and$5,000 each loss for all other perils unless the Contract Documents provide differently. Section 2.2 CONTRACTOR RETAINS VARIOUS OBLIGATIONS: (a) The furnishing of said insurance by the Owner shall in no way relieve, or limit,or be construed to relieve or limit,the Contractor or Subcontractors of any tier of any responsibility or obligation whatsoever otherwise imposed by this Contract. Nothing contained in this Article 2 of the "Attachment to Construction Specification" shall be construed as: (1)limiting in any way the extent to which the Contractor may be held legally responsible for damages to persons or property,,or(2)limiting the indemnity obligations which Contractor has to Owner pursuant to other sections of the Contract for the Work awarded under this specification. The intent of the O.C.I.P. is simply to assure that Contractor has been provided the insurance coverage indicated up to the limits and with the contractor deductible indicated. �!r T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (e) Owner assumes no obligation to provide insurance other than that evidenced by the policies referred to in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2, 2.1.3, and 2.1.4. The Owner,however,reserves the right to furnish insurance coverage of various types and limits,provided that such coverage shall not be less than that specified above (so long as such insurance and limits are reasonably available in the insurance market)and provided that the costs of such insurance shall be bome by the Owner. 2.1.1 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE. (a) Providing coverage for the statutory limits required by the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction, including coverage for the benefits provided under the United States Longshoremen and Harbor Workers'Act,the Jones Act and other extensions,with Coverage B -Employer's Liability, including Maritime, to limits of not less than One Million Dollars($1,000,000), which will cover operations of the Owner, the O.C.I.P.Administrator, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers performed in connection with the Work at the Project site. Coverage under the Broad Form All States extension is also included. This insurance is primary for all occurrences at the Project site. 2.1.2 LIABILITY INSURANCE (EXCLUDING AUTOMOBILE AND PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY). (a) Under a form providing coverage not less than that available under a Commercial General Liability insurance policy,and insuring the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator,the Contractor,Subcontractors of all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may designate, in connection with the performance of the Work; including coverage for hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and underground coverage), elevators,independent contractors, employees as additional insureds,completed operations for w three years after substantial completion of the Work, contractual liability coverage(for contracts related to the work)and personal injury liability coverage for claims arising out of the Project hereunder,and for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage, in a policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits to all insureds combined will not be less than Fifty Million Dollars($50,000,000), 40 combined single limits;provided that the Owner,in its sole discretion,may decide the size of any deductible so long as Contractor will not be liable to pay more than the first Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500)of the deductible for each occurrence. (b) Contractor may be liable, at its expense,to a maximum of Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500) each occurrence to the extent losses payable are attributable to its intentional acts or omissions,or the intentional acts or omissions of its Subcontractors of any tier or any other entity or person for whom it may be responsible. The Contractor's deductible shall encompass the costs of defense, including court costs and attorney's fees. (c) The insurance provided under the O.C.I.P.will not extend coverage for products liability to any insured party, vendor, supplier,material dealer or others for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site,unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the contract between the Owner and its Contractors. 2.1.3 ALL RISK BUILDER'S RISK,INCLUDING TRANSIT. (a) Insuring the interest of The Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers, including coverage on an "All Risk"basis,including, but not limited to,coverage against fire,lightning,wind damage,hail, explosion,riot or civil commotion,aircraft, and other vehicles,collapse and coverage available under the so-called Builders Risk.The polic(ies)for such insurance shall be secured and maintained by the Owner in a form and amount not less than the full replacement value of the new and existing building(s) included in the Project. Contractor is aware that insurance companies providing "All Risk" Builder's Risk insurance usually excludes several classes of unusual risk. Contractor agrees that the term of the Builder's Risk policy shall define any exclusion, which may exist. so 4 an T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ARTICLE 2. INSURANCE OBLIGATIONS OF OWNER AND CONTRACTOR, IF THE OWNER AWARDS A CONTRACT AND PROVIDES O.C.I.P.INSURANCE Section 2.1 INSURANCE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER: (a) Prior to commencement of the Work,the Owner, at its sole option and cost, shall have the right to secure and thereafter maintain, except as otherwise provided herein,the insurance coverages described in Subsections 2.1.1, 2.1.2and 2.1.3 at all times specified in this Article 2,covering as insured parries the Owner,Contractor,its Subcontractors of all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may designate in connection with the performance of the Work, and with limits not less than those specified for each coverage. w (b) Contractor agrees to furnish as a reimbursable cost of the Work the insurance described in the Contract Documents specifically Article 8 of the Agreement and Article 11 of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. (c) No insurance coverage provided by the Owner shall extend to the activities or products of the following: (i) Any person and/or organization that fabricates and/or manufactures products,materials and/or supplies away from the project site(s),unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the contract between the Owner and its Contractors. (ii) Any architect,engineer or surveyor and their consultants except where required by Contract Documents. (iii) Truckers,materialmen,vendors,suppliers,and owner/operators(independent contractors),whose Operation(s) and/or employee(s)is/are engaged solely in the loading,hauling and/or unloading of material,supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s). (iv) Any employee(s)of an enrolled or non-enrolled Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier,including Employee(s)of truckers,materialmen,vendors,suppliers,and owner/operators(independent contractors),which is/are engaged solely in the loading,hauling and/or unloading of material, supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s). (v) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier,that does not work and/or generate payroll at the project site(s). (vi) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier,that occasionally visits the project site(s)to make deliveries,pick up supplies and/or personnel,to perform supervisory and/or progress inspections, or for any other reason. (d) Unless herein otherwise specifically indicated, the policies set forth in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2 and 2.1.3 below shall cover only those operations of the insured parties performed at the Project site or sites incidental to the Work called for in the contract between the Owner and the Contractor. 3 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 .s. ARTICLE 1. DEFINITIONS 1.1 "Owner" means the Owner,Financier or Sponsor of the Project. 1.2 "OCIP Administrator" means the administrator retained by the Owner to implement and administer the a,,, O.C.I.P. In part,the administrator will assure that Contractor implement and effectively manages a Contractor Safety Program and assure that Contractor and insurance carriers effectively manage claims resulting from construction of the Project. The O.C.I.P.Adminstrator designated for this project is Acordia Northeast. 1.3 "Contractor"means the person or entity awarded the contract for the Project described in this specification. Contractor understands that all Contractors obligations set forth in the Owner's O.C.I.P., �w whether performed directly by Contractor or indirectly by its Subcontractors, are the responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors of all tiers satisfy all safety program,claim management and applicable insurance requirements. Whenever this specification establishes obligations for �s Contractor, it shall also be deemed to establish obligations for Subcontractors. For emphasis,this specification sometimes expressly refers to both Contractor and Subcontractors. The term"Contractor" refers to the entity awarded the contract pursuant to this specification. Vendors,suppliers, fabricators, material dealers, drivers and others who merely transport,pick up,deliver or carry materials,personnel, parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site shall not be considered Contractor(s),or Subcontractors of any tier for the purpose of insurance coverage. 1.4 "Construction Manager"means the engineering/design firm hired by the Owner to manage the process of construction. 1.5 "Owner-Controlled Insurance Program" ("O.C.I.P.")means an insurance delivery method that assures the Contractor all Subcontractors of any tier,and all other contractors on the construction Project, are . insured for Statutory Workers'Compensation,Employers Liability and Commercial General Liability,and such other coverages as the Owner may in writing specifically add or delete for the construction Project. „w The O.C.I.P. for the construction Project for which this contract is awarded is more fully described in Articles 2 and 3 below. 1.6 "Project" means the construction of the particular improvement set forth in this specification. • 1.7 "Safety Manager"means the Safety Manager hired by the Administrator to assist the Owner in assuring that Contractor implements its safety program. 1.8 "Subcontractor"means a person or entity furnishing labor and/or material to the Project pursuant to a contract either directly with the Contractor as that party is defined in Section 1.3 hereinabove or as a sub- subcontractor of any tier. w 2 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ATTACHMENT TO CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY OF THE OWNER-CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM SETTING FORTH CONTRACTOR INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM OBLIGATIONS Op This attachment shall apply only if the Owner,Prior to executing a construction contract,states in writing that this project shall be included in its owner controlled insurance program. If this project is included in the owner controlled insurance program,this attachment shall supplement the terms and conditions applicable to the Contractor which are set forth in the Contract Documents. INTRODUCTION ur The Owner is implementing an Owner-Controlled Insurance Program("O.C.I.P." or"Program")for many of its construction projects,which will be bid during the term of the O.C.I.P. In an O.C.I.P., the Owner purchases most of the insurance to cover the Worker's Compensation losses,and General Liability losses, (and possibly other coverages for other risks) associated with construction of the projects. This insurance covers the Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers,but not vendors coming onto the construction site. An O.C.I.P. allows the Owner to obtain a lower project cost, an effective contractor safety program, and efficient management of claims resulting from the Project. Depending on the insurance market, Contractor expertise,type of project, and other factors, Contractors can sometimes provide insurance for a construction project at a price competitive to the Owner's expected O.C.I.P. cost. Even under an O.C.I.P., the Contractor still provides some coverage as described more particularly below. For the above reasons,the Owner has selected this Project as a candidate for its O.C.I.P. Bidders are required to provide a base bid representing the bidder's total cost assuming that the Owner provides those Project insurance coverages set forth in more detail in Article 2 below. To be responsive to the bid specification,bidders must also include a bid for the cost of the insurance coverages described in the General Conditions. The successful bidder must provide said insurance coverage if,and only if,the Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P. at time of award. By bidding on the Work set forth in this specification and accepting a contract for such work,bidder agrees to(1)accept the Owner's O.C.I.P. if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P. and awards a contract based on the base bid, or(2)construct the Project and provide all insurance necessary if the Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P. Bidder recognizes that the O.C.I.P.benefits the successful bidder and the Owner by reducing overall costs. Bidder recognizes that a critical element in the success of the O.C.I.P. is the successful bidder's obligation to protect persons and property on the construction and related sites so that claims may be avoided and quickly and effectively managed if they occur. Accordingly,bidder agrees that it has fully reviewed and agrees to the Safety Program obligations set forth in Article 3.Bidder also specifically agrees to all the covenants and conditions set forth in Articles 2 and 3 if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P. 4 1 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM Page 2 of 2 A. Workers' Compensation Premium: Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium "' On site Payroll Deviation(if applicable) Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification (Attach Copy) Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) Standard Premium ARAP (if applicable) w Less other discounts (Describe) Total Discounted WC Premium DIA Assessment Total WC Cost B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue (circle one) X Rate = GL Premium Amount: X = C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million 4. Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium X = . Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than $2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to $2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST $ The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: Workers' Compensation($1,000,000 Employers Liability) $ General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations (3 Yrs. After Substantial Completion) $ Umbrella/Excess Liability($2,000,000 limit) $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead&Profit on Insurance Premium: $ TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent, or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. .� Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: T:5 colleges/SmithContract/CovemotePreBid2-2/2/01 Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form for Enrollment Page 1 of 2 Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: No Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: 00 Contract Amount: Est.Payroll: Est. Contract Start Date: Est. Contract Completion Date: go **NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. Aw I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns, transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right, title and interest to any and all returns of premium, dividends, discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled 00 Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information, actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor, or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants,additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. T:5 colleges/smithContracVCovernotePreBid2-2/2/01 All claims are to be reported to Acordia within 24 hours. Severe accidents should be reported immediately.When reporting a workers' compensation claim a "First Report of Injury" needs to be completed. When reporting a general liability claim a "General Liability Loss Notice" must be completed. A"Supervisor's Accident Report" should accompany all loss notices. These forms will be included in the Procedures and Enrollment Guidelines, which will be given to all contractors and subcontractors who are enrolled in the OCIP Also included in the Procedures and Enrollment Guidelines is the Safety Program Guidelines. These Guidelines are intended tor be a framework which can help when developing a safety plan for this project. If there are any questions or concerns we urge you to contact your insurance representative.Additionally, as administrator of the OCIP, Acordia is committed to work with you or your representative to facilitate the smooth operation of this program. Wendy O'Brien Pamela Anderson Fran McCormack OCIP Administrator Account Executive Safety Manager Acordia Acordia Acordia 125 Summer St 125 Summer St. 125 Summer St. Boston, MA 02110 Boston, MA 02110 Boston, MA 02110 Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 229 Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 281 Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 237 Fax: 617 330-5339 Fax: 6i7 330-5339 Fax 617 330-5339 w wir T:5 colleges/SmithContract/CovemotePreBid2-2/2,01 OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM (OCIP) ' OVERVIEW Welcome to the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. What follows is a brief overview of the OCIP program and what will be required by all contractors and all subcontractors of every tier. of This project is to be insured under an OCIP. An OCIP is a single insurance program which insures the owner, all enrolled contractors, all enrolled subcontractors of every tier and other entities designated by the owner for work performed at the project site. In contrast, a traditional approach requires each Contractor/Subcontractor to provide their own coverage. uw Under the terms of the OCIP, the owner has arranged for Workers' Compensation, General Liability, and Umbrella Liability coverage. The Limits of Liability for these coverages are: Workers Compensation: Statutory Employers' Liability: $1,000,000 each Accident General Liability: $1,000,000 each Occurrence Excess Liability: $50,000,000 each Occurrence These coverages apply only to work performed at the project site. All contractors and subcontractors of every tier who will be working on the site must be enrolled in the program. To become enrolled in the program you will need to complete the Insurance Information Form (attached), prior to your work starting on the project site. The Insurance Information Form is our way of determining what your insurance costs would have been had you ! * provided your own insurance for this project.We refer to this as your deduct. We suggest that you have this form completed by your insurance agent and forwarded to the OCIP Administrator, Acordia, when complete. The OCIP Administrator will review your enrollment form for accuracy and will verify the amount of the estimated deduct that has been offered. All Change Orders are handled in the same manner. The OCIP coverages do not apply to vendors, suppliers, material dealers, truckers and independent owner/operators. All enrolled contractors and subcontractors of each and every tier are required to provide evidence of insurance, in the form of a certificate of insurance, for workers' compensation and employer's liability, general liability, automobile liability and excess liability for coverage away from the project site. Receipt of this certificate of insurance to the OCIP Administrator is part of the enrollment process and is required prior to your work starting on the project site. The Limits of Liability you should carry are as follows: Workers Compensation: Statutory Employers' Liability: $1,000,000 General Liability: $1,000,000 each Occurrence/$2,000,000 Aggregate Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each Accident Excess Liability: $2,000,000 each Occurrence/$2,000,000 Aggregate The Owner is responsible for payment of premiums to the insurance carriers providing these insurance coverages. As such, you should promptly notify your insurance carrier(s) to delete this project from your current insurance on program. Even though you will not pay the premiums for the OCIP each Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier insured under the OCIP shall report the payrolls of all non-excluded employees performing contract work at the project site. Payroll reports are due to Acordia on a monthly basis. !► Additionally, all workers' compensation losses on this project will be reported to the National Council on Compensation Insurance (NCCI) and will apply to your Experience Modifier (EMR)for the next three years. T.5 colleges/SmithCOntract/CovernotePreBid2-2/2/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations w' Northampton, Massachusetts ARTICLE 14-TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT V NOTE 14.4:INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING WHEN DIRECTED BY OWNER,TO EXERCISE OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATION WITHOUT CAUSE 14.4 Add the following paragraph 14.4 after 14.3.3: 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall: .1 Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 Except for the Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing Subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further Subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. End Edits 14.4 14.3 Incorporate in full, the following attachments as Articles of the Supplementary Conditions at the end of Article 14: ARTICLE 15- OWNER-CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM End of Supplementary Conditions on OR Supplementary Conditions 00800-19 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 11.1.2 The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be provided by the Owner, under its' Owner-Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) as defined in the Document bound herewith, entitled as follows: Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Bidding & Enrollment Procedures O.C.I.P. Coverage Summary Contractor Responsibilities V NOTE 11.3.9: Version 1 Use 11.3.9 if arbitration has been deleted w 11.3.9 In the seventh line,following the words "as the parties in interest may reach" add a period and delete the remaining part of the subparagraph. End Edits 11.3.9 Version 1 *X V NOTE 11.3.9:Version 1 Use 11.3.9 WHEN ARBITRATION REMAINS 11.3.9 Delete the last sentence in subparagraph 11.3.9. End Edits 11.3.9 Version 2 V NOTE 11.3.10: Use 11.3.10 if arbitration has been deleted 11.3.10 In the forth line, following the words"the Owner's exercise of this power" add a period and delete the remaining part of the subparagraph. End Edits 11.3.10 11.3.11 Delete subparagraph 11.3.11. ARTICLE 12 -UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.2 Revise line 6 to read as follows: w. "to be defective or not in accordance with requirements of the Contract" ... ARTICLE 13 -MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.5.3 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 13.5.3 The Contractor also agrees that the cost of testing services required for the convenience of the Contractor in his scheduling and performance of the Work, and the cost of testing services related to remedial operations performed to correct deficiencies in the Work shall be borne by the Contractor. Supplementary Conditions 00800-18 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 9.11 STORAGE OF MATERIALS OFF SITE 9.11.1 The Contractor shall obtain prior written approval from the Owner through the Architect for permission to store materials to be incorporated in the Work, for which Progress Payments will be go requested, at off site locations. Any and all charges for storage, including insurance, and any and all charges for transportation to the site shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Before approval, of Owner will require proper proof of insurance and a letter in which is furnished: .1 The name of the Contractor or subcontractor or supplier Subcontractor leasing the storage area. .2 The location of such leased space. 3 The leased area: the entire premises or certain areas of a warehouse giving the number of floors or portions thereof. ap .4 The date on which the material is first stored. .5 The value of the material stored. 9.11.2 The Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Owner to inspect, at least once each month, the materials being stored at any location. 9.11.3 The Contractor shall mark each sealed carton with the name of the project and the Architect. wo 9.11.4 A perpetual inventory shall be maintained for all materials held in storage for which payment has been requested. 9.11.5 Payment for materials stored off site shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner.Any additional costs to the Owner resulting from storage of material off site for which payment is requested, such as, but not limited to, travel expenses and time for inspector shall be backcharged to, and paid by, the Contractor. ARTICLE 10 -PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 0 NOTE 10.1.2: Use 10.1.2 when arbitration has been deleted 10.1.2 In the last sentence delete the words, ..."on which arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under Article 4." End Edits 10.1.2 ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1.1 11.1.2 Delete the paragraph in its entirety and replace it with the following: Supplementary Conditions 00800-17 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ■, Northampton, Massachusetts .3 When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any; .4 For additional Work ordered as described above which will be executed by subcontractors, it is agreed to the net subcontract amount the Contractor may add Five percent 5 %). 7.5.2 Overtime, when specifically authorized by the Owner and not as Extraordinary Measure, shall be paid for by the Owner on the basis of premium payment only, plus the cost of insurance and taxes based on the premium payment period. Overhead and profit will not be paid by the Owner for overtime. ARTICLE 8 -TIME .� 8.1.4 Add the following after subparagraph 8.1.4: 8.1.4.1 The term "calendar day" is a full 24 hour period, starting from 12 " AM (midnight), and includes all weekends and legal holidays. 8.1.4.2 The term "working day'shall mean any calendar day except Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays at the place of the building. v NOTE 8.3.1: Use 8.3.1 when arbitration has been deleted 8.3.1 In the seventh line, delete the words"pending arbitration". End Edits 8.3.1 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.8.1 Delete after the words"Contract Documents"to the end of the subparagraph and insert the following: ... "and verified and accepted by the Architect, so the Owner can occupy or utilize the work for its intended purpose; provided, w however, that as a condition precedent to Substantial Completion, the Owner has received all certificates of occupancy and other permits, approvals, licenses, and other documents from any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof necessary for the beneficial occupancy of the Project." 9.8.2 In the twenty sixth line of subparagraph 9.8.2, after the word "Certificate" insert the following: "which shall identify all non-conforming, defective and incomplete Work and establish the date of commencement of warranties in connection with any such Work." 9.10 Add the following paragraph at end of Article 9: Supplementary Conditions 00800-16 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts (1)the party who accepts a Mini-Trial or Nonbinding Arbitration W recommendation and subsequently prevails in Binding Arbitration or litigation necessitated by the other party's rejection of the recommendation or award, and (2)the prevailing party in any litigation necessary to obtain (a) enforcement of ADR Procedures, or (b) collection of a final, nonappealable judgment obtained subsequent to exhaustion of ADR Procedures, End Edits 4.4 Version 2 ARTICLE 5-SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2.3 In subparagraph 5.2.3 delete the second sentence and substitute the following language: on The Contract sum shall be increased by the lesser of the following: the amount by which the subcontract amount proposed by the person or entity accepted or designated by the Owner and the Architect exceeds the amount set forth in the Schedule of Values which is applicable to the Work covered by such subcontract. ARTICLE 6-CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS No changes or modifications to clauses contained in Article 6. ARTICLE 7-CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2 Add the following paragraph to the end of Paragraph 7.2: „ 7.2.3 Agreement on any Change Order shall constitute a final settlement on all matters relating to the change in the Work which is the subject of the Change Order, including, but not limited to, all direct and indirect costs associated with such change and any and all adjustments to the Contract Sum and the construction schedule. In the event a Change Order increases the Contract Sum, Contractor shall include the Work covered by such Change Orders in Applications for Payment as if such Work were originally part of the Contract Documents. 7.4 Add the following at the end of Article 7: 7.5 Agreed Overhead and Profit Rates. 7.5.1 For any adjustments to the Contract Sum which are based, on other than the unit prices method, the Contractor agrees to charge and accept, as payment for overhead and profit the following percentages of costs attributable to the change in the Work: .1 Ten percent( 10%)for Work by the Contractor not involving subcontractors; .2 Ten percent( 10%)for Work by subcontractors; Supplementary Conditions 00800-15 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Contractor, or both, reject the recommendation or award, the dispute or Claim shall be considered unresolved and subject to Binding Arbitration or litigation in the appropriate jurisdiction. The recommendation or award shall not be admissible as evidence in subsequent Binding Arbitration or litigation, but shall be considered for recovery of attorney fees and costs as provided in Subparagraph 4.5.7. For purposes of compliance with the applicable statute of limitations, the running of the statute shall be suspended as of the date of tree demand for a Mini-Trial or Nonbinding Arbitration, provided that litigation or Binding Arbitration is commenced within sixty (60)days from the date of the Mini-Trial recommendation or the Nonbinding Arbitration award. 4.5 ARBITRATION 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract or breach thereof, and subject to arbitration, whether binding or nonbinding, shall be arbitrated in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association or such other rules as the parties may promptly agree to employ. In the event of a conflict between this Agreement and the applicable arbitration rules, this Agreement shall govern.Judgment upon a binding award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as + ! provided for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. 4.5.2 Notices of Arbitration. Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement between Owner ' and Contractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.5.3 Contract Performance During ADR. During ADR proceedings, Owner and Contractor shall comply with subparagraph 4.3.4. 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded. A demand for Binding " Arbitration or initiation of litigation shall in no event be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would he barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.5.5 Consolidation. To the extent not prohibited by Owner's or Contractor's agreements with third parties, disputes or Claims with third parties involving common questions of fact or law shall be addressed in the same ADR proceeding. 4.5.6 Judgment on Final Award.A Binding Arbitration award shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.5.7 Attorney Fees, ADR Costs, and Court Costs. Attorney fees, costs attributable to Intermediate ADR Proceedings, and crests attributable to Binding Arbitration or litigation shall be awarded to Supplementary Conditions 00800-14 3/7/01 MR Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts .1 Mini-Trial. Mini-Trial proceedings shall be concluded in accordance with the Mini-Trial Supplemental Specification and Mini-Trial Agreement. If the Claim is not settled by Mini- Trial, either party relay initiate Binding Arbitration or litigation. .2 Nonbinding Arbitration. Nonbinding Arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph 4.5. If the Claim is not resolved by Nonbinding Arbitration, either party may initiate litigation. .3 The Mini-Trial or Nonbinding Arbitration shall occur within ninety (90) days from written demand at any location to which the parties agree or, in the absence of such agreement, at the location of the Project. .4 Document Production, Depositions, and Exchange of Exhibits. After a request for Intermediate ADR Procedures, each party shall have the right to request in writing the production of Project related documents requested from the other party for requesting party's inspection and copying, except for those documents which are covered by an unwaived attorney-client privilege or which were prepared in anticipation of ADR Procedures, arbitration, or litigation. Such documents shall be produced in no event later than fifteen (15)days from the date of receipt of the request. Each party to the dispute shall also be entitled to take depositions which in combination shall not exceed ( )days in length. No later than fifteen (15)days prior to a Mini-Trial, a Nonbinding Arbitration proceeding, or a Binding Arbitration hearing, the parties shall make available to each other,for inspection and copying, the exhibits, photographs, and other documents which they intend to introduce or refer to during such proceedings. 4.4.5 Provided the parties have complied with the requirements for giving notice of the existence of a Claim or dispute, no delay in disposing of such Claim or dispute while the parties pursue resolution as provided by this paragraph shall prejudice the rights of either party; however, nothing contained in this paragraph shall be deemed to relax any requirement contained elsewhere in the Contract for the giving of notice between the parties. 4.4.6 ADR Recommendations and Awards. Mini-Trial recommendations and Nonbinding Arbitration awards shall be advisory only.They shall contain specific, detailed findings of fact and conclusions explaining the rationale for tribunal decisions. Within thirty (30) days frump the date of the recommendation or award, Owner and Contractor shall each serve written notice to the other,with a copy to the Architect, indicating either acceptance or rejection of the award. Failure to specifically accept the recommendation or award shall be deemed as rejection. If both accept the recommendation or award, then the dispute or Claim shall be deemed to have been resolved and the Architect will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation to implement the award. If either Owner or Supplementary Conditions 00800-13 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 4.4.1 ADR Procedures. The Contractor and Owner agree to exercise good faith efforts to resolve Claims and disputes amicably and in a timely manner in accordance with the Partnering cooperative approach to problem-solving and, if mutual agreement is not achieved, by using one or more of the following ADR Procedures prior to either Owner or Contractor submitting the Claim to Binding Arbitration or litigation: (1) Facilitated Negotiation, Mediation, or Dispute Review Board (initial ADR Procedures"), and (2) Mini- Trials or Nonbinding Arbitration ("Intermediate ADR Procedures"). Specific procedures for Facilitated Negotiation, Dispute Review Boards, and Mini-Trials are included in the Supplemental Specifications section entitled "Alternative Dispute Resolution Procedures." 4.4.2 If a Claim is resolved by Partnering or an ADR Procedure, the Architect will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation 4.4.3 Initial ADR Procedures. If twenty(20)days have passed after notification of a Claim without resolution of the Claim, the parties agree to proceed with dispute resolution by Facilitated Negotiation, Mediation, or Dispute Review Boards. If the parties cannot select an ADR Procedure by agreement, then the Initial ADR Procedure shall be Mediation. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of Contractor's default, the parties may, but are not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. .1 Mediation. Unless delay in initiating or prosecuting a Claim in litigation would irrevocably prejudice Owner or Contractor, any Claim which is not resolved by direct discussions between the parties shall be submitted to Mediation under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association or such other rules as the parties may promptly agree to employ. If Owner and .e Contractor cannot agree on the selection of a mediator within ten (10)days of the request for Mediation, either party may immediately request the appointment of a mediator in accordance with the governing mediation rules. Mediation shall occur at any location to which the parties and mediator agree or, in the absence of agreement, at the location of the Project. .2 The parties agree to conduct and conclude Mediation proceedings under this paragraph within sixty (60)days from the designation of the mediator. In the event that ■* Mediation proceedings do not resolve the claim within such period, either party may initiate other means of dispute resolution with respect to the Claim. 4.4.4 Intermediate ADR Procedures. If any Claim or dispute over $25,000 is not resolved through Initial ADR Procedures, the parties agree to proceed with dispute resolution by Mini-Trial or Nonbinding Arbitration upon the demand of either party. If the parties cannot agree, then the Intermediate ADR Procedure shall be Mini-Trial. s Supplementary Conditions 00800-12 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts shall upon thirty days after receipt of the submission, give the party making the submission written notice of the reasons why the decision cannot be made within the thirty-day period. 4.3.2 Add to the end of the first sentence"if the claimant first recognizes the claim prior to the date of final payment. #0 V NOTE 4.3.2: Use 4.3.2 and 4.3.4 if arbitration is being deleted 4.3.2 In the fifth and eleventh lines, delete the words"arbitration or". 4.3.4 In the second line, delete the words"including arbitration". 4.3.6 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 4.3.6: End Edits 4.3.2 ± No adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be permitted, however, in connection with a concealed or unknown condition which does not differ materially from those conditions disclosed or which reasonably should have been disclosed by the Contractor's inspections,tests review, and preconstruction services which the Contractor had the opportunity to make or should have performed in connection with the Project. 4.3.8.1 Delete the second sentence. *0 v NOTE 4.4.4 VERSION 1:Use 4.4.4 and 4.5 if arbitration is being deleted -Not for ADR procedures 4.4.4 At the end of the first sentence (sixth line)delete the words ... "but subject to arbitration." 4.5 Delete all Paragraph 4.5 entitled Arbitration, in its entirety and substitute the following: 4.5.1 The Contractor and the Owner shall not be obligated to resolve !" any Claim or dispute related to the Contract by arbitration. Any reference in the Contract Documents to arbitration is deemed void. End Edits 4.4.4 Version 1 09.26.96 V NOTE 4.4 VERSION 2: Use new 4.4 and 4.5 for ADR procedures(Alternative Dispute Resolution, including both negotiating and mediation-also for various partnering. 4.4 Delete Paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5 in their entirety and substitute with the following 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Supplementary Conditions 00800-11 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Drawings made during construction; (ii)details in the Work not previously shown; (iii) changes to existing conditions or existing conditions found to differ from those shown on any existing drawings: (iv)the actual installed position of equipment, piping, conduits, light switches, electric fixtures, circuiting, ducts, dampers, access panels, control valves, drains, openings and stub-outs; and (v)such other information. End Edits 3.11.1 3.14 Add the following paragraphs to Paragraph 3.14: 3.14.3 Only tradespersons skilled and experienced in cutting and patching shall perform such Work. 3.14.4 Contractor acknowledges that the Work involves renovation and alteration of existing improvements and, therefore, cutting and patching of the Work is essential for the Project to be successfully completed. Contractor shall perform any cutting, altering, patching, and fitting of the Work necessary for the Work and the existing improvements to be fully integrated and to present the visual appearance of an entire, completed, and unified project. In performing any Work which requires cutting, fixing, or patching, .0 Contractor shall use its best efforts to protect and preserve the visual appearance and aesthetics of the Project to the reasonable satisfaction of both Owner and Architect. 3.15.1 At the end of subparagraph 3.15.1 add the following: ... "Contractor shall clean all glass, replace scratched glass, remove stains and marks from decorated work, clean hardware, remove paint and smears and all damages from all surfaces, clean fixtures, and leave floors, walls,windows, ceilings and all other surfaces clean and undamaged. Refer to Division 1 of the Specifications, for specific requirements on cleaning up, glass cleaning, polishing, and other items of work to be performed. ARTICLE 4-ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT a 4.1.1 Add the following at the end of subparagraph 4.1.1: The term Architect refers to the firm of R.E. Dinneen Architects & Planners, Inc., Boston, Massachusetts.Any reference in the Contract Documents to the Architect taking action or rendering a decision within a reasonable time is understood to mean not more than 10 working days. 4.2.11 Delete the remaining paragraph after the words"... on the written request of either . the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests ..."and add the following language: ... will be made promptly, and in any event, no later than thirty " days after the written submission for decision, but if such decision requires extended investigation and study, the Owner or Architect w Supplementary Conditions 00800-10 3/7/01 Smith College 40 Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts .3 Sales and Use Tax imposed by the states where the Owner does not have exemption status: The Owner may choose to apply for tax exemption status in other states where major building materials and supplies are being purchased. In the event that the Owner obtains exemption status after bids are received, the Contractor shall adjust the Stipulated Sum by change order, for the amount equal to the scheduled taxes that where included in the Contractors Bid. End Edits 3.5 3.7.3 Add the following language to the end of the first sentence in subparagraph 3.7.3: "unless such laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes and rules and regulations bear upon the performance of the Work." Q NOTE:Use below when there are no allowances on the Project 3.8 Delete entire Paragraph 3.8. End Edits 3.8 0 NOTE 3.8.2.3: if allowances in project,AND if allowances cover installation 3.8.2.3 Delete the period and add the following at the end of subparagraph 3.8.2.3: except when installation is specified as part of the allowance in Section 01210-ALLOWANCES." End Edits 3.8.2.3 3.9 Add the following after subparagraph 3.9: 3.9.2 The superintendent shall be satisfactory to Owner and Architect and shall not be changed by the Contractor without the written approval of the Owner and Architect. 06.16.93 0 NOTE 3.11.1: Use when Owner requires"AS-BUILT"drawings for condition of final payment 3.11.1 Add the following subparagraph to the end of Paragraph 3.11: 3.11.2 Contractor shall maintain at the Project Site and shall make available to Owner and Architect, one Record copy of the Drawings (the"Record Drawings") in good order. The Record Drawings shall be prepared and updated during the prosecution of the Work. The prints for Record Drawing use will be a set of blackline prints provided by Architect to Contractor at the start of construction. Contractor shall maintain said set in good condition and shall use colored pencils to mark up said set with"record information" in a legible manner to show: (i)deviations from the Supplementary Conditions 00800-9 3/7/01 rw Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts immediately and unconditionally transfer to Owner for payment. 3.5.1 In the ninth line of subparagraph 3.5.1 delete the word "may"and substitute "shall". 3.5 Add the following subparagraph to the end of Paragraph 3.5: 3.5.2 The Contractor agrees to assign to the Owner at the time of final completion of the Work, any and all manufacturer's warranties relating to materials and labor used in the Work and further agrees to perform the Work in such manner so as to preserve any and all such manufacturer's warranties. 3.5 Add the following subparagraph to Paragraph 3.5: 3.5.3 If Contractor uses any portion of the Work or Owner's other property prior to the date of Substantial Completion of the entire • Work, such items shall be restored to their condition existing immediately prior to such use, or as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. Contractor's warranty and agreement to correct defective Work shall specifically include Contractor's obligations under this paragraph. ,ev 0 NOTE 3.6: USE THE FOLLOWING FOR NON-PROFIT CLIENTS,MODIFY FOR LOCATION w. 3.6 Add the following after subparagraph 3.6.1: 3.6.2 Important Tax Note: Smith College is a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from certain taxes. It is therefore required that the Contractor and all Subcontractors purchasing taxable goods or services make known to suppliers that tax-exempt status of the Owner, in order that such taxes will not be applied to the goods under Contract. In the event that such taxes are paid on any items, the Contractor shall obtain rebates for the taxes and reimburse the Owner in the full amount by change order. The Owner will provide the necessary evidence and certificates of its "* tax-exempt status upon request of those concerned. The most prevalent taxes concerned are: .1 Federal Excise Taxes as applied to articles which are taxable under Chapter 32 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, as amended. The Owner's Excise Tax Exemption Certificate Number is: 00-00-000OF is applicable. .2 Sales and Use Tax imposed by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts: The Owner has been assigned Exemption Certificate Number E-000-000-000 with respect to leases, rental, or purchase of"tangible personal property", including building materials and supplies, subject to the Massachusetts Sales and Use Tax. This exemption does ,rs, not apply to any equipment leased or rented by the Contractor for his own use on the construction of the Project. Supplementary Conditions 00800-8 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts all grades, elevations, dimensions, and locations. In all cases of interconnection of its Work with existing or other work, it shall verify at the site all dimensions relating to such existing or other work. Any errors due to the Contractor's failure to so verify all such grades, elevations, locations or dimensions shall be promptly rectified by the Contractor without any additional cost to the Owner. 3.3.1 Delete that part of subparagraph 3.3.1 after the word"Work", fifth line,to the end of the second sentence, and insert the following language: Contractor shall review any specified construction or installation Ok procedure (including those recommended by any product manufacturer). Contractor shall advise Architect: .1 if the specified procedure deviates from acceptable construction practice; .2 if following procedure will affect any warranties; or .3 of any objections which Contractor may have to the procedure. 3.3.2 In the third line of subparagraph 3.3.2, add the words"any entity or" between the words "and" and "other". In the fourth line, delete the words"under a contract with the Contractor". 3.4.2 After paragraph 3.4.2, add the following paragraph: 3.4.3 If the Contract Documents refer to particular construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or indicate or imply that such are to be used on the Work, such mention is intended only to indicate that the operations of the Contractor shall ON be such as to produce at least the quality of work implied by the operations described, but that the actual determination of whether or not the described operations may be safely employed on the work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall notify !! ► the Architect in writing of the actual means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures which will be employed on the work, if these differ from those mentioned in the Contract Documents. All loss, damage, or liability, or cost of correcting defective work arising from the employment of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the Contract Documents, unless the Contractor has given timely notice to the Architect in writing that such means, techniques, sequences, or procedures are not safe or suitable, and the Contractor has then been instructed in writing to proceed at the Owner's risk. ' ! 3.4.2 Add the following paragraph after subparagraph 3.4.2: 3.4.4 Neither Contractor nor any subcontractor shall purchase any equipment or materials on a conditional sales contract basis or any other basis upon which title to the equipment or materials does not Supplementary Conditions 00800-7 3/7/01 me Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations on Northampton, Massachusetts equal", "or equal,"or"other approved" means as approved by the Architect. The meaning of the term `approved" as used herein will be held to the limitations of the Architect's responsibilities as defined in Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 -OWNER 2.1.1 Delete the last sentence of Paragraph 2.2.1 and substitute the following language: The term "Owner" refers to The Trustee;s of The Smith College and those persons assigned as its agents, which are hereby designated by the Owner as its representatives and are authorized to act on behalf of the Owner, unless a new representative is subsequently designated by the Owner. v NOTE 2.2.1: the following 2.2.1 prevents the Contractor from harassing the Owner with repeated requests for financial evidence 40 2.2.1 In the second and third lines of subparagraph 2.2.1, delete the words "and promptly thereafter from time to time." End Edits 2.2.1 2.2.5 Delete subparagraph 2.2.5 in its entirety and substitute the following paragraph: 2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished,free of charge, all returned bidding copies of the Drawings and Project Manuals. The Contractor will be furnished, at its sole cost and expense for reproduction, postage and handling, as many additional copies as it may require. End 2.2.5 Version 1 2.3.2 Add the following paragraph following subparagraph 2.3.1 2.3.2 The Owner retains the right to temporarily suspend work of this Contract when such work proves to be disruptive to the normal operations of the Owner's facility, endangering the safety, health or well-being of the public, or Owner's employees. 2.4.1 Delete the sixth through the tenth lines of subparagraph 2.4.1. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.2.2 Add the following clauses to subparagraph 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 The exactness of grades, elevations, dimensions, or locations given on any Drawings issued by the Architect, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by the Architect or 46 the Owner. 3.2.2.2 The Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of Supplementary Conditions 00800-6 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts interpretation. The terms and conditions of this Paragraph 1.2.3, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the obligations set forth in Paragraphs 3.2 and 3.7. .1 On the Drawings given dimensions shall take precedence over scaled measurements and large scale drawings over small scale drawings. .2 Before ordering any materials or doing the Work,the Contractor and each subcontractor shall verify measurements at the Project site and shall be responsible for the correctness of such measurements. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and the dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for resolution before proceeding with the Work. .3 If a minor change in the Work is found necessary due to actual field conditions, the Contractor shall submit detailed drawings of such departure for the approval by the Architect before making the change. End 1.2.3 Version 3 1.2.5 Add the following after subparagraph 1.2.5 1.2.6 Before ordering any material or doing any work, each trade shall Y verify all measurements at this project and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawings; any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.2.7 Whenever an item is specified and/or shown on the Drawings by details or reference, it shall be considered typical for other items which are obviously intended to be the same even though not so designated or specifically named but does serve the same function for this project. 1.2.8 Wherever the terms"necessary", "as directed","when directed", "satisfactory", "good and sufficient", "approved", or other general qualifying terms are used on the Drawings, they are deemed to be MR followed by the words, "in the opinion of the Architect,"or"by the Architect,"as the case may be. 1.2.9 Words in the singular shall also mean and include the plural, wherever the context so indicates, and words in plural shall mean the singular wherever the context so indicates. 1.2.10 Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the terms"approval", "approved", "approved Supplementary Conditions 00800-5 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.2.3.4 In the event of conflict as to the type or quality of materials to be supplied, the Specifications shall govern, unless otherwise directed by written addendum. End 1.2.3 Version 1 06.16.93 / 10.20.95 V NOTE 1.2.3 -VERSION 2: HIEARCHY PRECEDENCE of documents: Language originally from Wiley Law Library Note Wil-Spec's use of this clause has been successful when used. However It is not consistent with AIA policy ob 1.2.3 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 1.2.3 1.2.3.1 In the event of inconsistencies within or between parts of the Contract Documents, and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, the Contractor shall comply with the more stringent requirement; either or both in accordance with the Architect's interpretations. The terms and conditions of this subparagraph 1.2.3, however shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the obligations set forth in Paragraphs 3.2 and 3.7. 1.2.3.2 Conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, shall be interpreted in the order of priority: First Agreement. Second Amendment and revisions of later date take precedence over those of earlier date. Third The Supplementary Conditions. Fourth The General Conditions. Fifth Drawings and Specifications; Drawings govern Specifications for quantity and location, and specifications govern Drawings for quality and performance. In the event of ambiguity in quantity or quality, the greater quantity and better quality shall govern. Sixth Figured dimensions govern scale dimensions, and large scale Drawings govern small scale Drawings; and. Seventh Submittals. End 1.2.3 Version 2 06.16.93 / 10.20.95 V NOTE 1.2.3 -VERSION 3: QUALITY/QAUNTITY PRECEDENCE of documents. Language originally from Wiley Law Library 1.2.3 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 1.2.3 In the event of inconsistencies within or between parts of the Contract Documents, and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, the Contractor shall (1) provide the better quality or greater quantity of Work or(2) comply with the more stringent requirement; either or both in accordance with the Architect's Supplementary Conditions 00800-4 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts .1 Owner assumes no responsibility or liability for the physical 4% condition or safety at the Project Site or of any improvements thereon. Except as set forth in subparagraph 10.1.2, Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing a 0 safe place for the performance of the Work. .2 Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that any information, material, and test data furnished to the 0 Contractor by the Owner or Architect, excepting the Drawings and Specifications, are supplied solely for the convenience of Contractor. Owner makes no representation or warranty regarding the accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of such information, materials, or data, and Contractor must verify independently that such items are sufficient to be relied upon in connection with the Work. .3 Owner shall not be required to make any adjustment in either the Contract Sum or Contract Time in connection with any failure by Contractor to comply with the requirements of Subparagraph 1.2.2 06.16.93 /10.20.95 V NOTE 1.2.3 -VERSION 1:hierarchy PRECEDENCE of documents: Note Wil-Spec's use of this clause has been successful on considerable number of projects,However It is not consistent with AIA policies 1.2.3 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 1.2.3 1.2.3.1 In the event of inconsistencies within or between parts of the Contract Documents, and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, the Contractor shall comply with the more stringent requirement; either or both in accordance with the Architect's t interpretations. The terms and conditions of this subparagraph 1.2.3, however shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the obligations set forth in Paragraphs 3.2 and 3.7. 1.2.3.2 In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents,the Documents shall be interpreted on the basis of the following priorities: First Owner-Contractor Agreement. Second Addenda - Later date to take precedence. Third Division 1 - General Requirements. Fourth Supplementary General Conditions. Fifth General Conditions. Sixth Drawings and Specifications. 1.2.3.3 In the event of conflicts between Drawings and Specifications as to the extent or locations of materials, the following order of precedence shall govern: First Large Scale Drawings. Second Small Scale Drawings. Third Schedules. Fourth Specifications. Supplementary Conditions 00800-3 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts identified shall be furnished and installed under this Contract. The term "Furnish",when used separately, shall mean that the items " referred to shall be furnished, only. Similarly the term "install', when used separately, shall mean that the items referred to shall be installed, only. 1.1.8.3 The word "product'shall mean materials, systems and equipment. 1.1.8.4 "Addenda" are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.1.8.5 Wherever the terms "necessary,""as directed,""when directed," "satisfactory,""good and sufficient," "approved,"or other general qualifying terms are used on the Drawings, they are deemed to be followed by the words, "in the opinion of the Architect,"or"by the Architect,"as the case may be." 1.1.8.6 The terms "approval," "approved, "approved equal,""or equal," or "other approved" means as approved by the Architect." 1.1.8.7 The terms"knowledge,""recognize"and "discover,"their 00 respective derivatives and similar terms in the Contract Documents, as used in reference to the Contractor, shall be interpreted to mean that which the Contractor knows (or should know), recognizes (or should recognize)and discovers (or should 00 discover) in exercising the care, skill and diligence required by the Contract Documents. Analogously, the expression "reasonably inferable" and similar terms in the Contract Documents shall be .. interpreted to mean reasonably inferable by a Contractor familiar with the Project and exercising the care, skill and diligence required of the contractor by the Contract Documents. 1.1.8.8 The phrase"persistently fails" and other similar expressions, as used in reference to the Contractor, shall be interpreted to mean any combination of acts and omissions, which causes the Owner or the Architect to reasonably conclude that the Contractor will not complete the Work within the Contract Time, for the Contract Sum or in substantial compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.2 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 1.2.2 ...Contractor represents and warrants that its investigation of the site was performed in detail and was sufficient to disclose the condition of the Project Site and all improvements thereon, and the conditions under which the Work is to be performed, including, without limitation (i)the location, condition, layout, and nature of the Project Site and surrounding areas, (ii)anticipated labor supply and costs, (iii)availability and cost of materials, tools, and equipment, (iv)expected loads and demands on the structural and MA mechanical systems of the Building during performance of the Work, and (v)other similar issues pertinent to the performance of the Work. to Supplementary Conditions 00800-2 no 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Document 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition, Articles 1 through 14 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is incorporated as fully as if herein set forth. For brevity, AIA Document A201 is also referred to in the Contract Documents as the "General Conditions." The following supplements modify, change, delete from, and add to, the General Conditions. When any portion of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph, or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. A This Contract is subject to all applicable Federal, state and municipal laws;where requirements contained herein do not conform to such statutes governing the construction of this Contract, the laws shall govern. ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.2 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 1.12 1.1.2.1 Should any part of the Contract Documents or their application to any situation be invalidated or determined to be contrary to law, ow the remainder of such documents and the application to other situations of any provision found invalid as to any given situation, shall not be affected thereby. 1.1.5 Add the following after paragraph 1.1.5: 1.1.5.1 The list of Contract Drawings is located on the Cover Sheet of the Drawings. 1.1.7 Delete subparagraph 1.1.7 and substitute the following language: 1.1.7 The Project Manual is the volume(s) assembled for the Work that includes Payment and Performance Bonds, the General Conditions (AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition), Supplementary Conditions, Owner-Controlled Insurance Program, the Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.1.7 Add the following language to the end of subparagraph 1.1.7: 1.1.8 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS EXPRESSED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL: 1.1.8.1 The terms, "Not in Contract' or"N.I.C." shall indicate equipment, furnishings, or other materials not included as a part of this Contract. 1.1.8.2 The terms, "Furnish and Install" or"Provide" shall mean that items Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 3/7/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Breakdown category and proposed firm !! 17. Electrical Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. `* = Owner's pre-qualified subcontractor required. End of Document • 0 40 Bid Form Supplement- Proposed Subcontractors 00438-5 3/8/01 as Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations .M Northampton, Massachusetts Breakdown category and proposed firm 13. Wheelchair lift: ** Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. 14. Fire protection: ** Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $. 15. Plumbing: ** Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. 16. Heating, ventilating &air conditioning: Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. ** = Owner's pre-qualified subcontractor required. Bid Form Supplement- Proposed Subcontractors 00438-4 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts f�A Breakdown category and proposed firm 8. Tile: Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. OR 9. Rubber and linoleum flooring: *. Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. 10. Carpeting: Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm . Alternative Firm: Add (OR) 0 Deduct City/State $.................. 11. Painting and coatings: '* Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: u Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. '* = Owner's pre-qualified subcontractor required. Bid Form Supplement- Proposed Subcontractors 00438-3 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,w Northampton, Massachusetts Breakdown category and proposed firm 4. Copper roofing, flashing and sheet metal: Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct *R $.................. City/State $.................. 5. Slate roofing: Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. 6. EPDM Roofing: '` Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. 7. Gypsum plaster: Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. ,,, ** = Owner's pre-qualified subcontractor required. Bid Form Supplement- Proposed Subcontractors 00438-2 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Document 00438 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS Indicate names of firms proposed for principal portions of Work and change to Base Bid for Alternative Firms. The Contractor attests that the below costs for alternative subcontractors (as approved by Owner) include all labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance for subcontractor and General Contractor, to provide the finished Work of the types itemized herein. Breakdown category and proposed firm 1. Masonry: fib Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. 2. Metal fabrications: " Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. 3. Architectural woodwork, (millwork and casework): ** Firm: City/State Cost for Alternative Firm Alternative Firm: Add (OR) ,. Deduct $.................. City/State $.................. *" = Owner's pre-qualified subcontractor required. Bid Form Supplement- Proposed Subcontractors 00438-1 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts N. The undersigned Bidder agrees to provide, as an integral part of this Bid, a separate attachment entitled "BID FORM SUPPLEMENT- PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS"stating names of firms proposed listed portions of Work O. Labor: The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is able to furnish labor and services that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the Work. P. The Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a „ period of 30 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. Q. The Bidder understands the Owner's right to reject any and all bids. R. The undersigned further certifies under the penalties of perjury that this bid is an all respects bona fide, fair, and made without collusion, or fraud with any other person. As used in this document, the word"person"shall mean any natural person,joint venture, partnership, corporation, or other business or legal entity. Dateof Bid: ........................... ..................................................................................... ..................................................................................... (Name of Bidder-Company Name) r�. BY ............................................................................... (Name of person signing Bid& Title) ..................................................................................... (Business Mailing Address) ..................................................................................... (City/Town, State and Zip Code) CorporateSeal ........................................................................I............ w" (Business Telephone Number) Note: If the bidder is a corporation, indicate state of incorporation under signature and affix corporate seal; if partnership, give full names and residential address of all partners; and if an individual give residential address if different from business .� address. End of Document A Bid Form 00410-4 3/8/01 Smith College 0 Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 15. Steel doors and frames, wood doors and hardware. $........................... 16. Windows $........................... 17. Gypsum veneer plaster, access panels. $........................... 18. Ceramic tile $. 19. Rubber and linoleum flooring $........................... 20. Refinishing wood floors $....................•...... 21. Carpet and floor mats $.......................... 22. PVC wall panels $......................•.. 23. Painting and coatings $.•......................... 24. Toilet compartments and toilet accessories $........................... ear► 25. Appliances $........................... 26. Vertical wheelchair lift $........................... 27. Plumbing $........................... 28. Fire protection $........................... 29. Heating, ventilating &air conditioning $........................... 30. Electrical $........................... Total ( Items 1 through 30 ) $........................... Or Total should equal amount of base bid. J. The undersigned Bidder agrees to the following maximum mark-up percentages for overhead, profit and taxes, computed on the total of labor and materials only, for additional work authorized by the Owner during the the performance of the Work. 1. For subcontractors, allow ten percent(10%) on their own work. 2. For the Contractor, allow five percent (5%)on the Work of subcontractors. 3. For the Contractor, allow ten percent(10%) on Work of his/her own employees. K. The Bidder hereby agrees to commence work on or after receipt of Notice to Proceed or suitable Letter of Intent, to pursue the Work with diligence, and bring the Project to Substantial Completion, or Owner acceptance for occupancy before August 24, 2001. L. The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as the Contractor, he will within five days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the Owner, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this general bid and furnish a Performance Bond and also a Labor and Material or Payment Bond, each of a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the Owner and each in the sum of the contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the Contractor and are included in the contract price. M. The undersigned Bidder agrees to provide, as an integral part of this Bid, a separate attachment entitled "BID FORM, RESUME AND QUALIFICATIONS OF PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT". Attachment shall include Contractor's intended Project Superintendent's resume defining the superintendent's qualifications, and years of experience with Bidding Contractor. Bid Form 00410-3 !1 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts F. Alternates: The undersigned Bidder submits the following alternate prices, as described in the Bidding Documents, which are to be added to or deducted from the above stated Base Bid Price, as may be selected by the Owner for inclusion into this Contract. (in the event that an alternate does not affect the Contract Price, the Bidder shall remark"No Change".) Add Alternates Deduct Alternates For Alternate No. 1: $ .................................... $....................................... ForAlternate No. 2: $ .................................... $....................................... G. Unit prices: Should certain additional work be required, or should the quantities of certain classes of work be increased or decreased from those upon which the Bid .. is based, as authorized by the Owner, the undersigned agrees that the following supplemental unit prices represent the exact net amount per unit to be paid the Contractor(in the case of additions or increases)or credited to the Owner(in the case of decrease), without further adjustment for overhead, profit, insurance, compensation insurance or other direct or indirect expenses of the Contractor. H. Schedule of Unit Prices Item Spec. Unit of Unit Bid Bid Price Section Measure Cost Quantity 1. Roof sheathing. 06100 Square $......... $ feet .................. 2. Interior and exterior 06200 Linear $ $ wood trim at feet replacement windows I. Cost Breakdown of total contract price: (Sum of breakdown equals Proposed Bid Price). + 1. General conditions &miscellaneous $........................... 2. Overhead and Profit 3. Concrete work $..........•..............•. 4. Masonry $........................... 5. Metal fabrications $........................... 6. Rough carpentry and wood framing $........................... 7. Finish carpentry, millwork, architectural woodwork $........................... .w,► and solid surfacing. 8. Waterproofing $........................... 9. Building insulation, thermal and acoustical $........................... 10. Wood siding $........................... 11. Firestopping, and joint sealants $........................... w, 12. Slate roofing, and related flashing work. $........................... 13. Sheet copper roofing, and related sheet metal $........................... flashing. 14. EPDM roofing, access hatch and skylights $........................... Bid Form 00410-2 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Document 00410 BID FORM BID OF: (Name of Bidder) TO: The Trustee's of the Smith College, herein called the Owner, per the attention of Smith College Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 A. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents, to complete all Work as specified and indicated in the Bidding Documents for the stipulated Contract Price stated herein, and within the time limit indicated in this Bid g► and in compliance with the Contract Documents and all applicable legal requirements. B. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he or she has visited the site and the !!" conditions present and has carefully examined the Bidding Documents, together with all Addenda issued, received and acknowledged below, and has familiarized himself or herself with the legal requirements (federal, state, and local laws, ON ordinances, rules and regulations)and other conditions which may affect the cost, progress or performance of Work, and has made independent investigations, deemed necessary by the Bidder. Ali C. The undersigned Bidder hereby offers and agrees to provide all labor, services, products, and materials required in the performance of Work to complete the following named project: Sessions Annex Renovation 105 Elm Street, Northampton Massachusetts. to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect and in accordance with the accompanying Bidding and Contract Documents, dated: March 15, 2001, as prepared by R.E. Dinneen Architects & Planners, Inc., Boston Massachusetts, for the Contract price specified below, subject to additions and deductions according to the terms of the Contract Documents. D. The proposed total contract price is: (Base Bid-NOT INCLUDING ALTERNATES) Dollars (total contact price amount in words,which governs) ($ ...........................................................................) (total contract price amount in numbers) E. Addenda: The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda, and has taken them into consideration in the preparation of this Bid: Addenda N°._, dated: Addenda N°._, dated: Addenda N°. dated: Addenda N°. _, dated: Bid Form 00410-1 3/8/01 .. Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.15 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS A. Bidders will not be required to provide Performance and Labor bonds for the work of this Contract. 1.16 COMMENCEMENT OF WORK AND TIME OF CONTRACT COMPLETION A. The successful Bidder may begin on-site work on, or after receipt of a written Notice to Proceed, or suitable Letter of Intent. After commencement of work, the Contractor shall pursue the Work continuously and with diligence, and bring the Project to Substantial Completion no later than August 24, 2001. 1. Substantial completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. This includes any and all permits required by governmental agencies necessary for occupancy and use. End of Document w Instruction to Bidders 00200-6 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 1.12 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS 00 A. The Owner shall have the right to waive any informalities, to reject any or all Bids, to reject a Bid based on attached data required by Bidding documents, or reject a Bid which is any way incomplete or irregular. B. No bid shall be considered which is not based on the Contract Documents. Further, no bid will be considered which contains any letters or memorandum qualifying the Proposal, or which is not properly executed, or which is not accompanied with the requested data and attachments. 1. In case of discrepancy between the numerical number and written number, the written number will be controlling and will be considered to be the actual Bid of the Bidder. 1.13 METHOD OF CONTRACT AWARD A. The intent of the Owner is to award a Contract to the Bidder whose qualifications and proposed bid sum, are, in the Owner's judgment, in the Owner's best interest. 1. The Owner reserves the right to accept a Proposal other than the lowest bid, to waive all informalities or irregularities in a Bid received, and to accept the bid which in its judgment best serves the interests of the Owner. 2. The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted. 3. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, which in his opinion is in his best interest to do so. B. The successful bidder will be notified in writing, by mail or otherwise, that his bid has been accepted and that he has been awarded the contract. 1.14 EXECUTION OF CONTRACTS A. Execution of Agreement: The General Bidder who is selected as the Contractor shall promptly confer with the Owner on any question concerning major sub- bidders and shall execute an Agreement with the Owner within Thirty(30)calendar days after receipt of award of Contract. 1. The successful Bidder will be required to execute AIA Document A101, 1987 edition, "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor." B. Failure to enter into a Contract: If the Bidder selected as the Contractor fails to perform his agreement to execute the contract in accordance with the terms of his general bid and furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment bond as stated in his general bid, the Owner reserves the right to make an award to another Bidder. 1. The thirty(30)day time limit will not apply to a second or subsequent award made after the expiration of the time limit with the consent of said next lowest responsible and eligible bidder and made because the original award made within the time limit was invalid, or because the general bidder fails to execute the general contract or to provide a performance bond and labor and materials or payment bond. Instruction to Bidders 00200-5 3/8/01 an Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ,o Northampton, Massachusetts 1.9 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS w A. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. do 1. No substitutions will be considered after Award of Contract. 1.10 SUBMITTAL, RECEIPT AND OPENING OF PROPOSALS A. Proposals will be received for the Project by the Owner, as follows: 1. Bid Proposal for the Base Bid, including Schedule of Values and Unit Prices, and qualification attachments will be received by the Owner until date and time stated in the INVITATION TO BID. 2. Any Proposal or portion thereof, received after the stipulated time will be due cause for rejection of Bidder's Proposal. B. Proposal shall be submitted, in duplicate, in a sealed 'bid envelope' bearing the Bidder's name and address for identification. Identify envelope on front face as follows: "Proposal for"Sessions Annex Renovations". C. Enclosed sealed 'bid envelope' in an outer envelope to mail or deliver bids; outer envelope shall be addressed: Smith College Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 D. Facsimile transmitted proposals will be rejected without review. E. No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel his proposal or any part thereof for a period of thirty(30)calendar days following date of receipt of proposals. F. Opening of Proposals will be private. Bidders may not be present at time of opening of Proposals. 1. A tabulation of Proposals will not be distributed to Bidders. 1.11 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date for the receipt of Bids and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a bid. B. Every bid which is not in the form requested, or which is incomplete, conditional or obscure may be rejected by the Owner, if it be in its interest to do so. C. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by written notice to Office of the Architect. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or w before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. D. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. Instruction to Bidders 00200-4 + 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations ' Northampton, Massachusetts 1.7 ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS go A. The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents, examine the site and local conditions and at once report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. All questions by prospective bidders as to the interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be submitted in writing to the Architect's office and should be in its possession at least seven calendar days before the date set for the receipt of general bids. C. Interpretations of questions raised by bidders, which in the opinion of the Architect require interpretation, and supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda. Oral interpretations given to prospective bidders will have no standing. All addenda will be sent by overnight mail or facsimile transmittal to all who are known by the Architect to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 1. No Addenda will be issued later than three days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the time for receipt of Bids. D. It shall be the sole responsibility of bidders to ascertain the existence of any and all addenda issued by the Architect whether or not the addenda is presented or mailed to or received by the bidder. E. As specified under the General and Supplementary Conditions, all addenda issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. 1.8 BID FORM A. Bidders shall completely fill-in the Bid Form included. Modify Bid form only as specified by Addendum. 1. All blank spaces on Bid Form shall be filled in; numbers shall be stated in both writing and numerals. 4 2. Bidders shall acknowledge all alternates, allowances and addenda where indicated on the Bid Form. 3. Proposals shall include cost breakdowns and all attachments indicated on the sample Bid Form and as required in these Instructions to Bidders. 4. Proposals shall be completed without interlineation, alterations or erasures. 5. Completed Proposals shall be signed with legal signature of Bidder. B. Each Bidder's Proposal shall include the following attachments. Bids submitted without all of the following items shall be considered incomplete and are subject for rejection. 1. Notarized assurance of Bidder's bonding eligibility on surety company's own letterhead. 2. Resume and Qualifications of Project Superintendent. 3. List of Proposed Subcontractors, stating names of firms proposed for principal portions of Work. Instruction to Bidders 00200-3 3/8/01 am Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations so Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Review with the Architect/Engineer ambiguities, inconsistencies, errors or omissions discovered in the Bidding Documents, 3. Provide for identification and discussion of potential problems that may arise during the administration of any subsequent contract, 4. Provide an opportunity for an examination of the existing structure to the extent reasonably discoverable by nondestructive means, 5. Permit bidders an opportunity to visit the site for determining extent of work, and quantities of materials required for the Work w 1.5 BIDDERS REPRESENTATIONS A. The Bidder by making a Proposal represents the following: 1. The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made in accordance with them. 2. The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with location conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has carefully examined the Bidding Documents, together with all Addenda issued, received and acknowledged below, and familiarized himself or herself with the legal requirements (federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations)and other conditions which may affect the cost, progress or performance of Work. 3. The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bid Documents without exceptions. 4. The Bidder acknowledges that his or her failure to acquaint himself or herself with the existing conditions and Contract Documents shall in no way relieve the Bidder from any obligations with respect to his or her bid. " 1.6 SUBCONTRACTS A. The Owner has pre-qualified subcontractors for particular trades involved in the Work. General Contract Bidders are required to obtain pricing and form subcontracts with Owner's pre-qualified subcontractors for the following trades listed. 1. Site Landscape. 2. Miscellaneous Metals. 3. Millwork. * 4. Roofing. 5. Flooring. 6. Painting. 7. Elevators. 8. Fire Protection. 9. Mechanical 10. Sheet Metal Fabricators. 11. Automatic Temperature Control. 12. Electrical 13. Communication. B. Bids may be rejected from any General Bidder who fails to utilize pre-qualified subcontractors in each of above trades listed. Instruction to Bidders 00200-2 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Document 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 APPROVED BIDDERS A. The Trustee's of the Smith College, hereinafter referred to as Owner, will receive proposals from a selected list of invited Bidders for Sessions Annex Renovations. w. Proposals will be accepted only from those Bidders who have been previously selected by Owner. 1. Unsolicited proposals of individuals, partnerships, companies or corporations will not be considered. 1.2 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Owner intends to award a single Stipulated Sum Contract for performance of all work required by the Contract Documents, including General, Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Prevention Systems, and Electrical work. 1. Where such terms as "Mechanical Contractor,""Electrical Contractor,""this Contractor," may appear within the body of any particular Division of the Specifications or in Drawings, such terms are used for convenience only and shall not diminish successful bidder's responsibility for a complete,finished is installation of all Work required by the Contract Documents. 1.3 AVAILABILITY OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4' A. Copies of the Bidding and Contract Documents, may be obtained at the Physical Plant Reception Desk after 2 PM local time, Thursday, March 15, 2001, weekdays: Monday to Friday from 7 AM to 5 PM at: Smith College Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 to B. Refundable Deposit Required: Cash, check or money order payable to the Owner in the amount of Two Hundred Dollars ($200.00) per set. The deposits will be ` refunded upon return of the documents in good condition within thirty(30)calendar days after opening of the General Bids, otherwise the deposit shall be the property of the Owner. 1. Upon payment of deposit, General Contractors will receive Contract Documents in the form of two bound sets of prints and two Project Manuals. Bidders shall be responsible for distribution of the Contract Documents. No additional sets will be provided by the Owner. 2. Additional sets may be purchased directly from the Owner's printer at a non- refundable cost set by the printer. 1.4 PREBID CONFERENCE A. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled at location, time and date indicated in the Invitation to Bid. Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend the pre-bid meeting. B. This meeting has been scheduled to: 1. Assist Bidders in understanding the intent of the Bidding Documents, Instruction to Bidders 00200-1 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts. INVITATION TO BID Sessions Annex Renovations -March 15, 2001 A. You are invited to bid on a General Construction Project entitled: Smith College, Sessions Annex Renovations, at 105 Elm Street, Northampton Massachusetts. The documents have been prepared by: R.E. Dinneen Architects& Planners, Inc., Boston Massachusetts. B. The Project is a complete renovation of the existing builidng; including major mechanical pluming, fire protection and electrical work. Work includes replacement roofing and windows, new interior finishes, improved fire separation construction, egress stairs and e0 alarms. The Owner intends to award a single Stipulated Sum Contract for performance of all Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. The Owner will award a separate contract for interior asbestos material abatement. C. Proposals will be accepted only from those Bidders who have been previously selected by Owner. Unsolicited proposals of individuals, partnerships, companies or corporations will not be considered. D. The Project shall be Substantially Completed by August 24, 2001. E. Proposals will be received at the Office of Owner's Project Manager, until 2 PM local time on Thursday,April 5, 2001. F. No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel his proposal or any part thereof for a period of thirty(30)calendar days following date of receipt of proposals. G. Proposals will be opened in private by the Owner, with the Architect present. Bidders may not be present at time of opening of Proposals. H. Copies of Bidding Documents will be distributed by the Owner as described in Document 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. I. A Pre-bid Conference will be held at 105 Elm Street, Northampton, MA 01063; on Thursday, March 22, 2001, at 1 PM. This conference is for the specific purpose of clarifying any questions by Bidders, Sub-Bidders, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. po J. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids of the General Bidders and to waive any informalities in the bids received and to accept the bid which in its judgment best serves the interests of the Owner. rs By order of The Trustee's of the Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Gary T. Hartwell Project Manager Invitation to Bid 00130-1 PIP 3/7/01 Smith College 0M Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION No work in this Division DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14422 - Vertical Wheelchair Lifts DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15300 - Fire Protection Section 15400 - Plumbing Section 15600 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16100 - Electrical APPENDICES Appendix A - Tree and Shrub Preservation Specifications ................................ 5 pages Appendix B - Lead Base Paint(LBP) Determination........................................ 00 pages Appendix C - Asbestos and Lead Survey Reports........................................... 00 pages End -Table of Contents Table of Contents 00010-3 3/8/01 .a Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04910 - Unit Masonry Assemblies DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05500 No work in this Division DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry--- Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork-- Section 06650 - Solid Surfacing DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07134 - Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing Section 07210 - Building Insulation Section 07317 - Slate Shingles Section 07468 - Wood Siding Section 07534 - Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer(EPDM) Roofing Section 07612 - Sheet Copper Roofing Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07720 - Roof Accessories Section 07840 - Firestopping Section 07900 - Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08115 - Steel Door Frames Section 08216 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors- * ! Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels Section 08550 - Wood Windows Section 08620 - Unit Skylights Section 08710 - Door Hardware DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09213 - Gypsum Veneer Plaster Section 09310 - Ceramic Tile Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Section 09654 - Rubber Flooring Section 09656 - Linoleum Flooring Section 09680 - Carpet Section 09691 - Refinishing Wood Floors Section 09723 - Vinyl Wall Covering Section 09774 - Plastic Wall Panels Section 09910 - Paints DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10170 - Plastic Toilet Compartments Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories .w DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Section 11451 - Appliances DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section 12481 - Floor Mats Table of Contents 00010-2 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 44 Document 00001 - Project Title Document 00002 - Project Directory Document 00010 - Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Document 00130 - Invitation to Bid Document 00200 - Instruction to Bidders Document 00370 - Information Available to Bidders—Pre-approved Subcontractors List Document 00410 - Bid Form Document 00438 - Bid Form Supplement- Proposed Subcontractors CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document 00520 - Agreement Form (AIA Form A101, 1987) Document 00700 - General Conditions (AIA Form A201, 1987) Supplementary Conditions and Attachments: Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions - Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) Overview ................................................................................ 2 pages Insurance Information Form for Enrollment............................ 2 pages Summary of the Owner-Controlled Insurance Program ...... 18 pages Bidding & Enrollment Procedures, Coverage Summary, and Contractor Responsibilities ......................................... 19 pages Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines .......... 34 pages CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS AND ACTIVITIES DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01100 - Summary Section 01210 Allowances Section 01230 - Alternatives Section 01270 - Unit Prices Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination Section 01320 - Construction Progress Documentation Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements Section 01420 - References Section 01450 - Quality Control Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01600 - Product Requirements Section 01700 - Execution Requirements Section 01732 Cutting and Patching Section 01739 Selective Demolition Section 01750 - Starting and Adjusting Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION No work in this Division DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete Table of Contents 00010-1 3/8/01 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER The Trustee's of The Smith College c/o Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01063 ARCHITECT R.E. Dinneen Architects& Planners 160 N.Washington Street Boston, Massachusetts 02114 CONSULTANTS MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING ENGINEERING Lindgren &Sharples Co., Inc. 96 Industry Ave. Springfield, Massachusetts 01104-3241 SPECIFICATIONS CONSULTANT Wil-Spec Lynnfield Medical Office Building Post Office Square Lynnfield, Massachusetts 01940 1 Project Directory 00002-1 3/7/01 Sessions Annex Renovation Addendum No. 04 18 April 2001 page 2 of 2 04.5 The 2°d floor plan is revised to relocate Closet 203B and decrease the width of Closet 202A. 04.6 The 2ni1 and 3`d floor plans are revised to add new Corian© shelves and coat hooks in Bathroom#200T (6' long)and#300T (4' long). 04.7 Drawing Sheet A2.2,Finish Plans, Basement and 15`Floors Drawing is revised to indicate approved paint, Corian and grout colors. Rooms scheduled to receive carpet now have pattern direction indicated. 04.8 A walk-off mat is added in Modified HC Entry 100S IA. 04.9 Drawing Sheet A2.3,Finish Plans,2nd and 31 Floors Drawing is revised to indicate approved paint, Corian and grout colors. Stairs scheduled to have rubber flooring now have color indicated. 04.10 Drawing Sheet A3.1,Enlarged Stair Plans &Sections Section is revised to show Closet 203A increased in width per drawinv-A 1.1. 04.11 Drawing Sheet A4.4, Millwork Details Drawing is revised to show detail #I I for the new Bathroom Corian shelves. End of Addendum No.04 cc: Gary Hartwell, Smith College Dino D'Angelo, Lindgren& Sharples Proiect File DATE: 18 April, 2001 MEMO TO: Wright Builders MEMO FROM: R. Gabriel Zavala, RA Project Architect R E Dinneen Architects & Planners, Inc. R.E.DINNEEN ARCHITECTS & PROJECT NAME: Smith College Sessions Annex Renovation PLANNERS,INC. 105 Elm Street Northampton, MA PROJECT NO.: 00166.32 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 04 The attention of Bidders submitting proposals for Smith College, Sessions Annex Renovations is called to the following changes revising, correcting, deleting, adding, substituting or clarifying the Bidding Documents dated 3/2/01 as prepared by this office. The items set forth therein below, whether of revision, omission, addition, substitution or clarification are all to be included as changes to Bidding Requirements, The Conditions of the Contract, Specifications and Drawings of the Members f Contract. This Addendum shall hereby become a part of the Contract Documents. American Institute of Architects ITEM# REFERENCE International Interior Design Association 04.1 Drawin.,Sheet D1.0,Demolition Plans,Basement, 1"Floor Instructs G.C. to save and relocate existing bulletin board to Entry 101 as shown. 04.2 Instructs G.C. to remove and dispose of all existing window treatments. 04.3 Drawing Sheet D1 1, Demolition Plans,2nd and 3rd Floors The drawing is revised to show two existing windows on the second floor included in the replacement work-scope. These were previously located and shown in elevation. 04.4 Drawing Sheet Al 1, Construction Plans, 2nd and Yd Floors The 2"'floor plan is revised to increase the width of under-stair Cinset 203A and delete Closet 2048. 160 Norrh Ht shington Street Boston,Massach usetts 02114-214 3 tel617 227 7727 fax 617 227 1870 HPF _ 3_2 1 1 7:44 RE DIMHEEH HPCHITECT� h1 f 227 18^O Sessions Annex Renovation Addendum No.02 2 April 2001 page 2 of 2 03.3 Dra Sheet A1.4 South Construction Elevation The demolition plan drawing D1.0 notes the replacement of the existing two South Elevation windows in existing Bedroom 4201 if the Add Alternates are accepted but the new South Elevation on A 1.4 does not note anew window type. Please include in your add alternate pricing the replacement with two Type"H" windows. 03.4 The demolition plan drawing D 1.0 notes the replacement of the existing two South Elevation windows in existing Lounge#104 if the Add Alternates are accepted but the new South Elevation on AIA does not note a new window type. Please include in your add alternate pricing the replacement with two Type"H" windows. General Contractors to distribute this information to their subcontractors as soon as possible. End of Addendum No.03 attachments: None cc: Gary Hartwell, Smith College (via fax)Dino D'Angelo,Lindgren& Sharples via fax) Louis Gallinaro,Teagno Construction (via fax) Linda Gaudreau, Wright Builders (via fax) A. R. Green& Son Inc. (via fax.) Marois Construction (via fax) Project File r 4>` d � Y N Y'N T <._ APr�— 1 17 44 PE D I D It IED I APCH I TEC TD b l 227 1 S?O P.02/0--3 03 April,2001 DATE: ?i MEMO TO: General Contractor Bidders: MEMO FROM: R. Gabriel Zavala, RA < .` Project Architect R E Dinneen Architects& Planners, Inc. R.E..DINNEEN ARCHITECTS & PROJECT NAME: Smith College Sessions Annex Renovation PLANNERS,INC. 105 Elm Street Northampton, MA PROJECT NO.: 00166.32 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 03 The attention of Bidders submitting proposals for Smith College, Sessions Annex Renovations is called to the following changes revising,correcting, deleting, adding, substituting or clarifying the Bidding Documents dated 312/01 as prepared by this office.The items set forth therein below, whether of revision,omission, addition, substitution or clarification are all to be included as changes to Bidding Requirements,The Conditions of the Contract, Specifications and Drawings of the Membcn f Contract. This Addendum shall hereby become a part of the Contract Documents. American Institute cf Archirecrs ITEM# REFENCE International Interior Design ksouaeion 03.1 Drawinp,Sheet D1.0 Basement Demolition Plan The window in Storage Area#B03 which is noted to be replaced if the window Add Alternate is accepted shall be included in the pricing even though it doesn't show on the South Elevation. 03.2 The two (2)existing windows which are located in the foundation wall supporting the two bay windows should not be considered for replacement in this work scope. They are hidden by the latticework and will enter to a Mechanical Space. T 160 Nonh Ifashington Street Becton,dfassachuscrtc 02114-2143 tel 617 227 7727 fax 617 227 IS 70 APR-02-2001 12:56 RE DIHNEEN ARCHITECTS 517 227 1870 P.05i05 P-7 Wan � all[ oyfv.V 1lrSAP6b6R ® - _ _ tRN lom /\' 7SS9V/rE6lrtaa/AN+ + -.. ..... OF ® m rsb F INaV /6 firm full/ ® ri rS ='abilrl/ ® �9T�BI3f7Q�A UtiM Mw �69�Tu7lQTFE KM I T81Hrrlla.vmw YIiQV +.— TS/ -I - 177N/!!T f mp IMP If V a GMM 1 pir! aewMesmom :YV 1 V WIN 1'a/ Mill ?~ urn ! a f urs T J P-9 ...._!S raa w v 191fmiS"VEMA tar An i n�;a,®b�acaalwc 1 L. ! \ I 1V! yrl/ __.. .. .1..fd.... `�► la l,Sifo6A�f/RNiO&Delft � !S t i e w1N UTOIWMftF' IablRil ;' /V Fla oom"rc ura mt m /0MMM loon) m�6T3A ru[�enrsrileE � tb�wlilSEkATY Max GNMEMM ra lttM IrNi. ra1�,Br6AEVli I�YrStOP6� G�- f 0.7 fY176/L'w�!lllf tY[bi � � laoeayralt�acaiw Ario/+INlli' JNdr!!i!!i! How/ REVISED BASEMENT PLUMBING PLAN 929 XMWVATKM 71D aaww=so sswr.. r lM► �,�Attl�[ SK PROM(AM say-aan can(Am fay-o+rt/ ® �zwomw TOTAL P.05 APR-02-2001 12:55 RE DINt4EEN ARCHITECTS 51? 22? 19?0 P.04i05 Lindgren&s Sharpies,PC Consulting Engineers 96 Industry Ave., Springfield,MA 01104 ADDENDUM NO.2 Session Annex Addendum No. 2 The following changes are hereby rnade in the Plans and Specifications for the subject Project and are to be included in the proposal,including revision of the documents for these modifications and clarifications with related ramifications of such changes for the entire Project. SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION A. Paragraph 2.2.F.1.K., change the dry pipe alarm valve to Reliable Model "D" complete alarm valve,solenoid valve,'/z HP air compressor, air maintenance device, accelerator,and controls. B. Paragraph 2.2.F.1.0 change the backflow preventor to a Watts Model 774 with OS&Y valve and strainer. SECTION 15400 PLUMBING A. Paragraph 2.09A.2 change mixing valves to Powers Model No. 1432-RB-D-M-1 single valve thermostatic mixing valve. Delete reference to Leonard Valve in its entirety. DRAWINGS 1.01 Drawing P1.1 a. Refer to revised new basement plumbing plan drawing SK.Pl.1 attached for revised water heater,water entrance,floor drain location and stand pipe. 1.02 Drawing FP1.1 a. Add the following note to the sprinkler service entrance: This Contractor shall disconnect and remove existing post indicator valve located outside the building and shall install a new flush type valve box and cover, complete with valve extensions on existing valve. 1.03 Drawing FP1.5 a. Typical Dry-Pipe Alarm Valve Detail 1. Add the following note: Pipe alarm valve drain to new 3 inch stand pipe furnished by Plumbing Sub-contractor. APR-02-2001 12:55 RE DINNEEN ARCHITECTS 617 227 1870 P.03/e5 Sessions Annex Renovation Addendum No.02 2 April 2001 page 2 of 2 02.4 Drawing Sheet PLIA,New&Existing Basement PlumbM Plam Drawing has been revised per the attached SKYL .1 from Lindgren& Sharpies dated 4/01/01. 02.5 Drawing Sheet FELL New&Existing Bassenaemt]E5re Protection PhM Add a new note to the sprinkler service entrance per the attached instructions from Lindgren& Sharpies. 02.6 DMwing Sheet FP1.3 nm Alarm Schedules and Details Add a new note to the Typical Dry Pipe Alarm Valve Detail per the attached instructions from Lindgen& Sharples. General Contractors to distribute this information to their subcontractors as soon as possible_ End of Addendum No-02 attachments; Lindgren&Sharpies Addendum#2 text SK. PL.1 [4/02/011 cc: Gary Hartwell,Smith College (via fax) Dino D'Angelo,Lindgren&Sbarples (via fax) Louis Gallinaro,Teagno Construction (via fax) Linda Gaudreau,Wright Builders (via fax) A.R.Green& Son Inc. (via fax) Marois Construction (via fax) Project Tile Rdt APR-02-2001 12:55 RE DINNEEN ARCHITECTS 617 227 1970 P.02/05 DATE: 02 April, 2001 MEMO TO: General Contractor Bidders: Teagno Construction s. Wright Builders MEMO FROM: R. Gabriel Zavala, RA Project Architect R.}:.DINNEEN R E Dinneen Architects& Planners, Inc. ARCHITF'CT & PROJECT NAME: Smith College PI.ANNFRS,INC. Sessions Annex Renovation 105 Elm Street Northampton, MA PROJECT NO.: 00166.32 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 02 The attention of Bidders submitting proposals for Smith College, Sessions Annex Renovations is called to the following changes revising,correcting, deleting, adding, substituting or clarifying the Bidding Documents dated 312101 as prepared by this office.The items set forth therein below, whether of revision, omission, addition, substitution or clarification are all to be included as changes to Bidding .Members J. Requirements,The Conditions of the Contract, Specifications and Drawings of the Amencan Institute Contract. This Addendum shall hereby become a part of the Contract Documents. f Architects International Interior ITEM# REFERENCE Design Assxiation 02.1 Specification Manual,Section 15300,Fire Protection Page 15300-19, Paragraph 2.2.F.l.k: Delete the dry pipe alarm valve model noted and revise per the attached instructions from Lindgren& Sharples. 02.2 Page 15400-20,Paragraph 2.2.F.I.o: Delete the backflow preventor model noted and revise per the attached instructions from Lindgren& Sharples. 02.3 Drawing Sheet A1.2,Roof Construction Plan Revise all references for new roofing paper to increase from the #15 noted to read"#30." 160 North Washington Street Boston,Afataachusetrs 02114-2143 tel 617 227 7727 fax 617 227 1870 Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.6 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM PLASTER A. Scratch coat:Apply with sufficient material and pressure to cover well and key into the lath,than scratch to a rough surface to provide proper bond for the brown coat. B. Brown coat: Apply brown coat to the firm and hard scratch coat, spreading the brown coat over an entire elevation,smooth without laps, in a thickness of not less than 1/4-inch over the scratch coat, and bring to a straight and true plane by rodding in every direction. Ensure that sufficient material is applied to provide a total scratch/brown coat thickness of approximately 5/8 inch. Leave surface of the brown coat rough for proper bonding of the finish coat. C. Finish coat: Apply the finish coat to an entire elevation, smooth without laps, in a thickness of 1/8 to 1/4-inch over the brown coat, and steel-trowel the surface. Double-back as necessary to provide a uniformly smooth dense finish, free from blemishes and irregularities. D. Total thickness of base coats and finish coats: Not less than 7/8 inch. 3.7 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from true flatness 118 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet(3 m). B. Maximum Variation from true position 1/8 inch (3mm). 3.8 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris. B. After completion of plaster work, remove equipment, and clean all wall, partition, and floor areas free from deposits of plaster, lath, and other materials installed under this Section. C. Inspect all gypsum plaster surfaces and correct conditions which do not meet specified requirements. End of Section Plaster Patching and Repair 09281-7 Addendum Number 1 (3/29/01) Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 3.4 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND ACCESSORIES A. Attach lath to concrete substrate with specified expansion screws, equipped with washers, spacing the screws not more than 6 inches on centers, vertical dimension, and not more than 24 inches on centers, horizontal dimension. B. Lap adjacent edges of lath a minimum of 1 inch; Secure lapped edges with wire ties at 6 inches on center. C. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. D. Lap ends minimum 1 inch (25 mm). Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. E. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Nest outside ribs of rib lath together. F. Attach metal lath to wood supports using nails at maximum [xxx] inches on center. 1. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door[and glazed] frames to 6 inches (150 mm)above ceiling line. 2. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place. 3. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. Secure metal lath with wire ties spaced 6 inches on center. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CASINGS AND TRIM A. Casings: Install specified casings at perimeters of each plaster area which abuts a dissimilar material; around major openings in plaster surfaces; and in other locations so indicated on the Drawings. 1. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends, set level, and at the proper height to receive the required thickness of plaster. Secure with wire ties spaced 6 inches on center. 2. Set casings plumb and level, and at the proper height to receive the required thickness of plaster. B. Corner beads: Install specified corner beads at external corners of plaster areas. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3 inches (75 mm)from the corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only. 1. Secure the beaded external angle with mesh, butt and align ends, secure to metal lath with specified tie wires at outer edges of lath spaced not more than 6 inches on centers. 2. Set corner beads plumb, and at the proper height to receive the required thickness of plaster. C. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place. D. Expansion joints: Install specified expansion joints, at locations to be determined by the Architect, wherever a continuous run of plaster surface exceeds 20 feet in any direction. 1. Secure the expansion joints to metal lath with specified tie wires spaced not more than 6 inches on centers. Plaster Patching and Repair 09281-6 Addendum Number 1 (3/29/01) Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. 1. Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready to receive Work of this Section.Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on concrete surface that are detrimental to plaster. 2. Verify items within walls and above ceilings concealed by this Section, have been installed and inspected. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. During the operation of work of this Section, protect existing finishes against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Clean, or repair all existing materials which are soiled or otherwise damaged by Work of this Section, to match original profiles and finishes. Existing materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work to match existing. B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter.Thoroughly dampen surfaces before using acid solutions, solvent or detergents to perform cleaning.Wash surface with clean water. C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces. 3.3 PATCHING-GENERAL A. Install steel framing and metal lath as required to patch the disturbed areas.Apply 3 coat plaster system over metal lath. Plaster finish shall identically match existing plastered surface. Patch existing plastered ceilings so as to maintain fire resistance integrity of the entire ceiling. B. Remove deteriorated plaster from existing plastered surfaces which are to remain. Cut out deteriorated plaster to a point where sound plaster is encountered. Remove plaster base if base is found to be deteriorated. Install steel framing and metal lath as required to apply plaster for patching. C. Patch all plastered surfaces and prepare such surfaces for the application of paint or wall covering by grinding all high spots and filling all depressions with Durabond Joint Compound, or other material approved by the Architect. Patching of plaster shall match existing work in texture and finish, and at joining with plaster previously applied, shall finish flush and smooth. Heavy textured sandpaper of other abrasive shall not be used to clean or smooth off finished plaster surfaces. D. Through wall cracks on plastered surfaces shall be cut back to the base and 6"on each side of crack and attach wire lath to this area and replaster with scratch, brown and finish coats. Surface shall be flush and smooth. Plaster Patching and Repair 09281-5 Addendum Number 1 (3/29/01) Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts D. Sand: Clean, sharp, free from alkali, salt, and quicksand, containing not more than 5 percent loam or clay, graded from coarse to fine,and conforming to ASTM C 35. E. Gypsum plaster for basecoats of gypsum gauging plaster finish: High strength gypsum plaster, conforming to ASTM C 28, USG Structo-Base Gypsum Plaster, or equal. F. Gypsum gauging plaster for finish coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster, conforming to ASTM C 28, USG Structo-Gauge Gauging Plaster, or equal. G. Water:Clean, potable, and free from deleterious amounts of oils, salts, alkali, organic matter, and other foreign matter. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Polyvinyl chloride accessories conforming to ASTM D 3678, for interior plaster work: 1. Casings: 5/8 inch deep ground, with 2 inch leg and 1/4 inch exposed flange, VinylTech Accessories No. 1058, or equal. 2. Corner beads: VinylTech Accessories No. 1A, with 2-1/2 inch legs, [or equal]. 3. Expansion joints: VinylTech Accessories No. 2058 or equal. B. Wire for tying metal lath to itself, and for tying polyvinyl chloride accessories to lath: 18 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire. C. Fasteners: For attaching metal lath to concrete: Galvanized flat-head expansion screws, 1-1/4 inches long,,equipped with 1/2-inch diameter galvanized steel washers. 2.5 PLASTER MIX A. Mix and proportion plaster in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C 842 and the plaster manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use containers of known capacity,or by information contained on the specific packages, and accurately mix the materials. 2. Do not use any lumpy or frozen materials in the mixes. 3. Ensure that all mixing equipment,tubs, and tools are absolutely clean, before commencing the mixing operations. 4. Use specified mix proportions,except where variations thereto would be more suitable due to prevailing conditions, and only when such variations are submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. 5. Continue mixing process until all materials are evenly distributed and blended. 6. Mix only the amount of material which may be applied within 2 hours. B. Scratch coat plaster: 2 cubic feet of sand per 100 pounds of specified basecoat plaster. C. Brown coat plaster: 3 cubic feet of sand per 100 pounds of specified basecoat plaster. D. Finish coat plaster:One part lime or lime putty and one part specified finish gauging plaster, with sufficient amount of water added to make the mix workable, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Plaster Patching and Repair 09281-4 Addendum Number 1 (3/29/01) Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts disposition therefor, and do not mix or apply plaster materials until all conditions are satisfactory and acceptable to the lathing and plastering applicator. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install metal lath until all pipes, ducts, conduits, and other such items which are to be enclosed thereby, have been permanently installed, inspected and approved. B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Metal lath and accessories a. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago IL. b. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Products Division, Charlotte NC. c. Georgia Pacific Corporation, Gypsum Division, Atlanta GA. 2. Plaster Materials: a. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago IL. b. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Products Division, Charlotte NC. c. Georgia Pacific Corporation,Gypsum Division, Atlanta GA. 3. Polyvinyl chloride trim and accessories: a. Plastic Components, Inc., (Vinyltech)Miami FL. b. Vinyl Corporation, Miami FL. c. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation, (AMICO)Birmingham,AL. 2.2 LATHING MATERIALS A. Diamond mesh lath: Expanded metal lath with (small diamond)5/16 inch wide diamonds, prime painted,weighing 2.5 pounds per square yard and complying with ASTM C 847. B. Flat Rib lath: Expanded metal lath,withl/8 inch deep solid metal ribs at 1-1/2 inches on center,weighing 2.75 pounds per square yard, prime painted and complying with ASTM C 847, equal to Gold Bond product"1/8 inch Flat Rib Lath". 2.3 PLASTER MATERIALS A. General: Gypsum plaster in general shall match existing plaster for texture and finish. B. Portland cement: Conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I or 11. C. Lime: Pressure-hydrated finishing lime,conforming to ASTM C 206,Type S. Plaster Patching and Repair 09281-3 Addendum Number 1 (3/29/01) Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts 11. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for fire resistance and smoke ratings of interior finishes. 12. United States Gypsum (or similar standards of other manufacturers whose products are used) Folder SA-917 -Plasters, Bases, and Accessories. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Certificate: Manufacturer's certificate, that the products used meet or exceed specified requirements. 3. Samples: a. Metal lath: 12-inch square piece of each specified type. b. PVC accessories: 12-inch length of each type. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator specializing in gypsum plaster Work with a minimum of 3 years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes and UL requirements for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with both existing construction and Section 09250-GYPSUM BOARD. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver items to the site, until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. B. Deliver plaster materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name, identification of manufacturer. C. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. D. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages, packages containing water marks,or show other evidence of damage, unless Architect specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit nor more than 80 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit degrees during and after installation of plaster, for the term of curing. C. Ensure that regulated ventilation will be provided during the application and curing period. Immediately report any unacceptable conditions to the Architect, requesting Plaster Patching and Repair 09281-2 Addendum Number 1 (3/29/01) Smith College Sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts Section 09281 PLASTER PATCHING AND REPAIR PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Patch all cracks in existing plastered surfaces which are to remain and which are indicated or required to be painted or receive a wall covering. B. Install access panels occurring in the work of this section, furnished under Section 08310-ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS, and by trades requiring the same. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01732-CUTTING AND PATCHING: Procedural and administrative requirements for cutting and patching. B. Section 01739-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: 1. Removal of existing finishes, partitions and walls as indicated in the Drawings. 2. Removal of existing handrails in stairwells. C. Section 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY:Wood framing, blocking, and nailers. D. Section 08310-ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS, and by trades requiring the same: Shop primed access panels,occurring in partitions and walls. E. Section 09213-GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER:Veneer plaster finish over gypsum base, sanded and ready to receive applied coatings. F. Section 09910- PAINTS:Applied Finish Coatings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01420-REFERENCES. 1. ASTM C 28-Gypsum Plaster. 2. ASTM C 35- Inorganic Aggregates for use in Gypsum Plaster. 3. ASTM C 206-Finishing Hydrated Lime. 4. _ ASTM C 631 -Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering. 5. ASTM C 842-Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster. 6. ASTM C 954-Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.33 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. 7. ASTM C 1002-Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. 8. ASTM D 3678-Polyvinyl chloride material for indoor exposure. 9. GA-Standard Specifications for Gypsum Plastering. 10. NAAMM MUSFA 920-Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring. Plaster Patching and Repair 09281-1 Addendum Number 1 (3/29/01) Sessions Annex Renovation Addendum No. 01 29 March 2001 page 4 of 4 01.12 Drawing Sheet A2.1,2nd&31 Floor Ceiling Plans Drawing has been revised as follows: a. Change ceiling tile Type II to#549 Cirrus type noted. See attached new drawing dated 3/29/01. End of Addendum No.01 attachments: Revised drawings D1.0, A1.0, A1.2, A1.5, A2.0, A2.1 Revised Bid Form Document 00410 Section 09281 Plaster Patching and Repair cc: Gary Hartwell, Smith College Dino D'Angelo, Lindgren& Sharples Louis Gallinaro, Teagno Construction Linda Gaudreau, Wright Builders Project File Sessions Annex Renovation Addendum No. 01 29 March 2001 page 3 of 4 01.8 Drawing Sheet A1.0,Basement& 1"Floor Construction Plan Drawing has been revised as follows: a. Revises location of new partition type 9 in basement, b. Adds new plywood shelving in Trunk Room 000TR, C. Adds detail 4 for new plywood shelving. See attached new drawing dated 3/29/01. 01.9 Drawing Sheet A1.2,Construction Roof Plan Drawing has been revised as follows: a. Revises drip edge at detail 5, b. Revises gutter detail at details 7& 8, C. Revises detail 8 to delete 3-pipe snow-guard and substitute with"Real Tool"RT300 bronze snow-guards at West elevation standing seam copper roof, d. Revises ridge cap detail 11 to delete blocking and increases copper weight. e. Adds detail 13 for typical new downspouts. f. Revises Roofing General Note#6 to delete grouting of downspouts. See attached new drawing dated 3/29/01. 01.10 _Drawing Sheet A1.5,Partial Wood Framing Plans Drawing has been revised as follows: a. Revises detail 5 to remove approximately 2/3 of new wood framing in Lounge 104 and substitute with new concrete entry slab. b. Revises details 7 & 8 to show new concrete slab and kneewall [approximately Y-0" high]. See attached new drawing dated 3/29101. 01.11 Drawing Sheet A2.0,Basement& 1"Floor Ceiling Plans Drawing has been revised as follows: a. Change ceiling tile Type II to#549 Cirrus type noted. See attached new drawing dated 3/29/01. Sessions Annex Renovation Addendum No. O1 29 March 2001 page 2 of 4 01.3 Page 00200-6,Paragraph 1.16 A: Delete the reference the existing paragraph and revise as follows: "The successful Bidder may begin on-site work on,or after receipt of a written Notice To Proceed,or suitable Letter of Intent. Interior work may begin on Tuesday May 22,2001. Outside work may begin after May 28,2001 [Memorial Day]. Afer commencement of work,the Contractor shall pursue the Work continuously and with diligence,and bring the Project to Substantial Completion no later than August 24,2001." 01.4 Specification Manual,Section 00370,Pre-Approved Subcontractors List page 00370-2, Paragraph 1.2 G: Add the following subcontractor to this list; Associated Elevator Co. 01.5 Specification Manual,Section 00410,Bid For Page 00410,1,2,3 &4: Delete the original Bid Form and use revised Bid Form which; a. adds an Add Alternate price to carry bonding[Section F] and, b. adds a Unit Cost for Plaster Repair per Sq. Foot to the Schedule of Unit Prices [Section H] and. C. Revises Paragraph I from a cost breakdown list to a Subcontractor Identification List. See attached new Bid Form. 01.6 Specification Manual,Section 09281-1,Plaster Patching& Re it Add new section per attachment dated 3/29/01. 01.7 Drawing Sheet D10,Basement& 1st Floor Demolition Plans Drawing has been revised as follows: a. Adds removal of existing masonry wall and boiler, b. Adds removal of existing stud and wire mesh partition, C. Increases excavation at crawl space BO 1. See attached new drawing dated 3/29/01. DATE: 29 March, 2001 MEMO TO: Gary Hartwell, Smith College General Contractor Bidders MEMO FROM: R. Gabriel Zavala, RA Project Architect R.E. DINNEEN R E Dinneen Architects & Planners, Inc. ARCHITECTS & PROJECT NAME: Smith College PLANNERS,INC. Sessions Annex Renovation 105 Elm Street Northampton, MA PROJECT NO.: 00166.32 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 01 The attention of Bidders submitting proposals for Smith College, Sessions Annex Renovations is called to the following changes revising, correcting, deleting, adding, substituting or clarifying the Bidding Documents dated 3/2/01 as prepared by this office. The items set forth therein below, whether of revision, omission, addition, substitution or clarification are all to be included as changes to Bidding Member,j Requirements, The Conditions of the Contract, Specifications and Drawings of the American Institute Contract. This Addendum shall hereby become a part of the Contract Documents. o�Architects International Interior ITEM REFERENCE # Design Association 01.1 Specification Manual, Section 00100,Table of Contents Page 00100-1, Contracting Requirements,Document 00520: Delete the reference to AIA Document A101, 1987 edition and revise as follows: "Agreement Form (AIA Document A101, 1997 edition) 01.2 Specification Manual,Section 00200, Instructions To Bidders Page 00200-5,Paragraph 1.15 A.1: Delete the reference to AIA Document A101, 1987 edition and revise as follows: "The successful Bidder will be required to execute AIA Document A101, 1997 edition, "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor." 100 Nor.., iio,r�..y�u��.ree. 13 __�..,:tias;a�busza<0'.'1l-?lT3 �_i 61i ??� i/2 %n., 617 2�7 1,' _ Y �- ,; �,. 315 r I qr Project Manual for smith College sessions Annex Renovations Northampton, Massachusetts prepared by: R.E. Dinneen Architects & Planners 160 N. Washington Street Boston, Massachusetts 02114 Date of Issue: 3/7/0'1